Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL Project Manual for Contract No. 831 _. (EDA Award No. 05-79-05007) F.Y. 2013 Storm Water Lift Stations Westfield Avenue, Vinton Street, and Virden Creek City of Waterloo Waterloo, Iowa January 2013 1 1 Stanley Consultants w- A Stanley Engineering,gtE�Environmental and Conmucea,Services-Worldwide Company °Stanley Consultants, 1 01.d13 — 00 O1 01.doc I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa- xul+Mutru,,,._ (slgnatutt) / `�•``�t�Q�`��......,�;"yl(�'�k�y (date) c��•' '; - Printed or typed name_Larry H. Badtram :• LARRY H. •C rt r License number: 08516 = BADTRAM ti 08516- My license renewal date is December 31,2014. Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Divisions 3&5-Sections ,%vIOWA „001"" 06 17 00&31 23 16-16 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. 0\vFESS10tH ( ` o ature) (date)t 2 Z: C=_ z : JON J. Printed or typed name Jon J. Bovenkamo = BOVENKAMP -: m License number: 15551 15551 = Z a My license renewal date is December 31,2014. •-•. , .- ' �. Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Divisions 20 F.23 i1i1111�1OIW11110 I hereby c I that this engineering document was prepared by me or under m ect ers I supervision and that I am a duly licensed Profes . al Engr e r u der the laws of the State of Iowa. �,\\```4��FESSIpN (signature) �,�;• :Fy (date) �, G,s Z : LANE E. Printed or typed name Lane E. Ingram = "' INGRAM : m V m c 17368 License number: 17368 c My license renewal date is December 31,2014. °% - •••''•-- ,.�``�� Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Division 26 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. lo \���plututuu++rulypU psi (signature) ' �O (date) Zt313 \\\\���oQFESSjpN�`���// p Printed or typed name Thomas J. Meroen :may = u. ; License number: 19064 Mil ; m 19064 rq My license renewal date is December 31,2014. Pages or sheets covered by this seal:_ Division 40 except for Section 40 23 00 goam Stanley Consultants INC A Stanley Group Company Engineetay,Environmental and Consaixtiwr Services-Worldwide 00 01 05.doc I hereb ,ertify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under direct rsonal su rvision and that I am a duly licensed Profes Tonal En�i er nde.t ws of the State of Iowa. \\����`` �FESS/pN � F y � (signature) - (date) DAVID J. ; Z - Printed or typed name David J. Bovee BOVEE • r" • 15800 • "' ` License number: 1580016 My license renewal date is December 31,2014. /���' •••••�•~���•• �\\ 0 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Division 31 except Section 31 23 16-16 and Division 32 nnunuurrur I hereby certifyprepared that the portion of this technical submission described \�\\\```Q"()FESSIpN �o,, below was re ared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible ��.�`� ..,•9� ''off charge. I am a duly registered architect under the laws of the state of Q��;'--•• 9�' Iowa. Printed or typ name Ja es ern er KEMPER r _ Signature � � � :� 02469 �+ '-.,-- \� Pages ors eet covered by this seal: ivisions 04 06 07 08 and 09 ........'/��' 0 W P••• �� �\``\ Date Issued: January 25, 2013 "ourplm1u11111%` Stanley Consultants INC _. A Stanley Group Company Engineering-Ermronmental and CorutWion Services-Worldwide 00 01 05.doc 23209.03.00 ms1222 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10-Pagel F.Y. 2013 STORM WATER LIFT STATIONS (WESTFIELD AVE., VINTON ST.,AND VIRDEN CREEK) CITY OF WATERLOO WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT NO. 831 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Title _ _ Notice of Public Hearing and Notice to Bidders Page Drawing List 1 thru 5 Instructions to Bidders 1 thru 3 Form of Bid 1 thru 11 Bid Bond 1 thru 3 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications 1 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder 1 thru 2 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Subcontractor 1 - Equal Opportunity Clause 1 Contractor's or Subcontractor's Affirmative Action Program 1 thru 2 Items of Potential MBE/WBE Participation 1 thru 9 Subcontractor's Bid Request Form, 1 Letter Form for Subcontractor Quotes 1 MBEM/BE Scope Letter 1 MBE and/or WBE Prebid Contact Information Form 1 Certified MBEM/BE Contractors List 1 Form of Contract 1 thru 4 Performance Bond 1 thru 5 Payment Bond 1 thru 2 Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificate 1 thru 2 General Specifications for Construction 1 Exhibit B- Insurance Requirements 1 thru 16 Supplemental General Specifications for Construction 1 thru 2 1 thru 2 U. S. Dept of Commerce, Economic Development Administration EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Contracts Davis-Bacon Wage Rates 1 thru 23 Certification Regarding Lobbying 1 thru 7 Notice of Requirements for Affirmative Action 1 thru 2 Buy America 1 Financial Disclosure of Federal Participation 1 1 Required Federal Contract Language for Community Development Block Grant(CDBG) Funded Contracts 1 thru 10 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP Resp. Charge Section Title - Page DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS BWR 01 11 00 Summary of Work Attachment A-Flood Contingency Plan 1 thru 2 BWR 01 2000 Price and Payment Procedures 1 thru 4 1 thru 3 23209.03.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS ms1222 Page 2-SECTION 00 01 10 Resp. Title Page Charge Section Request for Information (RFI) Form 1 BWR 01 2513 Product Substitution Procedures 1 thru 21 Product Substitution Form 1 thru 5 BWR 01 3000 Administrative Requirements 1 thru 8 BWR 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 1 Submittal Transmittal Form 1 thru 8 BWR 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 1 thru 6 BWR 01 45 33 Code Required Special Inspection and Procedures 1 thru 3 Statement of Special Inspections and Tests 1 thru 7 BWR 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 Project Sign A 1 Project Sign B 1 thru 2 EDA Sign Requirements Regarding Flagging and Cable Location 1 thru 2 for Construction on CN 1 thru 3 BWR 01 60 00 Product Requirements 1 thru 5 BWR 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 1 thru 3 BWR 01 73 19 Installation Requirements FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 1 thru 7 BWR 0241 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 1 thru 10 LHB 03 00 10 Concrete Work DIVISION 04 MASONRY 1 thru 5 JFK 04 05 00 Common Work Results for Masonry 1 thru 5 JFK 04 20 00 Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 METALS 1 thru 7 LHB 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 1 thru 4 JFK 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 1 thru 3 LHB 06 17 00 Shop-Fabricated Structural Wood DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 1 thru 2 JFK 0721 00 Thermal Insulation 1 thru 3 JFK 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 1 thru 3 JFK 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1 thru 2 JFK 07 72 33 Roof Hatches 1 thru 3 JFK 07 90 00 Joint Protection DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 1 thru 3 JFK 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1 thru 3 JFK 08 15 00 Plastic Doors and Frames 1 thru 4 JFK 08 70 00 Hardware 1 thru 2 JFK 0891 00 Louvers DIVISION 09 FINISHES 1 thru 3 JFK 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1 thru 6 JFK 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 23209.01.00 ms1222 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10-Page 3 Resp. _Charge Section Title Pape FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING JJB 23 09 13 Instrumentation and Controls Devices for HVAC JJB 2331 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 1 thru 2 JJB 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 1 thru 2 JJB 23 82 39 Unit Heaters 1 thru 3 1 thru 2 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL LEI 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical LEI 26 05 33 Above-Grade Raceway 1 thru 22 LEI 26 05 43 Below-Grade Raceway 1 thru 6 LEI 26 24 13 Low-Voltage Switchboards 1 thru 6 LEI 26 29 13-19 Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Starters 1 thru 8 LEI 26 50 00 Lighting 1 thru 6 1 thru 8 SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK DJB 31 1000 Site Clearing DJB 31 22 00 Grading 1 DJB 31 2219 Finish Grading 1 thru 2 DJB 31 2300 Excavation and Fill 1 thru 2 LHB 31 23 16-16 Structural Excavation and Backfill 1 thru 10 1 thru 7 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DJB 32 15 00 Aggregate Surfacing DJB 3231 31 Chain Link Fences and Gates 1 1 thru 3 DIVISION 35 WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION BWR 35 20 13-26 Trash Racks BWR 35 20 16-26 Sluice Gates 1 thru 3 1 thru 7 PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION BWR 40 23 00 Process Water Piping TJM 4091 00 Primary Process Measuring Devices 1 thru 7 1 thru 6 TJM 4091 10-19 Sample Calibration Reports 1 thru 4 TJM 40 95 13 Process Control Panels and Hardware 1 thru 11 DIVISION 43 PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION,AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT BWR 4321 39 Submersible Pumps 1 thru 8 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING On Proposed Plans, Specifications, Form of Contract, And Estimate of Cost and the NOTICE TO BIDDERS For the Taking of Construction Bids For the F.Y. 2013 STORM WATER LIFT STATIONS (WESTFIELD AVE., VINTON ST., AND VIRDEN CREEK) In the City of Waterloo, Iowa CONTRACT NO. 831 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 8th day of April, 2013, until 2 p.m. for the construction of the F.Y. 2013 STORM WATER LIFT STATIONS, (WESTFIELD AVE., VINTON ST., AND VIRDEN CREEK), Contract No. 831, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in open Council meeting to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 8th day of April, 2013 at 5:30 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on April 8, 2013 said hearing to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by the City Engineer of the City of Waterloo are now on file in the office of the City Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. PRE-BID CONFERENCE A pre-Bid conference will be held at 10:00 a.m. local time on March 20, 2013 at Waterloo City Hall, 2nd Floor, Mollenhoff Room. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. Owner will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers necessary in response to questions arising at the NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 1 of 5 conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. SCOPE OF WORK The extent of the work involved is general construction of 3 stormwater lift stations as follows: 1. Westfield Lift Station: General construction of new stormwater lift station including 3 submersible pump and motor units and associated discharge piping and connection of piping to existing levee gate well structures; new electrical building; related site, building, mechanical and electrical work. Project also includes construction of 84" storm sewer section and construction of box structure to connect new lift station to existing sewer line. 2. Vinton Lift Station: General construction of stormwater lift station including 3 submersible pumps located below grade in new wet well structure, and associated discharge piping and connection of piping to existing floodwall gate well structures; new electrical building; related site, mechanical and electrical work. 3. Virden Creek Lift Station: General construction of renovation of existing stormwater lift station including 3 new submersible pump and motor units and related site, building, mechanical and electrical work. Building work includes construction of new building roof with 3 individual access hatches for pump servicing and removal. BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and all items shall be completed within 385 calendar days. METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety-five percent (95%) of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 5 ms1222 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc., which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Plans and Specifications are available from the City Engineer (Engineer) upon the City's receipt of a $25.00 refundable deposit. Deposits will be refunded if the plans are - returned in usable condition (i.e. free of highlights, ink markings, tears, stickers, water stains and soiling) to the Engineer's Office by the end of the 14th consecutive day after the pro�ect has been awarded. No deposits will be refunded for any plans received after the 14t consecutive day, which includes plans returned via mail service. Plan holders are responsible for ascertaining when the project has been awarded. This deposit policy shall also apply to the prime contractor awarded the project for all plans and specifications obtained and distributed by the prime contractor to their subcontractors and suppliers in determining the prime contractor's bid, if the prime contractor wishes for their deposit to be returned. Upon award of project, the prime contractor shall be supplied with the needed number _ of plans and specifications at no additional cost. CONTRACT AWARD A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid. _ The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders, prior to awarding the contract. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 3 of 5 PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a "Performance Bond" and a "Payment Bond" within ten (10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and the Federal government and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM / SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. This project is funded in part or in total with federal funds and shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 4 of 5 ms1222 This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by the prime contractor, subcontractors and City Officials. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of Waterloo. FUNDING This project will be partially funded with Federal funds from the U.S. Department of Commerce, Economic Development Administration and therefore is subject to the Federal laws and regulations associated with that program. Published pursuant to the provisions of Division VI of Chapter 384 of the City Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of 2012. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA _ BY: Suzy Schares City Clerk NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 5 of 5 23209.03.00 ms1222 DRAWING LIST SECTION 00 01 15 -Page 1 Drawing No. Title Rev. No. General Sheets G001 Cover Sheet G002 Index Sheet 2 G003 General Le end 2 G004 Abbreviations 2 C001 Civil Le end 2 S001 Structural Notes and Le end 2 M001 Mechanical Le end 2 P001 Piping and Instrumentation 2 E001 Electrical Legend 2 E002 Electrical Notes 2 Westfield Avenue 2 C101 Site Plan C102 Enlarged Site Plan 2 C103 Gradina Plan 2 C104 Dischar e Piping Profile 2 A111 Architectural Floor Plan 2 A112 Elevations and Sections 2 A113 Architectural Details 2 A114 Roof Framing Plan 2 S101 Structural Plan at El 851.00 2 S102 Structural Plan at El 848.00 2 S103 Structural Plan at El 836.00 2 S104 Structural Sections 2 S111 Structural Foundation Plan 2 S112 Structural Section &Details 2 S131 Structural Plan at El 848.50 2 S132 Structural Plan at-El 838.00 2 S133 Structural Sections 2 M101 Mechanical Plan 2 M102 Mechanical Section 2 M111 HVAC Plan 2 M112 HVAC Schedules and Details 2 M121 Mechanical Plan 2 M122 Mechanical Sections& Details 2 P101 2 Pi in and Instrumentation 2 E101 Electrical Site Plan 2 E102 One-Line Dia ram 2 E103 Electrical Plan E104 Circuit Schedule 2 E111 Electrical Plan 2 E112 Panel Schedules 2 - E113 Electrical Details 2 E114 Electrical Details 2 1101 Pump Control Panel Layout 2 1102 PumpControl Panel Schematics 2 1103 Pump Control Panel Schematics 2 1104 Pump Control Panel Schematics 2 1105 Pum Control Panel Schematics 2 Pum 1106 2 Monitorin 2 D201 Demolition Plan Vinton Street Site Plan C201 2 C202 Enlar ed Site Plan 2 2 23209.03.00 DRAWING LIST ms1222 Page 2 -SECTION 00 01 15 2 C203 Gradin Plan 2 A211 Architectural Floor Plan 2 A212 Elevations and Sections 2 A213 Architectural Details 2 A214 Roof Frarninq Plan 2 S201 Structural Plan at El 844.00 2 S202 Structural Plan at El 842.00 2 S203 Structural Plan at El 826.00 2 S204 Structural Sections 2 S211 Structural Foundation Plan 2 S212 Structural Section & Details 2 M201 Mechanical Plan 2 M202 Mechanical Section 2 M211 HVAC Plan 2 M212 HVAC Schedules and Details 2 M221 Mechanical Plan 2 M222 Mechanical Sections & Details 2 P201 Pi in and Instrumentation 2 E200 Electrical Site Plan 2 E201 Electrical Site Plan 2 E202 One-Line Dia ram 2 E203 Electrical Plan 2 E204 Circuit Schedule 2 E211 Electrical Plan 2 E212 Panel Schedules 2 1201 Pum Control Panel Layout 2 1202 Pum Control Panel Schematics 2 1203 Pum Control Panel Schematics 2 1204 Pum Control Panel Schematics 2 1205 Pum Control Panel Schematics Virden Creek 2 D301 Demolition Plan 2 C301 Site Plan 2 C302 Enlarged Site Plan 2 A301 Demo, Floor, Roof, Frame Plans 2 A302 Elevations and Section 2 A303 Architectural Details 2 M301 Mechanical Plan at El 862.00 2 M302 Mechanical Plan at El 852.50 2 M303 Mechanical Plan at El 834.50 2 M304 Mechanical Sections 2 M311 HVAC Plan 2 M312 HVAC Schedules and Details 2 P301 Pi ing and Instrumentation 2 E301 Electrical Site Plan 2 E302 One-Line Dia ram 2 E303 Electrical Plan 2 E304 Panel Schedules 2 E305 Circuit Schedule 2 1301 Pum Control Panel La out 2 1302 Pumn Control Panel Schematics 2 1303 Pumo Control Panel Schematics 2 1304 Pump Control Panel Schematics 2 1305 Pump Control Panel Schematics 2 1306 --j5'ump Monitoring 23209,03.00 ms1222 DRAWING LIST SECTION 00 01 15-Page 3 StanFDrawings FlE Civil Details - Civil Details 2 tructural Details 2 lectrical Details2lectrical Details 2 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof. Failure to do so will not relieve bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The Owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the _ bid. b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or _ more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, _ failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. C. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. e. In preparing his bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 1 of 11 unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required, the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. C. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall made the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 11 ms 1222 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bond, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. The federal funding on this project requires that the surety is federally approved. Refer to EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Contracts. 8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS a. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he as not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. _ b. Each bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any, execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5:00 P.M. the business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he has not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before executing any subcontract, the successful bidder shall submit the name of any proposed subcontractor for approval by the City. 9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal. Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. 10. MBE/WBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PURPOSE a. The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 ms 1222 Page 3 of 11 and women disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction contracts. b. The Program does not propose to eliminate any bona fide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's grow and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. C. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set- aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. d. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good-faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than $50,000. e. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. f. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded construction contracts. 11. DEFINITIONS a. Goals: A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make "good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative action efforts to eradicate and prevent discrimination. b. Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical goal component of affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with respect to persons of any race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor) C. Set-Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority and women business enterprises. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 4 of 11 ms1222 d. Contractor: As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. e. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE): Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 f. Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification - List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 g. Minority: Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific, Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124-1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983). h. Lowest Responsible Bidder: Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. i. Broker: One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. j. Mayor's Advisory Committee: _ Mayor's Advisory Committee for Minority, Female, and Disadvantaged Business Enterprise. k. Good Faith Efforts: The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal - No Action necessary 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 5 of 11 12. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING a. The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. b. This project is funded solely or in part with Federal funds and shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBEMBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. C. Administrative Reconsideration: As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. d. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting * Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms * MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used * Reasons agreements were not reached * Follow-up after initial solicitations and materials (at * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor e. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 6 of 11 ms1222 13. RESPONSIBILITIES a. City of Waterloo 1. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. 2. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. 3. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms. 4. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. 5. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and within two (2) business days forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. b. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3) to appropriate MBE/WBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBE/WBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBE/WBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBEIWBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 7 of 11 2. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. 3. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBE/WBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). 4. If any MBE/WBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE was not selected. These reasons could include: a) Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. b) MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive.) c) Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d) Prime contractor self performs work. e) Any other reason relied on by prime. 5. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine e the weight toi b given to each item listed above (supp Y PP P e documentation) based on overall program goals. C. MBE/WBE Firms 1. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002. 2. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. 3. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5) to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 8 of 11 ms1222 subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. 14. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS a. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. b. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. 15. NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good- faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. 16. CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract - Compliance Programs. 17. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 18. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 9 of 11 take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 19. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The intention is to award the contract at any time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such action for a reasonable time, not exceeding 60 days. b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. C. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. 20. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT BONDS AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract documents in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds shall be in the same form as that included in the contract INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 10 of 11 ms1222 documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bonds. The federal funding on this project requires that the surety is federally approved. Refer to EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Contracts. C. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance," Pages 14 to 15 of 19 Pages. The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re-advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the amount of the bid an the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 11 of 11 FORM OF BID F.Y. 2013 STORMWATER LIFT STATIONS (WESTFIELD AVE., VINTON ST., AND VIRDEN CREEK) CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT NO. 831 Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of a Partnership consisting of the following partners: zd (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the'ng project ea affecting(himself) ffec ngsthe cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda (if any), as prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc., now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes tc furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this F.Y. 2013 STORMWATER LIFT STATIONS (WESTFIELD AVE., VINTON ST., AND VIRDEN CREEK) CONTRACT NO. 831, all in accordance with the above-listed documents for the following lump sum price: (words) ($ (figures) A. Breakdown of lump sum price: Westfield Lift Station: $ - Vinton Lift Station: $ Virden Creek Lift Station: $ B. Unit Adjustment Prices: Required Base Bid quantities of the items listed below are set forth in the Contract Documents. If increases or decreases in these quantities occur, the Contract Price is to be adjusted by Change Order on the basis of the following. Adjustment prices are subject to acceptance by Owner, and rejection of one or more adjustment prices will not invalidate acceptance of this Bid. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 1 of 3 No. Item Unit Unit Adjustment Price 1. Structural Earth Excavation And Backfill CY $ 2. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10) days after"Notice to Proceed" is issued. 4. Security in the sum of Dollars ($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 5. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. 6. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 7. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC, within ten (10) days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 8. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 9. The bidder shall list the MBE/WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s). The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL" Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract. The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 Page 2 of 3 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 10. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or"NA". 11. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. 12. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. (Name of Bidder) (Date) BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S. No. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 831 ms 1222 Page 3 of 3 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, as Principal, and as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER." In the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum will and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of 20_, for NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. - By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond as provided in the specifications or by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the- Owner may accept such Bid or execute such contract; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety, have hereunto set their hands anj seals, and such of them as are corporations, have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers this day of A.D. 201 _ Principal (Seal) By (Title) Witness Surety _(Seal) By Witness Attorney-in-Fact BID BOND CONTRACT NO. 831 ms1222 rage 1 of 1 _ STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) All questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers. 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: -. 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 PAGE 1 OF 2 ms1222 Dated at this day of 201 (Name of Bidder) By: Title: State of ) ss: County of ) is being duly sworn deposes and says that he Of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 201 Notary Public My commission expires Zi STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 PAGE 2 OF 2 ms1222 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of ) County of )ss) being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is _(Owner, Partner. Officer Representative or Agent) , of submitted the attached Bid; the Bidder that has 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 201 . Title My commission expires NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms 1222 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of ) County of ) ss: being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner. Partner Officer Representative or Agent) , of —' hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to contract pertaining to the project in (City or County and State) ' 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful �. agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure _. through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 0 201 . My commission expires Title NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT SUB CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms1222 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading C. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physica disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitment under this section. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions, 5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this contract and with rules and regulations of the City's EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 2 ms1222 Affirmative Action Program—Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract, subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non-discrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Official) (Title) (Date) EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 2 ms1222 Revised February 2003 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor I. Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company Address of Company Zip Telephone Number ( ) Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number Estimated Construction Work Dates / Start Finish Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number ( ) Subcontractor's Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 9 ms1222 C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or Subcontractor. 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic Name Address Position Sex Origin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY (Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training, upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employment opportunity and merit employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 9 ms1222 operatives, attendants (auto service and parking), plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners, mine operatives and laborers, motormen oilers and greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary fireman, truck and tractor drivers, weavers, (textile), welders and flame cutters and kindred workers. 8. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers, gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers, longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen, raftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifing, digging, mixing, loading and pulling operations and kindred workers. 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered with a Federal or State agency. 10. Trainees (on-the-mob): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial, professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 9 of 9 ms1222 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the F.Y. 2013 STORMWATER LIFT STATIONS (WESTFIELD AVE, VINTON ST, AND VIRDEN CREEK) CONTRACT NO. 831, that have a potential for MBE/WBE Participation. This listing, however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a Prime Contractor. All items are eligible for participation. MBE/WBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that MBE goal and WBE goals are attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors, but the Pre-Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out com letel . City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 ITEMS OF PARTICIPATION CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms1222 LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No.: Dear (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the above referenced project. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) - (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, anc all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and _ (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) Form CCO-3(11/28/2001) SOLICITATION LETTER CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms1222 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on (project name) in the area of (description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by (date) and (time). Subcontractor's Company Name Date Subcontractor's Signature Date Prime Bidder's Signature BID REQUEST FORM CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms1222 LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBE/WBE LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBE/WBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to he City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name- Address: -- Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: _ Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 Form CCO-5 (06-20-2002) LETTER OF INTENT TO BID CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms 1222 E o ° c 0 U E L o ° c0 0 -C O O C L 0 ° LZ 0 0- m _ c� y9 O c L O m O L. Q cn Q ` O O ocn C< C U c o w 0 U � o .0 m c a� E 0 ca p c m 0- ow o rn—cm ca. . .— � ui , .0 U a) (0 -0 o 0) U o 0) o 0 (D p .O E- U U a) N A ° a) n.a) 0 w a� Lac No co w ° @ 3v, n � 0 C: a i o d U E -m Q io w WD � c aa) cU) 0aa) � ia- N LL 0 0 0 c c .0 0 a) 0: Z d' Z cn � L Rio c0 WQ ap `ova o Z5UU a� � � U w � 0 Uw u> I- E •` c ° W c u Q ° c O > VO a) m C� Z � OW ° in � o ° E °a � � A W ° m .N a� � ° Z d o s � of � a0ia0i cE > W U wz W m � 5 cnY m � 0 �-- a a) m N � = Z ZI— ° � � a•- 3 � Q COW CO) w 0 .0 a) 0) Z �ca a) w; o m H o 3 E o c E O WCf) o WZZ � ° a) oai � o � fly' F- Z a �W m cu rn o ) V o h o o a Q Cl) p � SErn (co D -00 N Om Lu a m m jai °� c`�i d> 0 E aa) LL W 'A � � W cd O � 3 ° � � Oo cN Zm °.r' Cl a) (u mom au i � � fl LL � A c a. a? L c € a °° m OW o cu a� � O -5o m ° m V c`o ° O W ° 0 y 0 ° coi m w o m >— Os � co c Q 3 o .�° Nrn w ° Q a � w o i— O a' m Q o 0 co CO IX 0° a ° n v a o O aw OU � � gU -a `° ac' rn c m o m L 0 ° E .- CV Z D 3 E Z Q 0 -0 S rn 0 W co `p (n O `O C U a) O a) O Qa U C C FJ -0 Cr _ ° W O ° Z a a) `) a)i N U > O m a O a) � � c Oc'� m0- m a� ns U a U '3 � M - = ,, a) (D E atf c 00 � 00 'v, wY Exn (n ° °a zai U C0W W - o E CERTIFIED MBE / WBE CONTRACTORS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA �. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE OFFICE Community Development Board Carnegie Annex,Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo,Iowa 50703 t City WEB Site: w«-w.ei.waterloo.ia.us Contract Compliance WEB Site for listing updates: http://Nvw-w.wplwloo.lib.ia.us/contractcompliance/ Contact: Rudy Jones,Community Development Director Email: rudy.iones�:waterloo-ia.org Phone: (319) 291-4429 Fax: (319) 291-4431 MBEMBE Certified Contractors List CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 4 ms1222 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CARTER ELECTRIC 725 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)232-9808 Pager: (319)235-4021 Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319)235-0885 Fax: (319)236-8177 Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels _ Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)236-9075 FAX: (319)236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTLAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PA VING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING (ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION GREER'S WORKS 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: — MBEIWBE Certified Contractors List CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 4 ms1222 DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION LOVE'S ENTERPRISE 835 West Fifth St. P.O. Box 246 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319)233-3260 Contact: David Love Certified: Iowa DOT, City of Waterloo Certified MBE Specializing in: CONCRETE PAVING, ASPHALT, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, TRUCKING OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION QUICK CONSTRUCTION 217 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 215-4166 Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION MBEMBE Certified Contractors List CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 3 of 4 ms1222 CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS ATLAS PAINTING, INC.* 911 Sycamore Street P.O. BOX 65 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319)232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE* 4003 University Avenue Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone : (319) 233-6131 FAX: (319)233-6133 email: JR11486gcfu.net Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC.* 2920 Texas Street Waterloo, IA 50702 Phone : (319) 233-7481 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact :Patricia J. Kimball Specializing in: STORMSEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARYSEWER, INTAKE o STRUCTURES * DENOTES WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE -- MBEMBE Certified Contractors List CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 4 of 4 ms1222 FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y. 2013 STORMWATER LIFT STATIONS (WESTFIELD AVE., VINTON ST., AND VIRDEN CREEK) CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT NO. 831 This contract made and entered into this day of 20_, by and between the City of Waterloo, Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and _ of (hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH: PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the F.Y. 2013 Stormwater Lift Stations (at Westfield Ave., Vinton St., and Virden Creek) in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, furnish all necessary tools, equipment, materials, and labor necessary to do all the work called for in the plans and specifications in a workmanlike manner and for the prices set forth in Contractor's proposal, - which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and agreed to be a part of this contract. - PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to Bidders, the Form of Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and approval of the City and its engineer. PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and complete within 385 calendar days unless an extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City. PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date herein specified, the City may FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 5 ms1222 pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water, traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the backfilling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any injuries allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction, hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for, that it will defend said suit and save the City harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City, the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City and those who use the streets of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also, to make any test or any material to be used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. PAR. 10 Any material, which has been rejected by the construction reviewer, shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims of labor, material, men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor, material, or men under this contract. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 5 ms 1222 PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and shall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten (10) days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material, tools, or machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained by the City from any compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work, the City agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors, the amount of money due the _ Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set out in the Contractor's proposal, which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the Contractor's price, and for which 100% surety bond is required is $ PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said sites and adjacent streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the site and adjacent streets back in a proper condition for travel and parking. PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference, this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 3 of 5 ms 1222 PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2) years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2) years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after having been given ten (10) days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3) months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event, until two (2) years after the acceptance of the work. PAR. 22 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the Contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of $1,000.00 per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the Contractor does, or could have worked from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sundays if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 4 of 5 ms1222 This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engireering and contract administration. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor City Clerk Contractor By: Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, this _ day of 20_. ATTEST: City Clerk Waterloo, Iowa FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 5 of 5 ms1222 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, of (the "Principal"), and of (the "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo, Iowa (the "Obligee"), in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of said sum in connection with a contract (the "Contract") dated on or about for the purpose of The Contract is incorporated herein by reference as though fully set forth herein. Whenever the Principal shall be and is declared by the Obligee to be in default under the Contract, with the Obligee having performed its obligations in the Contract, then the Surety, acknowledging that time is of the essence, may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly undertake to: 1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or 2. Obtain one or more bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, or, if the Obligee elects, upon determination by the Obligee and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, arrange for a contract between such party and the Obligee. The Surety will make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price. The cost of completion includes responsibilities of the Principal for correction of defective work and completion of the Contract, the Obligee's legal and design professional costs resulting directly from the Principal's default, and liquidated damages or actual damages if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract. The term "balance of the Contract price" means the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal; or 3. Determine the amount for which it is liable to the Obligee and pay the Obligee that amount as soon as practicable. In the event this bond is enforced, Principal and Surety agree to indemnify Obligee and hold Obligee harmless from and against any and all costs of enforcement, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithstanding, to consent to each and all of the following matters, without notice: 1. To any extension of time to the Contract in which to perform the Contract. PERFORMANCE BOND CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 2 ms1222 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or Contract when such change does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent (20%) of the total Contract price, and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than one (1) year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such work was accepted. If the Principal performs the Contract, then this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. In no event shall the Surety's total obligation exceed the penal amount of this bond. Terms used herein shall include, as appropriate, the singular or plural number, or the masculine, feminine or neuter gender. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Principal and Surety have executed this Performance Bond as of PRINCIPAL SURETY Name Name By: By: Title: Title: [attach Power of Attorney] NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the State where the project is located. PERFORMANCE BOND CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 2 ms1222 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a , hereinafter called Principal, (Corporation,Partnership or Individual) and (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Owner) (Address of Owner) hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars, $( ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas,the Principal entered into a certain contract with the OWNER, dated the day of 20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants,oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the — construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in — ms1222 00 61 13-16- 1 any wise affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS. -- PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder,whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS HEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of (number) _ which shall be deemed an original,this the day of 20 ATTEST: Principal (Principal)Secretary (SEAL) By (s) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety -- ATTEST: By Attorney-in-Fact Witness as to Surety (Address) (Address) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds mast appear on the Treasury Department's most current list(Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the State where the project is located. ms1222 00 61 13-16-2 INFORMATION NEEDED _ FOR IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: (Check One) PRIME SUBCONTRACTOR FEDERAL ID#: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT CONTRACT NO.: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Brickwork Landscaping Carpentry Painting Concrete Paving Drywall-Plaster-Insulation Plumbing Electrical Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal Excavation/Grading Windows Flooring Wrecking-Demolition Heavy Construction Other (Please specify) Heating-Ventilating-Air Cond. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 1 ms1222 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SECTION A - Definitions of Terms SECTION B - Scope of work SECTION C - Control of Materials and Work SECTION D - Procedure and Progress _ SECTION E - Measurements and Payments SECTION F - Legal Relations and Responsibility SECTION A - DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the First Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefor and to such other duties as may be delegated to him in these specifications. 5. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanying contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract. 7. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a part of the work provided for in these specifications. 8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. - 9. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance of the contract. 10. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 16 ms1222 11. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 12. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying to the contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. 13. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 14. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 15. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 16. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. 17. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 18. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of completion. 19. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 20. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 21, WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 16 m s 1222 22. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. SECTION B - SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the _ contract documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to the Engineer and to his representatives. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors of omission in plans or in the layout as given by w said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same. 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 3 of 16 ms1222 work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices at 325 Sycamore Street or their telephone number is 319-232-6280. 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets, highways, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 4 of 16 ms 1222 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. - 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 5 of 16 ms1222 specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work. 4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The GentFaGteF shall R9t fuFnish stakes eF men to set them. He shall not PFOGeed until the PFOgFe6s of the WGF The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 6 of 16 ms1222 instructions, and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or -- omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being give, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporated in the work or not, and the _ Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. 9. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 7 of 16 ms1222 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re-employed unless express permission be given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer. 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of Waterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS 1. ORDER OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The City shall have the right to take possession of and use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or used, or any part thereof. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work at such time. 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation, unavoidable casualties, or any cause GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 8 of 16 ms1222 beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty (30) days before claim therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party _ under provisions in the contract documents. 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in charge of any office used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office, postpaid, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth (1/4) of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half (1/2) of the contract period, three- eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (3/4) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 9 of 16 ms1222 Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer. 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed, the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cost of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work. (c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work. Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 10 of 16 ms1222 correct, he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten (10) days after completion of the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Such notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten (10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 11 of 16 ms1222 If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall, within a period of five (5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty (30) days. If no claims are filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent (10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. SECTION F - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City harmless therefor. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save the City harmless and protect the public and any person from injury GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 12 of 16 ms1222 sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor and any Subcontractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: _ (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. _ (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. (c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other persons, firms, or corporations. (e) Railroad protective liability insurance, in the name of the appropriate CN entity, Vinton site only. (f) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.013 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.01) Railroad Protection Liability Insurance $5,000,000.00 per occurrence $10,000,000.00 aggregate (g) For Virden Creek site only, provide additional insurance policy to cover the insurance required by MidAmerican, outlined in Exhibit B following this Section. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 13 of 16 ms 1222 The Contractor shall have the City of Waterloo, Iowa and Stanley Consultants, Inc. named as an "Additional Named Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance. 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer, to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City. 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 14 of 16 ms1222 Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within a reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three--one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should _ either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa. In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 15 of 16 ms1222 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shall, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. 14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 16 of 16 ms1222 EXHIBIT B INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Grantee shall maintain the following insurance: A. Workers' Compensation Insurance and Occupational Disease Insurance in accordance with statutory requirements of the state and/or Federal Regulations (e.g., FELA,USL&H, Jones Act,as applicable) and Employers' Liability Insurance with limits of not less than: — Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 Each Accident Bodily Injury by Disease $500,000 Policy Limit Bodily Injury by Disease $500,000 Each Employee covering location of all work places under the Permit. B. The most recently approved ISO Commercial General Liability Insurance policy,or its equivalent,written on an Occurrence Basis,with limits of$1,000,000.00 per occurrence/aggregate(on a per location or per job basis) Bodily Injury and Property Damage, including the following coverages. l. Premises and Operations Coverage — 2. Independent Contractor's Coverage 3. Contractual Liability covering liabilities assumed under this Permit 4. Products and Completed Operations Coverage 5. Coverage for explosion, collapse, and underground property damage 6. Broad Form Property Damage Liability 7. Personal Injury Liability,with the contractual exclusion removed 8. Sudden and Accidental Pollution Liability, as appropriate C. The most recently approved ISO Business Automobile Liability Insurance policy, or its equivalent, covering owned, hired and non-owned vehicles with limits not less than $1,000,000 each accident Bodily Injury and Property Damage combined, including Sudden and Accidental Pollution Liability, as appropriate. D. Umbrella Liability Insurance with a minimum limit of $5,000,000 each occurrence/aggregate where applicable to be excess of the coverages and limits required in A., B., and C. above. Grantee shall notify MidAmerican, if at any time its full umbrella limit is not available during the term of this Permit, and will purchase additional limits,if requested by MidAmerican. E. Environmental Impairment Liability Insurance with limits of$2,000,000 per occurrence/$2,000,000 aggregate. The Grantee shall, on or prior to the date Work commences, deliver to MidAmerican — certificates of insurance evidencing valid coverage in effect as specified above. All of the above described insurance policies shall contain provisions that the insurance companies will have no right of recovery or subrogation against MidAmerican, its parent, divisions, — affiliates, subsidiary companies, co-lessees, or co-venturers, agents, directors, officers, employees, servants, and insurers, it being the intention of the parties that the insurance as effected shall protect all parties, and the Grantees insurance carrier shall be primarily — responsible for any and all losses covered by the described insurance. With respect to only the activities of Grantee arising out of the "PERMIT MIDAMERICAN ENERGY COMPANY PREMISES (MAYNARD SUBSTATION, WATERLOO, IOWA)" MidAmerican, its parent, divisions, affiliates, subsidiary companies, co-lessees, or co-venturers, agents, directors, officers, employees, and — servants shall be named as an additional insured in each of Grantee's insurance policies, except statutory Workers' Compensation. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. SUBCONTRACTS The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. 2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. The Contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests, which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or in part will be made at the project - site. 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease-purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any material or SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 1 of 2 ms1222 labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECS CONTRACT NO. 831 Page 2 of 2 ms1222 U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION �4 nl 1. r EDA CONTRACTING PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS These EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (EDA Contracting Provisions) are intended for use by recipients receiving federal assistance from the U. S. Department of Commerce -Economic Development Administration (EDA). They contain provisions specific to EDA and other federal provisions not normally found in non-federal contract documents. The requirements contained herein must be incorporated into all construction contracts and subcontracts funded wholly or in part with federal assistance from EDA. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Definitions 2. Applicability — 3. Federally Required Contract Provisions 4. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted 5. Inspection by EDA Representatives 6. Examination and Retention of Contractor's Records 7. Construction Schedule and Periodic Estimates 8. Contractor's Title to Material 9. Inspection and Testing of Materials — 10. "OR EQUAL"Clause 11. Patent Fees and Royalties — 12. Claims for Extra Costs 13. Contractor's and Subcontractor's Insurance — 14. Contract Security Bonds 15. Labor Standards-Davis-Bacon and Related Acts 16. Labor Standards-Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act 17. Equal Employment Opportunity 18. Contracting with Small,Minority and Women's Businesses 19. Health, Safety and Accident Prevention 20. Conflict of Interest and Other Prohibited Interests 21. New Restrictions on Lobbying 22. Historical and Archaeological Data Preservation 23. Clean Air and Water 24. Use of Lead-Based Paints on Residential Structures 25. Energy Efficiency 26. Environmental Requirements 27. Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusions 28. EDA Project Sign Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects 1. DEFINITIONS Agreement—The written instrument that is evidence of the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor overseeing the Work. Architect/Engineer-The person or other entity engaged by the Recipient to perform architectural, engineering, design, and other services related to the work as provided for in the contract. Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations,representations, or agreements,whether written or oral. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. Drawings or Plans—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by the Architect/Engineer that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by the Contractor. EDA -The United States of America acting through the Economic Development Administration of the U.S. Department of Commerce or any other person designated to act on its behalf. EDA has agreed to provide financial assistance to the Owner,which includes assistance in financing the Work to be performed under this Contract. Notwithstanding EDA's role, nothing in this Contract shall be construed to create any contractual relationship between the Contractor and EDA. Owner—The individual or entity with whom the Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. Project—The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. Recipient-An entity receiving Federal financial assistance from EDA, including any EDA- approved successor to the entity. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having direct contract with the Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be 9- provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as -- required by the Contract Documents. 2. APPLICABILITY The Project to which the construction work covered by this Contract pertains is being assisted by the United States of America through federal assistance provided by the U.S. Department of — Commerce- Economic Development Administration(EDA). Neither EDA, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees is a party to this Contract. The following EDA Contracting Provisions are included in this Contract and all subcontracts or related instruments pursuant to — the provisions applicable to such federal assistance from EDA. 3. FEDERALLY REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS (a) Administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors violate or breach contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be appropriate (Contracts more than the simplified acquisition threshold -currently fixed at$100,000. See 41 U.S.C. 403(11)). (b) Termination for cause and for convenience by the Recipient including the manner by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement(all contracts in excess of$10,000). (c) Compliance with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965,Equal Employment Opportunity, as amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967 and as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 41 C.F.R. chapter 60 (applicable to all construction contracts awarded in excess of$10,000 by recipients of federal assistance and their contractors or subrecipients). (d) Compliance with the Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act(18 U.S.C. § 874)as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 29 C.F.R. part 3 (all contracts and subgrants for construction or repair). (e) Compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act(40 U.S.C. § 3145) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 29 C.F.R. part 5 (construction contracts in excess of$2,000 awarded by Recipients and subrecipients). (f) Compliance with sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. §§ 327-330) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 29 C.F.R.part 5. (construction contracts awarded by Recipients and subrecipients in excess of$2,000, and in excess of$2,500 for other contracts which involve the employment of mechanics or laborers) (g) EDA requirements and regulations pertaining to reporting. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects -- (h) EDA requirements and regulations pertaining to patent rights with respect to any discovery or invention which arises or is developed in the course of or under such contract. (i) EDA requirements and regulations pertaining to copyrights and rights in data. (j) Compliance with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under section 306 of the Clear Air Act(42 U.S.C. § 7606), section 508 of the Clean Water Act(33 U.S.C. § 1368), Executive Order 11738,Providing for Administration of the Clean Air Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act With Respect to Federal Contracts, Grants, or Loans, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations at 48 C.F.R.part 15 (applicable to contracts, subcontracts, and subgrants of amounts in excess of$ 100,000). 4. REQUIRED PROVISIONS DEEMED INSERTED Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted,then upon the application of either party the contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion of correction. 5. INSPECTION BY EDA REPRESENTATIVES The authorized representatives and agents of EDA shall be permitted to inspect all work, - materials,payrolls,personnel records, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records. 6. EXAMINATION AND RETENTION OF CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS (a) The Owner, EDA, or the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives shall, generally until three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractor's directly pertinent books, documents,papers, or other records involving transactions related to this contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions. (b) The Contractor agrees to include in first-tier subcontracts under this contract a clause substantially the same as paragraph (a)above. "Subcontract," as used in this clause,excludes purchase orders that do not exceed$10,000. (c) The periods of access and examination in paragraphs (a) and (b) above for records relating to -- (1) appeals under the disputes clause of this contract, (2) litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, or(3) costs and expenses of this contract to which the Owner, EDA, or Comptroller General or any of their duly authorized representatives has taken exception shall continue until disposition of such appeals, litigation, claims, or exceptions. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects 7. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES Immediately after execution and delivery of the contract, and before the first partial payment is made,the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner an estimated construction progress schedule in a form satisfactory to the Owner, showing the proposed dates of commencement and completion of each of the various subdivisions of work required under the Contract Documents and the anticipated amount of each monthly payment that will become due to the Contractor in -- accordance with the progress schedule. The Contractor also shall furnish the Owner(a)a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the contract price and(b)periodic itemized estimates of work done for the purpose of making partial payments thereon. The costs employed in making up any of these schedules will be used only to determine the basis of partial payments and will not be considered as fixing a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price. 8. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIAL No materials, supplies, or equipment for the work shall be purchased by the Contractor or by any subcontractor that is subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that he/she has good title to all work, materials, and equipment used by him/her in the Work, free and clear of all liens,claims,or encumbrances. 9. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS All materials and equipment used in the completion of the Work shall be subject to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards. The laboratory or inspection ._ agency shall be selected by the Owner. Materials of construction,particularly those upon which the strength and durability of any structure may depend, shall be subject to inspection and testing to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for intended uses. 10. "OR EQUAL" CLAUSE Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is identified in the Contract Documents by r reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names,trade names, catalogue numbers, etc., it is intended merely to establish a standard. Any material, article, or equipment of other _ manufacturers and vendors that will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article, or equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, of equal substance and function. However, such substitution material, article,or equipment shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect/Engineer's written approval. 11. PATENT FEES AND ROYALTIES (a) Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product,or device that is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design,process,product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects -- the performance of the Work and if,to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others,the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by the Owner in the Contract Documents. _ (b) To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all _ claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 12. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COSTS No claims for extra work or cost shall be allowed unless the same was done in pursuance of a written order from the Architect/Engineer approved by the Owner. 13. CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS INSURANCE (a) The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until the Contractor has obtained all insurance reasonably required by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his/her subcontract until the insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. (b) Types of insurance normally required are: (1) Workmen's Compensation (2) Contractor's Public Liability and Property Damage (3) Contractor's Vehicle Liability (4) Subcontractors Public Liability, Property Damage and Vehicle Liability (5) Builder's Risk(Fire and Extended Coverage) (c) Scope of Insurance and Special Hazards: The insurance obtained,which is described above, shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his/her subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims that may arise from operations under this contract,whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him/her and -- also against any of the special hazards that may be encountered in the performance of this Contract. (d) Proof of Carriage of Insurance: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates, and dates of expiration of applicable insurance policies. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects 14. CONTRACT SECURITY BONDS (a) If the amount of this Contract exceeds $100,000, the Contractor shall furnish a performance bond in an amount at least equal to one hundred percent(100%)of the Contract price as security for the faithful performance of this Contract and also a payment bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent(100%) of the Contract price or in a penal sum not less than that prescribed by State, Territorial,or local law, as security for the payment of all persons performing labor on the — Work under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. The performance bond and the payment bond may be in one or in separate instruments in accordance with local law. Before final acceptance, each bond must be approved by EDA. If the amount of — this Contract does not exceed$100,000,the Owner shall specify the amount of the payment and performance bonds. (b) All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as otherwise — provided in applicable laws or regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies as published in Treasury Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent's _ authority to act. Surety companies executing the bonds must also be authorized to transact business in the state where the Work is located. 15. LABOR STANDARDS -DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACTS (as required by section 601 of PWEDA) (a) Minimum Wages (1)All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the Work in the construction or development of the Project will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account(except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor _ under the Copeland Act at 29 C.F.R.part 3, the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof)due at the time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor,which is _ attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship that may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered ' wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 C.F.R. § 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly)under plans, funds, or programs, which cover — the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 C.F.R. § 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects — rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein,provided that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates determined under 29 C.F.R. § 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis- Bacon poster(WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (2)(i) Any class of laborers or mechanics to be employed under the Contract, but not listed in the wage determination, shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. EDA shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (A)The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; (B) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and r (C)The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (ii) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and EDA or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate(including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate),a report of the action taken shall be sent by EDA or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration,U.S.Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. (iii) In the event the Contractor,the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the �— classification or their representatives, and EDA or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits,where appropriate),EDA or its designee shall refer the questions, including the -� views of all interested parties and the recommendation of EDA or its designee,to the Administrator for determination. �. (iv)The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate)determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(2)(ii)or(iii) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (3) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate,the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (4) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person,the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program,provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. — (b) Withholding EDA or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized ' representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this Contract or any other federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other — federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements,which is held by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices,trainees and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the Contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice,trainee or helper employed or working on the site of the Work in the construction or development of the ,. Project, all or part of the wages required by the Contract, EDA or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner,take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. EDA or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor,disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the Contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the _ case of direct Davis-Bacon Act contracts. (c) Payrolls and basic records (1) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the Work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the Work in the construction or development of the Project. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of _ wages paid(including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B)of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked,deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 C.F.R. § 5.5(a)(1)(iv)that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section I(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show _ that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable,the plan or program is financially responsible, and the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and provide records that show the costs anticipated or the - actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects — apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs,the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (2)(i)For each week in which Contract work is performed,the Contractor shall submit a copy of all payrolls to the Owner for transmission to EDA or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 C.F.R. part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose. It may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents(Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1),U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,D.C. 20402; or downloaded from the U.S. Department of Labor's website at www.dol.izov/esa/forms/whd/index.htm. The prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors (ii) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a"Statement of Compliance," signed by the Contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the Contract and shall certify the following: (A) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under 29 C.F.R. § 5.5(a)(3)(i)and that such information is correct and complete; (B) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee)employed on the Contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned,without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned,other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 C.F.R. part 3; (C) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the Contract. (iii) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the ` "Statement of Compliance"required by paragraph 14(c)(ii)of this section. (iv) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the Contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of Title 18 and section 231 of Title 31 of the U.S. Code. (3) The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph 14(c)(1)of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of EDA or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects available, EDA or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor or Owner,take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment,advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 - C.F.R. part 5.12. (d) Apprentices and Trainees. _ (1) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency(where appropriate)to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the —. entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work _ on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a Contractor is performing construction on a Project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress,expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator ^' determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau,withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (2) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 C.F.R. § 5.16,trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed " pursuant to and individually registered in a program that has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects _ Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits,trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program,the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. i, (3) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices,trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246,Equal Employment Opportunity, as amended, and 29 C.F.R.part 30. (e) Compliance with Copeland Anti-Kickback Act Requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act(18 U.S.C. § 874 and 40 U.S.C. § 276(c)) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations(29 C.F.R. part 3, "Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants of the United States"). The Act provides that the Contractor and any subcontractors shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of the compensation to which they are otherwise entitled. The Owner shall report all suspected or reported violations to EDA. (f) Subcontracts. The Contractor and any subcontractors will insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 C.F.R. §§ 5.5(a)(1)through (10) and such other clauses as EDA or its designee may require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in -� any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 C.F.R. part 5.5. �. (g) Contract termination; debarment. The breach of the contract clauses in 29 C.F.R. part 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a Contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 C.F.R. § 5.12. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (h) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 C.F.R. parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (i) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this Contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this Contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor — set forth in 29 C.F.R.parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor(or any of its subcontractors)and EDA or its designee,the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 0) Certification of Eligibility. (1)By entering into this Contract,the Contractor certifies that neither it nor any person or firm that has an interest in the Contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 C.F.R. § 5.12(a)(1). (2)No part of this Contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for — award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a)of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 C.F.R. § 5.12(a)(1). (3)The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. § 1001. 16. LABOR STANDARDS-CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY — STANDARDS ACT As used in this paragraph,the terms "laborers"and"mechanics" include watchmen and guards. (a) Overtime requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the _ Contract work,which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics, shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which that person is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of — pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (b) Violation; liability for unpaid wages, liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a)of this section,the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory,to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a) of this section, in the sum of$10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (a) of this section. (c) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. EDA or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any monies payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under any such Contract or any other federal contract with the _ same prime Contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act,which is held by the same prime Contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph(b)of this section. (d) Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs(a)through(c) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs(a)through (c) of this section. 17. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (a) The Recipient hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be incorporated into any contract for construction work, or modification thereof,as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41 C.F.R. chapter 60,which is paid for in whole or in part with funds obtained from EDA,the following equal opportunity clause: `- During the performance of this contract,the Contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color,religion, sex,or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race,color,religion, sex or national -� origin. Such action shall include,but not be limited to the following:Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer;recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation;and selection for training -- including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration .•• for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. (3) The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers representatives of the Contractor's Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects commitments hereunder, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places - available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and pursuant to rules,regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations,and orders. (6) In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this Contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this Contract may be canceled,terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally-assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulations or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph 17(a)(1) and the provisions of paragraphs 17(a)(1)through (6) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations,or orders of the _ Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as EDA or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, however,that in the event the Contractor becomes involved in or is threatened with litigation with or by a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by EDA or the Secretary of Labor, R the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. (8) The Recipient further agrees that it will be bound by the above equal opportunity clause with respect to its own employment practices when it participates in federally- assisted construction work. Provided, however, that if the Recipient so participating is a State or local government,the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to any agency, instrumentality, or subdivision of such government that does not participate in work on or under the Contract. T- (9) The Recipient agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with EDA and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal opportunity clause and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish EDA and the Secretary of Labor such information as they may Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (d) The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any noncompliance with these requirements and of the corrective action required. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor or the Contractor's representative at the site of the Work, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the noncompliance and corrective action required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to take corrective action promptly, the Owner may issue an order stopping all or part of the Work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall not base any claim or request for equitable adjustment for additional time or money on any stop order issued under these circumstances. (e) The Contractor shall be responsible for its subcontractors' compliance with the provisions of this clause. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract as EDA, or the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 20. CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND OTHER PROHIBITED INTERESTS (a) No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting, or i approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part hereof. (b) No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer, or inspector of or for the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, executive, supervisory or other similar functions in connection with the construction of the Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply contract, subcontract, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the Project. (c) The Contractor may not knowingly contract with a supplier or manufacturer if the individual or entity who prepared the Contract Documents has a corporate or financial affiliation with the supplier or manufacturer. `— (d) The Owner's officers, employees, or agents shall not engage in the award or administration of this Contract if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, may be involved. Such a conflict may arise when: (i)the employee, officer or agent; (ii) any member of their immediate family; (iii) their partner or(iv)an organization that employs, or is about to employ, any of the above, has a financial interest in the Contractor. The Owner's officers, employees, or agents shall neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors, or anything of monetary value from the Contractor or -- subcontractors. (e) If the Owner finds after a notice and hearing that the Contractor, or any of the Contractor's -s agents or representatives, offered or gave gratuities (in the form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise)to any official, employee, or agent of the Owner or EDA in an attempt to secure this Contract or favorable treatment in awarding, amending, or making any determinations related to -- the performance of this Contract,the Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor,terminate this Contract. The Owner may also pursue other rights and remedies that the law or this Contract Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects provides. However,the existence of the facts on which the Owner bases such findings shall be — an issue and may be reviewed in proceedings under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract. (f) In the event this Contract is terminated as provided in paragraph (e) of this section,the Owner may pursue the same remedies against the Contractor as it could pursue in the event of a breach of this Contract by the Contractor. As a penalty, in addition to any other damages to — which it may be entitled by law,the Owner may pursue exemplary damages in an amount(as determined by the Owner)which shall not be less than three nor more than ten times the costs the Contractor incurs in providing any such gratuities to any such officer or employee. 21. RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING (a) This Contract, or subcontract is subject to section 319 of Public Law 101-121,which added section 1352, regarding lobbying restrictions,to chapter 13 of title 31 of the United States Code. The new section is explained in the common rule, 15 C.F.R. part 28 (55 FR 6736-6748,February 26, 1990). Each bidder under this Contract or subcontract is generally prohibited from using federal funds for lobbying the Executive or Legislative Branches of the Federal Government in connection with this EDA Award. (b) Contract Clause Threshold: This Contract Clause regarding lobbying must be included in each bid for a contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 of federal funds at any tier under the — EDA Award. (c) Certification and Disclosure: Each bidder of a contract or subcontract exceeding$100,000 _ of federal funds at any tier under the federal Award must file Form CD-512,Certification Regarding Lobbying, and, if applicable, Standard Form-LLL,Disclosure of Lobbying Activities, regarding the use of any nonfederal funds for lobbying. Certifications shall be retained by the Contractor or subcontractor at the next higher tier. All disclosure forms, however, shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the EDA Award,who shall forward all disclosure forms to EDA. — (d) Continuing Disclosure Requirement: Each Contractor or subcontractor that is subject to the Certification and Disclosure provision of this Contract Clause is required to file a disclosure — form at the end of each calendar quarter in which there occurs any event that requires disclosure or that materially affects the accuracy of the information contained in any disclosure form previously filed by such person. Disclosure forms shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the EDA Award, who shall forward all disclosure forms to EDA. (e) Indian Tribes,Tribal Organizations,or Other Indian Organizations: Indian tribes, tribal organizations,or any other Indian organizations, including Alaskan Native organizations, are excluded from the above lobbying restrictions and reporting requirements, but only with respect to expenditures that are by such tribes or organizations for lobbying activities permitted _ by other federal law. An Indian tribe or organization that is seeking an exclusion from Certification and Disclosure requirements must provide EDA with the citation of the provision or provisions of federal law upon which it relies to conduct lobbying activities that would otherwise — Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects be subject to the prohibitions in and to the Certification and Disclosure requirements of section 319 of Public Law No. 101-121, preferably through an attorney's opinion. Note, also,that a non- Indian subrecipient, contractor,or subcontractor under an award to an Indian tribe, for example, is subject to the restrictions and reporting requirements. 22. HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL DATA PRESERVATION The Contractor agrees to facilitate the preservation and enhancement of structures and objects of historical, architectural or archaeological significance and when such items are found and/or unearthed during the course of project construction. Any excavation by the Contractor that uncovers an historical or archaeological artifact shall be immediately reported to the Owner and a representative of EDA. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions issued by EDA after consultation with the State Historic Preservation Officer(SHPO) for recovery of the items. See the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (80 Stat 915, 16 U.S.C. § 470)and Executive Order No. 11593 of May 31, 1971. 23. CLEAN AIR AND WATER Applicable to Contracts in Excess of$100,000 (a) Definition. "Facility"means any building,plant, installation, structure, mine,vessel, or other floating craft, location, or site of operations, owned, leased,or supervised by the Contractor or any subcontractor, used in the performance of the Contract or any subcontract. When a location or site of operations includes more than one building,plant, installation,or structure,the entire location or site shall be deemed a facility except when the Administrator, or a designee, of the United States Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)determines that independent facilities are collocated in one geographical area. (b) In compliance with regulations issued by the EPA, 2 C.F.R.part 1532,pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended(42 U.S.C. § 7401 et seq.);the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended(33 U.S.C. § 1251 et seq.); and Executive Order 11738,the Contractor agrees to: (1) Not utilize any facility in the performance of this contract or any subcontract which is listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities pursuant to 2 C.F.R.part 1532 for the duration of time that the facility remains on the list; (2)Promptly notify the Owner if a facility the Contractor intends to use in the performance of this contract is on the EPA List of Violating Facilities or the Contractor knows that it has been recommended to be placed on the List; (3)Comply with all requirements of the Clean Air Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, including the requirements of section 114 of the Clean Air Act and section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act,and all applicable clean air and clean water standards; and Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (4) Include or cause to be included the provisions of this clause in every subcontract and take such action as EDA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 24. USE OF LEAD-BASED PAINTS ON RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURES (a) If the work under this Contract involves construction or rehabilitation of residential — structures,the Contractor shall comply with the Lead-based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act(42 U.S.C. § 4831). The Contractor shall assure that paint used on the Project on applicable surfaces does not contain lead in excess of the percentages set forth in Paragraphs(a)and(b) of this section. In determining compliance with these standards, the lead content of the paint shall be — measured on the basis of the total nonvolatile content of the paint or on the basis of an equivalent measure of lead in the dried film of paint already applied. (1) For paint manufactured after June 22, 1977,paint may not contain lead in excess of 6 one-hundredths of 1 percent(.0006) lead by weight. (2) For paint manufactured on or before June 22, 1977,paint may not contain lead in excess of five-tenths of 1 percent lead by weight. (b) As a condition to receiving assistance under PWEDA, recipients shall assure that the restriction against the use of lead-based paint is included in all contracts and subcontracts involving the use of federal funds. (c) Definitions (1)"Applicable surfaces" are those exterior surfaces which are readily accessible to -- children under seven years of age. (2) "Residential structures" means houses, apartments, or other structures intended for — human habitation, including institutional structures where persons reside,which are accessible to children under seven years of age, such as day care centers, intermediate and extended care facilities, and certain community facilities. — 25. ENERGY EFFICIENCY The Contractor shall comply with all standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act(Public L.No. 94-163) for the State in which the Work under the Contract is _ performed. 26. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth excavations,the Contractor shall comply with the following environmental constraints: _ (1) Wetlands. When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials on public or private property, the Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert wetlands. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (2) Floodplains. When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials on public or private property, the Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert 100 year floodplain areas delineated on the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)Floodplain Maps, or other appropriate maps, i.e., alluvial soils on Natural Resource Conservation Service (MRCS) Soil Survey Maps. (4) Endangered Species. The Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species Act,which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of endangered and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to the attention of the Contractor,the Contractor will immediately report this evidence to the Owner and a representative of EDA. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions issued by EDA after consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 27. DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSIONS As required by Executive Order 12549,Debarment and Suspension, and implemented at 2 C.F.R. part 1326, for prospective participants in lower tier covered transactions (except subcontracts for goods or services under the $25,000 small purchase threshold unless the subrecipient will have a critical influence on or substantive control over the award), as defined at 2 C.F.R. part 1326. (1) By entering into this Contract, and by further executing Form CD-512, the Contractor and subcontractors certify,that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended,proposed for debarment, declared ineligible,or voluntarily excluded from participation in this Contract by any federal department or agency. (2) Where the Contractor or subcontractors are unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification,the Contractor or subcontractors shall attach an explanation to this bid. See also15 C.F.R. §§ 14.13 or 24.35, as applicable. 28. EDA PROJECT SIGN The Contractor shall supply, erect, and maintain in good condition a Project sign according to the specifications provided by EDA. To the extent practical, the sign should be a free standing sign. Project signs shall not be located on public highway rights-of-way. Location and height of signs �- will be coordinated with the local agency responsible for highway or street safety in the Project area, if any possibility exists for obstructing vehicular traffic line of sight. Whenever the EDA site sign specifications conflict with State law or local ordinances, the EDA Regional Director -- will permit such conflicting specifications to be modified so as to comply with State law or local ordinance. Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects Page 1 of 7 General Decision Number: IA130001 01/04/2013 IA1 Superseded General Decision Number: IA20120001 State: Iowa Construction Types: Heavy and Highway Counties: Adair, Adams, Allamakee, Appanoose, Audubon, Benton, Black Hawk, Boone, Bremer, Buchanan, Buena Vista, Butler, Calhoun, Carroll, Cass, Cedar, Cerro Gordo, Cherokee, -- Chickasaw, Clarke, Clay, Clayton, Clinton, Crawford, Dallas, Davis, Decatur, Delaware, Des Moines, Dickinson, Dubuque, Emmet, Fayette, Floyd, Franklin, Fremont, Greene, Grundy, Guthrie, Hamilton, Hancock, Hardin, Harrison, Henry, Howard, Humboldt, Ida, Iowa, Jackson, Jasper, Jefferson, Johnson, Jones, Keokuk, Kossuth, Lee, Linn, Louisa, Lucas, Lyon, Madison, Mahaska, Marion, Marshall, Mills, Mitchell, Monona, _ Monroe, Montgomery, Muscatine, O'Brien, Osceola, Page, Palo Alto, Plymouth, Pocahontas, Polk, Pottawattamie, Poweshiek, Ringgold, Sac, Shelby, Sioux, Story, Tama, Taylor, Union, Van Buren, Wapello, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Webster, Winnebago, Winneshiek, Woodbury, Worth and Wright Counties in Iowa. STATEWIDE EXCEPT SCOTT COUNTY HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Does not include work on or pertaining to the Mississippi or Missouri Rivers or on Water and Sewage Treatment Plants) , AND HIGHWAY PROJECTS (does not include building structures in rest areas) Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2013 * SUTA2002-003 02/28/2012 Rates Fringes Carpenter & Piledrivermen ZONE 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23.92 9.28 ZONE 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.83 9.28 ZONE 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.83 9.28 ZONE 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.80 7.50 ZONE 5 **. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.25 6.10 Concrete Finisher ZONE 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.77 6.50 ZONE 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.77 6.50 ZONE 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.77 6.50 ZONE 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.55 4.95 ZONE 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.95 5.50 Electricians: (STREET AND HIGHWAY LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS) ZONE 1, ZONE 2 AND ZONE 3. . .$ 20.55 5.20 ZONE 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.25 5.20 ZONE 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.00 5.20 http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=0 1/23/2013 Page 2 of 7 Ironworkers: (SETTING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL) ZONE 1 AND 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.05 7.45 - ZONE 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 24.75 7.75 ZONE 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.65 6.60 ZONE 5 **. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.25 6.10 Laborers: ZONE 1 AND ZONE 2 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.76 7.60 _ GROUP AA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.56 7.60 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.88 7.60 GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 14.65 7.60 ZONE 3 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.76 7.60 GROUP AA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.56 7.60 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.88 7.60 GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 14.65 7.60 ZONE 4 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 16.90 7.60 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 15.58 7.60 _ GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 12.70 7.60 ZONE 5 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.55 5.90 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 14.80 5.90 -- GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 14.20 5.90 Power equipment operators: ZONE 1 .� GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.30 12.90 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 24.70 12.90 GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.20 12.90 _ GROUP D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.20 12.90 ZONE 2 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.55 12.90 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23.95 12.90 _ GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.40 12.90 GROUP D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.40 12.90 ZONE 3 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.70 14.20 -- GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 24.90 14.20 GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23.90 14.20 GROUP D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23.90 14.20 ZONE 4 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.5o 7.85 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 24.36 7.85 GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.28 7.85 GROUP D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.28 7.85 ZONE 5 GROUP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.07 6.20 GROUP B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.03 6.20 -- GROUP C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.70 6.20 GROUP D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 18.70 6.20 TRUCK DRIVER (AND PAVEMENT - MARKING DRIVER/SWITCHPERSON) ZONE 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.25 9.50 ZONE 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.25 9.50 _ ZONE 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.25 9.50 ZONE 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.30 5.20 http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=0 1/23/2013 Page 3 of 7 ZONE 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.35 5.20 ZONE DEFINITIONS ZONE 1 - The Counties of Polk, Warren and Dallas for all Crafts, and Linn County Carpenters Only. ZONE 2 - The Counties of Dubuque for all crafts and Linn County for all Crafts except Carpenters. ZONE 3 - The Cities of Burlington, Clinton, Fort Madison Keokuk, and Muscatine (and abutting municipalities of any such cities) . ZONE 4 - Story, Black Hawk, Cedar, Jasper, Jones, Jackson, Louisa, Madison and Marion Counties; Clinton County (except the City of Clinton) , Johnson County, Muscatine County (except the City of Muscatine) , the City of Council Bluffs, Lee County and Des Moines County. ZONE 5 - All areas of the state not listed above. LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS - ALL ZONES GROUP AA: Skilled pipelayer (sewer, water and conduits) and tunnel laborers (zones 1, 2 and 3) GROUP A - Carpenter tender on bridges and box culverts; curb machine (without a seat) ; deck hand; diamond and core drills; drill operator on air tracs, wagon drills and similar drills; form setter/stringman on paving work; gunnite nozzleman; joint sealer kettleman; laser operator; pipelayer (sewer water and conduits) Zone 4 & 5; powderman tender; powerman/blaster; saw operator; tunnel laborer (zones 4 and 5) . GROUP B - Air, gas, electric tool operator; barco hammer; �-► carpenter tender; caulker; chain sawman; compressor (under 400cfm) ; concrete finisher tender; concrete processing materials and monitors; cutting torch on demolition; drill tender; dumpmen; electric drills; fence erectors; form line expansion joint assembler; form tamper; general laborer; grade checker; handling and placing metal mesh, dowel bars, reforcing bars and chains; hot asphalt laborer; installing temporary traffic control devices; jackhammerman; mechanical grouter; painter (all except stripers) ; paving breaker; planting trees, shrubs and flowers; power broom (not self/propelled) ; power buggyman; rakers; rodman (tying reinforcing steel) ; sandblaster; seeding and mulching; sewer utility topman/bottom man; spaders; stressor or stretcherman on pre or post tensioned concrete; stringman on re/surfacing/no grade control; swinging stage, tagline —' or block and tackle; tampers; timberman; tool room men and checkers; tree climber; tree groundman; underpinning and shoring caissons over twelve feet deep; vibrators; walk behind trencher; walk behind paint stripers; walk behind vibrating compactor; water pumps (under three inch) ; work from bosun chair. y GROUP C - Scale weigh person; traffic control/flagger, http://www.wdol.gov/wdoUscafiles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=O 1/23/2013 Page 4 of 7 surveillance or monitor, water carrier. POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS - ALL ZONES GROUP A - All terrain (off road) forklift; Asphalt Breakdown Roller (vibratory) , Asphalt laydown machine; asphalt plant; Asphalt Screed, bulldozer finish) ; central mix plant; concrete pump; crane; crawler tractor pulling scraper; directional drill (60,000(lbs) pullback and above) ; dragline and power shovel; dredge engineer; _ excavator (over 1/2 cu. yd.) front end loader (4 cy and over) ; horizontal boring machine; master mechanic; milling machine (over 350 hp) ; motor grader (finish) ; push cat; rubber tired backhoe (over 1/2 cu. yd. ) scraper (12 cu. yd. �- and over or finish) ; Self-propelled rotary mixer/road reclaimer; sidebroom tractor; slipform portland concrete paver; tow or push boat; trenching machine (Cleveland 80 or similar) . — GROUP B - Articulated off road hauler, asphalt heater/planer; asphalt material transfer vehicle; Asphalt Roller; belt loader or similar loader; bulldozer (rough) ; churn or rotarydrill; concrete curb machine, crawler tractor pulling ripper, disk or roller; deck hand/oiler directional drill (less than 60,000 (lbs) pullback) ; distributor; excavator 1/2 cu. yd. and under) ; form riding concrete paver; front end loader (2 to less than 4 cu. yd.) ; group equipment greaser; mechanic; milling machine (350hp. and less) ; paving breaker; portland concrete dry batch plant; rubber tired backhoe 1/2 cu. yd. and under) ; scraper (under 12 cy) , screening, washing and crushing plant (mobile, portable or stationary) ; shoulder machine; skid loader (1 cu. yd and over) ; subgrader or trimmer; trenching machine; _ water wagon on compaction. GROUP C - Boom & winch truck, concrete spreader/belt placer, deep wells for dewatering; farm type tractor (over 75 hp.) pulling disc or roller; forklift; front end loader (under 2 cu. yd.) ; motor grader (rough) ; pile hammer power unit; pump (greater than three inch diameter) ; pumps on well points; safty boat; self-propelled roller (other than asphalt) ; self-propelled sand blaster or shot blaster, water blaster or striping grinder/remover; skid loader (under 1 cu. yd. ) ; truck mounted post driver. GROUP D - Boiler, compressor, cure and texture machine; dow box; farm type or utility tractor (under 75 hp.) pulling disk, roller or other attachments; group greaser tender; ^ light plants; mechanic tender; mechanical broom; mechanical heaters; oiler; pumps (under three inch diameter) ; tree chipping machine; truck cranedriver/oiler. ., CARPENTERS AND PILEDRIVERMEN, OR IRONWORKERS (ZONE 5) Setting of structural steel; any welding incidental to bridge or culvert construction; setting concrete beams. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scaftles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=O 1/23/2013 Page 5 of 7 operation to which welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) ) . ---------- ----------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical _ order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non-union. -- Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable , i.e. , Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rates. 0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually each January. Non-Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=O 1/23/2013 Page 6 of 7 Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the _ Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3. ) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an •— interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7) . Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. _ Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an -- interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board) . Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=O 1/23/2013 Page 7 of 7 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION http://www.wdol.gov/wdoUscafiles/davisbacon/IAI.dvb?v=O 1/23/2013 CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING (This Certification is required pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1352) — Certification for Contracts Grants Loans and Cooperative Agreements The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belied that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid,by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract; grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this _ Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form LLL,"Disclosure of Lobbying Activities,"in accordance with its instructions. (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants,and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by Section 1352,Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than$11,000 and not more than$110,000 for each such failure. Please check appropriate box: ❑ No nonfederal funds have been used or are planned to be used for lobbying in connection with this application/award/contract. _ or ❑ Attached is Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," which describes the use (past or planned)of nonfederal funds for lobbying in connection with this application/award/ contract. Executed this day of 20 by (Type or Print Name) (Title of Executing Official) (Signature of Executing Official) (Name of orgaruization/applicant) CONTRACT CLAUSE -- NEW RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING This contract, subcontract, or subgrant is subject to Section 319 of Public Law 101-121,which added section 1352,regarding lobbying restrictions, to Chapter 13 of Title 31 of the United States Code. The new section is explained in the common rule, 15 CFR Part 28 (55 FR 6736-6748,2/26/90). Each bidder/applicant/recipient of this contract subcontract, or subgrant and subrecipients are generally prohibited from using Federal funds for lobbying the Executive or Legislative Branches of the Federal Government in connection with this Award. Contract Clause Threshold This Contract Clause regarding lobbying must be included in each application for a subgrant and in each bid for a contract or subcontract exceeding$100,000 of Federal funds at any tier under the Federal Award. Certification and Disclosure Each applicant/recipient of a subgrant and each bidder/applicant/recipient of a contract or subcontract exceeding$100,000 of Federal funds at any tier under the Federal Award must file a "Certification _ Regarding Lobbying" and, if applicable, Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," regarding the use of any nonfederal funds for lobbying. Certifications shall be retained by the next higher tier. All disclosure forms,however, shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the Federal Award(grant), who shall forward all disclosure forms to the Federal agency. Continuing Disclosure Requirement Each subgrantee, contractor, or subcontractor that is subject to the Certification and Disclosure provision of this Contract Clause is required to file a disclosure form at the end of each calendar quarter in which there occurs any event that requires disclosure or that materially affects the accuracy of the information contained in any disclosure form previously filed by such person. Disclosure forms shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the Federal Award(grant)who shall forward all disclosure forms to the Federal agency. Indian Tribes, Tribal Organizations, or Other Indian Organizations Indian tribes, tribal organizations,or any other Indian organizations, including the Alaskan Native organizations, are excluded from the above lobbying restrictions and reporting requirements, but only with respect to expenditures that are by such tribes or organizations for lobbying activities permitted by other Federal law. An Indian tribe or organization that is seeking an exclusion from Certification and Disclosure requirements must provide (preferably in an attorney's opinion)EDA with the citation of the provision or provisions of Federal law upon which it relies to conduct lobbying activities that would otherwise be subject to the prohibitions in and to the Certification and Disclosure requirements of Section 319 of Public Law No. 101-121. Note, also, that a non-Indian subgrantee,contractor, or subcontractor under an award(grant)to an Indian tribe, for example, is subject to the restrictions and reporting requirements. NOTICE OF REQUIREMENTS FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246 AND 41 CFR PART 60-4) The following Notice shall be included in, and shall be a part of all solicitations for offers and bids on all Federal and federally assisted construction contracts or subcontracts in excess of $10,000. The Offeror's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications" set forth herein. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: Timetables Goals for minority Goals for female participation for each trade participation for each trade 4.7 % 6.9% These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work(whether or not it is Federal or federally assisted)performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and non federally involved construction. The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60- 4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order, and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of$10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation,the "covered area" is: State of Iowa Iowa County of Black Hawk Black Hawk City of Waterloo Waterloo EXHIBIT 6 Buy America Equipment or products to be purchased by the EDA award funds must be American _ made,to the maximum extent possible, in accordance with Public Law 103-121, Sections 606(a) and(b). i i j� �I FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE OF FEDERAL PARTICIPATION SPECIAL AWARD CONDITION In accordance with Section 623 of Public Law 101-136, no amount of this award shall be - used to finance the acquisition of goods or services(including construction services) for the project unless the Recipient agrees to: a. specify in any announcement of the awarding of the contract for the procurement of the goods or services involved(including construction services)the amount of Federal funds that will be used to finance the acquisition; and b. express the amount announced pursuant to paragraph(a) as a percentage of the total cost of the planned acquisition. The foregoing requirements shall not apply to a procurement for goods or services (including construction services)that has an aggregate value of less than$500,000. In order to comply with this requirement, a statement should be included in your bidding documents,preferably in the Advertisement for Bids or the Information for Bidders,and in the Publication of Advertisement for Bids indicating that the project will be partially funded with Federal funds from the Economic Development Administration. When the contract award is announced,the amount of the EDA Grant and the percentage of the EDA Grant to the total project cost must be provided. EXAMPLE OF THE BID DOCUMENT ANNOUNCEMENT: This project will be partially funded with Federal funds from the U.S. Department of Commerce,Economic Development Administration and therefore is subject to the Federal laws and regulations associated with that program. Required Federal Contract Language For _ Community Development Block Grant (CDBG) Funded Contracts U.S.Department of Housing Federal Labor Standards Provisions and Urban Development Office of ..abor Relations Applicability benefits,bears a reasonable relationship I)the wage rates The Project or Program to which the construction work contained in the wage determination. covered by this contract pertains is being assisted by the (b)If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be United States of America and the following Federal Labor employed in the classification (if known),or their Standards Provisions are included in this Contract pursuant representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the to the provisions applicable to such Federal assistance. classification and wage rate(including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of A. 1.(i)Minimum Wages.All laborers and mechanics the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account Washington, D.C.20210.The Administrator,or an authorized (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by representative, will approve, modify,or disapprove every regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and Copeland Act(29 CFR Part 3),the full amount of wages so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its and bona fide fringe benefits(or cash equivalents thereof) designee within the 30-day period that additional time is due at time of payment computed at rates not less than necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.) of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, (c)In the event the contractor,the laborers or mechanics to regardless of any contractual relationship which may be be employed in the classification or their representatives, and alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably classification and wage rate(including the amount anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section designated for fringe benefits,where appropriate), HUD or its I(b)(2)of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or interested parties and the recommendation of HUD or its mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR designee, to the Administrator for determination.The 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a incurred for more than a weekly period(but not less often determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs,which its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30- cover the particular weekly period,are deemed to be day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate Number 1215-0140.) wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for (d)The wage rate(including fringe benefits where the classification of work actually performed,without regard appropriate)determined pursuant to subparagraphs(1)(ii)(b) to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or or(c)of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers mechanics performing work in more than one classification performing work in the classification under this contract from may be compensated at the rate specified for each the first day on which work is performed in the classification. classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, (iii)Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe time spent in each classification in which work is performed. benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate,the The wage determination(including any additional contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or 5.5(a)(1)(ii)and the Davis-Bacon poster(WH-1321)shall be an hourly cash equivalent thereof. posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors (iv)If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible, place other third person,the contractor may consider as part of the where it can be easily seen by the workers. wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs (ii)(a)Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits listed in the wage determination and which is to be under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of employed under the contract shall be classified in Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, conformance with the wage determination. HUD shall that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have approve an additional classification and wage rate and been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor fringe benefits therefor only when the following criteria have to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of been met: obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the (1)The work to be performed by the classification Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control requested is not performed by a classification in the wage Number 1215-0140.) determination;and 2.Withholding.HUD or its designee shall upon its own (2)The classification is utilized in the area by the action or upon written request of an authorized construction industry; and representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause (3)The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-4010(07/2003) ref.Handbook 1344.1 other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon Superintendent of Documents(Federal Stock Number 029- prevailing wage requirements,which is held by the same 005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under helpers,employed by the contractor or any subcontractor OMB Control Number 1215-0149.) the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the (b)Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including "Statement of Compliance,"signed by the contractor or any apprentice,trainee or helper,employed or working on subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the payment of the persons employed under the contract and contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to shall certify the following: the contractor,sponsor, applicant, or owner,take such (1)That the payroll for the payroll period contains the action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5 further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such (a)(3)(i)and that such information is correct and complete; violations have ceased. HUD or its designee may, after (2)That each laborer or mechanic(including each helper, written notice to the contractor, disburse such amounts apprentice, and trainee)employed on the contract during the withheld for and on account of the contractor or payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no are due. The Comptroller General shall make such deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from disbursements in the case of direct Davis-Bacon Act the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as contracts. set forth in 29 CFR Part 3; 3.(i)Payrolls and basic records. Payrolls and basic (3)That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less records relating thereto shall be maintained by the than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash contractor during the course of the work preserved for a equivalents for the classification of work performed, as period of three years thereafter for all laborers and specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records into the contract. shall contain the name, address, and social security (c)The weekly submission of a properly executed number of each such worker, his or her correct certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form classification, hourly rates of wages paid(including rates of WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe "Statement of Compliance" required by subparagraph benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described A.3.(ii)(b). in Section I(b)(2)(B)of the Davis-bacon Act),daily and (d)The falsification of any of the above certifications may weekly number of hours worked,deductions made and subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal actual wages paid.Whenever the Secretary of Labor has prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv)that the wages of any of Title 31 of the United States Code. laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs (iii)The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or required under subparagraph A.3.(i)available for inspection, program described in Section I(b)(2)(B)of the Davis-Bacon copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of Act,the contractor shall maintain records which show that HUD or its designee or the Department of Labor,and shall the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, permit such representatives to interview employees during that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor the plan or program has been communicated in writing to fails to submit the required records or to make them the laborers or mechanics affected,and records which available, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in contractor, sponsor, applicant or owner,take such action as providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and failure to submit the required records upon request or to certification of trainee programs,the registration of the make such records available may be grounds for debarment apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. prescribed in the applicable programs. (Approved by the 4.Apprentices and Trainees. Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control (i)Apprentices.Apprentices will be permitted to work at less Numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.) than the predetermined rate for the work they performed (ii)(a)The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in when they are employed pursuant to and individually which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered to HUD or its designee if the agency is a party to the with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training contract, but if the agency is not such a party,the Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant sponsor, and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to HUD or recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately her first 90 days of probationary employment as an and completely all of the information required to be apprentice in such an apprenticeship program,who is not maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may individually registered in the program, but who has been be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer available for this purpose and may be purchased from the and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency(where Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-4010(07/2003) ref.Handbook 1344.1 appropriate)to be eligible for probationary employment as determination for the work actually performed. In addition, an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination to the entire work force under the registered program.Any for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate,who and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for wage determination for the classification of work actually the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on (iii) Equal employment opportunity.The utilization of the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the apprentices,trainees and journeymen under 29 CFR Part 5 registered program shall be paid not less than the shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 work actually performed.Where a contractor is performing CFR Part 30. construction on a project in a locality other than that in 5.Compliance with Copeland Act requirements.The which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) 3 which are incorporated by reference in this contract specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered 6.Subcontracts.The contractor or subcontractor will insert program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid in any subcontracts the clauses contained in subparagraphs at not less than the rate specified in the registered program 1 through 11 of this paragraph A and such other clauses as - for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a HUD or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the and a copy of the applicable prevailing wage decision, and applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the clauses in any lower tier subcontracts.The prime contractor apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in this the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage paragraph. determination for the applicable classification. If the 7.Contract termination;debarment.A breach of the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be termination of the contract and for debarment as a contractor paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor 8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by Requirements.All rulings and interpretations of the Davis- the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3,and program,the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate 9.Disputes concerning labor standards.Disputes arising _ for the work performed until an acceptable program is out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not approved. be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. (ii)Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16,trainees Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR rate for the work performed unless they are employed Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause pursuant to and individually registered in a program which include disputes between the contractor or any of its has received prior approval, evidenced by formal subcontractors)and HUD or its designee, the U.S. certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment Department of Labor, or the employees or their and Training Administration.The ratio of trainees to representatives. journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than 10. (i)Certification of Eligibility.By entering into this permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and contract the contractor certifies that neither it(nor he or she) Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's less than the rate specified in the approved program for the firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government trainee's level of progress,expressed as a percentage of contracts by virtue of Section 3(a)of the Davis-Bacon Act or the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1)or to be awarded HUD contracts or determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If (ii)No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits by virtue of Section 3(a)of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator 5.12(a)(1)or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding (iii)The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.Additionally, U.S. provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Criminal Code, Section 1 01 0, Title 18, U.S.C., "Federal Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is Housing Administration transactions", provides in part: not registered and participating in a training plan approved "Whoever, for the purpose of... influencing in any way the by the Employment and Training Administration shall be action of such Administration ... makes, utters or publishes paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage any statement knowing the same to be false...shall be fined Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-4010(07/2003) ref.Handbook 1344.1 not more than$5,000 or imprisoned not more than two (4)Subcontracts.The contractor or subcontractor shall years, or both." insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in 11.Complaints,Proceedings,or Testimony by subpaagraph (1)through(4)of this paragraph and also a Employees. No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses salary, or other labor standards provisions of this Contract in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier discriminated against by the Contractor or any subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs(1) subcontractor because such employee has filed any through(4)of this paragraph. complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any C.Health and Safety.The provisions of this paragraph C proceeding or has testified or is about to testify in any are applicable only where the amount of the prime contract proceeding under or relating to the labor standards exceeds$100,000. applicable under this Contract to his employer. (1)No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in B.Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act.The surroundings or under working conditions which are provisions of this paragraph B are applicable only where unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety the amount of the prime contract exceeds$100,000.As as determined under construction safety and health used in this paragraph,the terms"laborers"and standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by "mechanics"include watchmen and guards. regulation. (1)Overtime requirements.No contractor or (2)The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work the secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 and which may require or involve the employment of laborers or failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or pursuant to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed Act,40 USC 3701 et seq. on such work to work in excess of 40 hours in such (3)The Contractor shall include the provisions of this workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives paragraph in every subcontract so that such provisions will compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half be binding on each subcontractor.The Contractor shall take times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of such action with respect to any subcontract as the Secretary 40 hours in such workweek. of Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of (2)Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. damages.In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph(1)of this paragraph,the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States(in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory,to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards,employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph(1)of this paragraph, in the sum of$10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in sub paragraph(1)of this paragraph. (3)Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contract, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act which is held by the same prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph(2)of this paragraph. Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-4010(07/2003) ref.Handbook 1344.1 REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS All project contracts shall contain at a minimum the following provisions, as appropriate. ALL CONTRACTS 1. Access and Maintenance of Records The contractor must maintain all required records for five years after final payments are made and all other pending matters are closed. At any time during normal business hours and as frequently as is deemed necessary,the contractor shall make available to the Iowa Department of Economic Development,the State Auditor,the General Accounting Office,and the Department of Housing and Urban Development, for their examination,all of its records pertaining to all matters covered by this contract and permit these agencies to audit,examine,make excerpts or transcripts from such records,contract, invoices,payrolls,personnel records,conditions of employment, and all other matters covered by this contract. 2. Civil Rights The Contractor must comply with the following laws and regulations: •Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964(P.L. 88-352). States that no person may be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, or subjected to discrimination under any program or activity receiving Federal financial assistance on the basis of race, color, or national origin. •Iowa Civil Rights Act of 1965 This Act mirrors the Federal Civil Rights Act. •Section 109 of Title I of the Housing and Community Development Act of 1974,as amended(42 U.S.C. 5309). Provides that no person shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, or subjected to discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or handicap under any program or activity funded in part or in whole under Title I of the Act. •The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended(42 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.) ` Provides that no person on the basis of age, be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity receiving Federal financial assistance. •Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973,as amended(P.L.93-112, 29 U.S.C. 794). Provides that no otherwise qualified individual shall solely by reason of his/her handicap be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be discriminated against under any program or activity receiving Federal financial assistance. •Americans with Disabilities Act(P.L. 101-336,42 U.S.C. 12101-12213) Provides comprehensive civil rights to individuals with disabilities in the areas of employment,public accommodations, state and local government services, and telecommunications. •Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968,as amended(12 U.S.C. 1701 u). Provides to the greatest extent feasible, that training and employment opportunities be made available to lower-income residents of project areas and that contracts be awarded to small businesses located within the project area or owned in substantial part by project area residents. •Federal Executive Order 11246,as amended by Executive Order 11357 Provides that no one be discriminated in employment — • Iowa Code Chapter 216(Effective July 1,2007) The Iowa Civil Rights Act was expanded to add sexual orientation and gender identity to the list of _ protected classes. 3. Termination Clause All contracts utilizing CDBG funds must contain a termination clause that specifies the following: •Under what conditions the clause may be imposed. — •The form the termination notice must take(e.g.,certified letter). •The time frame required between the notice of termination and its effective date. — •The method used to compute the final payment(s)to the contractor. _ 4. Certification regarding government-wide restriction on lobbying. All contracts utilizing CDBG funds must contain the following certification concerning restriction of lobbying: "The Recipient certifies,to the best of his or her knowledge and belief,that: _ i. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid,by or on behalf of the Recipient,to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency,a Member of Congress,an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract,the making of any Federal grant,the making of any Federal loan,the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension,continuation, renewal,amendment,or modification of any Federal contract,grant,loan,or cooperative agreement. ii. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency,a Member of Congress, — an officer or employee,or an employee of a Member of congress in connection with this Federal contract,grant, loan,or cooperative agreement,the Recipient shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Federal Lobbying" in accordance with its instruction. iii. The Recipient shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers(including subcontracts,subgrants,and contracts under grants,loans,and cooperative agreements)and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this _ transaction imposed by section 1352,title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than$10,000 and not more than$100,000 for each such failure." _ ALL CONTRACTS IN EXCESS OF$10,000 In addition to the preceding provisions,all contracts in excess of$10,000 must include the following language,pursuant to Federal Executive Orders 11246 and 11375: "During the performance of this contract,the contractor agrees as follows: _ (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion,sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed,and that employees are treated during employment,without regard to their race,color, religion,sex, or national origin. Such action shall include,but not be limited to the following: employment,upgrading,demotion,or transfer;recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places,available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race,color,religion,sex,or national origin. (3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice,to be provided by the agency contracting officer,advising the labor union or workers'representative of the contractor's commitments under Section 202 of the Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations,and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965,and by the rules,regulations,and orders of the Secretary of Labor,or pursuant thereto,and will permit access to his books,records,and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules,regulations, and orders. (6) In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the nondiscrimination clause of this contract or with any of such rules,regulations,or orders,this contract may be canceled,terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965,or by rule,regulation,or order of the Secretary of Labor,or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The contractor will include the provisions of Paragraphs(1)through(7)in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules,regulations,or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965,so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however,that in the event the contractor becomes involved in,or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency,the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States." ALL CONTRACTS IN EXCESS OF$100,000 In addition to the preceding provisions, contracts in excess of$100,000 shall require compliance with the following laws and regulations: Section 306 of the Clean Air Acts(42 U.S.C. 1857(h)). Section 508 of the Clean Water Act(33 U.S.C. 1368). Executive Order 11738. EPA Regulations-40 CFR,Part 32. — Clean Air and Water Acts-required clauses: This clause is required in all third party contracts involving projects subject to the Clean Air Act(42 U.S.C. 1857 et seq.),the Federal Water Pollution Control Act(33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq.),and the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency with respect to 40 CFR Part 32,as amended. It should also be mentioned in the bid document. — During the performance of this contract,the CONTRACTOR agrees as follows: (1) The CONTRACTOR will certify that any facility to be utilized in the performance of any nonexempt contract or subcontract is not listed on the Excluded Party Listing System pursuant to 40 CFR 32. (2) The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with all the requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act, as amended,(42 U.S.C. 1857c-8)and Section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act,as amended(33 U.S.C. 1318)relating to inspection,monitoring,entry,reports, and information,as well i as all other requirements specified in said Section 114 and Section 308,and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder. (3) The CONTRACTOR agrees that as a condition for the award of the contract,prompt notice will be — given of any notification received from the Director, Office of Federal Activities,Environmental Protection Agency,indicating that a facility utilized or to be utilized for the contract is under consideration to be listed on the Excluded Party Listing System. — (4) The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will include or cause to be included the criteria and requirements in Paragraph(1)through(4)of this section in every nonexempt subcontract and require every subcontractor to take such action as the Government may direct as a means of enforcing such — provisions. ALL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS IN EXCESS OF$2,000 — In addition to the preceding provisions,all construction contracts in excess of$2,000 must include the Federal Labor Standards Provisions(verbatim)found in Appendix Two under Required Contract Provisions. (Housing rehabilitation contracts of less than 8 units are excluded from this requirement.) HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT ACT OF 1968 SECTION 3 CLAUSE _ A. The work to be performed under this contract is on a project assisted under a program providing direct Federal financial assistance from the Department of Housing and Urban Development and is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701 u. Section 3 requires that to the greatest extent feasible opportunities for training and employment be given lower income residents of the project area and contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in the area of the project. B. The parties to this contract will comply with the provisions of said Section 3 and the regulations issued pursuant thereto by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development set forth in — 24 CFR Section 3, and all applicable rules and orders of the Department issued thereunder prior to the execution of this contract. The parties to this contract certify and agree that they are under no contractual or other disability that would prevent them from complying with these requirements. C. The contractor will send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding if any, a notice advising — said labor organization or workers' representative of his commitments under this Section 3 clause and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment or training. D. The contractor will include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract; for work in connection with the project and will, at the direction of the applicant for or recipient of Federal financial assistance, take appropriate action pursuant to the Subcontract upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of regulations issued by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, 24 CFR Section 3. The contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where it has notice or — knowledge that the latter has been found in violation of regulations under 24 CFR Section 3 and will not let any subcontract unless the subcontractor has first provided it with a preliminary statement of ability to comply with the requirements of these regulations. E. Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CFR Section 3, and all applicable rules and orders of the Department issued thereunder prior to the execution of the contract, shall be a condition of the Federal financial assistance provided to the project, binding upon the applicant or recipient for such assistance, its successors, and assigns. Failure to fulfill these requirements shall subject the applicant or recipient, its contractors and subcontractors, its successors, and assigns to those sanctions specified by the grant or loan agreement or contract through Federal assistance is provided, and to such sanctions as are specified by 24 CFR Section 135.135. 23209.03.00 SUMMARY OF WORK ms1222 SECTION '')1 11 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Agreement comprises general construction of 3 stormwater lift stations located in City of Waterloo, Iowa, for City of Waterloo, Iowa. 1. Westfield Lift Station: General construction of new stormwater lift station including 3 submersible pump and motor units and associated discharge piping and connection of piping to existing levee gate well structure; new electrical building; related site, building, mechanical and electrical work. Project also includes construction of 84" storm sewer section and construction of box structure to connect new lift station to existing sewer line. 2. Vinton Lift Station: General construction of stormwater lift station including 3 submersible pumps located below grade in new wet well structure, and associated discharge piping and connection of piping to existing floodwall gate well structure; new electrical building; related site, mechanical and electrical work. 3. Virden Creek Lift Station: General construction of renovation of existing stormwater lift station including 3 new submersible pump and motor units and related site, building, mechanical, and electrical work. Building work includes construction of new building roof with 3 individual access hatches for pump servicing and removal. Work also includes replacement of 6 gate actuators on existing sluice gates. 1.02 AGREEMENT A. Construct Work under single lump sum Agreement. 1.03 WORK SEQUENCE A. Westfield Pump Station, sequence work to: 1. Minimize duration of open excavation. 2. Maintain operational 84" storm sewer at all times. - 3. Coordinate disruptions to existing sluice gate with Engineer. Existing sluice gate: is part of flood protection system for City of Waterloo. 4. Verify existing gate and stem dimensions for gate manufacturer. B. Vinton Lift Station, sequence work to: 1. Minimize duration of open excavation. 2. Maintain operational 48" storm sewer at all times. 3. Coordinate disruptions to existing sluice gate with Engineer. Existing sluice gate- is part of flood protection system for City of Waterloo. C. Virden Creek Pump Station, sequence work to.- 1. Replace gate operators one at a time. Close gate prior to actuator work. Provide temporary power so that gate is operational before another gate is removed from service. 2. Isolate and dewater one pump bay. Verify existing sump dimensions and elevations for pump manufacturer. 3. Replace pumps one at a time: a. Remove portion of existing roof as required. Provide temporary weather proofing to protect equipment inside lift station. b. Remove existing pump, motor, and lubrication equipment. c. Install formed suction intake, pump column and pump. d. Provide temporary power connection and demonstrate pump is operational before another pump is removed from service. 4. Install walls and roof. Pump columns and sill plates shall be installed prior to roof installation. Pump columns with sill plates will not fit through openings in new roof. 5. Complete electrical and controls work. 6. Complete architectural and HVAC work. 7. Complete site work. SUMMARY OF WORK 23209 03 00 Page 2-SECTION 01 11 00 ms1222 1.04 OPERATIONS DURING FLOOD CONDITIONS A. Submit a Flood Contingency Plan at Preconstruction Meeting demonstrating ability and equipment to meet requirements of Attachment A, Flood Contingency Plan, approved by US Army Corps of Engineers. Contractor shall add names, contact numbers, equipment, materials, and planned staging of construction affecting existing flood control system and submit to Engineer for approval. Identify dates Westfield levee will be degraded and restored and risk factors that would result in opening being in place longer than anticipated. B. Contractor shall have personnel on-site during flood conditions to coordinate with Engineer and Owner personnel. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limit Contractor's use of premises for Work and for storage,to allow for: 1. MidAmerican Energy to access substation adjacent to Virden Creek Lift Station at all times. 2. Owner will operate existing gate wells at all 3 lift station locations throughout Project. 3. Owner will operate existing pumps at Virden Creek lift station in event of a flood. B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Engineer. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, storage of materials and equipment and operations of workers to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, or requirements of Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber premises with construction equipment or other material or equipment. C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of items under this Agreement, stored on Site. D. Move any stored items, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of Owner or MidAmerican Energy. E. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or Work areas needed for operations. 1.06 PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Contractor shall schedule its operations for completion of portions of Work, as designated, for Owner's occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of entire Work. B. Owner will occupy premises for purpose of: flood protection operations and normal operation and maintenance of existing sluice gates. C. Execute certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of Work prior to Owner occupancy. 1. After Owner occupancy, Contractor shall allow access for Owner's personnel. 2. Upon occupancy, Owner will provide: a. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems. b. Operation of pumps and gates. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION Attachment A Flood Contingency Plan FY 2013 Storm Water Lift Stations Westfield Avenue, Vinton Street, Virden Creek City of Waterloo Waterloo, Iowa The City of Waterloo has developed the plan to mitigate risk of flooding during construction of storm water lift stations adjacent to the existing levee(Westfield) and floodwall (Vinton and Virden Creek). Complete to date: • Engineering and design • Permit Applications Schedule Summary • Bidding,Nov-Dec 2012 • Lift Station Construction Duration,Jan-Dec 2013 General: The Contractor is responsible for monitoring river stages and forecasts. Contractor contact is to be determined when the contract has been awarded. City contact is Jamie Knutson,Associate City Engineer, 319-291-4312. Contractor shall update and resubmit this Flood Contingency Plan for approval prior to beginning work on the project. At a minimum,the Contractor shall update this plan with: �` • Contact names and 24-hour phone numbers • Anticipated dates for work items that are covered under this plan • Equipment make and model that will be kept on site for emergency backfill of excavations • Number, size, and capacity of temporary pumps that will be provided at the Vinton site Official river stages and forecasts for the contractor is the Cedar River gage at Waterloo (National Weather Service number aloi4). Seven day forecasts for this gage are available at the website water.weather.gov. The Black Hawk Creek at Hudson gage(National Weather Service number hudi4) is also relevant to the work at Westfield Avenue, however no forecasts are available for this gage. Westfield Avenue Site: The proposed lift station is located on the north bank of Black Hawk Creek adjacent to -` Westfield Ave and on the protected side of the existing flood protection earthen levee. The stormwater lift station takes water from an existing 84" storm sewer and discharges over the levee(through the freeboard) into an existing gatewell (Gatewell R). The — contractor will be required to excavate through the freeboard of the levee to install the �- 1 Attachment A discharge pipes and replace the existing manual gate actuator with an electric gate actuator. The City will be responsible for closing Gatewell R according to the established operations manual. The gatewell is closed when the Waterloo gage reaches 12.0 to 14.0 feet. Contractor requirements for excavation in or within 25 feet of earthen levee: • Notify US Army Corps of Engineers, Rock Island District 1 week in advance of any excavation that compromises the full height of the earthen levee. Contact is — Kirk Sunderman, 309.794.5140. • Excavations that compromise the full height of the earthen levee shall be completed and restored to full height within 3 weeks. — • Cedar River gage is below 12 feet and is forecasted to remain below 12 feet for the next 7 days. • Black Hawk Creek gage is not rising. — • The contractor shall maintain stockpiles of soil on site for backfilling open trenches. • Maintain presence of equipment on site for emergency backfilling throughout the duration of open excavation. Contractor requirements for replacing the Gatewell R gate actuator: .. • Cedar River gage is below 12 feet and is forecasted to remain below 12 feet for the next 7 days. • Black Hawk Creek gage is not rising. — • At any time, contractor shall be able to close gate within 24 hrs of notice from City. If flooding is forecast on the Cedar River or Black Hawk Creek within the next 7 days, Contractor shall take the following actions within 24 hrs: • Cease excavation dewatering operations. • Backfill open trenches within 25 feet of earthen levee. • Provide City access to close Gatewell R gate. • Provide City access to install and operate temporary pumps from City 84" storm sewer. Virden Creek Site: — The existing lift station is located on the left descending bank of the Cedar River at the confluence with Virden Creek. Discharge from Virden Creek enters the Cedar River through three sluice gates. The sluice gates are closed during high river elevations on the Cedar River and pumps convey the discharge to the river. The contractor will be required to replace the pumps, electrical, and building roof. Contractor will also replace all electric gate actuators. — 2 Attachment A The City will be responsible for closing the sluice gates according to the established _ operations manual. The sluice gates are closed when the Waterloo gage reaches 12.0 to 14.0 feet. Contractor requirements for replacing the Virden Creek gate actuators: • Cedar River gage is below 12 feet and is forecasted to remain below 12 feet for the next 7 days. • Only one actuator shall be replaced at a time. The gate shall be closed before power is disconnected from the gate. The new gate actuator shall be capable of operating the gate before the next gate actuator is removed from service. _ • At any time, contractor shall be able to open or close gates within 24 hrs of notice from City. Contractor requirements for replacing the Virden Creek pumps: • Cedar River gage is below 12 feet and is forecasted to remain below 12 feet for the next 7 days. _ • Prior to replacement of any pumps,the electrical supply equipment shall be upgraded so that either the existing or the new pumps can be operated on an emergency basis. The existing electrical supply equipment will not power the new pumps. • Only one pump shall be replaced at a time. The new pump shall be operational before the next pump is removed from service. • At any time, contractor shall be able to operate two out of three pumps within 24hrs of notice from the City. Pump operation is only required when the Virden Creek gates are closed due to a Cedar River flood. If flooding is forecast on the Cedar River within the next 7 days, Contractor shall take the following actions within 24 hrs: • Make all three Virden Creek gates operational. Prepare to close all three gates as directed by City. • Make two out of the three pumps operational. • Provide access to City staff to operate existing pumps. • Operate new pumps as directed by City. • If flooding is forecast on Virden Creek(with no flood on the Cedar River), Contractor shall take the following actions within 24 hrs: Make all three Virden Creek gates operational. Prepare to open all three gates as directed by City. Vinton Street Site: The proposed lift station is located on the left descending bank of the Cedar River adjacent to Vinton Street and on the protected side of the existing flood protection concrete floodwall. The stormwater lift station takes water from an existing 48" storm sewer and discharges over the levee into an existing gatewell (Gatewell HH-5). The contractor will be required to construct the lift station and connect the discharge pipes to the gatewell. 3 Attachment A The City will be responsible for closing Gatewell HH-5 according to the established — operations manual. The gatewell is closed when the Waterloo gage reaches 12.0 to 14.0 feet. Contractor requirements for demolition of existing lift station: • Provide and operate temporary pump(s)with a total capacity of 500 gpm to convey runoff from the 48 inch storm sewer to the gatewell. The City will provide direction on the pump operation based on the water levels in the storage area of Lafayette Park. Pump operation is only required when Gatewell HH-5 is closed. — Contractor requirements for excavation adjacent to concrete floodwall: • Cedar River gage is below 12 feet and is forecasted to remain below 12 feet for the next 7 days. • The contractor shall maintain stockpiles of soil for backfilling open trenches within 25 feet of earthen levee. • Maintain presence of equipment on site for emergency backfilling throughout the duration of open excavation. Contractor requirements for work on the Gatewell HH-5 gate actuator: • Cedar River gage is below 12 feet and is forecasted to remain below 12 feet for the next 7 days. • At any time, contractor shall be able to close gate within 24 hrs of notice from City. If flooding is forecast on the Cedar River within the next 7 days, Contractor shall take the following actions within 24 hrs: • Cease excavation dewatering operations. • Backfill open trenches within 25 feet of earthen levee. • Close Gatewell HH-5 gate as directed by City. • Operate temporary pumps as directed by City. The City will provide direction on the pump operation based on the water levels in the storage area of Lafayette Park. 4 23209.03.00 PRICE AND PAYMEN r PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION J1 20 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on EJCDC C-620—Contractor's Application for Payment. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. Identify site mobilization. — D. Include within each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment 1.02 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit 3 copies of each application on EJCDC C-620—Contractor's Application for Payment or Contractor's electronic media driven form. B. Content and format: Use Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. D. Payment period: Submit at intervals stipulated in Agreement. E. Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01 33 00. F. Submit waivers. G. Substantiating data: When Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include following with application: 1. Current construction photographs. 2. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 3. Record documents for review by Owner which will be returned to Contractor. 4. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. 5. Construction progress schedules, revised and current. 1.03 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to Work. B. Engineer will advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on Engineer's Instruction to Contractor(ITC) Form. C. Engineer may issue a proposal request which includes detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, change in Contract Time for executing change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and period of time during which requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 5 days. D. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to Engineer, describing proposed change and its full effect on Work. Include a statement describing reason for change, and effect on Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing effect PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 23209.03 00 Page 2 -SECTION 01 20 00 ms1222 on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 25 13. E. Stipulated price Change Order: Based on proposal request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Engineer. F. Work Directive Change: Engineer may issue a directive, on EJCDC C940-Work Directive Change signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute change. G. Time and material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in Conditions of Contract. Engineer will determine change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Contract Documents. H. Maintain detailed records of work done on time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in Work. I. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. J. Change Order Forms: EJCDC C-941 Change Order or Engineer's Change Order Form. K. Execution of Change Orders: Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of Contract. L. Correlation of Contractor submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Price. 2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by change, and resubmit. 3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.04 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Questions regarding conflicts or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted by Contractor on attached Request for Information (RFI)form. 1.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in opinion of Engineer it is not practical to remove and replace Work, Engineer will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Defective Work may remain, but unit price will be adjusted to a new price at discretion of Owner. D. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Engineer and unit price will be adjusted to a new price at discretion of Owner. E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. F. Authority of Engineer to assess defect and identify payment adjustment, is final. G. Nonpayment for rejected products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 23209.03.00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION (1 20 00 -Page 3 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 1.06 UNIT ADJUSTMENT PRICES A. Unit adjustment prices will be used to adjust Contract Price for additions to or deduct ons from quantities required by Contract Documents. B. Unit adjustment prices apply only to additions to or deductions from quantities required by Contract Documents made necessary by unforeseen conditions or changes deemed necessary or desirable by Owner during construction. Additions or deductions necessary to accommodate equipment furnished and installed under Agreement shall be made by Contractor at its expense, and unit adjustment prices shall not apply. C. Structural Earth Excavation And Backfill, CY: Unit price includes additional costs for excavation, dewatering, shoring, disposal of unsuitable material, structural backfill material, compaction, labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals for providing structural overexcavation and backfill in place of unsuitable foundation materials where authorized by Engineer. Adjustment only includes electrical building foundations at Westfield and Vinton sites. Measurement shall be adjustment of Over Excavation Detail bottom elevation shown on Drawings and multiplied by plan area of bottom of excavation (2' outside horizontal limits of foundation). 1.07 PAY ITEMS A. All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials delivery of these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. 1.08 OVERHAUL A. Overhaul will not be paid for"surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to the items to which it applies. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION REQUEST FOR INFORMATION RFI No.: Stanley Consultants Nc Contract No. Date: and Name: Contractor: Owner: Engineer: Subject: Drawing Reference: Spec Section: Information Required (Be Specific): Contractor Representative Date Reply: Engineer Representative Date THIS IS NOT A CHANGE IN SCOPE AUTHORIZATION. IF, IN YOUR OPINION,THIS RESPONSE INVOLVES WORK WHICH CHANGES THE CONTRACT PRICE OR TIME, YOU MUST SUBMIT A PROPOSAL OR A NC TICE AS REQUIRED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 23209.03.00 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION :)1 25 13 -Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. For period of 30 days after effective date of Agreement, Engineer will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. After end of that period, requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond c mtrol of Contractor. B. Submit 3 copies of request for substitution for consideration using attached Product -3ubstitution Request Form. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutions with requirements stated in Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified; list significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. Amount of any net change to Contract Price. 7. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources, or replacement materials. C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings. 2. They are requested directly by Subcontractor or supplier. 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written notification from Engineer of Owner's acceptance. E. Engineer will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution Contractor represents that: 1. It has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. It will provide same warranties or Bonds for substitution as for product specified or as required by Owner. 3. It will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and will make such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. It waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5, Cost data is complete and includes related costs under its Agreement, but not: a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 6. It will reimburse Owner for charges of Engineer or Engineers consultants for evaluating any proposed substitute, whether proposed substitute is accepted or rejected. 1.03 ENGINEER DUTIES PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 23209 03 00 Page 2 -SECTION 01 25 13 ms1222 A. Review Contractor's requests for substitution with reasonable promptness and advise Owner. B. Notify Contractor in writing of Owner's decision to accept or reject requested substitution. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM To: Project: Specified Item: - Section Page Paragraph Descriptior The undersigned request consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments are cor,ect: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature For use by Engineer/Architect Firm Approved Approved as noted Address Not Approved Received too late By Date Date Telephone Remarks Attachments 23209.03.00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 30 00- Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. B. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. _ C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion 1.02 COPIES OF DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUALS A. After Notice of Award, Contractor may obtain, at no charge, up to 5 printed or hard copies of Drawings and Project Manual and one set in electronic format. Additional copies will be furnis-)ed upon request at cost of reproduction plus handling charge. B. Revised Drawings and project manuals, if required, will be provided by Engineer to snow authorized changes or extra Work under following conditions: 1. Project manuals: Furnished at no charge, in same quantity as original issuance 2. Half-size Drawings: Half-size Drawings will be available as revised Drawings. One revised, complete set of half-size Drawings will be issued, at no charge, for each half-size set originally issued and for each half-size set purchased by Contractor after Notice of Award. 1.03 WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS A. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing 48 hours in advance if work on Saturday is planned. By noon Friday before planned Saturday work, Contractor shall confirm Saturday work:schedule with project inspector. — B. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of Engineer in accordance with Waterloo Standard Specifications. Contractor shall not work following days in 2013-14 due to holidays: 1. 2013: Mar 31, May 25-27, July 4,Aug 31-Sep 2, Nov 28-Dec 1, and Dec 24-25. 2. 2014: Jan 1, Feb 17, Apr 20, May 24-26, Jul 4,Aug 30-Sep 1, Nov 27-30, and Dec 24-25. 1.04 CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS A. Requirements of specifications contained in Contract Documents which conflict with _)rovisions of special provisions will be considered void. 1.05 MAILBOXES A. Contractor shall notify United States Postal Department of mailboxes, which interfere with any part of work before removing them, and Contractor will relocate them as required by Postmaster. Removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct payment, but will be considered incidental to item to which it applies. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 01 30 00 ms1222 1.06 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING A. Owner shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. Owner may change schedule to accommodate changing construction conditions. B. Contractor shall coordinate work under this contract with contractors performing work under other contracts which may be performed concurrently. C. Contractor shall be responsible to notify Police, Fire, Street and Engineering Departments of closing and opening of streets. D. Contractor shall commence work within 10 days after receipt of"Notice to Proceed"and diligently execute work of contract to completion. 1.07 PROJECT SITE ADMINISTRATION A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out Work and perform construction as required by Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at site. B. Except in connection with safety or protection of persons or Work or property at site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in Contract Documents, all Work at site shall be performed during regular working hours, and Contractor shall not permit overtime work or performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent given after prior written notice to Engineer. C. Incompetent or incorrigible employees shall be dismissed from Work by Contractor or its representative when requested by Engineer, and such persons shall not again be permitted to return to Work without written consent of Engineer. D. Workmanship shall be of best quality. 1.08 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Representatives of Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. B. Preconstruction meeting: 1. Engineer will schedule a meeting after 15 days after Notice to proceed 2. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by Engineer. 3. Attendance: a. Owner's representative. b. Engineer and its professional consultants. c. Resident Project Representative. d. Contractor's superintendent. e. Major Subcontractors. f. Major suppliers. g. Others as appropriate. 4. Agenda: a. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. b. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. c. Distribution of Contract Documents. d. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. e. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Engineer. f. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. g. Scheduling. 23209.03.00 ADMINISTRATIVE_ REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 30 00-Page 3 5. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with 2 copies to Engineer participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Site mobilization meeting: 1. Engineer will schedule a meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. 2. Attendance required: Owner, Engineer, Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. 3. Agenda: a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. — b. Owner's requirements. c. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Security and housekeeping procedures. f. Schedules. g. Application for payment procedures. h. Procedures for testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. j. Requirements for start-up of equipment. k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 4. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants with 2 copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. D. Progress meetings: 1. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of Work at periodic inte,vals. 2. Engineer will hold called meetings as required by progress of Work. 3. Location of meetings: Project field office of Engineer. 4. Engineer will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. 5. Attendance: a. Engineer and its professional consultants as needed. b. Contractor and Subcontractors as appropriate to agenda. c. Suppliers as appropriate to agenda. d. Others. 6. Suggested agenda: a. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. b. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. c. Field observations, problems, conflicts. d. Problems which impede construction schedule. e. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. g. Revisions to construction schedule. h. Progress, schedule, during succeeding Work period. i. Coordination of schedules. j. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. k. Maintenance of quality standards. I. Pending changes and substitutions. m. Review proposed changes for: 1) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. 2) Effect on other contracts of Project. 3) Other business. 7. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with 2 copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. E. Preinstallation meeting: 1. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at Site prior to commencing work of section. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section. 3. Notify Engineer 4 days in advance of meeting date. 4. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 01 30 00 ms1222 a. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. b. Review coordination with related work. 5. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants,with 2 copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GRADES, LINES, LEVELS AND SURVEYS A. Establish and maintain necessary grades, lines, levels and surveys. B. Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in same to Owner before commencing work. 3.02 SPECIAL PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing with new products for patching and extending work. B. Employ original installer to perform alteration work. C. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. D. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. E. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. F. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. G. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. H. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to original or specified condition. I. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material,with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. J. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide a smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. K. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible,terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Engineer for review. L. Where a change of plane of 1/4" (6 mm)or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition to Engineer for review. M. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. 23209.03.00 ADMINISTRATIV-= REQUIREMENTS ms 1222 SECTION 01 30 00-Page 5 N. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. O. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. END OF SECTION 23209.03.00 — ms1222 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Deliver submittals to person listed below when required by Specification Sections: 1. Engineer: Mr. Brad Roeth Email: roethbrad anstanleygroup com Stanley Consultants, Inc. Stanley Building 225 Iowa Avenue Muscatine, Iowa 52761-3764 B. Submittals shall be in English language. C. Weights, measures, and units shall be English units with SI metric values following in parenthesis. D. Symbols and drawings shall conform to ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/CSA Z99. 1.02 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance to Specifications. C. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. D. Notify Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in submittals frorr requirements of Contract Documents. Any such deviations permitted by Engineer will require modifications of Contract Documents. E. Provide space on Shop Drawings for Contractor and Engineer stamps. F. When Shop Drawings are revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since K)revious submission. G. Submittals containing language imposing duties on others (such as verification of dimensions or supply of related information) inconsistent with contract language shall be null and void. H. Submittals shall not be used as media for inquiries for information or for verification of information that must be supplied by others to Contractor. Inquiries or verification of information shalt be made by separate Contractor submittal using Request for Information (RFI) process. I. Begin no fabrication or Work which requires submittal review until return of submittals by Engineer with stamp, as either"Reviewed", "Reviewed as Noted", or"Reviewed as Noted-Resubmit." J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals that carry Engineer stamp as either"Reviewed"or"Reviewed _ as Noted"as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 23209.03.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ms1222 Page 2-SECTION 01 33 00 1.03 ENGINEER DUTIES A. Review required submittals with reasonable promptness and in accord with schedule, only for general conformance to design concept of Project and compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences,techniques, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or program incident thereto. Review of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of assembly in which item functions. B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal, or review of submittal. Engineer's action on submittals is classified as follows: 1. Reviewed: Submittal has been reviewed and appears to be in conformance to design concept of Project and Contract Documents. Contractor may proceed with fabrication of work in submittal. 2. Reviewed As Noted: Submittal has been reviewed and appears to be in conformance to design concept of Project and Contract Documents, except as noted by reviewer. Contractor may proceed with fabrication of work in submittal with modifications and corrections as indicated by reviewer. 3. Reviewed As Noted-Resubmit: Submittal has been reviewed and appears to be in conformance to design concept of Project and Contract Documents, except as noted by reviewer. Contractor may proceed with fabrication of work in submittal with modifications and corrections as indicated by reviewer. Contractor shall make any corrections indicated by reviewer and resubmit for review. 4. Resubmit: Submittal has been reviewed and appears not to be in conformance to design concept of Project or with Contract Documents. Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication of work in submittal, but instead shall make any corrections required by reviewer and resubmit for review. 5. Returned without Review: Submittal is being returned without having been reviewed because: 1) not required by Contract Documents; 2)grossly incomplete; 3) indicates no attempt at conformance to Contract Documents; 4)cannot be reproduced; 5) lacks Contractor's completed approval stamp; or 6) lacks design professional's seal when required by law or Contract Documents. If submittal is required by Contract Documents, Contractor shall not proceed with Work as detailed in submittal, but instead shall correct defects and resubmit for review. 6. For Information Only: Submittal has not been reviewed but is being retained for informational purposes only. 7. Void: Submittal is voided because it is no longer required or has been superseded by another submittal. C. Return 1 copy of submittals to Contractor. Contractor shall make additional copies as required. D. Review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from Contract Documents unless Contractor has, in writing, called Engineer's attention to such variation at time of submission, and Engineer has given written concurrence pursuant to Contract Documents to specific variation, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer or other reviewer relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in submittals. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance to information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with article "Submittal Procedures"and for record documents purposes as described in Section 01 70 00. B. Designate in construction schedule, or in separate coordinated submittal schedule, dates for submission and dates that reviewed submittals will be needed. C. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in Work or in work of other contractors. D. Present in clear and thorough manner, complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction, and like information to enable review of information as required. 23209.03.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION 01 33 00-Page 3 E. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Drawings. F. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. -m G. Equipment which is identified on Contract Documents with tag number or name shall be identified on Shop Drawing with same tag. H. Schedule submittals to expedite Project. Coordinate submission of related items. I. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from Cor•,ractor. J. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. K. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in electronic format. 1. Submit electronic copy on CD, E-mail files, or post in FTP site. 2. Text documents shall be submitted in .pdf. 3. Drawings shall be submitted in .pdf or.tif format. - 4. Electronic submittal shall be suitable for reproduction in black and white. L. Submittals shall contain: 1. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. Names of: a. Contractor. b. Supplier. c. Manufacturer. 5. Identification of product, with Specification section number and article number. — 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. An 8"x 3" blank space for Contractor and reviewer stamps. 12. Indication of Contractor's approval, initialed or signed, with wording substantially as follows: "Contractor represents to Owner and Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, or assumes full responsibility for doing so and has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents." 13. If Contract Documents include performance specifications stating required results which can be verified as meeting stipulated criteria, so that further design by Contractor prior to fabrication is necessary, Submittal depicting such design must be prepared under seal of professional engineer licensed in Iowa and Submittal shall be signed and sealed in accordance with applicable regulations and with following certification statement: "I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision,that I am a duly licensed professional engineer under laws of state of Iowa and I accept responsibility for adequacy of this document to meet criteria stipulated in Contract Documents." M. Product Data: 1. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information speck to this Project. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 23209 03 00 Page 4-SECTION 01 33 00 ms1222 2. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. N. Design data: 1. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 2. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. O. Data sheets: 1. Data sheets may require information not known until Contractor's engineering is complete. Furnish estimated values based on good engineering judgment. Estimated values shall be identified by placement of"(est.)" next to value. 2. Data Sheets shall be updated and resubmitted by Contractor once final values are known. 3. Do not leave items blank or labeled "To Be Determined"or"Later_" 4. Do not submit manufacturer Product Data instead of completed data sheets. P. Test reports: 1. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 2. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Q. Certificates: 1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor. 2. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to reviewer. R. Manufacturer's instructions: 1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. 2. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. S. Manufacturer's field reports: 1. Submit report 30 days of observation for information. 2. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. T. Erection drawings: 1. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Engineer or Owner. U. Samples: 1. Samples for selection as specified in product sections: a. Submit for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. b. Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for selection. 2. Submit to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 3. Include identification on each sample,with full Project information. 4. Submit number specified in individual Specification Sections; 1 of which will be retained by Engineer. 5. Reviewed Samples which may be used in Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 6. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification section. 23209.03.00 SUBMITTF,_L PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION 01 33 00 -Page 5 V. Proposed products list: 1. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed to Engineer for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each projuct. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. W. Operations and maintenance manuals: 1. Designate in construction schedule, or in separate coordinated schedule, dates for submission and dates that reviewed operations and maintenance manuals will be needed. 2. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be presented in clear and thorough manner, complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction, and like information to enable reviewer to review information as required. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Drawings. 1.05 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Engineer and resubmit until stamped as either"Reviewed,"'Reviewed as Noted,"or"For Information Only." B. Text and depictions changed on Submittal shall be back-circled (clouded). C. Engineer will assume that portions of Submittal not back-circled have not been changed by Contractor from previous submission. D. Indicate revision number and date in document revision block. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings which carry Engineer stamp as either"Reviewed"or "Reviewed as Noted"to: 1. Job site file. 2. Record Documents file. 3. Other affected contractors. 4. Subcontractors. 5. Supplier or fabricator. 6. Owner. B. Distribute Samples which carry Engineer stamp as either"Reviewed"or"Reviewed as Noted"as directed by Engineer. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION A. Construction progress schedules: 1. Submit initial schedules to Engineer within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within ten days. 2. Submit preliminary outline Schedules to Engineer within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed for coordination with Owner's requirements. 3. After review, submit detailed schedules within 15 days modified to accommodate revisions recommended by Engineer. a. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. b. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. c. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. B, Form of schedules: 1. Prepare schedules in form of horizontal bar chart. a. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. b. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 01 33 00 ms1222 c. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. d. Minimum sheet size: 11 x 17. 2. Format of listings: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 3. Format of listings: Chronological order of start of each item of Work. 4. Identification of listings: By major Specification Section numbers. C. Construction progress schedule shall show: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity, with Contract Price breakdown at each stage. 2. Dates for beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction specifically listing: a. Site clearing. b. Site utilities. c. Foundation Work. d. Structural framing. e. Subcontractor Work. f. Equipment installations. g. Finishes. 3. Projected percentage of completion for each item, as of first day of each month. D. Submittal schedule shall show: 1. Dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. Dates submittals will be required for Owner-furnished products. E. Products delivery schedule show delivery dates for: 1. Products specified under Section 01 20 00. 2. Products furnished by Owner, Section 01 10 00. F. Prepare and submit subschedules for each separate stage of Work specified in Section 01 11 00. G. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of prime schedules. H. Progress revisions: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. 2. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: a. Major changes in scope. b. Activities modified since previous submission. c. Revised projections of progress and completion. d. Other identifiable changes. 3. Provide narrative report as needed to define: a. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule. b. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. c. Effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. I. Distribution copies of reviewed schedules to: 1. Job site file. 2. Subcontractors. 3. Other concerned parties. J. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by projects shown in schedules. 1.08 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION A. Provide photographs of Site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Engineer. B. Each month submit photographs with Application for Payment. C. Provide photographs taken at each major stage of construction: 1. Completion of site clearing. / $ d < \0 \ a§ a \ Z § / E/ \ 6 (n 2 .- \ CO / } ����0-2 � ± | E \ R \w�� a_ \ § Q Of OfE> n V { 0o � \ \ / R co ! = m 2 \ ® Q) - c - =k /// / <I °2 /wq Q 3 .. q 2 £ E � 2 ® oz \ � � k\� � 0 m \ 2 �>°� 2 y = _�± ! % \ _\ < zzof Of Of 2f , E e w =3 8 y t R * 2E Irk m f § £ 7 // � m »_ = moo 2 � \ / S # E E E 3 \ § / : _ :R o $ K/ - k / \ cO > / > w Of \ } f ® \ 2 ƒ e \/ {© % ) r � _0 = 2 2 cu \ / U b cc ƒ / rc k o � � cn Q a) / 2 toa o E E » & M \ ( / \ $ � ƒ f\ « a) \ � k \ - CO � / \ a = ƒƒ k E % q > / 3 3 _ § \ > > �± - O R = ch 23209.03.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 40 00 -Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. - D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work, except where mo a stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict w wth Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.03 BUILDING CODES AND PERMITS A. Obtain all construction permits and licenses. Owner will assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Obtain City of Waterloo building, electrical, HVAC, and plumbing permits and subsequent required inspections. Owner will waive fee for City permits. B. Pay all charges of utility service companies for connections to Work. Owner will pay all charges of such companies for capital costs related thereto. _ C. Give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, building and construction codes, rules, and regulations applicable to Work. If Contractor observes that Specifications or Drawings are at variance therewith, give Engineer prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate Modification. D. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, and without such notice to Engineer, Contractor shall bear all costs w arising therefrom; however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations. E. Permission to haul over streets, railroads and highways: 1. Secure, from proper authorities, permission or permit which may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property. 2. Hauling operations shall be subject to requirements of such permits, permission, and to applicable - regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways and private property. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 01 40 00 ms1222 3. Costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining necessary permits or permission shall be considered incidental to Contract Price. 1.04 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except where a specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. F. Abbreviations used in Drawings and Specifications are as specified in ASME Y14.38 and IEEE 260. G. Schedule of references: 1. AA-Aluminum Association 2. AAMA-Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association 3. AABC-Associated Air Balance Council 4. AAMA-American Architectural Manufacturers Association 5. AAN-American Association of Nurserymen 6. AAR Association of American Railroads 7. AASHTO-American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 8. ABMA-American Bearing Manufacturers Association 9. ACI -American Concrete Institute 10. ACGIH-American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists 11. ACIL-American Council of Independent Laboratories 12. ADC-Air Diffusion Council 13. ADSC-The International Association of Foundation Drilling 14. AEIC-Association of Edison Illuminating Companies 15. AF&PA-American Forest& Paper Association 16. AFS-American Foundrymen's Society 17. AGA-American Gas Association 18. AGMA-American Gear Manufacturers Association 19. AHA-American Hardboard Association 20. AHRI -Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute 21. Al -Asphalt Institute 22. AIChE-American Institute of Chemical Engineers 23. AISC-American Institute of Steel Construction 24. AISI -American Iron and Steel Institute 25. AITC-American Institute of Timber Construction 26. ALSC-American Lumber Standards Committee 27. AMCA-Air Movement and Control Association 28. ANSI -American National Standards Institute 29. APA-American Pulpwood Association 30. APA/EWA-APA-The Engineered Wood Association 31. API -American Petroleum Institute 32. APMO-International Association of Plumbing 33. ARI-American Refrigeration Institute 34. AREMA-American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association 35. ARRA-Asphalt Recycling and Reclaiming Association 23209.03.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS - ms1222 SECTION 01 40 00 - Page 3 36. ASA-Acoustical Society of America 37. ASCE-American Society of Civil Engineers 38. ASHRAE-American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 39. ASME -American Society of Mechanical Engineers 40. ASPA-American Sod Producers Association 41. ASSE-American Society of Sanitary Engineering 42. ASTM-International Standards Worldwide 43. AWI -Architectural Woodwork Institute 44. AWPA-American Wood-Preservers'Association 45. AWS-American Welding Society 46. AWWA-American Water Works Association 47. Builders' Hardware Manufacturer's Association.BIA-Brick Industry Association 48. BOCA-Building Officials& Code Administrators International, Inc. 49. CDA-Copper Development Association Inc. 50. CBM-Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association 51. CEMA-Conveyor Equipment Manufacturer's Association 52. CFR-Code of Federal RegulationsCGA-Compressed Gas Association 53. CISCA-Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association 54. CISPI-Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 55. CISPR-Comite International Special des Perturbations Radioelectriques _ 56. CLFMI -Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 57. CMAA-Crane Manufacturers Association of America 58. CPSC-Consumer Products Safety Council 59. CRI -Carpet and Rug Institute 60. CRSI --Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 61. CSA-Canadian Standards Association. 62. CSI-Cast Stone Institute 63. CSI-Construction Specificaitons Institute 64. CSSB-Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau 65. CTI -Cooling Technology Institute 66. DASMA-Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International 67. DEMA-Diesel Engine Manufacturers Association. 68. DFI -Deep Foundation Institute. 69. DHI -Door and Hardware Institute 70. DIN-Deutsche Normen 71. ECTC-Erosion Control Technology Council. 72. EGSA-Electrical Generating Systems Association. 73. EIA-Electronic Industries Alliance 74. EIMA- EIFS Industry Members Association 75. EJMA-Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 76. EPA-Environmental Protection Agency 77. ETL-Electrical Testing Laboratory 78. FAA-Federal Aviation Administration 79. FCC-Federal Communications Commission 80. FCI -Fluid Controls Institute 81. FGMA-Flat Glass Manufacturer's Association 82. FM-FM Global 83. FS-Federal Specification Unit 84. FSC-Forest Stewardship Council 85. GA-Gypsum Association 86. GANA-Glass Association of North America 87. GS-Green Seal. 88. HI-Hydraulics Institute 89. HI -Hydronics Institute 90. HMI -Hoist Manufacturer's Institute 91. HMMA-Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 92. HPVA-Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association 93. IAS-International Approval Services 94. IAPMO- International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 01 40 00 ms1222 95. ICAC-Institute of Clean Air Companies 96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials 97. ICC- International Code Council, Inc. 98. ICEA- Insulated Cable Engineers Association 99. IEC- International Electrotechnical Council 100. IEEE- Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 101. IES-Illuminating Engineering Society 102. IETF-Internet Engineering Task Force 103. IGCC - Insulating Glass Certification Council 104. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America 105. IMI - International Masonry Institute 106. IMIAWC- International Masonry Institute All Wather Council 107. ISA-The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society 108. ISO-International Standards Organization 109. ITU-International Telecommunications Union 110. KCMA-Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association 111. LEED-U. S. Green Building Council 112. LPI -Lightning Protection Institute 113. MBMA-Metal Building Manufacturers Association 114. MFMA-Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 115. MIA-Marble Institute of America 116. MMA-Monorail Manufacturer's Association 117. MS-Military Standardization Documents 118. MSS-Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry 119. NAA-National Arborist Association 120. NAAMM -National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 121. NAAMM-North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers 122. NACE-NACE International 123. NAIMA-North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 124. NARA-U.S. National Archives and Records Administration 125. NASSCO- National Association of Sewer Service Companies 126. NBHA-National Builders Hardware Association 127. NBGQA- National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. 128. NBS-National Bureau of Standards 129. NCMA-National Concrete Masonry Association 130. NCTA-National Cable Television Association 131. NCRP - National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement 132. NDT-American Society for Non-Destructive Testing 133. NEBB -National Environmental Balancing Bureau 134. NECA-National Electrical Contractors Association 135. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association 136. NEMA- National Electrical Manufacturers'Association 137. NES -National Evaluation Service 138. NETA- InterNational Electrical Testing Association 139. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association 140. NFRC- National Fenestration Rating Council 141. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association 142. NIBS -National Institute of Building Sciences 143. NIST-National Institute of Standards and Technology 144. NLA-National Lime Association 145. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority 146. NOFMA-National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association 147. NPCA- National Paint and Coatings Association 148. NRCA-National Roofing Contractors Association 149. NRMCA-National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 150. NSF-NSF International 151. NSPI-National Spa and Pool Institute 152. NTMA-National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 153. NUCA-National Utility Contractors Association 23209.03.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 40 00 -Page 5 154. NWMA-National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association 155. NWRI-National Water Research Institute 156. NWWDA-National Wood Window and Door Association 157. OSHA-U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration 158. PCA- Portland Cement Association 159. PCI-Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 160. PCMCIA-Personal Computer Memory Card International Association 161. PDCA-Painting and Decorating Contractors of America 162. PDI-Plumbing and Drainage Institute 163. PEI -Petroleum Equipment Institute 164. PFI -Pipe Fabrication Institute 165. PPI-Plastic Pipe Institute 166. PS-Product Standard 167. PTI-Post Tensioning Institute 168. RCSC-Research Council on Structural Connections 169. RIS-The Redwood Inspection Service 170. RUS-U. S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Services 171. SAE-Society of Automotive Engineers 172. SAMA-Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 173. SBCCI - Southern Building Code Congress International 174. SCAQMD-South Coast Air Quality Management District 175. SCMA-Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association 176. SCTE -Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers 177. SDI -Steel Deck Institute - 178. SDI -Steel Door Institute 179. SIGMA-Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 180. SJI -Steel Joist Institute 181. SMACNA-Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 182. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 183. SPRI-Single Ply Roofing Institute 184. SSPC-The Society for Protective Coatings _ 185. STI -Steel Tank Institute 186. SWI-Steel Window Institute 187. SWRI-Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute 188. TCA-Tile Council of America, Inc. 189. TEMA-Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 190. TIA/EIA-Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance 191. TMS-The Masonry Society 192. TPI-Truss Plate Institute 193. TPI-Turfgrass Producers International 194. UL- Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 195. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau _ 196. WDMA-Window and Door Manufacturers Association 197. WH-Intertek Testing Services, Warnock Hersey Listing Services 198. WIC-Woodwork Institute of California 199. WSPFA-Western Spruce-Pine-Fir Association 200. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association 1.05 WELDING REQUIREMENTS - A. Welding shall be performed by qualified welding operators using procedures which have been qualified in accordance with applicable codes and standards specified. B. Procedure qualification: 1. Contractor, subcontractor, or fabricator performing welding under jurisdiction of referenced codes shall be responsible for obtaining and qualifying welding procedures. Structurail welding procedures conforming to AWS D1.1 are prequalified as defined in AWS D1.1. 2. Contractor shall maintain records, and make available to Engineer when requested, certifying successful completion of procedure qualification tests. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 01 40 00 ms1222 C. Performance qualification: 1. Contractor, subcontractor, or fabricator performing welding under jurisdiction of referenced codes shall be responsible for testing and qualifying its welding operators in accordance with applicable procedures. 2. Welding operator's qualification as specified in code shall be considered as remaining in effect indefinitely unless welder has not engaged in given process of welding for which welding operator is qualified for period of 6 months. 3. Engineer reserves right to require any welder to retake tests when, in opinion of Engineer, work of welder creates reasonable doubt as to welder's proficiency; Engineer reserves right to witness any required retesting; conduct such tests at no additional expense to Owner. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES - A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to Owner to perform specified testing. 1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. B. Independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Engineer. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in location in which Project is located. 2. Laboratory staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer specialist on staff to review services. 3. Testing equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-site testing as required by Engineer or Owner. D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Engineer and Contractor, in duplicate indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Engineer. Payment for retesting or re- inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price. H. Agency responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. 23209.03.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 40 00 -Page 7 I. Agency reports: After each test, promptly submit 2 copies of report to Engineer and to Contractor. When requested by Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. Include following 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in the Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. J. Limits on testing authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.07 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. Contractor shall provide qualified Service Engineer(s), as necessary to: 1. Supervise assembly of equipment. 2. Inspect equipment after it is installed to assure that all details of installation are correct and that equipment is prepared for operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3. Check connections to equipment and adjust, or supervise adjustment of, control and indicating devices after equipment has been installed and connected. 4. Fully instruct Owner's operating personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. 5. Provide Engineer with duplicate copies of final alignment and clearance measurements on all rotating or reciprocating equipment. Measurements shall clearly identify each piece of equipment. 6. Supervise preliminary operation of equipment and necessary adjustments. B. Presence of Service Engineer will in no way relieve Contractor of any responsibility assumed under Agreement. 1. Contractor shall furnish materials, tools, and labor necessary to start up each itern of equipment or system. 2. Comply with manufacturer's procedures in starting up each item of equipment. C. Work and abilities of Service Engineer shall be subject to review of Engineer. If Engineer determines that any Service Engineer is not properly qualified, Contractor shall replace Service engineer upon written notification by Engineer. D. Contractor shall provide continuity in assignment of Service Engineer to Work. In event substitution of Service Engineer is made which is not at request of Engineer, substitute's time for"familiarization" shall be at Contractor's expense. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 8-SECTION 01 40 00 ms1222 B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Notify Engineer when Work is considered to be complete, in operating condition, and ready for inspection and tests. B. Engineer will conduct tests it deems necessary to determine if equipment or system functions properly. C. After system or equipment necessary for operation of Work is in operating condition, Contractor shall supervise operation of equipment or system for period sufficient to assure proper functioning, and make necessary observations, investigations, and adjustment. END OF SECTION 23209.03.00 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AUD PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION 01 45 33-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A. Special inspections and structural observations required by IBC 2009. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT A. Unless noted otherwise, provide and pay for materials, samples, mockups, and assemblies required for testing and inspection. Pay for shipping costs related to delivery of Work to Site. B. Special Inspector will pay for shipping costs of samples transported from Site to laboratory. C. If exploratory work is required to determine cause of defects, cost of such work shall be paid by Contractor. If work is found to be defective, in judgment of Engineer, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for costs incurred in this event. D. Tests as required to qualify Contractor or workers for any phase of Work, shall be paid by Contractor. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Building official: Officer or its duly authorized representative charged with administration and enforcement of adopted building code. B. Continuous: Full time observation of work requiring special inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in area where work is being performed. C. Fabricator: Contractor who fabricates members and assemblies on premises of Contractor's shop. D. Field quality control testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of Work and for completed Work. E. Inspection: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring observation and technical adjustment. F. Installer/applicator/erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Subs ubcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. G. Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring special inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in area where work is being performed. Periodic inspection intervals shall be at beginning of work, at times of significant work, prior to work being concealed, and at completion of work. H. Preconstruction testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. I. Product testing: Tests and inspections performed by NRTL, NVLAP, or testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. J. Special Inspector(SI): Experienced person who is educated and qualified in conducting, supervising, and evaluating tests and/or inspections. 1. Where tests or inspections are required to be performed by a certified individual, SI shall have required certifications. CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 01 45 33 ms1222 2. Where tests or inspections are required to be performed by a licensed engineer, SI shall be a licensed engineer or shall be under direct supervision of a licensed engineer experienced with type of work requiring special testing and inspection. K. Special testing and inspection services: Items required by building code as adopted by local Building Official, and other items identified which in professional judgment of Engineer, are critical to integrity of building structure. Services are required of materials, installation, fabrication, erection, or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved Contract Documents and referenced standards. L. Source quality control testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. M. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance with approved standards. N. Testing agency: Established and approved independent testing agency acceptable to Owner and Building Official and as noted below: 1. Authorized to operate instate in which project is located and experienced with requirements and testing methods specified in Statement of Special Inspection. 2. Testing equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards, or to accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.04 SPECIAL INSPECTOR(S) A. More than one SI may be required to provide varied knowledge and experience necessary to adequately test and inspect all categories of work requiring special inspection. B. Sls shall perform their duties independent from construction quality control staff employed by Contractor. SI services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with requirements of contract documents. C. Engineer will employ and pay for specified services of SI(s). SI(s)will be: 1. Prime Special Inspector: Stanley Consultants, Inc. 225 Iowa Ave, Muscatine, IA 52761 Brad Roeth (563)264-6703 roethbrad@stanleygroup.com 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Special Inspector shall submit information to Building Official as required to get Building Official approval of Special Inspector's qualifications. Special Inspector shall submit letter to Engineer documenting acceptance of qualifications by Building Official. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepared in tabular form by Special Inspector,to submit to Owner, Contractor and Engineer, and including following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests, inspections, and submittal of reports. 7. Requirements for obtaining samples. 8. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 23209.03.00 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION 01 45 33- Page 3 C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports including following. 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. _ 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of Special Inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. D. Submit Reports to Owner, Building Official, Contractor, and Engineer weekly.A final report of inspections documenting required special inspections and correction of discrepancies shall be submitted periodically. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special Inspector acting as Owner's Representative may require testing and inspection of work at plant, before shipment. Owner reserves right to reject material not complying with Contract Documents. _ B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Perform special inspections, tests, and structural observations in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 and in accordance with requirements of this section. 2. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with industry standard used as reference for specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 3. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective wore or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, for shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. C. Qualifications: Following paragraphs establish minimum qualification Levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 1. Installer:A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Manufacturer: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. a 3. Fabricator:A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Engineer: Professional Engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction whe,e Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 5. Specialists: Certain sections of Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for activities indicated. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing Work. 6. Testing agency: NRTL, an NVLAP, or independent agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548; and with CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 01 45 33 ms1222 additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. a. NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. b. NVLAP: Testing agency accredited according to NIST National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 7. Factory-Authorized Service Representative: Authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. D. Conflicting requirements: 1. If compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 2. Minimum quantity or quality levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for context of requirements. 1.07 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Special Inspector: 1. Attend a pre-construction meeting to review scope of special testing and inspection. 2. Test or inspect work specified for conformance with approved design Drawings, Specifications, and applicable material and workmanship provisions of code. 3. Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality control services with minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 4. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 5. Bring discrepancies to immediate attention of Contractor for correction, then, if uncorrected after a reasonable period of time, to attention of Owner, Engineer and Building Official. 6. Submit test and inspection reports to Building Official, Contractor, Engineer, and other designated persons. 7. Limits of authority: Special Inspectors may not waive or alter Contract requirements, or approve or accept any portion of Work unless specifically authorized by Owner. Sis may not assume any duties of Contractor, and they have no authority to stop or reject Work. B. Engineer: 1. Identify items requiring special testing and inspection specified. 2. If requested, attend a pre-construction meeting to review scope of special structural testing and inspection. 3. Review summary reports submitted by Sls. 4. Provide Sis with approved design Drawings and Specifications and with reviewed Shop Drawings. C. Contractor: 1. Attend preconstruction meeting to review scope of special testing and inspection. 2. Provide SI access to approved Drawings and Specifications at job Site. 3. Review reports submitted by Sis. 4. Retain at job Site reports submitted by Sls for review by Building Official upon request. 5. Correct in a timely manner, deficiencies identified in inspection and testing reports.Allow adequate time for corrective work, re-inspection, and documentation. 6. Provide SI safe access to work requiring inspection or testing. 7. Provide labor and facilities to provide access to Work and to obtain, handle and deliver samples, to facilitate testing and inspection and for storage and curing of test samples. 8. Verify conformance of Work within specified construction tolerances. 9. Costs of retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with Contract Documents. 23209.03.00 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES ms1222 SECTION 01 45 33- Page 5 10. Maintain a log of tests and inspections at Site. D. Building Official (typical responsibilities; noted for information only)- 1. Determine work which, in its opinion, involves unusual hazards or conditions in accordance with IBC. 2. Approve fabricators of assemblies as it deems fit. 3. Review and approve SI qualifications. 4. Review reports and recommendations submitted by Sls. 5. Review"final signed reports"submitted by Sls. Documents should be acceptec and approved by building department prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 1.08 NOTICE OF INSPECTIONS A. Provide adequate notice for inspections performed by Building Official, as required by building code and other local codes. B. Provide adequate notice for inspections performed by SI. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERIODIC SITE OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER A. Special testing and inspection, conventional testing and inspection, and periodic inspections by Building Official do not preclude normal field involvement and site observations by Engineer, nor shall it relieve Contractor of any responsibility to complete work in accordance with approved drawings and specifications in a timely manner. - 3.02 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare record of tests and inspections. Include: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of Work tested or inspected. 3. Identification of testing agency or SI conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project Site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for reference during normal working hours. 3.03 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged Work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed surfaces, as judged solely by Engineer. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Cutting and patching: Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00. B. Protect work exposed by or for testing and/or inspection and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for testing and/or inspection. CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 01 45 33 ms1222 3.04 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Attached Statement of Special Inspections and Tests outlines inspections and tests that will be performed by Special Inspector in accordance with IBC 2009 Chapter 17.Additional information on tests and inspections is included in referenced Specification Sections. B. Tests and inspections listed in Statement of Special Inspection and Tests are in addition to those required by Contractor's quality control program. END OF SECTION As required by 2009 IBC Building Code 1704.1.1, Engineer has completed following Statement of Special Inspections and Tests. Completion of Statement of Special Inspections and Tests and submission to Building Official is a condition for issuance of Building Permit. Project Title: FY2013 Stormwater Lift Stations-Westfield Avenue, Vinton Street, and Virden Creek EDA Award No 05-79-05007 Project No.: 23209 (Stanley Consultants project number Project Address: NA Architect/Engineer: Stanley Consultants, Inc. Name of Person Completing this Mr. Bradley W. Roeth, P.E. Statement: Phone: 563 264-6703 Date: 1 01/25/2013 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS fn D U O o REFERENCED INSPECTION AND TESTING z O REFERENCE IBC SPECIFICATION (Continuous and Periodic as Defined by IBC) z w STANDARD REFERENCE SECTION O n- U A. Concrete Construction: 1704.4 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel, including X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7 1913.4 03 00 10 prestressing tendons, and placement. 2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding in AWS D1.4;ACI 318: 03 00 10 accordance with Item 5b above. 3.5.2 3. Inspection of bolts to be installed in X ACI 318: 8.1.3, 21.2.8 1911.5, 03 00 10 concrete prior to and during placement of 1912.1 concrete where allowable loads have been increased or where strength design is used. 4. Inspection of anchors installed in hardened X ACI 318: 3.8.6, 8.1.3, 1912.1 03 00 10 concrete 21.2.8 5. Verify use of required design mix. X ACI 318: Ch. 4, 5.2-5.4 1904.2.2, 03 00 10 1913.2, 1912 3 6. At the time fresh concrete is sampled to X ASTM C 172,ASTM C 1913.10 03 00 10 fabricate specimens for strength tests, 31;ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8 perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete. Perform laboratory concrete strength tests. 7. Inspection of concrete and shotcrete X ACI, 318: 5.9, 5.10 1913.6, 03 00 10 placement for proper application 1913.7, 19112, 8 techniques. 8. Inspection for maintenance of specified X ACI, 318: 5.11 -5.13 1913.9 03 00 10 curing temperature and techniques. 9. Inspection of prestressed concrete. ACI 318: 18.18.4, 18.20 a.Application of prestressing forces X b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons X in seismic-force-resisting system. 10. Erection of precast concrete members. X ACI 318: Ch. 16 11.Verification of in-situ concrete strength, X ACI 318: 6.2 03 00 10 prior to stressing of tendons in post- tensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs. 12.Inspect formwork for shape, location and X ACI 318: 6.1.1 03 00 10 dimensions of concrete member being formed Pagel STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS D U i] REFERENCED INSPECTION AND TESTING Z p REFERENCE IBC (Continuous and Periodic as Defined by IBC) H R STANDARD REFERENCE SPECIFICATION Z w SECTION o a. U B. Masonry Construction: 1704.5 L1 =Level 1 Inspection required for nonessential ACI 530/ ACI facilities. ASCE 530.1/ 5/TMS ASCE 402, Ch. 6/TMS 35 602, Ch. 35 1. Compliance with required inspection L1 1.5 04 05 00, provisions of the construction documents 04 20 00 and approved submittals shall be verified 2. Verification of fm and fAAC prior to L1 1.46 04 05 00, construction and for every 5,000 square 04 20 00 feet during construction 3. Verification of slump flow and VSI as L1 1.513.1.b.3 04 05 00, delivered to the site for self-consolidating 04 20 00 rout 4. Verification of proportions of materials in 1.513 04 05 00, premixed or preblended mortar and grout L1 04 20 00 as delivered to the site 5. The following shall be verified to ensure 04 05 00, compliance: 04 20 00 a. Proportions of site prepared mortar and L1 2.6A rout b. Placement of masonry units and L1 3.36 construction of mortar joints. c. Placement of reinforcement and L1 1.15 3.4 connectors. d. Grouts ace prior to grouting L1 3.2D e. Placement of grout L1 3.5 f. Size and location of structural elements L1 3.3F g. Type,size,and location of anchors, L1 1.2.2(e), including other details of anchorage of 1.16.1, masonry to structural members, frames or other construction. h. Specified size, grade, and type of L1 1.15 2.4, reinforcement and anchor bolts.. 3.4 i. Welding of reinforcing bars. L1 2.1.9.7.2 3.3.3.4 b j. Preparation, construction and protection L1 1.8C, 2104.3, 2104.4 of masonry during cold weather 1.8D (temperature below 40 degrees F)or hot weather(temperature above 90 degrees F 6. Preparation of grout specimens, mortar L1 1.4 2105.2.2, 04 05 00, specimens, and/or prisms shall be 2105.3 04 20 00 observed. C. Wood Construction: 1704.6, 1. Inspect field-fabricated items for X 1704.6.1 06 10 00, compliance with contract documents. 06 17 00 Page 2 - STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS co U p o REFERENCED INSPECTION AND TESTING z p REFERENCE IBC SPECIFICATION (Continuous and Periodic as Defined by IBC) P 2 STANDARD REFERENCE z W SECTION O a U D. Soils: 1704.7 1. Verify materials below shallow X 31 23 00, foundations are adequate to achieve 31 23 16-16 design bearing capacity 2. Verify excavations are extended to X 31 2300, proper depth and have reached proper 31 23 16-16 material 3. Perform classification and testing of X 31 2300, controlled fill material 31 23 16-16, 4. Verify use of proper materials, X 31 2300, densities and lift thicknesses during 31 23 16-16 placement and compaction of compacted fill 5. Prior to placement of fill, observe X 31 2300, subgrade, and verify site has been 31 23 16-16 prepared properly Page 3 23209.03.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1222 SECTION 01 50 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source as needed for constru tion operation. Use Owner's existing power service where available, provide separate metering and reimburse Owner for cost of energy used. B. Provide power outlets for construction operations as required by Work. Outlets shall be GCFI-rated and fed from a dedicated minimum 115-volt, 20-ampere circuit. Number of outlets per circuit shall be in accordance with NEC. Provide flexible power cords as required. Power outlets pi ovided shall be properly sized and rated to operate in tunnel ambient temperature and conditions. C. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at generator. 1.02 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office and Engineer's field office at time of project mobilization. 1.03 BROADBAND INTERNET CONNECTIVITY A. Provide, maintain, and pay for broadband Internet connectivity in field office for exclusive use of Engineer and Owner. T1, cable modem, or DSL connectivity is acceptable. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility is not available. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. At end of construction, remove temporary facilities. 1.05 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. It is responsibility of Contractor to obtain location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from various utility companies and City electrician before starting any excavation. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on plans so that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of work. B. If Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, resolution of additional costs incurred shall be made between Contractor and respective utility company. 1.06 RAILROAD A. At Vinton site, it is responsibility of Contractor to coordinate with CN Railroad for cable location and flagging. Owner will obtain CN utility crossing permit. Contractor shall submit Request For Flagging Services form and pay all fees associated with location, flagging, and installation of underground electrical. See Attachment Requirements Regarding Flagging And Cable Location For Construction On CN, effective date August 1, 2011, found at end of this section. 1.07 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 01 50 00 ms1222 B. Provide separate private office similarly equipped and furnished, for use of Engineer. C. Locate offices and sheds a minimum distance of 30' (10 m)from existing and new structures. D. Permanent facilities shall not be used for field offices or for storage. E. Construction: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations with steps and landings at entrance doors. 1. Construction: Structurally sound, secure,weathertight enclosures for office and storage spaces. Maintain during progress of Work; remove at completion of Work. 2. Temperature transmission resistance of floors,walls, and ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. 3. Exterior materials: Weather-resistant, finished in one color. 4. Interior materials in offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and bases. 5. Lighting for offices: 50 ft C (538 Ix) at desktop height, exterior lighting at entrance doors. 6. Fire extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area. 7. Interior materials in storage sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products. F. Environmental control: 1. Heating, cooling, and ventilating for offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions. 2. Storage spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of products. G. Engineer office: 1. Separate space for sole use of Engineer,with separate entrance door with new lock and 2 keys. 2. Area: Minimum 150 sq ft, minimum dimension 8'. 3. Windows: Minimum 3, minimum total area of 10%%of floor area, with operable sash and insect screens. Locate to provide views of construction area. 4. Minimum four 110 volt duplex convenience outlets, one on each wall. 5. Telephone: As specified. 6. Sanitary facilities: Convenient access to lavatory toilet facilities. 7. Photocopy machine with following features: a. Original and copy sizes 8-1/2"x 11"and 11"x 17". b. Automatic document feeder. c. 8-1/2 x 11"duplexing. d. Scanning to single or multiple page portable document format(pdf)file with resolutions of 400 x 400, 300 x 300, and 200 x 200 dots per inch. e. Individual paper sources for 8-1/2"x 11", 11"x 17", and bypass feeder. f. Network printing capabilities. 8. Engineer office furnishings: a. One desk with 3 drawers. b. One metal, double-door storage cabinet. c. Plan rack to hold working Drawings, shop drawings, and record documents. d. One standard 4-drawer letter-size metal filling cabinet with locks and 2 keys per lock. e. Six lin ft of metal bookshelves. f. Two swivel armchairs. g. Two straight chairs. h. 4' x 8'white board. i. One wastebasket per desk and table. H. Storage areas and sheds: Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products to requirements of Section 01 60 00. I. Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings. 23209.03.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1222 SECTION 01 50 00 -Page 3 J. Installation: 1. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed. 2. Employee residential occupancy: Not allowed on Owner's property. K. Maintenance and cleaning: 1. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. 2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. L. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, anci debris. Restore areas. 1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS A. Construct temporary all-weather access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of a width and load bearing capacity to provide unimpeded traffic for construction purposes. B. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20' (6 m)width driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.09 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS A. Contractor shall contact City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have an} street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when work has been compleed. 1.10 TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, ere.;t and maintain, at all times during progress and suspension of work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs or other adequate protection, as required by latest edition of Part VI of"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices"and shall provide, keep and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by Engineer, to er sure safety of public as well as those engaged on work. All barricading plans shall be reviewed by Engineer. B. Contractor shall determine, provide and obtain approval from Owner on detour locations for street closings, barricades, and posting prior to construction. These shall meet requirements of City Police Traffic Department. Contractor shall notify Owner's Office and Police, Fire, and Street Departments when street is closed for construction. Barricading shall be in accordance with latest edition of Part VI of"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." Encapsulated lens sheeting is not required on this project. 1.11 PARKING A. Provide temporary gravel surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. Locate as indicated by Engineer. C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. D. Permanent parking facilities: Base for permanent parking areas may be used for cc nstruction traffic. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 01 50 00 ms1222 E. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. F. Removal, repair: 1. Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion. 2. Remove underground work and compacted materials to a depth of 2" (600 mm); fill and grade site as specified. 3. Repair permanent facilities damaged by use, to specified condition. G. Mud from site vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.12 DUMPING AREAS A. Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be hauled to County Landfill or other area secured by Contractor and approved by Owner. Rubble, rubbish, trees, brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by Owner, shall be hauled to County Landfill. Landfill charges shall be considered incidental to contract and are responsibility of Contractor. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE A. Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure safety and protection to existing features located near or within limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by Engineer, shall be considered Contractor's responsibility. 1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site. 1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Provide two project identification signs meeting requirements of Economic Development Administration (EDA) as described below and shown at end of this section. Locate one sign each at Vinton and Westfield pump stations. B. Size: 4'x 8'x 3/4". C. Materials: Exterior grade/MDO plywood (APA rating A-B). D. Supports: 4"x 4"x 12'posts with 2"x 4"cross branching. E. Erection: Set posts minimum of 3' deep in concrete footings that are at least 12"in diameter. F. Paint: Outdoor enamel. 23209.03.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1222 SECTION 01 50 00 -Page 5 G. Colors: Jet Black, Blue(PMS300), and Gold (PMS7406). Specifically, on white background the following will be placed: 1. U. S. Department of Commerce seal in blue, black, and gold; 2. "EDA" in blue; 3. "U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION" in black; 4. "In partnership with" in blue; 5. (Actual name of the) "Investment Recipient" in black; 6. "PUTTING AMERICA TO WORK" in blue; 7. "Barack Obama, President of the United States" in black. H. Lettering: Specific fonts are named below; positioning will be as shown on the atta hed illustration. 1. "U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION"use Bank Gothic Medium; 2. "In partnership with" use UniversTm 55 Oblique; 3. (Name of)"Investment Recipient" use UniversTM Extra Black 85; 4. "PUTTING AMERICA TO WORK"use Walkway Black; 5. "Barack Obama, President of the United States" use UniversTm 55 Oblique. I. Do not erect project signs on public highway rights-of-way. If any possibility exists for obstruction to traffic line of sight, coordinate location and height of sign with agency responsible for highway or street safety in project area. J. EDA Regional Director may permit modifications to these specifications if they conflict with state law — or local ordinances. K. Maintenance: Maintain sign and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage. L. Removal: Remove sign, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Proje:t and restore area. 1.16 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way. C. Protect nonowned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.17 SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC A. Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect life and health of all persons employed on this project and public. Contractor shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. All such protection shall be furnished to employees without cost. B. No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection, but shall be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work area 1.18 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING A. Provide 6' (1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks. B. Exterior enclosures: Provide temporary weathertight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.19 SECURITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 01 50 00 ms1222 A. Security program: Protect Work from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 1.20 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.21 DUST CONTROL A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.22 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. C. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains,to prevent water flow. Temporary measures shall meet Iowa SUDAS Section 9040, dated 10/18/2011. Provide following minimum controls or equivalent: 1. Silt fence,filter socks, or wattles. 2. Inlet protection. 3. Stabilized construction entrance: At point of entry to each construction site. 4. Mulch: Refer to Section 31 23 00. D. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. E. Periodically inspect earthwork and temporary measures to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. 1.23 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. 1.24 PEST CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work. 1.25 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.26 RODENT CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. 23209.03.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1222 SECTION 01 50 00-Page 7 1.27 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2' (600 mm). Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 8 2' 2' 1/4'MVSONCTE 2" 4- 1-21t I 2 X 4 4 X 4 POST z_ � lV N 2 Z 3 3 _ iMI 1�J 4' SIGN A MASONITE SIGN SCALE: 3/8" = 1' PROJECT - SIGN A ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION 8. 2• 2 3/4-PLYWOOD 4- 2% 4 4 X 4 POST i z WON tV (V Z = 4- t' SIGN B PLYWOOD SIGN SCALE: 3/8" = 1' PROJECT - SIGN B ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION z O a ul z o � _ cO z w a +�-+ w w z o w4-j ... W U i. w CL lij 0 4) O U NZ LL. O09 (D U H T- w z m IL w ° [f7 U CL cL CL z II -6 co m b cc En 0 CZ - z 42 Lli 7- 0 0- 0 421 Ld > Ld Q) U 4� 0 z c0 Q) E3 w � � W N w U m CL LLI 0 U ft---k 0 C) LL. 0 cc C, z E-I w CO cc EL LLI En REQUIREMENTS REGARDING FLAGGING AND CABLE LOCATION FOR CONSTRUCTION ON CN (Hereinafter called"Railroad") (Revised: Effective August 1, 2011) NOTE: Flagging and/or Cable Locate fees may apply A utility or contractor shall not commence, or carry on, any work for installation, maintenance, repair, changing or renewal of any FACILITY, under, over or on RAILROAD property at any location without giving notice to the RAILROAD authorized representative at the RAILROAD's office located at Troy, Michigan, Phone (248) 740- 6227; and if, in the opinion of the RAILROAD the presence of an authorized representative of the RAILROAD is required to supervise the same, the RAILROAD shall render bills to the utility or contractor for all expenses incurred by it for such supervision. This includes all labor costs for flagmen or cable locate supplied by the RAILROAD to protect RAILROAD operation, and for the full cost of furnishing, installation and later removal of any temporary supports for said tracks, as the RAILROAD's Chief Engineer's Office may deem necessary. A flagman is required anytime a utility or contractor does any work on or near RAILROAD property within twenty-five (25)feet horizontally of the centerline or any work over any railroad track. The RAILROAD, however, also reserves the right to require a flagman for work on RAILROAD property, which is more than twenty-five (25)feet from the centerline of a railroad track when there are other conditions or considerations that would dictate the need for a flagman to safeguard the RAILROAD's operations, property and safety of working personnel. A cable locate of RAILROAD owned facilities may be required to identify and protect Signal & Communication cables that have been installed to provide power, signa control, and wayside communications. These cables are vital to a safe and reliable railway operation.The cable locate will be performed by a qualified RAILROAD employee. Cost for a cable locate is $250.00,which is to be prepaid before installatson is _ to begin. Outside contractors are prohibited from driving on, along, or across any track that does not have a CN installed crossing. They may utilize an existing public crossing. TI•e practice of allowing rubber tired equipment to operate over track with no crossing has been banned. Exceptions to this rule will require the express approval from CN Engineering. Prior to any protect being started, the RAILROAD requires a "Request for flagging services" form to be completed and submitted; including check for prepayment _ based on the number of days flagman protection will be required. Request for flagging services Southern Region TO: Mary Ellen Carmody Date submitted: Audit Officer CN 2800 Livernois,Suite 220 Troy,Michigan 48083 (248)740-6227 (248)740-6036 fax maryellen.carmody a@cn.ca FROM: (Name) I am requesting a flagman for the following project. All blanks below must be completely filled in before any flagman request will be honored. Proof of Insurance must accompany this form. Flagman will be provided at your cost, depending on availability, within five (5) business days. Direct your calls concerning availability and problems to(248)740-6227. Project Location: RR milepost,Street,etc. Company. Billing Address: City: State: Zip: Company Phone: Company Fax: E-Mail_ *"Agreement or Authorization No.: Dated: With: Contractor's Contact Person: Phone: Date(s)Flagging needed: Starting time: Ending Time: Location for flagman to report: Description of work to be performed A check for the number of days flagman protection is required, and MUST be over-nighted to the address shown at the top of this page.Flagging is based on the number of days a flagman is required,at the base rate of $1,000.00 per day(1—8 hours).Any hours in excess of eight(8)hours are billed at the rate of$150.00 per hour. Prepayment check MUST be received prior to the beginning of this project. Weekend and Holiday flagman protection will be billed at the minimum rate of eight hours(8)at$150.00 per hour,$1,200.00. If project runs longer than originally anticipated,then MaryEllen Carmody must be contacted,and an additional check must be submitted.Rates areEffective August 1,2011. Cost for cable locate is$250.00,and is to be prepaid before installation is to begin. ** You must have an agreement with CN railroad subsidiary,such as a Right of Entry Permit,Formal Agreement or State,County,City Project Number and proof of insurance before you can enter the property. Will you receive State or Federal Funds as reimbursement for this project?Yes No I agree to pay for flagging services as requested: Attach map or other location info and fax completed form with cover letter on your company's letterhead and proof of insurance to MaryEllen Carmody(248) 740-6036 23209.03.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION U1 60 00-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PRODUCTS _ A. Provide products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Provide produ is of each type by a single manufacturer unless specified otherwise. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer for components being replaced. 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.03 RECEIVING, UNLOADING AND STORING A. Receive and unload shipments to plant site from suppliers of equipment under this Contract. B. Unload equipment as soon as possible after arrival. C. Pay freight car and truck demurrage, detention, and any other costs which may be billed to Owner due to failure to unload cars or trucks within time required by freight companies. D. Provide physical protection for equipment placed in storage. 1. Store and maintain materials and equipment after receipt until completed installation is accepted by Owner. Such storage and maintenance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Specifications. Provide materials, equipment, and labor required for such storage and maintenance. Contractor shall be accountable for any deterioration of materials or equipment occasioned by improper storage or maintenance, and shall recondition, repair, or replace any such materials or equipment without addition cost to Owner. 2. Stored equipment shall be supported above ground and shall be covered with canvas or other heavy-duty sheeting. Cover shall be securely fastened and shall be replaced if tom or otherwise damaged during storage period. 3. Motors shall be stored in dry, warm place and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Motors over 20 hp shall have shaft rotated 900 each month. Provide Owner with evidence that this requirement is met. _ 4. Desiccant shall be maintained between cover and motor frames on motors. Provide desiccant of type permitting visual determination of condition of desiccant. Replace desiccant when it becomes ineffective. 5. Following items shall be stored in weatherproof building complete with bins for storage of small pieces of equipment. Heat to a minimum of 50°F (10'C). a. Electronic instruments and cabinets. b. Electrical equipment with general-purpose enclosures. c. Insulation materials. d. Rotating equipment. e. Miscellaneous electronic equipment, gaskets, and small, machined parts. f. Instruments and controls. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 23209 03 00 SECTION 01 60 00-Page 2 ms1222 E. Inspect stored equipment weekly. Renew protective coatings as necessary to preserve fitness of equipment. 1.04 GENERAL STORAGE A. Store products immediately on delivery in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed. B. Arrange storage in manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. 1.05 ENCLOSED STORAGE A. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures. B. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's instructions. D. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 1.06 EXTERIOR STORAGE A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids, to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining. B. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to elements, cover with impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater. E. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 1.07 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Periodically inspect stored products on scheduled basis. B. Verify storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements. C. Verify manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. D. Verify surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected and if weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents. 1.08 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 30 days after effective date of Agreement, submit to Engineer five copies of complete list of major products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate products by Specification section number and title. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 23209.03.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 31 60 00-Page 3 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data, 1.09 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. "Or equal" products shall be allowed for all products, unless"no substitutions" is speJfically stated. B. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. C. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with Specifications. D. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal," submit request as for substitutions for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named. E. Whenever Specifications call for item by manufacturer's name and type and additioral features of item are specifically required by Specifications, additional features specified shall be provided whether or not they are normally included in standard manufacturer's item listed. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 23209.03.00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT_REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 70 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previois payments, and sum remaining due. - 1.02 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.03 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Engineer seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. — F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized — representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 30 00 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 01 70 00 ms1222 A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel 2 weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at equipment* location. D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. E. Amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections. 1.05 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt,wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 23209.03.00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 70 00-Page 3 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. G. Submit documents to Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation and maintenance data shall be in English language. B. Submit data bound in 8-1/2"x 11" (A4)text pages, 3-D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. C. Prepare binder cover with printed title"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS,"title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. D. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below;with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. E. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume,with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: _ a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Originals of warranties and bonds. G. Submit draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. H. Submit 3 sets of revised final volumes, and 1 CD with .pdf version within 10 days after final inspection. 1.08 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 23209 03 00 Page 4-SECTION 01 70 00 ms1222 C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit 2 sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. E. Building products, applied materials, and finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. F. Instructions for care and maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. G. Moisture protection and weather exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. H. Additional requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. I. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed, obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the warranty period. B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affect: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 23209.03.00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUI_ REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTIOPJ 01 70 00-Page 5 C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Worth, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. — 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide p-oper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Engineer for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION 23209.03.00 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 73 19-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 00 10-Concrete Work: Grouting. B. Section 05 50 00—Structural Metal Framing: Welding requirements. — C. Section 40 23 00—Supports and Anchors for Process Piping and Equipment: Welling requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Drawing indicating proposed layout and utilization of Contractor's storage area for Owner approval. Drawing shall be maintained current and shall indicate location w all stored equipment and materials. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Plan indicating location and extent of proposed field welding, and showing what provisions have been made for type of base metal, present stress conditions, and preheating requirements. 2. Proposed shoring or above floor load transfer structure for moving equipment across floors to final position. Documents shall be signed and sealed by Contractor's structural engineer. 3. Certificates for each welder, showing proof of qualifications as outlined in code prior to any field welding, either temporary or permanent. 4. Duplicate copies of clearances of bearings aligned and amount of runout on couplings. 5. Monthly report indicating status of equipment, motor test reports and materials received. Report shall contain a log of equipment and materials and storage maintenance duties performed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Provide dowel pins and shims necessary for leveling and doweling equipment to baseplates. Shims shall be stainless steel. B. Provide bolting required to anchor equipment securely to building structural steel; holes required in structural steel shall be drilled; burning with cutting torch not allowed. C. Provide expansion anchors where required, subject to review by Engineer. D. Provide welding rods for field erection of equipment installed under this Contract. E. Grout and material noted on Drawings as"by others,""by purchaser," "by Owner," cr the like, necessary for equipment installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES — A. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide access space around equipment for service. Provide no less than minimurn as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 SPECIAL ERECTION PROCEDURES A. Field welding to existing structural members shall conform to following requirements: 1. Conform to AWS D1.1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 01 73 19 ms1222 2. Welding to high strength steels or preheating of highly stressed members will not normally be permitted. 3. Remove temporary welded attachments, grind area smooth, and apply 1 coat of primer to match existing primer. B. Welding of piping shall conform to ASME B31.1 Code for Power Piping and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX when either or both are applicable. C. Remove any temporary attachments made to equipment. Grind area of attachment on equipment to smooth surface and apply 1 coat of primer to match existing primer. 3.03 CLEANING A. Before assembly or erection, thoroughly clean equipment of temporary protective coatings and foreign materials; completely remove shop-applied flushing compounds. B. Blow out with compressed air as required to remove foreign material. C. After erection of equipment, clean external surfaces of oil, grease, dirt, or other foreign material;touch up shop paint, primer, and filler; leave surfaces smooth and ready for finish painting. 3.04 ALIGNING A. Align equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Use shims of sheet and plate steel; use shims with laminations having individual layers not heavier than 0.015" (0.40 mm)for 1/32"(1 mm)to 1/8" (3 mm)directly under equipment. C. Check alignment of equipment after piping and other external connections have been made and before equipment is placed in operation. Realign equipment as necessary. D. After alignment, hot run and recheck alignment; drill and ream items of equipment and fasten to baseplates with tapered dowel pins. E. Include costs for labor required to obtain alignment within allowable limits on equipment installed. This includes labor for any hanger adjustments required. 3.05 SUPPORTS A. Provide devices to support equipment and piping, furnished or installed under this Contract. B. Fabricate supports of structural steel sections, plates, or rods arranged to provide rigid and sturdy mounting for equipment. C. Provide connections or fasteners required between equipment supports and building structure. D. Equipment foundation pads: As shown on Drawings. E. Provide devices to support equipment piping and appurtenances where specific support is not detailed on Drawings. Support piping adjacent to equipment such that no weight is carried on equipment. 3.06 GROUTING A. Place minimum of 1" (25 mm) nonshrink grout under equipment being mounted on concrete foundations unless specified otherwise. Refer to Section 03 00 10. B. Determine quantity of grout required. 23209.03.00 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ms1222 SECTION 01 73 19-Page 3 C. Entire space between top of foundation and bottom of equipment base shall be completely filled with grout, free of any voids. D. Place no grout that has been allowed to set, after mixing, beyond time limitations set forth by grout manufacturer. E. Remove and replace grout that shows cracking. END OF SECTION 23209.03.00 DEMOLITION ms1222 SECTION 02 41 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES _ A. Removal and disposal salvage relocation and associated work including, but not limited to: 1. Demolition and removal of buildings, including removal of foundations. 2. Demolition and removal of structures. 3. Demolition and removal of Site improvements. B. Remove and legally dispose of items, except those identified for use in recycling, re-use, and salvage programs. _. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for demolition work under this contract except as specifically described and listed in Agreement. Include costs in connection with Worx in lump sum Contract Price or unit price for demolition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Deconstruction: Disassembly of buildings for the purpose of recovering materials. B. Construction and demolition (C&D) materials: Materials produced in the process of construction, renovation and/or demolition of structures,where structures include buildings (residential, commercial, institutional), roads, and bridges. C&D materials typically include concrete, asphalt,wood, gypsum wallboard, paper, glass, rubble, and roofing materials.Also includes land clearing debris, such as stumps, rocks, and dirt. C. Environmental pollution and damage: Presence of chemical, physical, or biological a ements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balance,of importance to _ human or animal life; affect other species of importance to humanity; or degrade utility of environment for aesthetic, cultural or historical purposes. D. Inert fill: 1. Permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively for purpose of disposal. 2. Inert solids and waste: Nonliquid solid waste including, but not limited to, soil and concrete, that does not contain hazardous substances or soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of water- quality standards established by regional water board and does not contain significant quantities of decomposable solid waste. E. Class III Landfill: Landfill that accepts nonhazardous materials such as household, commercial, and industrial waste, resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations. Class III Landfill must have solid waste facilities permit from Iowa DNR. _ F. Demolition waste: Building materials and solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, cleanup, or demolition operations that are not hazardous. Term includes, but is not limited to, asphalt concrete, portland cement concrete, brick, lumber, gypsum wallboard, cardboard and other associated packaging, roofing material, ceramic tile, carpeting, plastic pipe, and steel. The materials may include rock, soil, tree stumps, and other vegetative matter resulting from land clearing and landscaping for construction or land development projects. G. Chemical waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals and inorganic wastes. H. Recycling: Process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting materials for purpose of using altered form in manufacture of new product. Recycling does not include burning, incirerating or thermally destroying solid waste. DEMOLITION 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 02 41 00 ms1222 I. Reuse: Use, in same or similar form as it was produced, of material which might otherwise be discarded. J. Solid waste: Putrescible and nonputrescible solid, semisolid, and liquid wastes, including garbage, trash, refuse, paper, rubbish, ashes, industrial wastes, demolition and construction wastes, abandoned vehicles and parts thereof, discarded home and industrial appliances, dewatered, treated, or chemically fixed sewage sludge which is not hazardous waste, manure, vegetable or animal solid and semisolid wastes, and other discarded solid and semisolid wastes. "Solid waste"does not include hazardous waste, radioactive waste, or medical waste as defined or regulated by State law. 1.04 SCHEDULING A. Perform Work in manner which will provide least interference and most protection to public and existing construction. Contractor's operations subject to approval by Owner prior to commencement of Work. B. Carefully coordinate time and manner of demolition work with Engineer to maintain construction schedule requirements. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings: Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain property of Owner, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed, recycled, or disposed from Project Site in appropriate and legal manner. 2.02 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS A. Following equipment shall be removed and remain property of Owner. Contractor shall remove salvageable equipment and transport to Owner's designated storage area as directed by Owner. B. Salvageable equipment list: 1. Six gate actuators located at Virden Creek Lift Station. 2. Pump, motor, and controls located at Vinton Lift Station. 3. One existing manual gate actuator located at Westfield gatewell. C. Tag salvageable items and submit list to Owner identifying equipment and tag numbers. D. Upon delivery of a salvaged item to designated storage area, Contractor shall receive from Owner receipt indicating delivery of that item. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Inspect buildings and structures where demolition is required. Inspect existing Drawings of buildings and structures; Drawings are available from Owner. Contractor shall be familiar with items that require demolition and patching. B. Perform excavation and dewatering necessary to accomplish Work. C. Determine actual Site conditions, extent to which demolition is required, and method of demolition. 23209.03.00 DEMOLITION ms1222 SECTION 02 41 00- Page 3 D. Schedule work with Owner and work in other parts of these Contract Documents. E. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. F. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of demolition and recycling required. G. Survey condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of portion of structure or adjacent structures during demolition. H. Perform surveys as Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from demolition activities. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare drawings, documents, and applications and obtain government agency app ovals and permits required for demolition activities. B. Do not close or obstruct adjacent occupied or utilized facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic way:; if required by governing regulations. C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area. 3.03 EXPLOSIVES A. Use of explosives not permitted. 3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. Comply with federal, state and local regulations pertaining to water, air, solid waste, ecycling, chemical waste, sanitary waste, sediment and noise pollution. B. Protection of natural resources: Preserve natural resources within project boundaries or restore to equivalent condition. 1. Confine demolition activities to areas defined by public roads, easements, and v&ork area limits indicated on drawings. 2. Temporary construction: Remove indications of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work areas, structures, stockpiles or waste areas. 3. Water resources: a. Comply with applicable regulations concerning direct or indirect discharge of pollutants to underground and natural surface waters. b. Oily substances: 1) Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water in such quantities as to affect normal use, aesthetics, or produce measurable ecological impact on area. 2) Store and service construction equipment at areas designated for collec-.ion of oil wastes. 4. Dust control, air pollution, and odor control: Prevent creation of dust, air pollution and odors: a. Use temporary enclosures and other appropriate methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. b. Store volatile liquids, including fuels and solvents, in closed containers. c. Properly maintain equipment to reduce gaseous pollutant emissions. 5. Disposal practices and waste hauling: a. Legally transport and dispose of materials that cannot be delivered to source-separated or mixed recycling facility to transfer station or disposal facility that can legally accept materials for purpose of disposal. b. Use permitted waste hauler or Contractor's trucking services and personnel. To confirm valid permitted status of waste haulers, contact state or local waste management agency. DEMOLITION 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 02 41 00 ms1222 c. Become familiar with conditions for acceptance of new construction, excavation and demolition materials at recycling facilities, prior to delivering materials. d. Deliver to facilities that can legally accept new construction, excavation and demolition materials for purpose of re-use, recycling, composting, or disposal. e. Do not burn, bury or otherwise dispose of rubbish and waste materials on project site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect existing facilities from damage by falling debris, dust, and construction operations. B. Provide shoring and bracing where necessary to support existing construction and protect personnel during demolition operation. 3.06 DEMOLITION-GENERAL A. Building demolition: Demolish buildings completely and remove from site. Use methods required to complete Work. B. Remove existing construction as specified and shown and as required to permit new construction. C. Perform removal in manner that will minimize dust, noise, and other nuisance. Maintain haul routes for disposal of material clean and free of debris. D. Remove existing construction carefully providing for neat and orderly junctions at construction to remain in place. Final appearance of exposed surfaces shall be similar and equal to that of adjacent existing work. Grind off rough surfaces to remove sharp projections. E. Perform demolition operations in manner that in no way endangers personnel, public, existing structures, utilities, roadways, or facilities not to be demolished. F. Any portion of existing construction whether structural, or accessory which has become unstable through removal of other parts of construction shall be removed as soon as practicable, and no such unstable part shall be left free-standing or inadequately braced against causes of collapse at end of each day's work. G. No demolition shall be performed on piping, electrical circuits, or equipment until system has been isolated by Owner. Contractor shall verify isolation of system. H. Contractor shall relocate existing active miscellaneous piping, conduit, and electrical circuits and devices not detailed on Drawings but required for installation of equipment and items installed by this Contract. I. To reduce fire hazards during demolition, Contractor shall: 1. Before removing any part of any building, remove volatile or flammable materials, such as fuel oil, gasoline, kerosene, benzene, cleaning fluids, paints,thinners, cloth, loose paper,combustible trash, coal, and similar materials which might serve as ready fuel for small fires. 2. Maintain sufficient number of fire extinguishers to check and extinguish small fires in areas where Work is being performed. 3. Wherever cutting torch or other equipment which might cause fire is being used, fire extinguishers shall be kept nearby and ready for instant use. Users of such equipment shall be instructed in proper method of preventing fires and extinguishing fire. J. Fires will not be permitted in Project area, except that small fires for warming of personnel maybe permitted in suitable burning equipment arranged to prevent release of embers or sparks. 3.07 DEMOLITION OF ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL,AND SITE MATERIALS A. Remove as shown and specified or as required to permit new construction. 23209.03.00 DEMOLITION _ ms1222 SECTION 02 41 00-Page 5 B. Structural parts of buildings, such as columns, beams, and joists supporting floor of any story shall be left in place until walls, flooring, and partitions of that story are completely removed, beginning at top and working downward. Exception to this requirement will be made in case of nonrigid frames or concrete buildings. C. Any part of building,whether structural, or accessory, which has become unstable through removal of other parts shall be removed as soon as practicable, and no such unstable part shall be left free- standing or inadequately braced against cause of collapse at end of day's work. D. Structural steel in building.- 1. Provide temporary support or complete new work required for support prior to removal. Maintain existing parts until equipment supported by part is removed or modified. 2. Remove and dispose of steel indicated on Drawings including miscellaneous associated steel. Do not remove bolts and/or rivets of common connections; cut member being removed to leave connection unless shown otherwise. 3. Where steel penetrates masonry or concrete wall, cut flush with wall unless shown otherwise. 4. Where applicable, remove anchor bolts and grout to top or face of existing concrete. Make provisions to ensure smooth surface where grout is removed. 5. Care shall be taken not to damage any portion of existing structural steel that is to remain intact. 3.08 DEMOLITION OF MECHANICAL ITEMS A. Remove mechanical equipment and materials as shown on Drawings and as specified. B. Removal shall include but not limited to piping, valves, pumping equipment, hangers, and associated accessories. 3.09 DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. Examination: 1. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. 2. Demolition drawings are based on cursory field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. B. Preparation: 1. Before beginning underground demolition, contact Owner, and local utilities locating service One Call at least 24 hours before digging. 2. Disconnect electrical systems in or on walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. 3. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. 4. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. 5. Existing electrical service: maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and — ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. C. Demolition and extension of existing electrical work: 1. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to remain to accommodate new construction. 2. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 3. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 4. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. -- 5. Disconnect and remove the following: a. Abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. b. Devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. c. Abandoned light fixtures, including brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. 6. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. 7. Maintain safe access to existing electrical installations which remain active. DEMOLITION 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 02 41 00 ms1222 D. Disposal of equipment containing polychlorinated biphenyl compounds (PCBs): Transformers, capacitors, and lamp ballasts containing PCBs shall be disposed of in accordance with CFR 40 Part 761. Ballasts, even those labeled "no PCBs", shall be disposed of accordingly. Deliver equipment to an Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)approved incinerator or ballast recycling service for disposal. Provide Owner with manifest and certificate of destruction pursuant to CFR 40 Part 761, Subpart K. 3.10 HANDLING OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Salvageable materials, except items specified to remain property of Owner, shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from Site as Work progresses. B. Promptly re-use, salvage, recycle, or dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate or be stored on-site for more than 10 days. C. Certain equipment and material shall be removed and reinstalled as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Contractor shall remove such items, store if required, and reinstall as indicated. In the event of loss or damage to such material or equipment, Contractor shall replace items without additional cost to Owner. D. Storage of materials to be removed not permitted to accumulate on site. Promptly remove and dispose of unsalvageable equipment and materials. E. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. F. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on roofs, floors, or in areas outside of and around any buildings being removed. Waste materials and debris resulting from Work shall be removed and disposed of daily by Contractor in disposal area obtained by Contractor. G. No material, obstructions, or debris shall be placed or allowed to accumulate within 15'(4.5 m)of any fire hydrant. Fire hydrants shall be accessible at all times. 3.11 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally reuse, salvage, recycle, or dispose of materials. B. Storage of materials to be removed not permitted to accumulate on site. Promptly remove and dispose of unsalvageable equipment and materials. C. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on roofs, floors, or in areas outside of and around any buildings being removed. Waste materials and debris resulting from Work shall be removed and disposed of daily by Contractor in disposal area obtained by Contractor. D. Burning of waste lumber and other building materials or trash on Site will not be permitted. E. No material, obstructions, or debris shall be placed or allowed to accumulate within 15'of any fire hydrant. Fire hydrants shall be accessible at all times. 3.12 PATCHING A. Patch openings in walls, foundations, and checker plating caused by demolition. Use materials comparable to adjacent undisturbed surfaces for patching. B. Any new construction work that affects existing building structures shall be patched to match existing surrounding materials. This includes roofing, walls, walks, flooring ceilings, and any other materials that affect structural or architectural integrity of building. 23209.03.00 DEMOLITION ms1222 SECTION )2 41 00-Page 7 3.13 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to personnel, public, roadways, streets, structures, utilities, facilities, and equipment caused by operations and shall repair any damage at its own expense or replace items damaged beyond repair. B. Do not operate vehicles or equipment on existing construction or roadways that could be damaged. C. Backfill applicable excavated areas, open pits, and other depressions as work progresses. Backfill materials shall conform to requirements of Drawings and other specification sections D. Grade areas disturbed by construction to smooth, uniform surfaces sloped to drain. E. Replace construction removed to facilitate operations with construction of equal quality to that removed. 3.14 CLEAN-UP A. Maintain public streets, alleys, or other thoroughfares used in carrying out disposal free of litter or soil attributable to this operation. Equip and load trucks or other vehicles to prevent leakage, blowing off, or other escape of any portion of whatsoever is being hauled. Cost incurred by Owner in cleaning up such litter will be charged to Contractor and deducted from monies due or to become due it under this contract. B. Upon completion of demolition work in each area, thoroughly clean area of materials not to remain. C. Remove materials (except paint)adhered to construction to remain. D. Leave areas in broom clean and vacuumed condition. END OF SECTION 1) H.A. Day 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 CJNCRETE WORK ms1222 SECTION 03 00 10 -Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete including formwork, reinforcing steel and miscellaneous materials. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS — A. Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit for each type of product provided under work of this Section: B. Quality assurance data: 1. Tests, or certificates of compliance with standards specified in this Section at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placement for: a. Cement: From each car from which cement will be used. b. Fly ash: From each separate shipment from which fly ash is being used. c. Aggregates: For each size aggregate from each source of aggregate, for grading, deleterious substances and soundness. 2. List of admixtures,joint fillers, sealants, curing compounds, and other manufactured materials proposed identifying manufacturer and type. Provide data on specific items when requested by Owner. 3. Testing laboratory reports required at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placement for each class of concrete and each size aggregate: a. Proposed concrete design mix. b. Tests on concrete cylinders from trial batch of proposed mix. 4. Testing laboratory reports for tests on concrete cylinders taken in field. C. Submit to Engineer unless noted otherwise. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings on reinforcing steel. Submit to Engineer unless noted otherwise. B. Show bending details, lap lengths, quantities and similar items in addition to rebar layout. C. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by Engineer for conformance to reinforcing bar material, size and spacing only. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Obtaining, making samples and trial batches and performing laboratory testing specified. 2. Establish proposed concrete design mix proportions on basis of either field experience and/or trial mixtures in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5, except specific requirements shall conform to requirement of these specifications. Determine and submit supporting data, standard deviation, trial batch tests, required average strength, proportions, air content, and slump range for each mix. 3. Provide reports to Owner giving information on materials, concrete design mixes and testing performed. B. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 117 and 301. C. Ow er-ENGINEER shall retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Obtaining, making samples and performing laboratory and field testing specified. 2. Provide reports to Owner giving information on materials and testing performed 3. Reports shall indicate whether or not materials meet specifications. CONCRETE WORK 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 03 00 10 ms1222 4. Concrete strength tests: a. Comply with ASTM C39/C39M for testing and ASTM C31/C31 M or C192/C192M for preparation of cylinders. b. Field tests: Sample in accordance with ASTM C172; make and test 3 cylinders from each sample on basis of not less than: 1) One sample from each day's placement for each class of concrete. 2) One sample from each 150 cu yd (120 cu m). 3) One sample for each 5,000 sq ft(460 sq m)of surface area for slabs or walls. 4) For a given class of concrete, if frequency of testing specified above would provide less than 3 samples, sample at least 3 randomly selected batches or each batch if 3 batches or fewer are required. c. Cylinders shall be laboratory cured. Test one laboratory cured cylinder at 7 days and other two at 28 days for average strength. d. If tests indicate deficient strength as defined by ACI 318, Contractor shall immediately adjust mix to increase average of subsequent test results and,when directed, perform drilled core testing, ASTM C42/C42M. Testing and remedial work shall be at no additional cost to Owner. 5. Slump tests: a. Test each batch as delivered. Comply with ASTM C172 and C143/C143M. b. If slump exceeds Specifications, promptly remove batch from Work and dispose of off-site at location selected by Contractor. Do not add water in excess of specified water-cement ratio to batch to achieve desired slump. 6. Air content tests: a. Sample on basis specified above for field strength tests. b. Obtain samples from concrete at point of discharge from chute or pumper hose. c. Determine air content by pressure method; comply with ASTM C231. d. If air content does not meet Specifications, remove deficient concrete from Work. 7. Temperature tests: a. Sample on basis specified above for field strength tests. b. Comply with ASTM C1064/C1064M. c. If temperature does not meet Specifications, remove deficient concrete from Work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cement: Keep clean, dry, and free from weather damage. B. Aggregates: Stockpile each gradation separately on clean, noncontaminating surface. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Types I and 11. B. High-early-strength portland cement: ASTM C150, Type III. May be used instead of Type I or II cement at Contractor's option, unless specified otherwise, to achieve 28-day strength at 7 days. Do not use in concrete where least dimension of concrete section exceeds 3'-0"(900 mm). C. White cement: Nonstaining,ASTM C150, Type I. D. Use only 1 brand of each type of cement. E. Slag cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C989; Grade 100. 2. Recycled content: Minimum 20% pre-consumer recycled content at Contractor's option. 2.02 AGGREGATE A. Regular aggregate: Strong, durable, well-graded minerals conforming to ASTM C33 requirements for grading, deleterious substances and soundness. 23209.03.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1222 SECTION 03 00 10-Page 3 B. Aggregates not conforming exactly to above specifications may be used provided: 1. Special tests or actual service establish that such aggregates will produce concrete of quality specified. 2. An Addendum to Specifications is issued prior to receipt of Bids; no deviations will be permitted after receipt of Bids. C. Coarse aggregate nominal size: 1. 1-1/2"to No. 4 (38 mm to 4.75 mm): Use for all concrete unless specified otherwise. 2. 3/4"to No. 4 (19 mm to 4.75 mm): Use for slabs and thin sections and areas where clear spacing between reinforcing bars is less than 3" (75 mm). 2.03 FLY ASH A. Comply with ASTM C618 including Supplementary Optional Physical Requirements in Table 3. Report chemical analysis of fly ash in accordance with ASTM C311. Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D5759. B. Recycled content: Minimum 20% pre-consumer recycled content at Contractor's option. C. Fly ash for total Project shall be obtained from single source. D. Design concrete mixes to include fly ash in amount of approximately 15%to 20%of cement by weight. E. May be used at Contractor's option for all concrete. 2.04 WATER _ A. Clean,fresh, free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, acid, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Mix water shall comply with ASTM C1602. 2.05 ADMIXTURES A. Water-reducing and set-controlling admixture,ASTM C494/C494M, type as required Use for all concrete. B. Air entraining agent, ASTM C260. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use for all concrete. 2.06 REINFORCING A. Bars: 1. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (420) deformed bars. 2. Bend bars cold to conform to required details. B. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185 plain wire or ASTM A497 deformed wire in flat sheets. 2.07 FORMWORK A. Wood forms: 1. Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood, 5/8" (15 mm)thick minimum, conforming to DOC PS 1, Grade B-B, Class I or II. 2. Removable metal forms with surfaces equal to Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood. 3. Fiber tube forms: Cylindrical fiber reinforced forms. 4. Sheathing: As specified in Section 06 16 00. B. Plastic forms; plastic lumber: As specified in Section 06 60 00. C. Form ties: Type leaving no metal within 1"(25 mm) of finished surface after removal of forms. CONCRETE WORK 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 03 00 10 ms1222 D. Form coating: 1. Wood forms: Nonstaining mineral oil or commercially produced form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and curing, and will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces, "Nox-Crete Form Coating,"by Nox-Crete Chemicals, or equal. 2. Metal forms: Treat surfaces as recommended by manufacturer before placing reinforcing. 3. Fiber tube forms: Treat surfaces as specified for wood forms or as recommended by manufacturer. 2.08 JOINT MATERIALS A. Expansion and isolation joint filler: Preformed nonextruding and resilient bituminous type,ASTM D1751; use for electrical buildings. B. Expansion and isolation joint sealant: 1. Horizontal joints: "Sonolastic SL2,"multi-component polyurethane base by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 2. Vertical joints: "Sonolastic NP-2," multi-component polyurethane base by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 3. Provide primer as recommended by manufacturer. C. Sawed control joint sealant: 1. "Masterfill 300,"2-part flexible 100% solids epoxy joint filler, by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 2. Use for sawed control joints. 2.09 WATERSTOPS A. Polyvinyl chloride: 1. Conform to COE Spec. CRD-C-572. 2. Manufacturer: Greenstreak,Vinylex Corp., or equal. B. Rubber: 1. Conform to COE Spec. CRD-C-513. 2. Manufacturer: Greenstreak; Williams Products, Inc., or equal. C. Shop-fabricate intersection and change-of-direction waterstops. 2.10 BENTONITE WATERSEALS A. Size: 1"x 3/4"(25 mm x 19 mm). B. Use: Where specifically shown. Waterseals not permitted as substitute for PVC waterstops specified and shown. C. Manufacturer:American Colloid Company"Waterstop-RX Cold Joint Water Stop Volclay Waterproofing Systems,"or equal. 2.11 CURING MATERIALS A. Liquid membrane-forming compound: 1. ASTM C309, Type 1 with fugitive dye, except Type 2 with white pigment for surfaces exposed to direct rays of sun. 2. Do not use compounds containing wax, oil, resin, varnish, or other bases that will prevent bonding of finishes*such as floor coverings, tile, additional concrete, paint, and similar applied finishes.* 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for particular application. 23209.03.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1222 SECTION 03 00 10-Page 5 B. Plastic film: 1. Polyethylene plastic film, white, nonstaining, conforming to ASTM D2103. 2. Minimum 4-mil (0.1 mm) thickness. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for particular application. C. Absorptive mat: 1. Cotton fabric, burlap fabric, or burlap-polyethylene material woven or bonded to prevent separation. 2. Material shall be clean and nondetrimental to concrete or finish. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for particular application. 2.12 GROUT A. Regular grout: 1. One part portland cement to 3 parts fine aggregate with sufficient water to maintain adequate workability. Substitute white cement for normal portland cement to match color of adjacent concrete. 2. Minimum strength: 4,000 psi (28 Mpa) at 28 days. 3. Use for patching. B. Nonshrink grout: 1. Nonmetallic and free of chloride, gypsum or corrosive-type materials;ASTM C1107, Grade C; formulation suitable for application. 2. Minimum strength: 5,000 psi (34.5 Mpa) at 28 days. 3. Use for grouting beneath baseplates, bearing plates, equipment bases, and whe-e shown. 2.13 CONCRETE DESIGN AND USE A. Each concrete design mix shall be established in strict accordance with ACI 318 by proportioning on basis of either experience and/or trial mixtures. B. Strength classifications: Class Specified Compressive Required Average Strength, fc Compressive Strength, fcr A 4,000 psi 5,200 psi B 2,500 psi 3,500 psi C 3, 000 psi 4, 200 psi Class Specified Compressive Required Average Strength, fc Compressive Strength, fcr A 28 MPa 36.4 Mpa B 17.5MPa 24.5M a C 20.7 MPa 29.4 Mpa C. Required average compressive strengths: Produce concrete of average strengths noted above unless test results substantiate a lower permissible average strength based on standard deviation criteria set forth in ACI 318. Strengths listed above are 7-day strengths for concrete using high-early-strength cement and 28-day strengths for concrete using other type cements. D. Maximum water-cement ratio: 0.45 by weight except for Class B concrete. Where pozzolan fly ash is used, water-cement plus pozzolan ratio shall not exceed specified ratio. E. Air entrainment: Concrete shall contain entrained air within following limits. CONCRETE WORK 23209.03.00 Page 6- SECTION 03 00 10 ms1222 Nominal Maximum Size of Total Air Content,% By Coarse Aggregate, In. Volume 3/4" 4 to 8 1-1/2" 3 to 6 Nominal Maximum Size of Total Air Content,% By Coarse Aggregate, mm. Volume 19 4to8 38 3to6 F. Workability: 1. Proportions of concrete shall produce a mixture, suited to placement methods,which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and embedded items. Segregation of materials or presence of free water will not be permitted. 2. Slump of concrete: Use minimum practical; vary within limits given to suit placement conditions; in no case is slump to be increased by addition of water in excess of design mix quantity: Type of Construction Slump, in. Minimum Maximum All concrete unless noted otherwise 2 5 Building columns 3 5 Type of Construction Slump, mm. Minimum Maximum All concrete unless noted otherwise 50 125 Building columns 75 125 G. Concrete use: 1. Class A: Use for all concrete unless specified otherwise. 2. Class B: Use for fill concrete and thrust blocks. 2.14 READY-MIX CONCRETE A. Provide concrete from an established, approved ready-mix plant. Ready-mix plant equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with NRMCA QC-3. B. Equipment and methods: Conform to ASTM C94/C94M. 2.15 FINISHED CONCRETE A. Mix design: Comply with ASTM C595. 2.16 ACCESSORIES A. Curing compounds, sealers, and coatings: Water-based. B. Isolation joints: Rubber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Construct forms strong, straight, adequately braced and securely fastened. 23209.03.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1222 SECTION 03 00 10-Page 7 B. Install vapor barrier where shown or specified. Lap and tape seams per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Remove laitance from previously placed or existing concrete; thoroughly clean surface before placing additional concrete. D. Apply form coating on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. E. Do not apply form coating where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive applied coverings which may be affected by agent. 3.02 PLACING CONCRETE A. Clean transporting equipment, reinforcing, and embedded items before placing concrete. Remove water and debris from places to be occupied by concrete. B. Place no concrete until forms, reinforcing, and embedded items have been verified as adequately supported and accurately placed. Place no concrete over water-covered, muddy, or frozen soil. - C. Immediately remove concrete where water, soils, or other deleterious substances are permitted to mix with concrete, form or embedded item movement occurs, or inadequate consolidation is obtained. D. Hot weather concreting: 1. Applies to concrete placed when ambient temperature exceeds 90°F (32°C). 2. Conform to ACI 305R recommendations and requirements. E. Cold weather concreting: 1. Applies to concrete placed when ambient temperature is below 40°F (4°C). 2. Conform to ACI 306R recommendations and requirements. 3. If temporary heating facilities used are of type which produce an atmospheric condition of high carbon dioxide content, seal off concrete in such manner that no damage will result to concrete surface. F. Employ best industry practices to prevent segregation during placing. Do not drop concrete more than 5' (1500 mm). Use tremied or pumped concrete to provide proper placement. Place in layers approximately 18"(450 mm)deep. G. Place concrete continuously in each section until completed. Permit not more than 3)minutes between depositing adjacent layers of concrete within each section, unless an acceptable set retarder is used in concrete mix. - H. Thoroughly compact, puddle, and vibrate concrete into corners and around reinforcing and embedded items. Use internal vibration where size of section permits. I. Maintain concrete placing temperature between 50°F(11°C) and 90°F (32°C)except as specified for hot and cold weather concreting. J. Place sections of concrete in sequence that eliminates shrinkage effects to greatest extent practicable. K. Protect concrete from injury due to sun, cold weather, running water, construction operations, and other causes until properly cured. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Remove scale, loose flaky rust, dirt, grease, curing compound, and other coatings that would impair bond. CONCRETE WORK 23209.03.00 Page 8-SECTION 03 00 10 ms1222 B. Install slab-reinforcing bars in correct position by use of preformed bolsters and spacers, except concrete blocks may be used to position bars in concrete placed on grade. Concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of surrounding concrete. C. Space bars properly and tie securely in position before placing concrete. Tack welding to keep reinforcing in place is not permitted. D. Lap wire fabric not less than 8"(200 mm). E. Welding of reinforcing bars: Conform to AWS D1.4. F. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Install only where shown or where specifically permitted. B. Provide keyway 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep covering approximately 1/3 area of construction joint, unless shown otherwise. C. Install waterstop where shown or specified. D. Location where not shown: 1. Contractor shall locate joints using the following guide for Owner's Representative's review. 2. Near center of self-supported slabs, beams, and girders unless beam intersects girder at this point, in which case joints in girders shall be offset a distance equal to twice beam width. 3. Underside of deepest beam at walls and piers. 4. At other places least likely to impair strength and appearance. 5. Provide additional shear reinforcement where requested by Owner's Representative. 6. Maximum pour unit shall be less than 50' (15 m) in any dimension unless specified otherwise. E. A delay, until concrete is no longer plastic, shall occur after placing concrete for columns or walls before placing concrete for slabs, beams, or girders supported thereon. F. Slabs-on-grade: Place concrete in continuous side-by-side strips. Saw-cut control joints as soon as possible after concrete hardens. 3.05 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS A. Formed joints: Make exposed edge of concrete slightly rounded with edger at joints to contain joint sealant. B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Set preformed material securely in place before placing concrete. C. Install joint filler to within joint width (1/2" (12 mm) minimum)of exposed surface. Fill remainder of joint with joint sealant. 3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Install items required under this contract to be embedded in concrete. Install items required by others for embedding in concrete, if so instructed before placing concrete. B. Fasten embedded items securely in proper position before placing concrete. C. Conduit or pipe embedded in slabs or walls: 1. Locate in center of slab or wall and space not closer than 3 diameters on center; locate to avoid impairing strength of concrete. 23209.03.00 CONCRETE WORK _ ms1222 SECTION 03 00 10 -Page 9 2. Coordinate placing of reinforcing with conduit or pipe location. Do not cut reinforcing to clear conduit or pipe. D. Aluminum pipe shall not be embedded in concrete. Where aluminum projects into or rests against surface of concrete, coat surfaces of aluminum to prevent direct contact with concrete. 3.07 WATERSTOPS A. Hold securely in proper position by tying with wire, clamping between members, or other method to - prevent waterstop from being moved out of position or bent over due to placement of concrete. B. Join ends by heat-sealing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.08 GROUTING A. Roughen concrete surfaces by light chipping to remove laitance to approximately 1/2"(12 mm). Do not expose reinforcing steel. B. Remove materials which might interfere with bond; prepare surfaces in strict conformance to manufacturer's instructions. C. Mix, place, and cure grout in strict accordance to manufacturer's instructions. D. Remove shims after grout is placed. Fill shim voids with grout. 3.09 FINISHING - A. Flatwork: 1. Tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate down from surface. 2. Screed with straightedge, eliminate high and low places, bring surface to required finish elevations; slope uniformly to drains. 3. Dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing operations is not permitted. 4. Apply curing compounds and similar materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during or after finishing. 5. Finish surfaces within following tolerances as measured with a 10' (3 m)straightedge: a. Sidewalks: 5/16" (8 mm). b. Other slabs: 3/16"(5 mm). c. Top surfaces of structures other than slabs: In accordance with ACI 117. 6. Float finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane. b. Float second time to uniform finish with wood or cork float; use edger on exposed edges. c. Use on slabs. *equipment foundations and tops of structure foundations.* 7. Roughened finish: a. Roughen surface with rake or stiff broom to minimum depth of 1/4" (6 mm). b. Use on surfaces to receive additional concrete or grout. 8. Broomed or belted finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane. b. Steel trowel to smooth, uniform surface. c. Broom with fiber brush or drag burlap belt across surface in direction transverse to traffic flow. d. Use on sidewalks, paving, and exterior slabs at door entrances. B. Formed surfaces: 1. Remove fins, projections, and loose material. 2. Clean surfaces of form oil. 3. Patch honeycomb, aggregate pockets, voids, and holes as follows: a. Chip out until sound concrete is exposed to minimum depth of 1" (25 mm). b. Prepare patching mortar with approximately 2 parts normal portland cement, one part white cement, 9 parts fine aggregate; vary proportions of cement as necessary to match color of adjacent concrete. CONCRETE WORK 23209.03.00 Page 10 -SECTION 03 00 10 ms1222 c. Saturate surfaces with water and fill cavities with patching mortar. 4. Fill holes left by form ties with patching mortar. 5. Cure patches as specified for concrete. 3.10 FORM REMOVAL A. Minimum time before removal after placing concrete, unless permitted otherwise: 1. Footings: 24 hours. 2. Walls, piers, and columns: 48 hours (24 hours for metal-lined forms). 3. Self-supported beams and slabs: 14 days. 4. Time specified above represents cumulative time during which temperature of concrete is maintained above 50°F (11°C) and for concrete without set-controlling admixtures. B. Reduce removal time by half for high-early-strength cement concrete. C. In any event, do not remove supporting forms and shoring until concrete has acquired sufficient strength to safely support own weight plus construction loads. D. Take care when removing forms that concrete is not marred or gouged and that corners are true, sharp and unbroken. E. Reshoring and backshoring: Conform to requirements of Section 2, ACI 301. 3.11 CURING A. Cure all concrete; begin curing as soon as possible after placement of concrete. B. Use of liquid membrane-forming curing compound permitted for all concrete except where product would impair bond of other applied materials to surface, where surface curing and sealing product is specified for use, or where other method of curing is specified for particular use. C. Plastic film curing: 1. Dampen surface of concrete and lay plastic film with minimum 6" (150 mm)side laps and free of wrinkles; tape side laps. 2. Hold film in place with lumber or use similar provisions to prevent exposure of concrete for 7 days after placing. 3. Immediately repair tears in film. D. Water curing: 1. Keep concrete continuously wet for 7 days after placing. 2. Use on concrete surfaces not receiving compound or plastic film curing. 3. Clean, nonstaining absorptive mat may be used with water curing. 4. Do not use for curing cold weather concrete. 3.12 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Formwork: Reuse forms to greatest extent possible without damaging structural integrity of concrete and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete. B. Mixing equipment: Return excess concrete to supplier; minimize water used to wash equipment. C. Moisture curing: Prevent water run-off. D. Hardened, cured waste concrete: Hardened, cured waste concrete may be crushed and reused as fill or as base course for pavement. END OF SECTION 1) L. H. Badtram 2) C. S. Phillips 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY ms1222 SECTION 04 05 00-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Masonry mortar. B. Masonry grout. C. Anchorages and reinforcements. D. Masonry cavity wall drainage system. E. Accessories. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Anchorage system for field conditions not specified. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Certificates of compliance for reinforcing. 2. Certified laboratory tests for compressive strength of mortar and grout mixes shall be submitted for review prior to commencement of masonry work, unless approved mix as specified is used. C. Field test reports. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings showing concrete masonry unit(CMU)wall reinforcing. Drawings shall show elevation view of each wall, identifying following: 1. Reinforced CMU cells and reinforcing bar size. See Drawings. 2. Locations of bond beams and reinforcing. 3. Locations of horizontal reinforcing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry construction and materials shall conform to requirements of"Specifications for Masonry Structures(ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602),"published by ACI. B. Testing laboratories: 1. Engineer will retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory. Responsibilities of testing laboratory will include: a. Field sampling and testing of mortar and grout. b. Obtain, make samples, and trial batches of mortar and grout(if required)anc perform laboratory and field testing specified. c. Special Inspection in accordance with IBC 1704.5 for portions of CMU construction identified on Drawings as requiring Special Inspection. d. Provide reports to Engineer giving information on inspections, materials, des gn mixes, testing performed and test results. e. Reports shall indicate whether materials meet specifications. f. Bind reports in one volume at end of Project and give 2 copies to Engineer. 1.05 STORAGE A. Cement and lime: Keep clean, dry, free of contact with ground and protect from weather damage. -- B. Aggregate: Stockpile on clean, noncontaminating surface. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 04 05 00 ms1222 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. At temperatures below 40°F (4°C), heat, but do not scorch, sand; heat mixing water to not over 160°F (71°C) and keep mortar and grout between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C). Maintain temperature of mortar and grout above freezing. B. When mean daily air temperature is 40°F (4°C)or below, completed masonry shall be protected in accordance with Section 04 20 00. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -GENERAL A. Water: Potable, clean, free from deleterious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, and organic matter. B. Do not use admixtures to lower freezing point. C. Air content of mortar and grout shall not exceed 12%. D. Use same brand of each different proprietary material throughout Project. 2.02 MORTAR A. Proportions and strength: ASTM C270"Proportion Specifications." Proportions shall be as indicated in Table 1. Table 1 Mortar Parts by Volume Part by Volume Aggregate Measured in a Compressive Type Portland Cement Hydrated Lime Damp Loose Condition Strength, minimum (psi) M 1 1/4 Not less than 2-1/4 and 2,500(17.2 mPa) S 1 Over 1/4 to 1/2 not more than 3 times 1,800(12.4 mPa) sum of volumes of N 1 1 Over 1/2 to 1-1/4 cements and limes used 750(5.2 mPa) B. Use portland cement-lime mortar. No masonry cement allowed. C. Use no admixtures, salts, or anti-freeze compounds. D. Use Type S mortar for other unreinforced and reinforced masonry work. E. Preblended mortar: Cementitious materials and aggregate shall be blended at factory under controlled conditions, and mix shall only require addition of water of job Site. F. Mixing: 1. Accurately measure mortar materials by volume. 2. Mix sand, lime, and cement dry to uniform color using drum-type mixer. 3. Add water to bring mortar to proper consistency for use. 4. Mix for at least 3 minutes after adding water. 5. Thoroughly clean mixer after discharging each batch. 6. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing and discard mortar not used within this time. 7. Mortar may be retempered by adding water and remixing at any time within 2 hours after initial mixing. G. Use same brand of each different proprietary material throughout Project. H. Color: To be selected after award of Contract. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULT FOR MASONRY ms1222 SECTION ;)4 05 00-Page 3 2.03 GROUT A. Type: Fine or coarse, at Contractor's option, complying with mix proportions and ins,,allation requirements of IBC. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Manufacturers and products listed are for reference purposes. Equivalent products by other manufacturers are acceptable. B. Horizontal joint reinforcing: 1. Exterior walls: Dur-O-waL standard 9-gage (3.8 mm)side rods with 9-gage (3.8 rnm)cross rods of hot-dipped galvanized steel (1.5 oz psf) (0.045 g/cm2). 2. Types: a. Sing le-wythe walls: Dur-O-waL"Truss"D/A 310. b. Multiple-wythe walls(cavity construction): Dur-O-waL"Ladur-Eye," D/A 360 c. Miscellaneous anchors: For field conditions not specifically identified, provide proper anchoring system meeting above conditions regarding galvanizing and fasteners. 3. Provide prefabricated corner and "T' intersection units for use at corners and load bearing wall intersections, and other special shapes as needed. C. Reinforcing bars: Deformed, 60,000 psi (414 mPa) minimum yield strength conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60. 2.05 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Through-wall flashing: "Perm-a-Barrier"wall flashing, self-adhesive, cold-applied sheet consisting of 32 mils (0.8 mm)of rubber-bonderized asphalt integrally bonded to 8-mil (0.2 mm), high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film. Use in conjunction with"Bituthene Mastic"and "Perm-a-Barrier" surface conditioner. W. R. Grace and Company, or equal. B. Drip edge flashing: 26-gage (0.5 mm)stainless steel. 2.06 MASONRY CAVITY WALL DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Construction, cavity wall: Open mesh weave 10" (250 mm) high x cavity width. "Mortar Net" drainage system by Mortar Net. B. Use: Where shown on Drawings. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Control joints: Preformed rubber material; "Rapid Control Joint," by Dur-O-waL. B. Joint filler: "Polyseal" precompressed self-expanding polyurethane foam impregnated sealant tape, adhesive on one side, sized to suit joint conditions, by Sandell Manufacturing Co., or equal. C. Building paper: Asphalt-saturated felt. D. Weep holes: "Cell Vent" by Dur-O-waL, D/A 1006, or equal. Size to fit vertical brick Dints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT A. Conform to ASTM C270 for mortar and ASTM C476 for grout, except as otherwise specified herein. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 04 05 00 ms1222 B. Accurately measure materials, using mechanical measuring device or other method that will consistently maintain specified proportions by volume. C. Mix mortar and grout with a maximum amount of water consistent with satisfactory workability. D. Mix in drum-type mixer for at least 3 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. Mortar or grout that has stiffened due to evaporation of water shall be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency and shall be used and placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. Empty drum completely before starting new batch. 3.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16" (400 mm)oc. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend 30" (750 mm)minimum each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6"(150 mm). E. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement. Maintain position within 1/2" (13 mm)of true dimension. F. Veneer anchors: Fasten veneer anchor ties at maximum 16"(400 mm) oc vertically and 24" (600 mm)oc horizontally. Place at maximum 8"(200 mm)oc each way around perimeter of openings. G. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with prefabricated corner and 'T' intersection joint reinforcing. 3.03 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Through-wall flashing: Install stainless steel drip flashing 2"(50 mm)wide with 1/2"(13 mm)drip set at 45'angle. Set in place and then lap self-adhesive wall flashing over drip flashing. B. Extend wall flashings through veneer, turn up minimum 8"(200 mm) and bed into mortar joints of masonry back-up. - C. Extend wall flashings up one masonry course to form flashing dam at end of wall flashings. Seal all penetrations through flashings watertight. D. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations. E. Lap end joints minimum 6" (150 mm)and seal watertight. F. Use adhesive recommended by flashing manufacturer. G. Calk underside of drip flashing. 3.04 WEEP HOLES A. Install in vertical brick joints at 24" (600 mm)oc maximum above through-wall flashings. 3.05 MORTAR CAVITY WALL DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations above through-wall flashings. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULT S FOR MASONRY ms1222 SECTION 04 05 00-Page 5 3.06 LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS A. Construct loose steel lintels as shown on Drawings. B. Construct masonry lintels and bond beams in accordance with details shown on Drawings. Maintain minimum 8"(200 mm) bearing on each side of opening. C. Bond beams shall be continuous except where shown on Drawings. At control joints and expansion joints one side of reinforcing steel shall be installed in plastic conduit to allow for slippage. D. Use reinforcing bars of one-piece lengths only. E. Place and consolidate grout fill without disturbing reinforcing. F. Allow lintels to reach 3,000 psi (20.7 mPa) compressive strength before removing temporary supports. G. At bearing points, fill wall masonry cores with grout minimum 12"(300 mm)from opening. 3.07 CONTROL JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across control joints. B. Install resilient control joint in continuous lengths. Heat or solvent weld butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Seal exposed sides of control joints. Size depth of joint in accordance with Section 07 90 00 for sealant performance. D. Where control joint intersects lintel bearing, provide bond breaker. 3.08 FIELD TESTING -MORTAR AND GROUT A. During construction, perform 1 test of mortar for each 5,000 sq ft(465 m2)of wall area. Test in accordance with ASTM C780. B. During construction, perform 1 test of grout for each 5,000 sq ft(465 m2) of grouted wall area. Test in accordance with ASTM C1019. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209,03.00 UNIT MASONRY ms1222 SECTION 04 20 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units. B. Decorative units. C. Mortar, grout, and masonry accessories. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance data: 1. Certificates of compliance for masonry units. 2. Field tests as specified. 3. Test reports for face brick units indicating compliance with ASTM standards,type, grade, and physical requirements. Samples submitted shall be accompanied with current test data verifying that sample will meet 24-hour cold water absorption test of below 6%. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Four samples of decorative units. Submit samples to mockup size as indicated in article "Mockup"to clearly illustrate texture and color range. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Masonry construction and materials shall conform to all requirements of"Specificaticns for Masonry Structures(ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602)," published by the American Concrete Institute. B. Testing laboratories: 1. Engineer will retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory. Responsibilities of testing laboratory will include: a. Perform inspections and laboratory and field testing specified. b. Special Inspection in accordance with IBC 1704.5 for portions of CMU construction identified on Drawings as requiring Special Inspection. c. Provide reports to Engineer giving information on inspections, materials, testing performed and test results. d. Reports shall indicate whether materials meet specifications. e. Bind reports in one volume at end of Project and give 2 copies to Engineer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units in dry location on plank platforms of adequate size. Platform must prevent absorption of moisture from ground. B. Completely cover masonry units with waterproof tarpaulins, polyethylene sheet, or other waterproof material. Loose plank covering not allowed. Units shall be in air-dry condition before placement. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold weather requirements: IMIAWC Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. In addition, the following shall apply: 1. Temperature of masonry units shall be not less than 20°F (-7°C)when laid in masonry. Remove visible ice on masonry units before unit is laid in masonry. 2. Heat mortar sand or mixing water in accordance with Section 04 05 00. 3. Install wind breaks when wind velocity is in excess of 15 mph (24 kph). UNIT MASONRY 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 04 20 00 ms1222 4. Where mean daily temperatures are between 40°F (4°C) and 32°F (0°C), protect completed masonry from rain or snow by covering with weather resistive membrane for 24 hours after construction. 5. Where mean daily temperatures are between 32°F (0°C) and 25°F (-3°C), completely cover completed masonry from rain or snow by covering with weather resistive membrane for 24 hours after construction. 6. Where mean daily temperatures are between 25°F(-3°C) and 20°F (-7°C), maintain masonry temperature above 32°F (0°C)for 24 hours after construction by enclosure with supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, by infrared heat lamps, or by other acceptable methods. 7. Where ambient temperatures are below 20°F(-7°C), provide an enclosure for masonry under construction and use heat sources to maintain temperatures above 32°F (0°C)within enclosure. B. Protect masonry work prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Recycled content: Minimum 5% post-consumer recycled content, or minimum 20% pre-consumer recycled content at Contractor's option. B. Hollow units: Two-cell per unit. Provide all units by same manufacturer. 1. Load-bearing and exterior nonload-bearing units: ASTM C90. 2. Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33. 3. Nominal face measurements 8"x 16"(200 mm x 400 mm)with depth as shown on Drawings. 4. Minimum strength as specified. C. Decorative units: ASTM C90. 1. Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33. 2. Design: - a. Split-face units. b. "Scored block"with vertical scores in exposed face; 1 score per block equally spaced, square and 3/8" (10 mm)wide x 3/8"(10 mm)deep. 3. Color: Selected after award of Contract. 4. Minimum strength: As specified. D. Provide special units for 90' corners, bond beams, and lintels. E. Minimum compressive strength (average of 3 units): 1,900 psi (13 mPa) based on net area when tested according to ASTM C140. 2.02 MORTARS, GROUTS,ACCESSORIES A. Portland cement: 1. Fly ash: a. Comply with ASTM C593. b. Recycled content: Minimum 5% post consumer recycled content, or minimum 20% pre-consumer recycled content at Contractor's option. 2. Slag: a. Comply with ASTM C989; Grade 80. b. Minimum 5% post consumer recycled content, or minimum 20% pre consumer recycled content at Contractors option. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Concrete masonry units: Do not wet down units prior to laying. Units shall be dry when laid. 23209.03.00 UNIT MASONRY ms1222 SECTION 04 20 00-Page 3 B. Verify that all reinforcing, anchors, dowels, lintels, flashings, and other built-in items are on hand, of proper size, and locations established. C. Verify embedded items and inserts are properly sized and located. _.. D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.02 COURSING A, Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. C. Lay concrete masonry units in one-half running bond. Course one block unit and mortar joint to equal 8"(200 mm). Form concave mortarjoints. 3.03 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full and properly jointed with other Work. Buttering corners of joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints not permitted. B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners. C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. D. Perform job site cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Do not break masonry unit corners or edges. E. Cut mortar joints of masonry units flush where cavity insulation is applied. 3.04 CAVITY WALL A. Do not let mortar fall into cavity air space or plug weep holes; clean out promptly. B. Install "mortar net" into cavity air space at base of wall above through-wall flashing and where - indicated. C. Install weep holes in veneer at 24"(600 mm) oc horizontally above through-wall flashing. D. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation applied using full coating of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. E. Close off cavity around door, window, and other openings. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Alignment of pilasters: maximum 1/4" (6 mm) from true line. B. Variation from unit to adjacent unit: 1/16" (1.5 mm)maximum. C. Variation from plane of wall: 1/4" in 10' (6 mm in 3 m) and 1/2"in 20' (13 mm in 6 m)or more. D. Variation from plumb: 1/4"(6 mm) per story noncumulative; 1/2" (13 mm) in two stories or more. UNIT MASONRY 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 04 20 00 ms1222 E. Variation from level coursing: 1/8" in 3' (3 mm in 1 m); 1/4"in 10' (6 mm in 3 m); 1/2" (13 mm) maximum. F. Variation of joint thickness: 1/8" in 3' (3 mm in 1 m). G. Maximum variation from cross sectional thickness of walls: 1/4"(6 mm). 3.06 BUILT-IN WORK A. As Work progresses, install metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, insulation, anchor bolts, plates, and other built-in items into Work. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry cores with mortar minimum 12"(300 mm)from framed openings. 3.07 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit masonry as necessary to accommodate installation of electrical outlets, conduits, plumbing pipes, built-in anchors, lintels, etc., and other work for all trades as required. Coordinate with other Work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Properly seal all openings required by other trades after their installation by means of foamed-in insulation. C. Notify Engineer prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During construction, perform 1 prism test for each size of block wall for each 5,000 sq ft(464 m2)of wall area. Test in accordance with ASTM C1314. Net area compressive strength of masonry prism shall be 1,500 psi (10.3 mPa). B. Inspection: Omit every sixth horizontal block at locations where there is through-wall flashing. Install block after inspection of cavity by Owner. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean exposed surfaces with cleaning solution not harmful to masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. D. Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations. E. Waste management: 1. Mixing equipment: Minimize water used to wash equipment. 2. Broken, waste masonry units: May be used as nonstructural fill if approved by Engineer. 3. Cured, crushed waste mortar: May be used as non-structural fill if approved by Engineer. 4. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program. Set aside packaging to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. 3.10 PROTECTION 23209.03.00 UNIT MASONRY ms1222 SECTION 04 20 00-Page 5 A. Protect finished installation. B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work. C. Keep expansion and expansion-contraction joint voids clear of mortar. D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of concrete block work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. E. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work. Comply with governing codes and with"Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction by Brick Industry Association (BIA). - Extend covering at least 2'(600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold securely in place. F. Prevent mortar or soil from staining face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. G. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar. H. At end of each day's work, cover tops of walls with building paper or by other means to protect wall from becoming excessively wet. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 METAL. FABRICATIONS ms1222 SECTION 05 50 00 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A, Miscellaneous aluminum, steel, and stainless steel. B. Anchor bolts. C. Adhesive anchors. D. Mechanical anchors. E. Masonry anchors. F. Welded studs. G. Handrails and guardrails. H. Ladders. I. Grating. J. Checkered plate. K. Aluminum hatch. L. Manhole steps and covers. M. Shop painting. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: List of manufactured materials proposed, identifying manufacturer anc type, B. Quality assurance data: ICC-ES evaluation reports for anchor rods and expansion anchors provided to verify conformance to specifications. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for miscellaneous steel and aluminum. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code"and AWS D1.2"Structural Welding Code-Aluminum,"and AWS D1.6 Structural Welding—Stainless Steel as applicable. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous steel plates and shapes: 1. WT shapes:ASTM A992/A992M, Grade 50 ASTM A36/A36M. 2. L shapes:ASTM A36/A36M. 3. Plates:ASTM A36/A36M. 4. Structural pipes:ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B METAL FABRICATIONS 23209.03.00 Page 2—SECTION 05 50 00 ms1222 B. Miscellaneous aluminum plates and shapes: Type 6061-T6,ASTM 13209/13209M or B211/B211M. Weld in conformance to requirements of AWS D1.2 and AA"Specifications for Aluminum Structures." C. Miscellaneous stainless steel: ASTM A240/A240M Type 316. D. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M. E. Standard bolts:ASTM A307. F. High-strength bolts:ASTM A325/A325M, Types 1 or 3. G. Aluminum bolts: Anodized alloy 2024-T4. 2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Material: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. B. Provide anchor bolt assemblies for: 1. Structural steel furnished under this Section. 2. Equipment and structures furnished by others,where detailed on Drawings. C. Provide washers and heavy hexagon heads and nuts on anchor bolts unless specified otherwise. D. Do not prime paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete. Galvanize anchor bolts, nuts and washers. E. Installation of anchor bolts under Division 03. F. Provide double nuts for anchor bolts used for installation of machines and other equipment subject to vibration. 2.03 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. Threaded rods anchored in concrete with 2-component blend of resin and hardener. Filler material may be mixed with resin and hardener in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Anchor rod system shall have ICC approval for use in cracked concrete and for seismic conditions and shall have passed mandatory creep tests requirements of AC 308. C. Threaded rod type: 1. All-threaded. 2. Standard(use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized. 3. High-strength: ASTM Al93/A193M, Grade B7, galvanized. 4. Stainless steel: ASTM F593 (AISI 304). D. Manufacturer: "HIT-RE 500-SD System"by Hilti, or equal. 2.04 MECHANICAL ANCHORS A. Torque controlled wedge-type with expanding cone or undercut anchor. B. Size and locations: As shown or required for equipment installation. C. Anchors shall be ductile, Category 1, and approved for use in seismic applications, cracked and uncracked concrete and shall have ICC approval in accordance with AC 193. D. Type(as indicated on Drawings): 1. Expansion anchor: Strong-Bolt Wedge Anchor by Simpson Strong-Tie, or equal. a. Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): carbon steel with electroplated zinc. 23209.03.00 META- FABRICATIONS ms1222 SECTION 05 50 00-Page 3 b. Stainless steel. 2. Undercut anchor: "HDA Undercut Anchors" by Hilti or equal. a. Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): carbon steel with zinc coating. b. Stainless steel. 2.05 MASONRY ANCHORS A. Masonry anchor bolts: 1. All-threaded. 2. Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings):ASTM F1554, Grade 36, galvanized. 3. Stainless steel: Threaded ASTM F593 (AISI 304) 4. Provide washers and heavy hexagon heads and nuts on anchor bolts unless specified otherwise. B. Solid-core masonry anchors (anchored in grout-filled or solid masonry): 1. Use unless masonry anchors are noted on Drawings as"Adhesive Hollow Masonry Anchors." 2. Type: a. Adhesive anchor: "HIT HY-150 MAX Adhesive System"by Hilti, or equal. 1) Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized. 2) Stainless steel: ASTM F593 (AISI 304). b. Mechanical expansion anchor: "Kwik Bolt 3"by Hilti, or equal. 1) Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): Hot-dip galvanized steel. 2) Stainless steel. 3. Fill hollow core masonry cells with grout where anchors will be installed. C. Adhesive hollow masonry anchors: 1. Manufacturer: "HY-20 Adhesive System"by Hilti with screen; or equal. a. Standard rod (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings):ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized. b. Stainless steel rod: Threaded ASTM F593 (AISI 304) 2. Use for nonstructural anchoring of light weight equipment or where specifically identified for use on Drawings. Resulting anchor loads shall be less than manufacturer's allowable loads. 3. Maximum load on hollow masonry anchor shall not exceed 100 lb(45.4 kg) shear or 50 lb (22.7 kg)tension. 2.06 WELDED STUDS A. Material: ASTM A108. B. Type: "Nelson Fluxed Headed Anchor Studs," by Nelson Stud Welding Division, or equal. C. Automatically end weld in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 STEEL HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS A. Material: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B or ASTM A501. B. Use steel pipe for rails and uprights. C. Connections: Weld and grind smooth. D. Bend pipe at corners; do not miter pipe. E. Provide removable rails where shown. F. Conform to details shown on Drawings. 2.08 STEEL LADDERS A. Conform to details shown on Drawings. METAL FABRICATIONS 23209.03.00 Page 4—SECTION 05 50 00 ms1222 B. Provide self-closing gates with ladders unless specifically noted otherwise on Drawings. C. Rung type: Steel, 4-row, 13-gage(2.3 mm)tread-grip (with end notching for fit-up with ladders utilizing pipe rail) by Morton Manufacturing Co., or equal. D. Provide safety cages as shown on Drawings. 2.09 ALUMINUM LADDERS A. Material: Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6, anodized. B. Provide self-closing gates with ladders unless specifically noted otherwise on Drawings. C. Rung type: Aluminum, 0.125"(3.2 mm), 4-row, tread-grip(with end notching for fit-up with ladders utilizing pipe rail)by Morton Manufacturing Co., or equal. D. Conform to details shown on Drawings. 2.10 STEEL GRATING A. Use welded rectangular grating conforming to standards of NAAMM. B. Size of bearing bars: 1-1/4"x 3/16"(32 mm x 4.8 mm)at 1-3/16"(30 mm) oc, unless shown otherwise. C. Make sections removable; limit weight of each section to not more than 150 lb (68 kg). D. Provide saddle clip fasteners for each removable section of floor bar grating supported on structural steel members. E. Provide edge binding at exposed edges and as required to stiffen irregular sections. Provide openings shown. Provide joints at center of openings where possible to permit removal of grating around items passing through. F. Openings not shown but required for piping and other items passing through grating will be cut and edge bound in field. G. Grating, plates welded to grating, and grating saddle clips shall be galvanized. 2.11 ALUMINUM GRATING A. Material: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6 or 6061-T6. B. Use pressure-locked rectangular grating conforming to standards of NAAMM. C. Bearing bars: 1-1/4"x 3/16"(32 mm x 5 mm)at 1-3/16"(30 mm)oc, unless shown otherwise. D. Crossbars: Rectangular cross-section, flush at top with bearing bars and spaced 4"(100 mm) oc. E. Main bars: Dovetail slotted; slots solidly filled by cross bars. F. Make sections removable; limit weight of each section to not more than 150 lb (68 kg). G. Provide galvanized saddle clip fasteners for each section of floor bar grating supported on structural members. 23209.03.00 METkL FABRICATIONS ms1222 SECTION 05 50 00-Page 5 H. Provide edge binding at exposed edges and as required to stiffen irregular sections Provide openings shown. Provide joints at center of openings where possible to permit removal of grating around items passing through. I. Openings not shown but required for piping and other items passing through grating will be cut and edge bound in field. 2.12 STEEL CHECKERED PLATE - A. Material: ASTM A786/A786M, pattern shall be similar to Figure 2, Pattern No. 5, 1/4"(6 mm)thick. B. Provide stiffener angles at checkered plate joints welded to one plate and fastened to the other. Provide stiffener angles, bars or other supports to limit deflection to 1/300 of span using a live load of 50 psf(2.4 kPa) as basis for calculating deflection. C. Make floor plate sections removable; weight of each section not more than 150 lb(68 kg). D. Provide 2 holes, slotted, round ends, 3/4"x 1-1/2" (19 mm x 38 mm),for lifting each section of floor plate; ream holes to remove burrs. Use lift handles where indicated on Drawings. 2.13 ALUMINUM CHECKERED PLATE A. Material: Alloy 6061-T6, pattern tolerances in accordance with AA"Aluminum Standards and Data"; 1/4" (6 mm)thick unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. B. Provide stiffener angles at checkered plate joints welded to one plate and fastened to other plate. Provide stiffener angles, bars or other supports to limit deflection to 1/300 of span using a live load of 50 psf(2.4 kPa) as basis for calculating deflection. C. Make floor plate sections removable; weight of each section not more than 150 lb(68 kg). D. Provide 2 holes, slotted, round ends, 3/4"x 1-1/2" (19 mm x 38 mm), for lifting each section of floor plate; ream holes to remove burrs. Use lift handles where indicated on Drawings. 2.14 ALUMINUM HATCH A. Type: Floor door access hatches, Type"K." B. Door: 1. 1/4"(6 mm) aluminum diamond plate, reinforced with aluminum stiffeners as needed. a. Open to 90' and lock automatically in position. b. Withstand live load of 150 psf(7.3 kpa)and equip with lock and removable handle. 2. Frame: 1/4"(6 mm) extruded aluminum with built-in neoprene cushion and strap anchors. 3. Finish: Mill finish, with bituminous coating applied to portions of exterior of frame in contact with concrete. C. Manufacturer: The Bilco Co., or equal. 2.15 MANHOLE STEPS AND COVERS A. Manhole steps: 1. Material: ASTM A536. 2. Cast iron by Neenah Foundry Company, or equal, Catalog No. R-1980-M. B. Manhole covers: 1. Material: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35. 2. Type: Gray cast iron, slab-type, single-lid, double hinges and lifting handle. Installed cover shall be capable of withstanding 1-ton (790 kg) concentrated load. METAL FABRICATIONS 23209 03 00 Page 6—SECTION 05 50 00 ms1222 3. Complete with frame, lid, and required accessories. 4. Shop coat cover assembly with manufacturer's standard shop finish. 5. Manufacturer: Neenah Foundry Company, or equal. 2.16 FACTORY FINISHING A. Conform to requirements of Section 05 10 00 except use of"Power Tool Cleaning"for handrails, guardrails, ladders, checkered plate, and grating is permitted. B. Surface preparation: Remove oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign elements by "Power Tool Cleaning" in accordance with SSPC-SP3. C. Shop primer: Apply one shop coat of: 10 Rust Inhibitive Primer,"by Tnemec Co., or equal; apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions including recommended coverage. Coordinate color with Owner for steel not receiving finish coatings. D. Shop primer: Apply one coat of"90-97 Tnemec-Zinc,"by Tnemec Co., Inc. or equal; apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions including recommended coverage. E. Omit shop prime coat from surfaces subject to field welding or to be embedded in concrete. F. Omit shop prime coat from galvanized surfaces, stainless steel, aluminum and from surfaces which are to receive gunite. G. Leave unpainted steel clean and free from rust. H. Finishing system: 1. Toxicity: Solvent coating systems not permitted. Electroplated coating systems not permitted. 2. Anticorrosive paint: Comply with GS-03. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Anchor handrails, guardrails, ladders, and miscellaneous items securely to structural steel framing, concrete or masonry. B. Fasten each section of grating to structural steel. C. Bolt stair treads to stair stringers. D. Field weld studs to members if required by state or local regulations. In absence of regulations, Contractor may exercise option as to attachment of studs in shop or field. 3.02 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Install embedded anchor bolts as shown on Drawings. B. Coat threaded portion of anchor bolts with oil or grease and wrap with protective tape at time bolts are positioned for new construction. Tape shall remain in place until bolts are secured. 3.03 ADHESIVE ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE MASONRY ANCHORS A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Perform work using manufacturer's standard equipment including adhesive cartridges, dispensing guns, mixer tubes and extensions, brush, and air nozzle for compressed air cleaning of holes. 23209.03.00 METAL FABRICATIONS ms1222 SECTION 05 50 00-Page 7 Contractor shall possess equipment at site prior to start of installation and workers shall demonstrate knowledge of procedure for installing anchors prior to installation. C. Use hammer drill except where holes are within 6"(150 mm) of edge of concrete or masonry, core drill holes. D. Inspect existing concrete and masonry at anchor locations for soundness. Report to Engineer cracked, deteriorated or weak concrete or masonry detected from drilling operation o-from inspection. — 3.04 MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND MECHANICAL MASONRY ANCHORS A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Use manufacturer's installation equipment. 3.05 ALUMINUM HATCH INSTALLATION A. Fasten hatch securely in place. B. Completely assemble hatch with inside-outside operable handles, lifting and hold-open mechanism, hinges, and necessary hardware for complete operation. C. Unit shall be operable upon completion of installation. D. Location: In floors where shown on Drawings. 3.06 FIELD PAINTING A. Apply one field coat of primer to cleaned surfaces of bolts, new welds and abrasions to shop coat after erection. B. Do not paint aluminum, stainless steel, or galvanized steel work. C. After erection, repair hot-dip galvanized coatings in accordance with ASTM A780. T-iis includes surfaces where shop-applied galvanized coatings have been damaged, removed, or omitted. D. Field finish painting: As specified in Section 09 90 00. END OF SECTION 1) L. H. Badtram 2) C. S. Phillips 23209.03.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY ms1222 SECTION 06 10 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood framing, plates, nailers, grounds, and furring. B. Fire retardant treatment. C. Preservative treatment. D. Rough hardware and accessory materials. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Source quality control submittals: 1. Wood preservative treatment data: Submit certification by treating plant, indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Fire retardant treatment data: Submit certification by treating plant, indicating ccmpliance with specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/fuel/smoke ratings. B. Lumber: Comply with PS-20-70. Provide lumber species grade marked and complying with grading rules of following associations: 1. Southern pine: 1977 Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber, published by Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. Douglas fir, Western larch and hemlock: Western Lumber Grading Rules, 91 published by Western Wood Products Association (WWPA), or Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber, Number 16, 1989, published by West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 3. Western spruce, pine, and fir: Western Spruce-Pine-Fir Association (WSPFA)and current Canadian Grading Rules by National Grades Association Canada. C. Plywood: Grade marked and manufactured in accordance with PS-1-83 or one of APA/EWA-APA- The Engineered Wood Association performance standards. D. Fire retardant treatment shall conform to requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Keep materials dry and undamaged during delivery and site storage. Protect against weather exposure and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack rough carpentry materials t:)ensure proper drainage and ventilation. Protect from weather damage and deterioration. B. Store and protect rough carpentry accessories and hardware from weather damage and deterioration. C. Store shop-fabricated items indoors in well ventilated area with temperature and humidity stabilized and maintained at minimum of 60°F (16°C)temperature and maximum of 60% humidity. ROUGH CARPENTRY 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 06 10 00 ms1222 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Nominal lumber sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS-20-70 for moisture content specified for each use. 2. Provide dressed seasoned dimensioned lumber, S4S, air-dried with maximum 19% moisture content(S-DRY). 3. Provide pressure preservative treated materials for material used at exterior of buildings. 4. Grades: Southern Pine or Western Lumber species. a. Furring, blocking and bracing: Utility. b. Studs, 10' (3,000 mm) and shorter: Stud 5. Exposed framing lumber 2" (50 mm)through 4"(100 mm)thick: Where framing will not be concealed by other work, provide Southern pine, appearance grade or Douglas fir, appearance framing. B. Plywood: 1. Concealed performance-rated panels. 2. Provide in thickness indicated on Drawings, if not indicated, not less than 1/2"(13 mm)thickness. 3. Roof sheathing: APA/EWA-rated sheathing EXP 1, span rating 48/24, square edge. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Rough hardware: 1. Provide bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete, masonry, or wood structures. 2. Provide manufactured or fabricated items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. 3. Bolts: ASTM A307. Provide with double washers. Furnish sill plate anchor bolts for installation under Section 03 30 00. 4. Steel: ASTM A36. 5. Fasteners and anchorages: Provide size, type, material, and finish required for nails, screws, bolts, nuts,washers and anchoring devices. Provide hot-dip galvanized finish for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application. B. Metal connectors: Galvanized steel hangers, ties and anchors. Provide 16 or 18 gage (2 mm or 1 mm) materials sized for full load carrying capacity of supported members. C. Building paper: ASTM D226 asphalt saturated felt, nonperforated. D. Plywood sheathing clips: Extruded 6063T6 aluminum alloy. E. Sill sealer: 1"(25 mm)thick x width required fiberglass blanket sill sealer. 2.03 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood preservative treatment: Sodium silicate. 1. For interior or exterior applications, including ground contact. 2. Framing lumber and plywood pressure-and heat-treated with sodium silicate. 3. Manufacturer: Timber Treatment Technologies"Timber SIL,"or equal. B. Fire-retardant treatment: 1. Type: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development rating of 25/25/25. 2. Provide UL-approved identification on fire-retardant treated materials. 23209.03.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY ms122.2 SECTION 06 10 00-Page 3 3. Kiln dry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 19% moisture content for lumber and maximum 15%for plywood. 4. Deliver fire-retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Only end cuts, drilling holes, and joining cuts permitted. 5. Fire-retardant wood shall meet interior Type A requirements in AWPA Standard C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood. 6. Location: Where shown on Drawings. 7. Manufacturer: Arch Wood Protection, Inc., "Dricon" FRT, or equal. - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set carpentry work accurately to required lines and levels with members plumb, true and accurately aligned, cut and fit. Work shall be performed in conformance with good trade practice, recommendations of manufacturer, building codes and specifications. B. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required to support applied loading, in accordance with recognized standards. 1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts. - 2. Use fasteners of proper size that will not penetrate members where opposite sicse will be exposed to view or receive finish materials. 3. Do not drive threaded friction type fasteners. 4. Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation and retighten as required. - 5. Nails, screws, and bolts used in connection with preservative treated wood shall be galvanized. C. Provide treated wood grounds, nailers, blocking, sleepers, and furring where required for screeding or attachment of other work and surface applied items. Attach to substrate as required to support applied loading. 1. Material: Framing lumber. 2. Nominal size: Match adjacent framing lumber, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. - 3. Extent of Work: Provide roofing, sheet metal flashing and trim, doors, building equipment, and mechanical and electrical work; verify exact locations. 3.02 FRAMING, PLATES, NAILERS, AND BLOCKING A. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown and frame openings to comply with International Building Code, latest edition. Cut,join, and tightly fit framing around o-ner work. Do not splice structural members between supports. B. Use only sound thoroughly seasoned materials of longest practical lengths and sizes to minimize joints. Use materials free of warp, unless warp can be easily corrected by anchorage and attachment. Make tight connections between members. Discard units with defects which might impair quality of work and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Anchor and nail framing to comply with International Building Code, latest edition. D. Provide treated sill plates where wood framing is supported by concrete construction. Install exterior wall sill plates over single layer of sill sealer. Anchor to embedded bolts. E. Set studs at spacing shown on Drawings. Unless otherwise shown, use 2"x 4" (50 mm x 100 mm) wood studs spaces 16" (400 mm)o.c.with 4"(100 mm)face placed perpendicular to direction of wall or partition. Provide single bottom plate; double top plates, 2" (50 mm)thick by width of studs. Double studs at sides of framed openings. F. Erect wood framing members level and plumb. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side-up. Construct framing members full length without splices. ROUGH CARPENTRY 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 06 10 00 ms1222 G. Bolting of wood to structural members of masonry shall be, in general, with a minimum of 1/2" (13 mm) bolts at 4'-0"(1,200 mm) oc except where shown otherwise. Situations requiring special bolting shall be with size and spacing of bolts to suit conditions. H. Install wood plates, blocking,furring, and nailing grounds as indicated and required. Coordinate work with other trades. I. Work shall be well fitted and securely fastened in proper location with nails, screws, or other approved fastening devices. 3.03 SHEATHING AND BACKING PANELS A. Install plywood sheathing where indicated. Comply with International Building Code, latest edition, for types of plywood products and applications indicated. 1. Install with face grain across supports, using panels continuous over 2 or more spans with end joints between panels staggered and located over center of supports. 2. At minimum, fasten 6" (150 mm)on center along panel ends and 12"(300 mm) on center at intermediate supports for spans less than 48"(1,200 mm) using 6d common nails. 3. Allow 1/8"(3 mm)open space between end joints and edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels. 4. Provide roof sheathing ply-clips at unsupported joints of panels between roof framing members. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean up debris and cutting on regular periodic basis. Remove and dispose of excess materials and debris created by carpentry work. B. Maintain buildings and site free of accumulations of cutting and waste materials in neat orderly condition. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 SHOP-FABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD ms1222 SECTION 06 17 00-Page 1 PART11 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood trusses. B. Wood preservative. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's instructions: Installation of lateral bracing. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings showing truss framing plans; species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stresses; force analysis of each member; pitch, span, and spacing of trusses; gage thickness, nominal sizes and locations of connectors at joints; bearing and anchorage details; framed openings; and permanent bracing and bridging. B. Shop Drawings shall bear seal of professional engineer, licensed in State of Iowa. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber used in manufacture of trusses: Grade stamp clearly visible, by an agency certified by American Lumber Standards Committee(ALSC). B. Design and fabrication criteria for wood trusses shall meet: 1. "National Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings"by National Forest Products Association (NFPA). 2. "Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate-Connected Wood Trusses" by Truss Plate Institute. 3. "Timber Construction Standards" by American Institute of Timber Construction. 1.05 STORAGE A. Store trusses off ground on wood sleepers. B. Cover trusses to prevent accumulation of dirt and exposure to moisture. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Alpine Structures Div.,Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. B. Gang-Nail Systems, Inc. C. Truss Joist MacMillan, for TJI Joists. D. Louisiana Pacific. 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design criteria: 1. Design trusses under direct supervision of licensed professional engineer experienced in structural design of prefabricated structural wood members. 2. Structural design shall include dead and live loads, and wind and seismic loads (both lateral and vertical) in combinations causing critical design stresses. SHOP-FABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 06 17 00 ms1222 3. Design shall consider combined effects of bending, shear, and axial loads where appropriate. 4. Engineered wood products shall be custom designed to fit dimensions and loads specified. 5. Design headers and other framing to provide openings for stairs, chases, equipment, etc. as required. 6. Design for dead loads and for live,wind, and seismic loads shown on Drawings. Include 7 psf collateral load on bottom of member. B. Spacing of roof framing: 24" (600 mm), unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Accessories: Provide miscellaneous parts, including bridging, temporary and permanent bracing, and related items of hardware, metal hangers, anchors, and special metal shapes necessary for proper prefabrication, erection, assembly, supporting, and anchoring of structural wood products. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Lumber: PS-20. Stress-graded in accordance with ALSC. Maximum moisture content of 19%. B. Connector plates: ASTM A653/653M, G90 galvanized sheet steel, die-stamped with integral teeth; minimum 20-gage (1 mm)thickness. C. Wood preservative: 1. Type: CCA, clear paintable, glueable, noncorrosive. 2. Kiln dry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 19% moisture content. 3. Pressure treat trusses exposed to weather and wood in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Manufacturer: "Wolmanized" pressure-treated wood, or equal. D. Lateral support: Recommended by truss manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Ensure members are accurately cut to length, angle and true to line to ensure tight joints. B. Shop-apply primer to connectors and gussets. Allow to dry thoroughly before installing. C. Floor joists shall be manufactured in plant approved for fabrication by building code and under supervision of approved third-party inspection agency. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Each floor joist shall be identified by stamp indicating joist type, NER report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and independent inspection agency's logo. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Set and secure wood trusses level, plumb, and in correct locations. B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold trusses in place until permanently secured. C. Ensure truss ends have sufficient bearing area. D. Install permanent bracing and bridging prior to application of loads. E. Cutting and altering of members not permitted. F. Brush apply 2 coats of wood preservative: 1. On members in contact with sheet metal work. 23209.03.00 SHOP-FABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD ms1222 SECTION 06 17 00-Page 3 2. On members in contact with cementitious materials. 3. Ensure sawn ends are protected. END OF SECTION 1) M. A.Westlake 2) L. H. Badtram 23209.03.00 THERMAL INSULATION - ms1222 SECTION 07 21 00 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES _. A. Rigid board insulation. B. Flame-resistant fiberglass insulation. C. Attic rafter vents. D. Adhesive materials and accessories. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site bearing original labels. B. Store materials as recommended by manufacturer in dry, enclosed area free from c-,)ntact with soil and weather. C. Handle materials in a manner to prevent damage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Rigid board insulation: 1. Type: Extruded polystyrene meeting ASTM C 578, Type IV. 2. Minimum compressive strength: 24 psi (165 kPa),ASTM D1621. 3. Water absorption by volume: 0.1% maximum,ASTM C272. 4. R-value: 6.5°F-ft2-h/Btu per inch, minimum, at 75°F (24°C) mean temperature,ASTM C518 and warranted by manufacturer to retain at least 90%of its published R-value for 15 years. 5. Thickness, foundation walls: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Thickness, cavity walls: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Use: Where shown on Drawings. B. Flame-resistant fiberglass insulation: 1. Type: Preformed fiberglass batts faced with Foil-Scrim-Kraft(FSK)facing,ASTM C665, Type III, Class A, and fire hazard classification of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Use: Where shown on Drawings. 2.02 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor and air barrier: Translucent polyethylene film for above grade application; 6-mil thick. B. Nails or staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application. C. Tape: Type and size to suit application. D. Protective covering: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Attic rafter vents: Extruded polystyrene, Owens-Corning "Raft-R-Mate." THERMAL INSULATION 23209 02.00 Page 2 -SECTION 07 21 00 ms1222 F. Insulation fasteners.- 1. Mechanically fasten to surface to receive rigid insulation. 2. Length to suit insulation thickness. 3. Capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesives. B. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb and fins, irregularities and materials that will impede adhesive bond. C. Verify insulation boards are unbroken and free of damage. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Foundation perimeters: 1. Install boards on foundation perimeter with long dimension horizontal. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding. Staggerjoints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. B. Cavity walls: 1. Secure insulation to masonry wall with either impale fasteners or full bed adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement. 3. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent boards and seal all edges to form an effective air barrier. C. Fiberglass insulation: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on Drawings without gaps or voids. 2. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. 3. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. 4. Apply factory-applied facing to warm side of room. 5. Where separate vapor barrier is indicated, place on warm side of room. 6. Properly install vapor barriers. 7. Extend vapor barriers tight to full perimeter of adjacent openings and other items interrupting plane of membrane. Tape seal in place. D. Attic rafter vents: Install between each rafter. END OF SECTION 1) M. A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 ROOFING ANE SIDING PANELS ms1222 SECTION 07 40 00 -Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standing seam metal panel roof system, related flashing, and accessory components. B. Metal soffit panel system, and accessory components. C. Insulated metal fascia panels. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data indicating method of anchorage and installation. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings indicating dimensions, panel layout, and construction details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory-finished metal coating system shall carry a 20-year film and color life warranty. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty. B. Finish: 20-year nonprorated covering panel finish. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Petersen Aluminum Corporation, or equal. B. Products referenced in this Section are manufactured by Petersen Aluminum Corporation, unless specified otherwise. 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Loads: Provide exterior panel systems capable of resisting wind pressures acting Eoth inward and outward as determined by International Building Code, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wind up lift: Roof-panel assembly shall comply with UL 580 for UL 90 rated assemblies. C. Static air infiltration: In accordance with ASTM E283. D. Water infiltration: In accordance with ASTM E331. E. Fasteners holding together various elements of building panels shall be designed to withstand design load requirements set forth in these Specifications. F. System shall accommodate movement of components without buckling,failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects, when subject to seasonal tempera-ure ranges. ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS 23209 03 00 Page 2-SECTION 07 40 00 ms1222 2.03 ROOF AND SOFFIT PANELS A. Roof panel: "Pac-Clad Snap-On Panels," uninsulated, standing-seam profile metal panel. 1. Design: 22-gage, G90 hot dipped galvanized steel. 2. Panel dimensions: 18"(450 mm)wide x 1"(25 mm) high manufactured in continuous lengths. 3. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard high performance concealed fastener clip system for UL 90 assemblies. 4. Finish: "Pac-Clad" Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating applied over epoxy-type prime coat. Provide 20-year warranty against fading, peeling, and chalking. 5. Color: Selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors after award of contract. B. Fascia panel: 1. "Versawall" insulated metal panel, 2" (50 mm)thick, by Centria, or equal. 2. Face sheets: 26-gage, G-90 galvanized steel. 3. Surface texture: Planked. 4. Finish: Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating applied over epoxy-type prime coat. Provide 20-year warranty against fading, peeling, and chalking. 5. Color: Selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors after award of contract. C. Soffit panel: 1. "PAC-750", 0.032 aluminum, 12"(300 mm)wide with center"Vee"groove. 2. Provide panels with half vent construction. 3. Finish same as roof panels. 4. Color: Selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard. 5. Provide"J" channel trim in matching color. D. Fascia, trim, closure panels, and flashings; inside and outside: Same material and finish as respective inside and outside elements of panels. E. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard for applicable use. Exposed fasteners shall be gasketed-type with finish to match panel. F, Underlayment: ANSI/ASTM D226; No. 30 unperforated asphalt felt. G. Waterproofing underlayment: Self-adhesive, minimum 60 mil thick, fiberglass-reinforced with SBS- modified asphalt, complying with ASTM D1970 and UL-approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to receive metal panels and notify Engineer in writing of any defects. B. Starting of work by Contractor shall constitute acceptance of work of others as satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of metal panel system shall be performed under experienced supervision and in strict accordance with Shop Drawings and manufacturer's recommended procedures. B. Roof panels shall be set plumb and true to line as indicated on Drawings with work properly centered and well secured to adjoining construction, in such manner as to be rigid and watertight. Attachment to structure shall be by approved fastening method. 1. Erect panels to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4"(6 mm) in runs of 20' (6 m). 2. Fittings shall have laps of sufficient width to make work watertight. 3. Limit use of exposed fasteners to extent indicated in manufacturer's data and instructions with fasteners driven and tightened full depth to head. 23209.03.00 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS ms1222 SECTION 07 40 00-Page 3 4. Anchor component parts securely in place, providing for necessary thermal and structural movement without undue distortion or overstressing of any component. 5. Roof panels shall transition into side walls as indicated on Drawings. Transition to form a continuous seam line with concealed flashings. C. Install soffit panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Install metal trim members, flashings, and similar accessory items straight and plumb, level and true, securely fastened, and sealed in place as recommended by panel manufacturer. Trim member lengths as long as practical, with joints concealed or located in unobjectionable places. Fittings shall have laps of sufficient width to make work watertight. E. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint, concealed, on 1 or both surfaces wherever dissimilar metals would otherwise be in contact to eliminate possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals. F. Install sealants at joints and where sheets adjoin other work, as shown or required to achieve wind and watertight condition with work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Calking shall include head,joint, and sill members where panel meets structure Perimeter calking shall also include such items as door frames, windows, and other penet-ations occurring within system. 2. Make lap joints in flashing watertight with 2 beads of sealant. 3.03 CLEANING A. After installation has been completed, Contractor shall thoroughly clean metal components, interior and exterior, exposed surfaces in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Cleaning procedures shall be in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's recommendations. B. Work that is damaged or defective shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Installed work shall be carefully protected against disfiguration, contamination, or damage by mechanical abuse or contact with other harmful materials. Wherever exposure to damage is critical, provide protective cover or barriers. END OF SECTION 1) M. A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL ms1222 SECTION 07 60 00-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Miscellaneous closure and trim flashings not supplied as part of roof panel system. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings describing material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication and installation of the work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. B. Prevent contact with materials during storage that may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's finish coating warranty for prefinished sheet metal. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aluminum sheet: ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, temper as required for forming and performance,with factory-painted finish color, gage indicated. B. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A526, G90 commercial quality or ASTM A527, G90, lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20% copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting, not less than 0.0396" (1 mm)thick, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fasteners: Provide same metal as sheet metal or other noncorrosive compatible metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with materials being fastened. D. Bituminous coating: Solvent-type bituminous mastic. E. Metal accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar a cessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material installed, non-corrosive, size and thickness as required for performance. F. Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 15 Type I unperforated asphalt roofing felt. G. Slip sheet: FS UU-B-790, Type 1, Style 1 b, rosin-sized building paper, 5 lb per square, single-ply. 2.02 FLASHING A. 0.025"(0.64 mm) aluminum. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 07 60 00 ms1222 C. Accessories: Provide as necessary, including prefabricated corners. 2.03 PREFABRICATED PIPE SEAL A. Spun aluminum base with 5" (125 mm)flange and PVC boot. B. Type: 1. Uninsulated pipes from 1/2"to 2-1/2" (13 mm to 63 mm) nominal: PPS-3". 2. Uninsulated pipes from 3"to 5" (75 mm to 125 mm) nominal: PPS-6". 3. Uninsulated pipes from 6"to 10" (150 mm to 250 mm) nominal: PPS-12". C. Manufacturer: Pate Company"Pipe Seal." 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING A. Type: Base flashing, counterflashings, and miscellaneous flashings as shown on Drawings. B. Material: 0.032"(0.80 mm) aluminum; 24-gage (0.60 mm)galvanized steel; same finish as adjacent construction. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fastener: Stainless steel, aluminum, or galvanized steel. Finish exposed fasteners same as adjacent construction. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2" (13 mm); miter and seam corners. C. Weld aluminum seams. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. B. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure Site conditions prior to fabricating Work. B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners where exposed to view. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Surfaces to receive sheet metal shall be plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, dry and free from defects and projections that might affect application. Installation of items not shown in detail or not covered by Specifications shall meet applicable requirements of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 23209.03.00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL ms1222 SECTION 07 60 00-Page 3 B. Provide expansion joints as required to permit normal expansion and contraction of sheet metal work to prevent buckling and wrinkling. C. Neatly form seams straight throughout. D. Install flashings in manner to provide for expansion and contraction to provide weathertight joint and avoid straining of metal,joints, or fasteners. E. Surfaces to receive flashing shall be smooth, even, and free from defects. Remove dirt, mortar, and foreign objects from surfaces receiving flashing before installation. F. Drive nail heads flush with metal. G. Separate aluminum from contact with electrolytically dissimilar materials by 2 coats Df alkali-resistant bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer on contact surfaces. _. H. Fasteners shall be compatible with type of metal fastened and capable of holding ite-MS securely in place. I. Separate sheet metal work from dissimilar metals, treated wood, and cementitious materials. Provide roofing felt underlayment and rosin-sized paper slip-sheet over treated wood surfaces. J. Provide bead of silicone sealant across lapped joints placed 1"(25 mm)from exposed edge of joint. K. Position and fasten pipe seals assemblies in place. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove strippable film protection coating and clean exposed prefinished metal surfaces. Touch-up exposed edges and damaged coated surfaces with manufacturer's color matched touch-up paint. B. Clean exposed metal surfaces. Remove substances that may cause corrosion of metal and deterioration of finishes. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 ROOF HATCHES — ms1222 SECTION 07 72 33-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment hatches. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Bilco Co. B. Milcor, Inc. C. Nystrom. D. Products referenced in this Section are manufactured by The Bilco Co., unless noted otherwise. 2.02 EQUIPMENT HATCHES A. Type: "D"double-leaf roof scuttle, with flange modified with built-in configuration for metal roof system. B. Size: 6'-0"x 6'-0" (1820 mm x 1820 mm). C. Curb height: 12"(300 mm) high with 3-1/2" (89 mm)flange. D. Curb: 14-gage(1.9 mm), G90 paint bond galvanized steel with 1" (25 mm) rigid insulation; modify flange to accommodate metal roofing system, with built-in self-drainage feature efirrinating water accumulation on up-slope side. E. Cover: 14-gage(1.9 mm), G90 paint bond galvanized steel with 1" (25 mm)concealed glass fiber insulation retained by 18-gage(1.0 mm)aluminum inner liner, internally reinforced for 40 psf - (195 kg/mz) live load. Continuous neoprene or EPDM gasket to provide weatherproof seal. F. Hardware: 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard, manually operated with compression spring operators, with automatic hold-open arms. 2. Positive snap latch with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasp inside. 3. Automatic hold-open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release. 4. Finish: Cadmium-plated. G. Hinges: Manufacturer's recommended type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate free of visual distortions and defects. Weld corners and joints. B. Provide for removal of condensation. C. Provide weathertight assembly. ROOF HATCHES 23209 03 00 Page 2-SECTION 07 72 33 ms1222 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings. Provide weathertight installation. B. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION 1) M.A.Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 JCINT PROTECTION ms1222 SECTION 07 90 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants. B. Joint cleaner, primers and sealers. C. Sealant joint backing materials and accessories. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of joint sealer and accessory material required. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Sealant colors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide each type of joint sealer required produced by one manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged and labeled containers. B. Store, handle and protect materials from damage or contamination from foreign materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply joint sealants as late as possible in construction, preceding application of pa nting and following cleaning operations. B. Do not apply joint sealants during inclement weather conditions or when temperature is above or below manufacturer's limitations for installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Contractor and joint sealant applicator shall jointly warranty elastomeric joint sealants work for 2 years from date of final acceptance. B. Warranty shall include replacing joints which fail to perform as airtight; or fail in adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration and stain .esistance or general durability. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS -- A. BASF, Building Systems(Sonneborn Products). B. Pecora Corp. C. Tremco, Inc. JOINT PROTECTION 23209 03 00 Page 2- SECTION 07 90 00 ms1222 D. Dow Corning Corp. E. General Electric Co., Silicone Products Div. F. Products referenced in this Section are manufactured by BASF Building Systems (Sonneborn Products), unless noted otherwise. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Polyurethane, 3-component: 1. Type: "NP-2." 2. Color: To be selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors after award of contract. 3. Use: Sealant work unless specified otherwise. B. Silicone.- 1. Type: "Omniseal50." 2. Color: To be selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors after award of contract. 3. Use: Glazing installations and where indicated. C. Expanded foam sealant tape: 1. Open cell foam material, pre-compressed with self-adhesive one side for abovegrade applications, by EMSEAL, or equal. 2. Select tape appropriate for installation conditions for use as either shadow line or secondary backer system. 3. Size sealant tape to suit joint size and expansion requirements. 4. Use: Where shown on Drawings. 2.03 JOINT CLEANER AND PRIMER A. Provide type of cleaning compound recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint surface to be cleaned. B. Joint primer: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with sealant and sealant backing. 2.04 SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer; nonbonding to sealant and adjacent surfaces. B. Nonstaining and fully compatible with sealant material. C. Size: To fit joint width in compression, as recommended by backing manufacturer. D. Where joint design or depth will not permit use of backer rod, provide adhesive backed polyethylene bond breaker tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install joint sealer materials and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install sealant backer rod, except where recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application indicated. Use rod diameter that will cause compression when installed. C. Make joints watertight and airtight. 23209.03.00 JOINT PROTECTION - ms1222 SECTION 07 90 00-Page 3 D. Apply sealer materials using handguns or pressure equipment with proper nozzle size. Apply joint sealants in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete"wetting"of joint bond surfaces on both sides. Fill sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.At horizontal joints between horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joist to form slight cove, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt. Hand tool and finish all joints. E. Apply bond breaker as required or as recommended by sealant manufacturer. F. Install joint sealants within recommended temperature ranges and to depths indicated or when not indicated, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage. Clean soiled surfaces immediately. Replace damaged material that cannot be properly cleaned with new materials. 3.02 SCHEDULE _ A. Calk nonmovement general interior joints with acrylic latex calk. B. Calk perimeter of bathtubs, backsplashes of kitchen and bathroom countertops wit,i sanitary sealant. C. Install sealants at other locations shown, with sealant appropriate for application. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ms1222 SECTION 08 11 13-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hollow metal doors and frames. B. Frame anchors. — 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings indicating door and frame elevations and sections, materials, gages and finishes, fabrication and erection details, locations of finish hardware by dimension and locaticns/details of openings and louvers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Hollow metal distributor shall be qualified by manufacturer of products to be furnished, and have in their regular employment, a knowledgeable person who will be available at reasonable times to consult with Engineer, Contractor, and Owner regarding matters affecting door and frame openings. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped, crated, palletized or otherwise protected during transit and site storage. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal to new work and accepted by Engineer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items. C. Store doors and frames at site in dry secure place. 1. Place units on minimum 4" (100 mm) high wood blocking. 2. Avoid use of nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide 1/4"(6 mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Amweld Building Products. B. Ceco Door Products. C. Curries Co. D. Pioneer Industries. E. Republic Doors and Frames. F. Steelcraft. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Doors, full flush:Face sheet: Flush; smooth, weatherproof, cold-rolled stretcher leveled steel. 2. Face sheet thickness, exterior doors: 16-gage(1.5 mm). HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 08 11 13 ms1222 3. Top and bottom edge: Flush; continuous steel closure channel, 16-gage (1.5 mm) minimum, welded to each face. 4. Hardware reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard for hardware specified for each door. 5. Lock and hinge rail edge: Seamless,welded,filled, and ground smooth full height; 14-gage (1.9 mm) minimum standard rails full height. 6. Lock edge: Beveled. 7. Cores, exterior doors: Solid slab of polystyrene foam permanently bonded to each face skin. 8. Door thickness: 1-3/4"(45 mm). 9. Size: As shown on Drawings. 2.03 DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate all doors in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8, except where more stringent requirements are specified. B. Exterior doors: Hot-dipped galvanized, zinc-coated commercial quality carbon steel,ASTM A924 with ASTM A653, A60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Also galvanize associated reinforcements, stops, and trim. C. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. D. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind smooth uniform finish. E. Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed due to sanding or handling. F. Chemically treat surfaces and apply manufacturer's standard, baked-on prime coat. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Type: Welded frames. B. Door bumpers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement. C. Frame profile and jamb depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2.05 FRAME FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames from 16-gage (1.5 mm) steel. B. Exterior frames: Hot-dipped galvanized, zinc-coated commercial quality carbon steel,ASTM A924 with ASTM A653,A60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Associated stops, anchors, clips, reinforcement, and trim shall also be galvanized. C. Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish. D. Reinforce frames wider than 4'(1200 mm)with 12-gage (2.6 mm)formed steel channels weld in place, flush with top of frames. E. Reinforce, provide cutouts, and prepare frames to receive hardware and electronic devices. F. Place minimum of 3 single bumpers on single door frames. Space equally along strike jambs. G. Place minimum of 2 single bumpers on double door frames. Place on frame heads. H. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish. I. Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed due to sanding or handling. 23209.03.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ms1222 SECTION 08 11 13-Page 3 J. Chemically treat surfaces and apply manufacturer's standard baked on prime coat. K. Coat inside of exterior frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. 2.06 FRAME ANCHORS A. Wall anchors for frame attachment to masonry construction.- 1. Anchors built into exterior or masonry: Galvanized. 2. Masonry anchors: Adjustable, flat, corrugated or perforated "T" shaped anchors with leg not less - than 2" (50 mm)wide by 10" (250 mm) long or masonry"wire"type not less than 3/16"(5 mm) diameter. B. Provide frame jamb anchors; 1 each jamb per 30"(750 mm) of frame height or fracion thereof. C. Floor anchors, angle clip type: 1. 16-gage(1.5 mm) minimum. 2. To receive 2 fasteners per jamb. 3. Welded to bottom of each jamb. D. Head struts: For frames not anchored to masonry or concrete construction, provide ceiling struts spot - welded to jambs each side extending to building structure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI 100, except as amended in this Section. B. Jambs of frames set against masonry: Fill frames solid with grout including side lite mullions. 1) M.A. Westlake END OF SECTION 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 PLASTIC DCORS AND FRAMES - ms1222 SECTIC N 08 15 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic doors and frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 70 00—Hardware: To be supplied by door manufacturer. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings indicating door and frame elevations and sections, materials, thickness, and finishes, fabrication and erection details, locations of finish hardware by dimension and locations/details of openings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Door distributor shall be qualified by manufacturer of products to be furnished, and have in their regular employment, a knowledgeable person who will be available at reasonable times to consult with Engineer, Contractor, and Owner regarding matters affecting door and frame openings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped, crated, palletized or otherwise protected during transit and site storage. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repai,ed provided refinished items are equal to new work and accepted by Owner; otherwise remove and replace damaged items. C. Store doors and frames at site in dry secure place. 1. Place units on minimum 4"(100 mm) high wood blocking. _ 2. Avoid use of nonvented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide 1/4"(6 mm)spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Doors and frames shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 1 year from date of shipment, and from degradation or failure due to corrosion for 20 years from date of shipment, provided that structural integrity of the doors and frames have not been violated or compromised. (No unauthorized cuts, bores, or other structural alterations affecting core of door or structure of frame.) -- B. Normal wear and tear or physical abuse of a specific installation shall not be part of warranty. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Chem-Pruf Door Company. B. Corrim Company. C. Dor-Tec D. FRP Doors, LLC. PLASTIC DOORS AND FRAMES 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 08 15 00 ms1222 2.02 DOORS A. Type: Standard: B. Face sheet: Flush; smooth,weatherproof, seamless fiberglass-reinforced plastic(FRP)with 25-mil gel coat finish. C. Stiles and rails: FRP channel molded in one continuous piece, chemically bonded to each face. Mortices shall be molded in at factory. D. Hardware reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard for hardware specified for each door. E. Cores: Expanded polyurethane foam. F. Door thickness: 1-3/4" (44 mm). G. Size: As shown on Drawings. H. Color: Selected after award of Contract. 2.03 DOOR FABRICATION A. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. 2.04 FRAMES A. Type: Solid fiberglass-reinforced plastic. B. Door bumpers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement. C. Frame profile and jamb depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2.05 FRAME FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames from fiberglass-reinforced plastic with 25-mil gel coat finish. B. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Mortises shall be molded in. Routing of mortises after fabrication not permitted. C. Place minimum of 3 single bumpers on single door frames. Space equally along strike jambs. D. Place minimum of 2 single bumpers on double door frames. Place on frame heads. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Zinc-plated or stainless steel 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (114 mm x 114 mm)full mortise. B. Closer: Norton 1600 Series, or equal. C. Lockset: Stainless steel. Severe service shall be Grade 1 stainless steel. Handles shall be heavy- duty series. D. Fasteners: Furnished by manufacturer, unless noted otherwise. 2.07 FRAME ANCHORS A. Wall anchors for frame attachment to masonry construction: Stainless steel. 23209.03.00 PLASTIC DOORS AND FRAMES ms1222 SECTION 08 15 00 -Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake - 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 HARDWARE ms1222 SECTION 08 70 00- Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for exterior doors. B. Thresholds and weatherstripping. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance data: 1. Hardware supplier shall supply templates to door and frame manufacturer to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs for hardware. 2. "Hardware Schedule" listing hardware required for each door indicating style and finish. 3. Keying schedule resulting from coordination between Owner and hardware supplier. _ 4. Upon completion of project, submit"As Built" hardware schedule to Owner. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish UL-listed hardware for fire-rated doors openings in conformance to requirements for class of opening scheduled. - 1.05 KEYING A. Door locks: Match Owner's existing keying scheme. B. Prepare detailed keying schedule in consultation with Owner and Engineer. C. Use construction master key system for locks and cylinders. D. Supply 2 change keys for each lock. Provide 3 master keys. E. Send change keys with locks to project site. Ship master keys and control keys via registered mail to Owner. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware to project site in manufacturer's original labeled containers. B. Securely store hardware items in clean, dry place. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Butts: 1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BOM) - 2. Hager Hinge Co. (HAG) 3. McKinney. (McK) 4. Stanley Hardware. (ST) B. Locksets:Best Lock Corporation. (BST) 2. Sargent Mfg. Co. (SAR) HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 08 70 00 ms1222 3. Schlage Lock Co. (SCH) 4. Yale Security Inc. (YAL) C. Closers: 1. LCN Closers. (LCN) 2. Norton. (NOR) 3. Rixson-Firemark. (RIX) 4. Sargent Mfg. Co. (SAR) D. Exit Devices: 1. Sargent Mfg. Co. (SAR) 2. Von Duprin, Inc. (VON) 3. Yale Security Inc. (YAL) E. Auxiliary Hardware: 1. Glynn-Johnson Corp. (GJ) 2. Hager Hinge Co. (HAG) 3. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA) 4. Ives. (IVE) F. Cylinders: 1. Match hardware manufacturer. 2. Best Lock Corp. (BST) G. Thresholds, weatherstripping, and seals: 1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP) 2. Pemco Mfg. Co. (PEM) 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RES) 4. Zero International, Inc. (ZER) 2.02 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in"Hardware Schedule"at end of this Section, complete to function as designed. B. Butt hinges: 1. Quantity: a. Two hinges per leaf through 60" (1500 mm) in height. b. Three hinges per leaf through 90"(2250 mm) in height. c. One additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30"(750 mm) in height, or fraction thereof. d. Four hinges for Dutch doors. 2. Size: a. 4"x 4"(100 mm x 100 mm)for 1-3/8"(35 mm)thick doors. b. 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"(113 mm x 113 mm)for 1-3/4"(45 mm)thick doors, to 36" (900 mm)wide. c. 5"x 4-1/2" (125 mm x 113 mm)for 1-3/4"(45 mm)thick doors, over 36"to 48"(900 mm to 1200 mm)wide. d. 6"x 4-1/2" (150 mm x 113 mm)for 1-3/4"(45 mm)thick doors, over 48" (1200 mm)wide. e. 5"x 5" (125 mm x 125 mm)for 2-1/4"(56 mm)thick doors, to 42"(1050 mm)wide. 3. Provide nonremovable pins on exterior out-swinging doors. C. Locket design: 1. Following lockset design is manufactured by Schlage, and is identified for reference purposes only. 2. Mortise locksets: "06"squared return lever,with escutcheon plate. 3. Provide removable core system for keyed locks. D. Closers: 1. Furnish drop plates and mounting brackets as necessary for door and jamb conditions. 2. Mount closers on interior side of exterior doors, unless noted otherwise. 23209.03.00 HARDWARE ms1222 SECTION 08 70 00 - Page 3 3. Furnish through bolts on closers mounted on mineral core doors. 4. Closers on exterior doors shall have cold weather fluid, and shall be of type that controls closing of - door with built-in door stop effective at point selected at installation. Door stop shall be cushioned by shock absorbing heavy-duty spring action effective at pivot. 5. Provide parallel arm closers where possible. E. Weatherstripping: Provide seals for head,jambs, and sill as shown on Hardware Schedule. 2.03 FINISHES A. Hardware and accessories: Unless specified otherwise, US32D, satin stainless steel. B. Closers: Manufacturer's standard enameled aluminum covers. C. Weatherstripping: Clear anodized aluminum, unless noted otherwise. D. Thresholds: Mill aluminum, unless noted otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates. B. Install hardware at mounting heights recommended by BHMA. C. Fit mortised items, then removed and stored in original containers until painting and finishing has been completed, then properly reinstall in permanent place. D. Upon completion, check and adjust all hardware for proper operation. Submit installation instructions, templates, adjusting tools and keys to Owner. E. Mount weatherstripping prior to installation of closers or other hardware. Make allowance for mounting closer where weatherstripping is designed to accept arm of closer or overhead stop. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of installation, inspect and test for function and performance, and adjust to optimum working condition. B. Clean hardware to restore original finish. 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Quantities listed in Hardware Schedule are for each door opening occurrence. Item Quantity Manufacturer Model HW-1: Exterior Single Entrance Doors Butts — ST FBB199 Exit Device 1 VON 99L-#06 (Rim Lever) Lockset 1 SCH L9453 (Entrance) (Mortise) Closer 1 LCN 4114-Cush Head/Jamb Seals 1 set ZER 328AA Sill Sweep 1 ZER 328AA Rain Drip" 1 ZER Series 148, Part 142 HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 4- SECTION 08 70 00 ms1222 Item Quantity I Manufacturer Model Threshold 11 IZER 545A HW-5: Exterior Active/Inactive Double Doors Butts -- ST FBB199 Lockset 1 SCH L9453 (Entrance) (Active leaf) Dummy trim 1 SCH L0172 (Inactive leaf) Closer 2 LCN 4114H-Cush (Active leaf) Holder 1 GJ 70H (Inactive leaf) 79H (Inactive leaf) (Large Heavy Doors) Flush Bolts 1 set GJ F136 (Inactive leaf) Head/Jamb Seals 1 set ZER 328A Sill Sweep 2 ZER 328A Astragal 1 ZER Series 87M (Interior face) Rain Drip* 1 ZER Series 148, Part 142 Threshold 1 ZER 655A *Add rain drip only if other door protection is not provided. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 LOUVERS ms1222 SECTION 08 91 00 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stationary louvers. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS - A. Shop Drawings indicating, in large scale, profile of frame and installation details, relation to adjacent construction, flashing, blade configuration, connections to duct work, construction materials, finishes, bird screens, free-area, pressure drop, and water penetration. B. Samples: 1. Indicate, in large scale, profile of frame and installation details, relation to adjacent construction, flashing, blade configuration, connections to duct work, construction materials,Finishes, bird screens, free-area, pressure drop, and water penetration. 2. Color specified, minimum size 3"x 6"(75 mm x 150 mm). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stationary louver performance: Rate in accordance with AMCA 500, latest edition. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Air Balance, Inc. B. American Warming and Ventilating. C. CESCO Products. D. Construction Specialties, Inc. E. Greenheck. F. Ruskin Company. G. Materials referenced in this Section are manufactured by Ruskin Company, unless noted otherwise. Equivalent products from other manufacturers are acceptable. 2.02 STATIONARY LOUVERS A. Designation: LVR. B. Size: As scheduled on Drawings. C. Type: 6" (150 mm) stationary louver with 45' drainable blade angle and hidden mullions. D. Material: Extruded aluminum with minimum 0.125" (3 mm)frame and 0.090" (2.3 rrm) blade thickness. E. Provide intermediate structural supports required to withstand wind load of 20 lb/sq ft(98 kg/sq m). F. Finish: Color to be selected by Owner. LOUVERS 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 08 91 00 ms1222 G. Performance: As scheduled on Drawings for maximum face velocity and maximum static pressure drop. H. Water penetration: 0.01 oz/sq ft(0.3 ml/sq m) maximum at 680 fpm. 1. Model: ELF6811 S. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Take site dimensions affecting Work. B. Ensure openings affecting this Work are properly prepared and that flashings are correctly located to divert moisture to exterior. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers in openings properly aligned and level. B. Secure louver rigidly with fasteners of noncorrosive metals to suit materials being encountered. C. Coordinate installation method with mechanical work. D. Set and tie in to flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Install bird screens fixed to interior. F. Blank off unused portions of louvers with 1-1/4"(31 mm)thick polyisocyanurate insulated panel by Mapes Industries, or equal. G. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be built by Contractor from factory-assembled louver sections to provide overall sizes required. 3.03 FINISH A. Apply finishes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exterior: Kynar finish or as required to match louver. C. Interior: Galvanized steel or as required to match ductwork. D. Edges: Either factory-enclosed with like materials or field-enclosed with galvanized sheet metal to match panel. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect louvers and finishes from damage during delivery and installation. B. Protect adjacent surfaces,finishes, and materials from damage during installation of louvers. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209,03.00 GYPSUM BO,%RD ASSEMBLIES ms1222 SECTION 09 21 16-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum board. B. Fasteners and accessories. C. Joint materials. D. Finish materials. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in their original packages and containers bearing name of _. manufacturer and brand. B. Store in protected area according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Do not store materials on damp or wet surfaces. Remove from premises and repla;e damaged materials. D. Store gypsum board flat. Do not deliver to building in which application is to be made until windows are in and glazed, and exterior doors are hung. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. In cold weather and during gypsum board joint finishing, maintain temperatures in building within range of 55°F to 70°F (13°C to 21°C). Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. CertainTeed Corp. B. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Co. D. U. S. Gypsum Co. E. Materials referenced in this Section are manufactured by U. S. Gypsum Co., unless noted otherwise. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Fire-rated gypsum panels: Comply with ASTM C36 for Type X gypsum board. "Sheetrock FireCode" gypsum panels,with tapered edges; 5/8"(16 mm)thick. 2.03 FASTENERS _ A. Screw type: Self-drilling, self-tapping, bugle head, for use with power-driven tool. B. Drywall-to-wood: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. C. Length and spacing: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 09 21 16 ms1222 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories necessary for complete installation. Plastic trim accessories not acceptable. B. Corner beads: Galvanized steel, Dur-A-Bead No. 103, or equal. C. Control joints: Galvanized steel control joint No. 093, or equal. D. Casing beads: Galvanized steel, Metal Trim No. 200-A, or equal. 2.05 JOINT MATERIALS A. Adhesives and joint compound materials shall be as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board for type best suited to prevailing partition or wall materials and conditions. B. Joint reinforcement tapes and joint compounds shall be capable of producing finished joints between gypsum wallboard panels that are free of cracks and form smooth, unobtrusive surfaces suitable for painting. C. Materials shall be moisture-resistant and not affected by humidity after final hardening. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Prime coat, ceiling: "Sheetrock First Coat"flat latex base coat paint with high solids content, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Install materials as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board, and in accordance with ASTM C840. B. Verify insulations and vapor barriers are in place. C. Complete installation shall be plumb and true, without waves or buckles, and rigid with members fastened securely together. D. Use approved UL construction system for fire-rated ceiling. 3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Where possible, install single sheets full distance across space, perpendicular, to minimize end joints. Long edges of board shall be at right angles to framing members. B. Abutting ends or edge joints shall occur over surface of framing member; fit neatly and accurately into corner conditions. C. Secure to supports and along abutting ends with screws of type and spacing recommended by manufacturer and as specified. D. Fasteners shall be not less than 3/8" (10 mm)from edges or ends. E. After trim has been applied, and prior to decoration, correct surface damage and defects as required to leave work smooth and without blemish. F. Gypsum board shall be continuously protected from weather and damage by dampness or any other means. 23209.03.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES _ ms1222 SECTION 09 21 16 -Page 3 3.03 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Fasten corner beads, control joints and other accessories securely in place and build around them with 3 coats of feathered-out joint compound and sand smooth. _ B. Reinforcement: Use reinforcement tape around openings to reduce stresses on drywall at these points; cover with feathered-out joint compound and sand smooth. 3.04 JOINT FINISH APPLICATION-CEILINGS A. Finishing: In accordance with GA-214, as follows. B. Level5: 1. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 3 separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Thin skim coat of joint compound, or material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to entire surface. Surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 2. Location: Exposed drywall surfaces. END OF SECTION 1) M.A. Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 PAINTING AND COATING ms1222 SECTION 09 90 00 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. On-site surface preparation and painting. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS - A. Product Data: 1. Schedule of products proposed for each system. 2. Product data sheets, if other than products specified in schedule. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Duplicate 6"x 8" (150 mm x 200 mm)samples of paint and stain colors when requested by Engineer. When possible, apply finishes on identical type materials to which they w 11 be applied on job. Identify each sample as to finish type, formula, color name and number, and glass. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra stock: Leave on premises,where directed by Owner, usable partial cans of paint. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification. 1.05 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations including analyses of potential impact of painting operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to work zone. B. Worker exposures: Exposure of workers to chemical substances shall not exceed limits as - established by American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists: Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices,ACGIH-02 or as required by a more stringent applicable regulation. C. Toxic compounds: Toxic compounds having ineffective physiological properties, such as odor or irritation levels, shall not be used unless approved by Owner. D. Training: Workers having access to affected work area shall be informed of contents of manufacturer's current printed product description, Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)and technical data sheets for each coating system and shall be informed of potential health and safety hazard and protective controls associated with materials used on Project. Affected work area is one that may receive mists and odors from painting operations. Workers involved in preparation, painting and clean- up shall be trained in safe handling and application, and exposure limit, for each material which worker will use in Project. Personnel having a need to use respirators and masks shall be instructed in use and maintenance of such equipment. E. Provide paints for interior use that contain no mercurial mildewcide or insecticide. Provide paint containing not more than 0.06% lead. F. Provide documentation stating that paints proposed for use meet Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) regulations of local air pollution control districts having jurisdiction over geographical area in which Project is located. PAINTING AND COATING 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 09 90 00 ms1222 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. B. Provide adequate storage facilities. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45°F (7°C) in well ventilated area. C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Benjamin Moore Paints. B. ICI Paints (Devoe/Dulux). C. Pittsburg Paints. D. Sherwin-Williams Co. E. Materials and colors referenced in this Section are as manufactured by Sherwin Williams Co., unless noted otherwise. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Paint accessory materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve finishes specified of high quality and approved manufacturer. B. Paints: Ready-mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining soft paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly dispersing to complete homogeneous mixture. C. Paints to have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. D. Dry mil thickness of paint shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations for materials specified for prevailing substrates and Project conditions. E. Paints containing lead in excess of 0.06% by weight of total nonvolatile content(calculated as lead metal)shall not be used. F. Paints containing zinc chromate or strontium chromate pigments shall not be used. G. VOC content: Paints shall comply with applicable state and local laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards and shall conform to restrictions of local air pollution control authority. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of Work. Report in writing to Engineer, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not commence until such defects have been corrected. 23209,03.00 PAINTING AND COATING ms1222 SECTION 09 90 00 -Page 3 B. Correct defects and deficiencies in surfaces that may adversely affect work of this Section. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. B. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preaaration area. C. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material that may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned, and replaced on completion of wore in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Remove mildew, by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry completely. B. Aluminum surfaces: Remove surface contamination by steam, high-pressure water or solvent washing. Apply etching primer or acid etch. Apply paint immediately if acid etching C. New concrete floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse with clear water. Ensure required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to thoroughly dry. D. Concrete and concrete masonry: 1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oi, and grease with solution of trisodium phosphate, rinse well and allow to thoroughly dry. 2. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after being thoroughly wetted with water. Allow to thoroughly dry. E. Prepare surfaces to be finished in conformance to recommendations of finish manufacturer. 3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ensure surface temperatures and surrounding air temperature is above 45°F (7°C) -)efore applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints are 45°F (7°C)for inter or work and 50°F (10°C)for exterior work. Minimum application temperature for varnish finish is 65°F (18°C). B. Do no exterior painting while surfaces are damp or during rainy or frosty weather. C. Do no exterior spray painting while wind velocity is above 13 mph (20 km/h). D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain :emperatures above 45°F (7°C)for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finish es. E. Provide adequate lighting on surfaces to be finished. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Apply each coat at proper consistency. Materials shall be evenly spread and applied smoothly without runs or sags, by skilled workers. Do painting under conditions suitable to production of high quality work. Follow manufacturer's directions on container label. PAINTING AND COATING 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 09 90 00 ms1222 B. Each coat of paint shall be slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved by Engineer. C. Sand lightly between coats to achieve smooth finish on metal surfaces. D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. E. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. F. Previously finished existing surfaces: Where scheduled to be finished,finish same as designated for new surfaces, except initial (prime) coat may be deleted. Spot-prime damaged or defective existing finish as required to provide uniform finished surface. G. Where interior or exterior metal are primed in mill or shop, material shall be that specified for such surfaces and shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's directions for first or prime coat. In such case, no prime coat will be required on job, except for touch-up. 3.06 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to mechanical and electrical sections with respect to painting and finishing requirements. B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location and paint separately. C. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected. D. In finished areas of building, prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are plated or covered with prefinished coating. Color and texture to match adjacent surfaces unless otherwise directed. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color banding and identification (flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc.) 3.07 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.C. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. 3.08 SURFACES EXCLUDED FROM PAINTING A. Surfaces not requiring painting: Surfaces concealed inside mechanical and electrical chases. B. Surfaces on which painting is prohibited: 1. Sprinkler heads. 23209.03.00 PAINTING AND COATING ms1222 SECTION 09 90 00 -Page 5 2. Fire detection elements. 3. Anodized aluminum surfaces. - 4. Chrome and stainless steel hardware items. 5. Electrical fixtures or wiring devices. 6. Floor finishes, unless specified otherwise. 7. Wall base materials. 8. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 9. Door hardware items. 10. Factory finished items, unless specified otherwise. 3.09 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE A. System A: Metals, exterior. 1. Primer, on ferrous metals, galvanized metal, and aluminum: "Pro-Cryl" Universal Primer, B66-310 Series.Finish coats: 2 coats"Sher-Cryl" HPA High Performance Acrylic, B66-300 Series, B. System D: Concrete masonry, clear, exterior.First and second coats: "H&C" HB-150 water repellent. C. System N: Drywall surfaces, interior, epoxy finish. 1. Primer, on drywall: "ProMar" 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W8200. - 2. Finish coats: 2 coats Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss B70/B60V25 Series. D. System S: Metals, interior. 1. Primer and touch-up on shop-primed surfaces, on ferrous metals, galvanized metal and aluminum: "Pro-Cryl" Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2. Finish coats: 2 coats"ProMar"200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34W200 Serie;:. E. System T: Metals, interior.Primer: "Pro-Cryl" Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2. Primer touch-up on shop zinc-primed surfaces: Compatible zinc-rich primer as furnished for materials requiring touch-up. 3. Finish coat: 1 coat"Tile-Clad" High Solids Epoxy, Gloss, B62Z Series. F. System V: Concrete and concrete masonry, interior. 1. Filler, on CMU only: "PrepRite" Block Filler, B25W25. 2. Primer, on concrete only: "Loxon"Concrete& Masonry Primer A24W8300. 3. Finish coats: 2 coats"ProMar"200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34W200 Series. G. System X: Concrete floors, interior. 1. Primer: "Armorseal" 33 Epoxy Primer/Sealer, 1358/660. 2. Finish coat: 2 coats"Armorseal" 1000 HS, B67 Series, with anti-slip aggregate if required. 3.10 PAINT SCHEDULE A. Colors will be selected after award of contract from manufacturer's standard colors. Item Description System Color Exterior Structural and miscellaneous steel A Galvanized A Concrete masonry D Interior Drywall (epoxy coating) N Structural and miscellaneous steel S Galvanized S PAINTING AND COATING 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 09 90 00 ms1222 Item Description System Color Metal surfaces (epoxy coating) T Concrete and masonry V Concrete floor X END OF SECTION 1) M.A.Westlake 2) J. F. Kemper 23209.03.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC ms1222 SECTION 23 09 13-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. HVAC instrumentation for use with control system. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Specification Data Sheets for control components. B. Complete instruction manual covering function and operation of control components. C. Bill of Materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall guarantee control device installed under this Specification to be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use for a period of one year from date of acceptance of building by Owner. B. Replace defective material or workmanship within guarantee period, immediately,without cost to Owner. C. Control devices shall be by same manufacturer insofar as practicable. Control deg ices shall be provided by control system manufacturer unless noted otherwise. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMOSTATS A. Electronic space temperature sensor with set point adjustment: 1. Single-or dual-scaled set point adjustment as required for application. 2. Sensor: Nickel or platinum 1000-ohm resistance type. 3. -Accuracy: t1°F. 4. Override button: Integral momentary pushbutton. 5. Locking cover with concealed set point and thermometer, suitable for institutional use. 6. Manufacturer: Johnson Controls, Inc., Series TE-6400, or equal. 2.02 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Materials of construction: 13-gage galvanized sheet steel frame formed into channels and spot welded. B. Bearings: Oil-impregnated sintered bronze. C. Seals: Synthetic elastomer seals on blade edge and ends D. Temperature limits: -20OF to 200°F. E. Leakage: 0.5%at 4"w.g. static pressure and 2000 ft/min velocity. _ F. Action: Opposed or parallel. G. 16-gage galvanized steel blades, not over 8"in width. H. Manufacturer: Johnson Controls, Inc. Model D-1300, or equal. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 23 09 13 ms1222 2.03 DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Type: Electronic. B. Power: 24 volts ac or volts dc, to suit application. C. Size adequate to provide 2-position action, as required. D. Input: 0- 10 volts do or 4-20 mA, as required. E. Output feedback. F. Enclosure: NEMA 3R. G. Spring return: As required. H. Manufacturer: Johnson Controls, Inc. Series M9100 or M9200, or equal. 2.04 CONTROL STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER A. Primary voltage: 120 volts,60 Hz, single-phase. B. Secondary voltage: 24 volts ac. C. Size: As required to power control devices. D. Manufacturer: Johnson Controls, Series Y60, or TZ-5000, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Size control apparatus to supply and/or operate and control devices served. B. Provide temperature control wiring. Wiring shall include line voltage and low-voltage wiring. Install wiring by licensed electrician employed by Contractor and shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Division 16. C. Provide numbered terminal strips in control panels for interfacing with others. Furnish others with control drawings indicating points of electrical interface. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Exposed tubing and tubing within mechanical spaces shall be hard drawn seamless copper. B. Exposed tubing and conduit shall run parallel to or at right angles to building structure. Adequately support tubing at uniform intervals. C. Mount room thermostats 5-0"above floor, vertically aligned with light switches. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, and other equipment provided. END OF SECTION 1) A. D. Abraham 2) J. J. Bovenkamp 23209.03.00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS ms1222 SECTION 23 31 00-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ducts. B. Epoxy coating. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Duct sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain scheduled sizes inside lining or insulation. B. Pressure class: 1. See application table for pressure class requirements for each duct system. 2. Pressure classes shall correspond to pressure classes defined by SMACNA in HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible—Third Edition. 3. Each pressure class shall be suitable for positive or negative pressure applications. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Guarantee ductwork to be free of vibration, chatter, objectionable pulsation, and excessive leakage under all conditions of operation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use material, weight, thickness, gage, construction, and installation methods as outlined in following SMACNA publications: 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Metal & Flexible, Third Edition. 2. SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards, Seventh Edition. B. Construct and install ductwork in accordance with provisions of International Mechanical Code. C. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized sheet steel: 1. Cold-rolled, soft sheet steel capable of double seaming without fracture. 2. Zinc coating: G90 in accordance with ASTM A653 and ASTM A90. B. Epoxy coating: 1. Film thickness: 12 to 15 mils(0.30 to 0.38 mm). 2. Percent solids: 56% by volume. 3. Coverage: 53 sq ft/gal. (1.3 m2/L) 4. Type: Cross-linked epoxy-phenolic amine. 5. Manufacturer: Wisconsin Protective Coating Corporation, Heresite Protective CDatings, Inc, Whitford Corporation, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install duct, fittings, reinforcement, and supports in accordance with SMACNA recommendations HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23209 03 00 Page 2-SECTION 23 31 00 ms1222 B. Ductwork-general: 1. Construct ductwork so interior surfaces are smooth. Use rivets or nuts and bolts for fabricating ductwork. Sheet metal screws may be used on duct hangers, transverse joints, and other SMACNA-approved locations if screw does not extend more than 1/2"(15 mm) into duct. Seal fastener locations where leakage could occur and seal ductwork according to SMACNA recommendations with regard to pressure class of duct. 2. Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges and slips to leave smooth duct interior. 3. Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate, or sag. 4. Fasten hangers to duct with nuts and bolts or surround duct with hanger strap to provide a single hanging point for round duct. Trapeze hangers may be used. Internal duct hangers not accepted. 5. Provide sufficient clearances between duct and beams, pipes, or other obstructions in building construction and for work of other trades. Check drawings showing work of other trades and consult with Engineer in event of any interference. In all cases, provide a streamlined casement or collar designed in accordance with SMACNA and seal to prevent air leakage. 6. Install motor-operated dampers and connect to or install equipment furnished by others. 7. At outside air intakes, install duct to pitch to intakes and to drain to outside of building. Solder or calk on airside seams to form watertight joints. 3.02 APPLICATION Duct Application Duct Material Minimum Pressure Insulation Class Outdoor air Galvanized 2 "w. g. 500 Pa None END OF SECTION 1) A. D.Abraham 2) J. J. Bovenkamp 23209.03.00 HVAC FANS ms1222 SECTION J23 34 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Centrifugal wall exhaust fans. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Catalog data showing selection and options. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimension drawings. 2. Fan curves. 3. Sound ratings. 4. Material of construction. 5. Weights. 6. Tag numbers. 7. Vibration isolation. 8. Motor data as specified. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test fans as complete units in accordance with applicable test code of AMCA. Fans shall be certified by AMCA. B. Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bear AM(:A certified rating seal. C. Fabrication and installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA and manufacturers recommendations. D. Industrial Ventilation, 25th Edition,American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is cleaned, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Loren Cook. B. Greenheck. C. Twin Cities Fan and Blower. HVAC FANS 23209.03 00 Page 2-SECTION 23 34 00 ms1222 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide fans with variable pitch V-belt drives for 15 hp and smaller and fixed drives for 20 hp and larger. Provide variable pitch drive for purposes of initial system balancing on 20 hp and larger fans. Provide fixed pitch drives for final system balancing. V-belt drives shall be designed for 150% of motor rating. B. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Variable speed fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced for entire range of speed operation. C. Where fan drives are exposed, provide guards in accordance with applicable code requirements. Provision shall be made so tachometer may be used to verify fan speed without removing guard assembly. D. Fan size, fan class,wheel type, inlet type, capacity, arrangement, operating characteristics, and other special requirements shall be as scheduled. E. Fans shall be Class 1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Equivalent fan selections shall not increase motor horsepower, increase noise level, increase tip speed by more than 10%, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20%,from that specified. 2.03 FINISHES A. Application: All, unless specified or scheduled otherwise. B. Aluminum components: None. C. Interior concealed steel components: Galvanized. D. Exterior or interior exposed to air stream: Polyester powder coat, 1.5 to 3 mils thickness, Loren Cook "Lorenized,"Greenheck"Permatector,"or equal. E. Epoxy powder coat: 1. Applications: As scheduled. 2. Aluminum components: None. 3. Steel components: Epoxy powder coat. 4. Thickness: 2 to 3.5 mils. 5. Provide UV-resistant coating for outdoor fans. F. Color: Manufacturer's standard 2.04 WALL EXHAUST FANS: v A. Performance: As scheduled. B. Construction: 1. Arrangement: as scheduled. 2. Housing: Heavy-gage spun aluminum. 3. Wheel: Centrifugal, backward inclined aluminum. C. Drive: As scheduled. D. Bearings: _ 1. Regreasable with fittings extending outside of casing for ease of service. 2. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow block, ball-bearing type. 23209.03.00 HVAC FANS ms1222 SECTION 23 34 00-Page 3 3. L50 rated at not less than 200,000 hours. E. Manufacturer: Loren Cook*ACW or equal by Greenheck or Twin Cities Fan and Blower. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Provide sheaves as necessary for final air balancing. C. Furnish and install miscellaneous hangers, steel, and supports to adequately support unit. D. Construct sheet metal transition fittings as required to connect ductwork and equipment in accordance with requirements of Section 23 31 00. E. Arrangement of components shall provide easy access to items requiring periodic maintenance, including, but not limited to belts, filters, and grease fittings. F. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 1) A. D.Abraham 2) J. J. Bovenkamp 23209.03.00 UNIT HEATERS ms1222 SECTION 23 82 39 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose electric unit heaters. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Catalog data showing selection and options. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 3. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance data. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensions. 2. Capacities. 3. Materials of construction. 4. Ratings. 5. Weights. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Tag numbers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Terminal heat transfer units shall be products of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of such units and issuing complete catalog data on such product. Throughout Project, use products of same manufacturer to greatest extent possible. See Section 01 60 00. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Coils shall be ARI certified. - 2. Units shall be UL listed for intended service. C. Refer to Sections 01 60 00 for product delivery, storage, and handling, of manufacturers not named. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PURPOSE ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS A. Designation on Drawings: UH. B. Arrangement: Horizontal or vertical, as scheduled or shown on Drawings. C. Cabinet: Heavy-gage steel with baked enamel or epoxy finish. D. Fan: Aluminum blades, statically and dynamically balanced with OSHA-approved guard. E. Louvers: Adjustable for horizontal units, diffuser for vertical units. F. Coil: Electric heating coil, industrial grade. G. Motor: Totally enclosed, permanently lubricated with thermal overload protection. H. Electrical and controls: 1. Refer to schedule on Drawings for electrical requirements. 2. Single-point electrical connection. 3. Control voltage transformer, as required. 4. Automatic reset thermal overload protection. UNIT HEATERS 23209 03 00 Page 2-SECTION 23 82 39 ms1222 5. Fan delay relay. I. Manufacturer: Trane, Indeeco, Ruffneck, Brasch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Electrical service shall be installed in accordance with Division 26. C. Level or pitch units and elements to manufacturer's required tolerance; shim. D. Hang units from building construction. Do not hang from piping. E. Support units with rod-type hanger anchored to building , F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. G. Coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size for recessed units. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Comb out damaged fins where bent or crushed, before covering elements with enclosure. B. Clean dust and debris from each unit as it is installed. C. Touch-up finish on each cabinet and component after final adjustments are made. D. Replace all filters before final acceptance. E. Replace coils which have excessively damaged fins, and replace enclosures and accessories which are damaged beyond restoration to acceptable condition. END OF SECTION 1) A. D.Abraham 2) J. J. Bovenkamp 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS I OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General electrical requirements for equipment and services including, but not limite i to: 1. Factory wiring. 2. Low voltage field wiring. 3. Low voltage splices and terminations. 4. Low voltage cabinets and electrical enclosures. 5. Equipment safety grounding. 6. Low voltage fuses and fuse blocks. 7. Electrical meters. 8. Low voltage circuit breakers and disconnect switches. 9. Auxiliary power transformers. 10. Outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 11. Plates and covers. 12. Wiring devices, 13. Welding receptacles. 14. Panelboards. - 15. Shop finish. 16. Rust-inhibiting compounds. 17. Galvanizing. 18. Packaging, identification, and tagging. 19. Nameplates. 20. Trip setting coordination. 21. Grounding and bonding. 22. Fireproofing and fire ratings. 23. Testing and demonstration. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02 41 00-Demolition: Demolition of electrical items. 1.03 INFORMATIONALSUBMITTALS A. Submit with Bid: Description of manufacturer's standard factory test procedure for ogic systems. B. Product Data: 1. List of proposed material identifying manufacturer,type and model number for equipment to be provided for complete job. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets marked to indicate specific type, model or catalog number of equipment to be provided. 3. Equipment drawings, elementary diagrams, schematics, wiring, performance curves, instruction manuals, and all other documentation necessary for complete description of material being supplied and as required to support installation, commissioning and maintenance of equipment. Manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted. 4. Manufacturer's technical descriptions, product data sheets, and applicable manuals for use in protective device system coordination including: a. Fuse manufacturer, type, ratings, and protection curves. b. Circuit breaker manufacturer, type, trip setting ranges, and protection curves. c. Relay trip device ranges, curves, and setting manuals. d. Transformer damage curves. e. CT ratios and saturation curves. f. VT ratings. 5. List of recommended spare parts required for equipment start-up, commissioning and operation. 6. List of special maintenance tools required for installation and operation of equipment. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 7. If necessary, provide additional data to clearly demonstrate that proposed alternate equipment meets or exceeds equipment as specified. 8. When requested by Engineer, submit system information, including but not limited to, utility feeders, existing relays, circuit breakers,fuses, and transformers. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals. Provide at minimum: 1. Itemized equipment list. 2. General description and technical data. 3. Receiving, storage, installation, and testing instructions. 4. Operating and maintenance procedures. 5. Complete set of final drawings requiring no further action. 6. Complete documentation of inspections and tests performed, including logs, curves, and certificates. Documentation shall note any replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing. 7. Spare parts list. 8. Lubrication recommendations. 9. Warranty information. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra materials: Provide touchup paint in same type and color to repair at least 25% of finish-painted equipment surface. Paint shall be sufficient to perform touch-up painting in accordance with shop- applied material instructions for repair painting. B. Each piece of equipment shall be furnished with special tools as required for installation, maintenance, and dismantling of equipment. 1. Furnish in quantities as necessary to complete work on schedule. 2. Tools shall be new and shall become property of Owner. 3. Tools and intended use shall be identified in assembly instructions. Tools shall only be used for their intended purpose. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Manufacturer of equipment specified shall be recognized in industry for normally supplying this type of equipment. 2. Manufacturer shall be ISO certified. 3. When requested by Engineer, provide list of similar equipment installations that have employed identical equipment from manufacturer. B. Installer qualifications: 1. Installer shall be skilled in trade and shall have thorough knowledge of products and equipment specified. 2. Cutting, drilling, trenching, or channeling necessary to properly install equipment shall be performed by competent skilled crafts people in safe, professional manner. C. Regulatory requirements: Perform electrical construction in accordance with NEC, local and state m codes as applicable to job site. D. Materials and equipment furnished for permanent installation shall be new, unused, and undamaged. E. Asbestos not allowed. F. Parts shall be manufactured to American industry standard sizes and gages to facilitate maintenance and interchangeability. Metric sized components not allowed unless specifically requested and approved. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS I OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00-Page 3 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Pack, ship, handle, and store in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. B. Ship equipment completely factory assembled unless physical size, arrangement, configuration, or shipping and handling limitations make this impracticable. Shipping splits and required field assembly shall be identified with equipment submittals. C. Costs associated with sections, accessories, or appurtenances requiring field asse-nbly shall be Contractor's responsibility. D. Separately packaged parts and accessories shall be consolidated and shipped together with equipment. Mark each container clearly to identify contents and as belonging with main equipment. 1. Provide individual weatherproof itemized packing slips attached to outside of each container for contents included. Provide duplicate inside each container. 2. Attach master packing list, covering accessory items for equipment, to main piece of equipment. _ 3. Mark each container with project identification number for equipment and container number followed by total number of containers. E. Equipment shall be suitably protected during shipment, handling, and storage. Damage incurred during shipment shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. F. Protect coated surfaces against impact, abrasion, and discoloration. G. Electrical equipment and insulation systems shall be protected against ingress of moisture. Use space heaters if necessary to protect against moisture. H. Exposed threads shall be greased and protected. I. Pipe,tube, and conduit connections shall be closed with rough usage plugs. Seal and tape open ends of piping, tubing, and conduit. J. Equipment openings shall have covers, and taped to seal equipment. K. Store materials in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with Owner early and late shipping and delivery schedules for items requiring storage and handling at Site. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Electrical equipment shall be provided with manufacturer's standard warranty, but not less than 1 year. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Service conditions: Provide equipment and material suitable for intended service and installation at location indicated. B. Low-voltage auxiliary and control power. 1. Electrical power for ac control and instrumentation equipment: a. Provide devices necessary for proper operation and protection of equipment during electrical power supply and ambient temperature fluctuations specified. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209 03 00 Page 4 -SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 b. Design for continuous operation at any voltage from 85%to 110%of nominal voltage. Dropout voltage shall be 60%of nominal for relays and 75% for contactors and starters. 2. Electrical power for do devices: a. Design for continuous operation on ungrounded station battery system, capable of maintaining operation at any voltage from 80%to 112% of nominal voltage. b. Electrical devices served shall not impose ground connection on supply. C. Auxiliary power: Design auxiliary equipment for low voltage service, with electrical power designed to operate from one of nominal electrical power sources as follows and as indicated on Drawings: Volts Phase Frequency 480Y/277 3 or 1 60 120/240 1 60 125 1 Dc 2.02 FACTORY WIRING A. Select cable for electrical and environmental conditions of installation, and suitable for unusual service conditions where encountered. 1. Proper temperature application cable shall be used throughout, but shall be not less than 900C rated. 2. Conductors routed over hinges shall use extra-flexible stranding. 3. Cable insulation shall be rated for maximum service voltage used, but not less than 600 volts. 4. Splices not allowed. B. Panel, control cabinet, switchboard, motor control center, and switchgear wiring shall use flame retardant cross-linked polyethylene(XLP) or flame retardant ethylene-propylene rubber(EPR) insulation that meet or exceed requirements of UL 44 for Types SIS, and XHHW. 1. Minimum size: No. 14 AWG (1.5 mm2). 2. Request tinned copper if used in certain corrosive type environments.Conductors: Annealed bare copper with fine stranding passing IEEE 1202 and UL VW-1 flame test. C. Instrumentation, thermocouple, and thermocouple extension wire shall use twisted shielded pairs/triads having flame retardant cross-linked polyethylene(XLPE) insulation, and chlorinated polyethylene(CPE)jacket. 1. Minimum size: No. 16 AWG (1.0 mm2). 2. Conductor type: a. Instrument: Annealed copper Class B stranding. b. Thermocouple: Solid alloy,ANSI MC 96.1. 3. Provide each pair/triad with shield. 4. Shielding shall consist of aluminum-polyester tape and flexible strand tin-coated No.18 AWG (0.75 mm2)copper drain wire. 5. Drain wire for each instrument cable shall be insulated with spaghetti sleeve. One end of shield wire shall be terminated on grounded terminal. 6. Cables shall pass IEEE 1202 and ICEA 70,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame test, and each conductor shall pass UL VW-1 flame test. D. Terminations: 1. Conductor terminal connectors shall be insulated, ring tongue, compression type connectors properly sized for conductor and terminal. a. Connectors shall be constructed of copper and shall be tin-plated. b. Interior surface of connector wire barrel shall be serrated; exterior surface of connector wire barrel shall be furnished with crimp guides. 2. Uninsulated terminal connectors shall be used for conductors terminated on devices equipped with individual fitted covers, such as, but not limited to, control switches and lockout relays. 3. Connections requiring disconnect plug and receptacle type devices shall be provided with factory- terminated conductors on each plug and receptacle. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00-Page 5 a. Plugs and receptacles shall be factory wired into junction boxes containing terminal blocks for external connections. b. Conductors on disconnect portion of plug-receptacle assemblies shall be in common jacket. 4. Prior to shipment of equipment, remove temporary wiring installed in factory for equipment testing. 5. Current transformers shall terminate on shorting type terminal blocks. Ship with shorting jumpers installed. E. Identification and labeling: 1. Provide conductor identification sleeve on each end of each internal conductor. Mark each sleeve with opposite end destination identification with nonsmudging, permanent black ink. Sleeves shall be UV-resistant self-adhesive type or PVC, not less than 1/2" long. 2. Permanently label each terminal block, terminal, conductor, relay, breaker, fuse block, and other auxiliary devices to coincide with identification indicated on manufacturer's drawings. 2.03 FIELD WIRING A. Nationally or internationally recognized cable manufacturer shall produce cable provided. 1. Metal-clad cable, NEC Type MC, may not be substituted in place of cable and conduit unless specified otherwise, or unless approved in writing. 2. Comply with code and Project requirements directly associated with use of each cable type. B. Cables specified are for voltages 600 volts and below. C. Wiring shall be bare copper with not less than 98% conductivity, unless specified otherwise. D. General-purpose building conductor used on interior lighting circuits and general-purpose branch circuits routed entirely in conduit shall be single conductor. 1. Voltage rating: 600-volt. 2. Conductor: Class B, solid or stranded, annealed, uncoated copper, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.Omm'). 3. Insulation: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)complying with NEC for type THHN or THWN. 4. Jacket: Overall clear nylon jacket applied over conductor insulation, UL-listed as gasoline and oil resistant. 5. Color coding: a. Provide conductor sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller in following colors: 1) Source voltage of 120/240 volts: a) Phase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. c) Neutral: White. 2) Source voltage of 480Y/277 volts: a) Phase A: Brown. b) Phase B: Orange. c) Phase C: Yellow. d) Neutral: Gray. b. Sizes No.6 AWG and larger shall be black and color-coded with field-applied tape. 6. Rated continuous operating temperature shall be 900C in wet and dry locations for operation at maximum 75°C. E. Single-conductor, low-voltage power cable for motors, feeders, branch circuits, anc do circuits routed in conduit, duct bank, or cable tray: 1. Voltage rating: 600-volt. 2. Conductor: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.OmmZ). 3. Insulation: NEC Type XHHW-2. Insulation shall be sunlight resistant. 4. Wire shall be identified by surface marking indicating manufacturer, conductor size, conductor material, voltage rating, UL symbol, and listed type. 5. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr, ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests, and UL 1581, VW-1 vertical flame test. 6. Temperature rating: 900 C for normal operation in wet or dry locations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 F. Multiconductor, low-voltage power cables for motors, feeders, and branch circuits routed in cable tray, conduit or duct bank: 1. Voltage rating: 600-volt. 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.Omm2). 3. Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)complying with NEC Type XHHW-2. 4. Phase conductors shall be cabled together with Class B stranded, bare copper grounding conductor and fillers. Ground wire size shall comply with requirements of UL 1277. 5. Cover cable assembly with helically applied polyester binder tape with minimum 10% overlap. 6. Temperature rating: 90'C for normal operation in wet or dry locations. G. Multiconductor cable for control, interlocks, current transformers(CTs), voltage transformers (VTs), routed in cable tray and conduit: 1. Voltage rating: 600-volt. 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, CT minimum size No. 10 AWG (6.Omm2),VT minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.Omm2). 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant, cross-linked polyethylene(XLPE)or complying with NEC Type XHHW-2. 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat, moisture, and sunlight-resistant; polyvinyl chloride(PVC). 5. Conductors shall be cabled together with nonhygroscopic fillers. 6. Cover cable assembly with helically applied binding tape with minimum 10% overlap. 7. Color coding: Insulated conductors shall have colored insulation meeting ICEA Method 1, Table E-2 color code (K2 color code). 8. Each cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, number of conductors, size, voltage rating, and UL listing as rated for cable tray. 9. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr, and ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests. 10. Temperature rating: 900 C for normal operation in wet or dry locations. H. Instrumentation cable installed indoor or outdoor routed in cable tray, conduit, and ducts: 1. Voltage rating: 300-volt. 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 16 AWG (1.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride(PVC). 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat, moisture, and sunlight resistant; polyvinyl chloride(PVC). 5. Pairs/triads: Each twisted with lay not exceeding 2"(50 mm). 6. Color code: Insulated conductors shall have colored insulation meeting ICEA Method 1, Table E- 2 color code (K2 color code): Pairs black/red; Triads black/red/blue. 7. Assembly: a. Each pair or triad shall be cabled together with aluminum/polyester tape shield helically wrapped with minimum lap of 15%of tape width and isolation tape. Entire cable assembly shall have overall aluminum/polyester tape shield helically wrapped. b. Flexible strand tin-coated No.18 AWG (0.75 mm2) copper drain wire shall be helically wound between twisted conductors and tape shield. 8. Each instrumentation cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, conductor size, and quantity, UL listing. 9. Cables shall pass UL 1581, 70,000 Btu/hr flame test. I. Thermocouple extension cable circuited in cable tray or conduit: 1. Voltage rating: 300-volt. 2. Conductors: a. No. 16 AWG solid alloy(+Chromel/-Constantan);ANSI and ASA/ISA Type"EX". b. No. 16 AWG solid alloy(+Chromel/-Alumel);ANSI and ASA/ISA Type"KX". c. No. 16 AWG solid alloy(+Iron/-Constantan);ANSI and ASA/ISA Type"JX". 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride(PVC), color code: a. Type EX: Purple(+) and red (-). b. Type KX: Yellow(+)and red(-). c. Type JX: White(+)and red (-). 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat, moisture, and sunlight-resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC); color code: a. Type EX: Purple. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS F OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 7 b. Type KX: Yellow. c. Type JX: Black. 5. Assemble insulated conductors with 1-1/2"to 2-1/2" (38 mm to 63.5 mm)twisted lay. 6. Assembly: Provide with helically applied, laminated aluminum/polyester tape shield,with minimum lap of 15% of tape width. Flexible strand tin-coated No.18 AWG (0.7E mm2) copper drain wire shall be helically wound between twisted conductors and tape shield 7. Cables shall pass UL 1581, 70,000 Btu/hrflame test. J. Provide high-temperature wire around process equipment operating at temperatures exceeding standard cable ratings. 1. Voltage rating: 600-volt. 2. Temperature rating: Up to 1000 C. 3. Conductor: Stranded, "A" nickel. - 4. Insulation: Layers of ceramic fiber braids. 5. Jacket: Overall metallic sheath. _ K. Uninsulated and Insulated grounding conductors.- 1. Voltage rating: 600V, green XHHW-2, when insulated. 2. Conductors: Class B, stranded, bare copper. 2.04 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices, except as in lighting and general purpose power circuits specified below, riot allowed unless specifically indicated on Drawings or required for connection to equipment. B. Temperature rating of splices and terminations: No less than 75°C. C. Splices allowed in lighting and general-purpose power circuits. 1. Provide wire and cable connectors of high-conductivity, corrosion-resistant material with contact area equal to at least current carrying capacity of wire or cable. 2. General lighting and general-purpose building power circuits: a. Twist-type, insulated spring connectors for splices on solid or stranded conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. b. Use indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type connectors,with or without tongde for splices on solid or stranded conductors No. 6 AWG and larger. c. Apply insulating 600-volt tape. D. Insulating tapes and compounds for terminations and splices: UL-listed for intended use, location, and voltage by manufacturer. E. Termination of conductors to equipment with bolted connections: 1. Use compression type lugs: 2. Compression lugs for cables 250 kcmil and larger shall have at least 2 clamping elements of compression indents, and provision for at least 2 bolts for joining to apparatus terminals. 3. Crimping hand tools used for securing conductors in compression type connectors or terminal lugs shall be made for purpose and conductor sizes involved. 4. Crimping tools shall be ratchet-type preventing tool from opening until crimp a tion is completed. 5. Tools shall be product approved by connector manufacturer. F. Terminals: 1. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Marathon 1500 Series. 2. Conductors larger than No. 4/0 AWG: Terminate to tinned copper bus bar drilled and tapped with standard NEMA sized and spaced holes. G. Coordinate sizes and types of conductor terminals for 600-volt power cable terminations in equipment with furnished conductor and terminal connector data. H. Provide 600-volt rated terminal blocks for instrumentation and control conductors for connection to circuits external to specified equipment, and for internal circuits crossing shipping splits. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 8 -SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 1. Use crimp-on terminals matching termination point terminations in manufacturer-furnished panels. Splices not allowed. 2. Terminal blocks for thermocouple extension wire: Buchanan "Medium Duty"with thermocouple contacts or Marathon 200 Series with Omega Engineering, Inc. Type TL terminal lugs. 3. Furnish with white marking strips. 4. Where permitted by safety codes and standards, provide without covers. Neither step-type terminal blocks nor angle mounting of terminal blocks allowed. 5. Fuses may be mounted on terminal blocks. 6. Maximum 2 conductors in accordance with termination point. I. Terminal blocks for external connections shall leave from centrally mounted location, not from individual devices in enclosure. 1. Group-in instrument and control compartment for easy accessibility. 2. Provide sufficient space on each side of each terminal block to allow orderly arrangement of leads to be terminated on block. 3. Locate auxiliary equipment in compartments, enclosures, or junction boxes so service personnel will have direct access without interference from structural members and instruments without removal of barriers, cover plates, or wiring. 4. Do not mount terminal blocks in compartments containing cables or buses operating at voltages above 600 volts. 5. Size for wire sizes of incoming conductors as necessary. J. Terminate each conductor in multiconductor control cable or as shown on Drawings. Provide 10% spare terminals for circuit modifications. K. Circuit identification number listed on either circuit schedule or panel schedule shall be used to identify circuit, positioned as near as possible to end of each conductor on multiple single wire circuits and on cable jacket for multiconductor cables. L. Cable designations shall be visible after installation without requiring physical movement of cable. 2.05 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES A. Size junction boxes, pull boxes, and enclosures in accordance with requirements of NEC. B. Junction boxes and pull boxes 4" (100 mm)trade size or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron, or cast ferrous metal NEMA rated for installed location. Do not use concentric knockouts. C. Junction boxes, pull boxes, and electrical enclosures larger than 4" (100 mm)trade size in any dimension shall be as follows, unless required otherwise. 1. NEMA rating for electrical enclosures installed in nonhazardous locations: a. Indoor: 1) Dry environmentally controlled area: NEMA 12. 2) Noncorrosive wet or hose-down area: NEMA 4. 3) Corrosive wet or hose-down area: NEMA 4X b. Outdoor: 1) Corrosive area: NEMA 4X. 2) Noncorrosive area hose-down or spray area: NEMA 4. 3) Noncorrosive area nonhose-down area NEMA 3R. 2. Construct noncast-metal electrical enclosures from reinforced steel plate capable of supporting devices mounted on or within enclosure without deflection. Steel plate thickness shall conform to UL requirements. 3. Enclosures shall be of adequate strength to support mounted components during shipment and installation. 4. Conduit entrances: Field drilled. 5. Electrical enclosures located in outdoor,wet, or hose down areas shall be provided with space heaters. Provide space heaters completely wired within enclosure. Provide following: a. Space heater. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION .6 05 00-Page 9 b. Adjustable thermostat with set point temperature indicator. c. One miniature circuit breaker protective device. d. Space heaters, thermostat, and protection shall not interfere with cable into _')r out of enclosure, or with maintenance or replacement of devices within enclosure. e. Use of space heaters shall not change or discolor any painted surface. f. Space heater capacity shall maintain enclosure internal temperature above Jew point under — specified service conditions. g. Space heaters: Rate for 240 volts ac minimum, and size for operation on al:plied voltage of 120 volts ac. D. Outdoor electrical enclosures with ventilating openings: 1. Louver on outdoor electrical equipment and protect in accordance with NEMA type. 2. Equip openings on outdoor electrical equipment with fine mesh filters and stainless steel bug screens. 2.06 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring systems: Sheet metal, galvanized or cadmium plated. B. Minimum 4" (100 mm)square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, sized to accommodate devices and number of conductors in accordance with NEC. Equip with plaster ring or cover as necessary for flush finish. C. Exposed conduit systems shall have surface-mounted boxes unless specified otherwise. Boxes for exposed wiring in nonhazardous, noncorrosive, and nonweatherproof locations shall be malleable iron, cadmium finish or cast aluminum alloy, minimum 4" (100 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep. D. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which they are installed and as specified. 1. Boxes: Install flush in masonry construction and design for intended use. 2. Recessed boxes: a. Where fixture is mounted, boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) and octagc nal in shape or 4" (100 mm) square by 1-1/2" (38 mm)deep with round plaster ring. b. Where used as junction box, boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) square by 2-1/8" (53 mm) deep. 3. Outlet boxes for wall concealed telephone and signaling systems: 4" (100 mm) square by 1- 1/2"(38 mm)deep, minimum. Furnish with plaster ring and cover plate. 4. Floor boxes for floor outlets: a. Cast-metal with threaded conduit entrances, brass flange ring and brass duplex flap cover plate. b. Watertight with leveling and adjustment screws for adjusting cover plate to finished floor. c. Minimum 4" (100 mm)diameter and 3-1/2" (88 mm) deep with approved gasket or seal between adjusting ring and box. 5. Floor outlets for combination signaling, data, and power outlets: Construct of steel base, PVC housing, and steel bracket to allow feed through wiring and activation load-bearing support. Box construction shall meet UL 514A requirements. a. Entire housing shall be removable for unrestricted access. b. Once assembled, PVC housing shall be capable of carrying 6,000 lb (2722 kg) load. c. Coordinate outlet requirements with communication system requirements. 6. Floor boxes in 2-hour rated floors shall be secured in cored hole and shall be L L classified and listed for 2-hour rated floors. 2.07 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Furnish junction boxes and pull boxes were shown on Drawings, and where necessary to facilitate pulling wires and cables without damage. B. Above ground boxes shall be formed from sheet steel,with corners folded in and securely welded with inward flange on each of 4 edges. C. Drill box for mounting and attachment of cover-, galvanize after fabrication. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 10-SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 D. Cover: Construct of one-piece galvanized steel and provide with stainless steel round head machine screws. E. Box and cover shall be made of code gage steel, or heavier if shown on Drawings. F. Size: Minimum 4-1/2" (113 mm)deep and in accordance with NEC. Use next larger standard size when necessary in accordance with manufacturer standard sizes. G. Furnish pull and junction boxes without knockouts for field drilling. H. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which installed and in accordance with requirements specified. I. Underground boxes: Specifically design and construct for intended installed location, and be either pre-formed concrete or PVC. Covers shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, type of traffic in general area. J. If pull and junction boxes are exposed in and around architecturally finished surfaces, paint box to match finish of nearby surfaces, unless indicated otherwise. K. Bolt-on junction box covers 3'-0"(900 mm)square or larger, or heavier than 25 lb. (11 kg)shall have permanent rigid handles. Covers larger than 3'-0"x 4'-0" (900 mm x 1200 mm) shall be split. 2.08 EQUIPMENT SAFETY GROUNDING A. Install exposed raceway electrically continuous. Conduit and tray shall not be considered to be only ground conductor. B. Furnish equipment that is part of integral shipping unit or assembly with bare copper ground conductor extending to central ground connection lug. Lug shall be suitable for field connection to local ground. Electrical equipment shall be considered any device that is energized. C. Single-point ground connections required for proper operation of electronic equipment shall be insulated from equipment safety ground. Such connections shall be extended, using insulated cable, to single insolated termination point suitable for field connection to appropriate ground system. D. Conduits containing power circuits shall have ground conductor installed inside conduit. Ground conductor shall be bonded to equipment or tray or duct ground at both ends. E. Provide ground bushing on each conduit containing power circuit. Connect ground bushings together inside enclosure and to enclosure ground lug or ground bus. 1. Use No. 8 AWG conductor for ground bushings trade size 1-1/2"(38 mm) and smaller. 2. Ground bushings larger than 1-1/2"(38 mm) shall be sized in accordance with requirements of NEC, but in no case shall bushings be smaller than No. 8 AWG. F. Ground conductor: Uninsulated, Class B standard, round soft drawn uncoated copper as defined in ICEA S-19-81, unless specified otherwise. G. Hardware: Clamps, bolts, washers, nuts, and other hardware used with grounding conductor shall be copper, copper alloy, high copper alloy, or silicon bronze. 2.09 PIN AND SOCKET CONNECTORS A. Unless shown on Drawings, not allowed. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00-Page 9 b. Adjustable thermostat with set point temperature indicator. c. One miniature circuit breaker protective device. d. Space heaters, thermostat, and protection shall not interfere with cable into or out of enclosure, or with maintenance or replacement of devices within enclosure. e. Use of space heaters shall not change or discolor any painted surface. f. Space heater capacity shall maintain enclosure internal temperature above dew point under specified service conditions. g. Space heaters: Rate for 240 volts ac minimum, and size for operation on applied voltage of 120 volts ac. D. Outdoor electrical enclosures with ventilating openings: 1. Louver on outdoor electrical equipment and protect in accordance with NEMA type. 2. Equip openings on outdoor electrical equipment with fine mesh filters and stainless steel bug — screens. 2.06 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring systems: Sheet metal, galvanized or cadmium plated. B. Minimum 4" (100 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, sized to accommodate devices and number of conductors in accordance with NEC. Equip with plaster ring or cover as necessary for flush finish. C. Exposed conduit systems shall have surface-mounted boxes unless specified otherwise. Boxes for exposed wiring in nonhazardous, noncorrosive, and nonweatherproof locations shall be malleable iron, cadmium finish or cast aluminum alloy, minimum 4" (100 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm)deep. D. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which they are installed and as specified. 1. Boxes: Install flush in masonry construction and design for intended use. 2. Recessed boxes: a. Where fixture is mounted, boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) and octagonal in shape or 4" (100 mm) square by 1-1/2" (38 mm)deep with round plaster ring. b. Where used as junction box, boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm)square by 2-1/8" (53 mm) deep. 3. Outlet boxes for wall concealed telephone and signaling systems: 4" (100 mm) square by 1- 1/2"(38 mm)deep, minimum. Furnish with plaster ring and cover plate. 4. Floor boxes for floor outlets: a. Cast-metal with threaded conduit entrances, brass flange ring and brass duplex flap cover plate. b. Watertight with leveling and adjustment screws for adjusting cover plate to finished floor. c. Minimum 4" (100 mm)diameter and 3-1/2" (88 mm) deep with approved gasket or seal between adjusting ring and box. 5. Floor outlets for combination signaling, data, and power outlets: Construct of steel base, PVC housing, and steel bracket to allow feed through wiring and activation load-bearing support. Box construction shall meet UL 514A requirements. a. Entire housing shall be removable for unrestricted access. b. Once assembled, PVC housing shall be capable of carrying 6,000 lb (2722 kg) load. c. Coordinate outlet requirements with communication system requirements. 6. Floor boxes in 2-hour rated floors shall be secured in cored hole and shall be UL classified and listed for 2-hour rated floors. 2.07 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Furnish junction boxes and pull boxes were shown on Drawings, and where necessary to facilitate pulling wires and cables without damage. B. Above ground boxes shall be formed from sheet steel,with corners folded in and securely welded with inward flange on each of 4 edges. C. Drill box for mounting and attachment of cover; galvanize after fabrication. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 10-SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 D. Cover: Construct of one-piece galvanized steel and provide with stainless steel round head machine screws. E. Box and cover shall be made of code gage steel, or heavier if shown on Drawings. F. Size: Minimum 4-1/2" (113 mm)deep and in accordance with NEC. Use next larger standard size when necessary in accordance with manufacturer standard sizes. G. Furnish pull and junction boxes without knockouts for field drilling. H. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which installed and in accordance with requirements specified. 1. Underground boxes: Specifically design and construct for intended installed location, and be either pre-formed concrete or PVC. Covers shall be capable of withstanding,without failure, type of traffic in general area. J. If pull and junction boxes are exposed in and around architecturally finished surfaces, paint box to match finish of nearby surfaces, unless indicated otherwise. K. Bolt-on junction box covers 3'-0"(900 mm)square or larger, or heavier than 25 lb. (11 kg)shall have permanent rigid handles. Covers larger than T-0"x 4'-0" (900 mm x 1200 mm)shall be split. 2.08 EQUIPMENT SAFETY GROUNDING A. Install exposed raceway electrically continuous. Conduit and tray shall not be considered to be only ground conductor. B. Furnish equipment that is part of integral shipping unit or assembly with bare copper ground conductor extending to central ground connection lug. Lug shall be suitable for field connection to local ground. Electrical equipment shall be considered any device that is energized. C. Single-point ground connections required for proper operation of electronic equipment shall be insulated from equipment safety ground. Such connections shall be extended, using insulated cable, to single insolated termination point suitable for field connection to appropriate ground system. D. Conduits containing power circuits shall have ground conductor installed inside conduit. Ground conductor shall be bonded to equipment or tray or duct ground at both ends. E. Provide ground bushing on each conduit containing power circuit. Connect ground bushings together inside enclosure and to enclosure ground lug or ground bus. 1. Use No. 8 AWG conductor for ground bushings trade size 1-1/2" (38 mm)and smaller. 2. Ground bushings larger than 1-1/2"(38 mm)shall be sized in accordance with requirements of NEC, but in no case shall bushings be smaller than No. 8 AWG. F. Ground conductor: Uninsulated, Class B standard, round soft drawn uncoated copper as defined in ICEA S-19-81, unless specified otherwise. G. Hardware: Clamps, bolts, washers, nuts, and other hardware used with grounding conductor shall be copper, copper alloy, high copper alloy, or silicon bronze. 2.09 PIN AND SOCKET CONNECTORS A. Unless shown on Drawings, not allowed. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS F OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION ,'6 05 00- Page 11 2.10 FUSES AND FUSE BLOCKS A. Modular-type, Class H screw terminal fuse blocks with Bakelite frame and reinforce J retaining clips. Blocks shall be similar in construction and by same manufacturer. B. Slow blow fuses: Bussmann Type MDL or Gould Shawmut Type GDL with ampere ratings of 1/4, 1/2, 1, or 2. _ C. Fast acting fuses: Bussmann Type NON or Gould Shawmut Type OT with ampere ratings of 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 20, or 30. D. Extremely fast acting fuses: Bussmann Type KAB with ampere ratings of 1, 3, 6, 11), 15, 20, or 30. 2.11 CONTROL SWITCHES _ A. Multistage, rotary-type rated 120 volts ac or 125 volts dc, 3 amperes, as required. B. Handles: Black, fixed, modern, pistol grip type. Provide engraved black plastic escutcheon plates with targets. C. Provide with colored LED lamps and nameplates as required. 2.12 PUSHBUTTONS A. Standard pushbuttons: Heavy, industrial-type rated 120 volts ac or 125 volts dc, 3 amperes, as req u i red. B. Provide with colored LED lamps and nameplates as required. 2.13 INDICATING LIGHTS A. Status indicating lights: High-intensity, cluster, LED-type for panel mounting. B. Coordinate indicating light colors with indicated conditions as follows. Indicating lights shall be energized when condition exists and shall be de-energized when condition does not exist: 1. Red: Equipment energized: such as motor running, valve open, or breaker closed. 2. Green: Equipment de-energized: such as motor stopped, valve closed, or breaker open. 3. Amber: Equipment abnormality: such as motor trip, breaker trip, or relay trip. 4. White: Monitoring of control power or trip coil: such as lockout relay trip coil monitor or breaker trip coil monitor. Light is on during normal circuit operation and off during loss of power or loss of coil. 5. Blue: Loss of control power. 2.14 ALARM AND TRIP CONTACTS _ A. Alarm contacts for remote annunciation: Suitable for operation at 120 volts ac anc 125 volts dc. Contacts shall be rated at least 0.5-ampere make and break, minimum. B. Alarm contacts: Normally closed contacts that open to alarm condition. C. Trip contacts for remote trip: Suitable for operation at 125 volts do and rated 5 amperes make or break, minimum. 2.15 SEPARATELY MOUNTED COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS _ A. Enclosed, 3-phase, full-voltage, nonreversing, unless indicated otherwise. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 12 -SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 B. Complete combination starter shall have minimum interrupting rating of 65 kA or greater if specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings. C. Starter enclosures shall have enclosure NEMA rating specified herein. D. Provide combination starter with microprocessor-based contactor and integral electronic overload protection; minimum size shall be NEMA 1. E. Each phase shall have microprocessor-monitored current sensor for motor running overload, phase loss and phase unbalance protection. 1. Provide Class II ground fault protection; set to 20% of maximum continuous ampere rating and have delay of 20 seconds and run delay of 1 second to prevent nuisance trip on start. 2. Single-speed starters shall be furnished with 3 current sensors. 2-speed starters shall be furnished with 6 current sensors. F. Starters shall be furnished with motor circuit protectors (MCP) rated 600-volt. 1. Each breaker shall be manually operated with quick-make, quick-break, trip-free toggle mechanism. 2. Starters shall have external manual breaker-operating handle with provisions for up to 3 padlocks. 3. Access door shall be interlocked with motor circuit protector, so door cannot be opened while breaker is closed except by interlock override. 4. Starter contactor shall mechanically operate auxiliary contacts. Each starter shall include auxiliary contacts required for application, plus 2 spare NO and 1 spare NC contacts. 5. Provide membrane-style pushbutton control module and LED lights, if indicated on schematics, to control starter functions and indication. Pushbuttons and LEDs shall be clearly identified. 6. Verify and match control power transformers, overload protection, and sizes of starters to actual equipment furnished. 7. Size control power transformers(CPT)to supply control circuit and any additional loading simultaneously. Minimum CPT size shall be 100 volts-amperes for Size 1 starters and 150 volts- amperes for Size 2 and larger starters. 8. CPTs shall have primary leads protected, and one secondary lead protected and one secondary lead grounded. Provide DIN rail-mounted, miniature circuit breakers for protection. Fuses not allowed. 9. Starters for systems with system voltage of 120 volts or less shall not require CPT. 10. Two-speed starters and reversing starters shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked so only one set of contacts can be closed at any one time. 2.16 LOCAL SEPARATE MANUAL STARTERS A. Separately enclosed manual starters, shall be provided with adjustable, bimetallic, Class 10 ambient- compensated, integral overload relay and fixed magnetic short-circuit trip mechanism designed to trip at 12 times maximum current rating. B. Starters shall use high-conductivity copper for current carrying parts. C. Size starters for motors served in accordance with NEC and manufacturer's recommendations. D. Mount manual starters in enclosures with NEMA rating for area as specified herein. E. If applicable, starters shall be UL-listed and CSA-certified for group installations. F. Accessories shall be available for auxiliary contacts, trip alarm, under-voltage release, and shunt trip for field installation. G. Starters shall be pad-lockable with 3 padlocks in "On" and "Off"position. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS F.)R ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 23 05 00-Page 13 2.17 LOCAL SEPARATE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide 3-pole, molded-case, separately enclosed circuit breakers of not less than interrupting rating shown on Drawings at rated voltage. 1. Provide with thermal and instantaneous trip elements. 2. Breakers shall use high-conductivity copper for current carrying parts. Breaker enclosures shall have NEMA type enclosure as specified. B. Each breaker shall be manually operated with quick-make, quick-break, and trip-free: toggle mechanism. Thermal elements shall withstand sustained overloads and short-circu t currents without injury and without affecting calibration. C. Circuit breakers shall have"On,""Off," and"Tripped" indication and shall be pad-lockable with 3 padlocks in "On" and "Off position. 1. Breakers rated over 70 amperes shall berated 100% and have adjustable electronic trip units. 2. Breakers shall be capable of adding alarm, lockout, shunt trip, and under-voltage as options. 2.18 LOCAL SEPARATE DISCONNECT SWITCHES --- A. Three-pole, nonfusible, heavy-duty, rated 600-volt with continuous current rating as shown on Drawings and as required by load. 1. Type: Either molded-case or blade. 2. Switches shall use high-conductivity copper for current carrying parts. B. Switches shall be positive, quick-make, and quick-break mechanisms. 1. Switch assembly plus operating handle shall be integral part of enclosure base. _ 2. Each switch shall have handle whose position is easily recognizable and which can be locked in "On" and "Off' position with 3 padlocks. "On"and "Off' positions shall be clearly marked. C. Switches shall be UL-listed and horsepower rated. Where applicable, switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent door from being opened while operating handle is in"On"position. 2.19 AUXILIARY POWER TRANSFORMERS A. Provide separately mounted transformers as shown on Drawings. B. Windings: Copper. C. Transformers shall be self-air-cooled, dry-type, capable of wall-or floor-mounting, and enclosed for wiring connection by conduit. In areas where dust and dirt may be normally present, use encapsulated-type transformers. D. NEMA enclosure type protection shall be as specified herein. E. Provide at least 2 full kVA capacity voltage taps above and 2 full kVA capacity taps below nominal rating. Each tap shall be 2.5% step. F. Transformer shall be capable of at least 1500C rise above rated site maximum amtient without degrading transformer life. G. Transformers shall be capable of continuous operation at rated kVA with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57. H. Sound level shall not exceed NEMA maximum average sound level. 1. Enclosure: Sheet steel with corrosion-resistant finish and manufacturer's standard color. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 14 -SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 2.20 PLATES AND COVERS A. Provide finish plates and covers of appropriate type and size for wiring and control devices, signal, and communication outlets. B. Mark each plate and cover to show circuit and panel designation. Unless indicated to be engraved plate, use self-sticking, clear membrane, UV-resistant labels with typed black letters. Handwritten labels not allowed. C. Coordinate color with adjacent surfaces. D. Raised cover galvanized steel plates shall be acceptable for use on surface-mounted outlet boxes in unfinished areas where weatherproof plates are not required. E. For weatherproof installations, cover plates shall be gasketed and rated for NEMA Type 4 installation. F. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and finished to match plate. 2.21 WIRING DEVICES A. Where more than one flush device is indicated in same location, mount devices in gangs under common plate. B. Switches for control of ac lighting panel load circuits, single-pole, 3-way, and 4-way, shall be premium, heavy-duty specification-grade, and meet FS W-S-896E. Switches shall be rated for use at 120 or 277 volts and 20 amperes minimum. C. Device color, if not shown on Drawings, shall be coordinated to match adjacent finishes. D. Wall switches requiring pilot light indication shall have red LED pilot light when toggled"On." E. Pulse control of lighting contactors shall be 20 amperes, 120/277 volts, momentary, double-throw, and center"Off." F. Standard convenience outlets: Premium, heavy-duty, specification-grade, duplex, 3-wire, grounding, 20-ampere, 125-volt for 120-volt circuits, and rated 250-volts for 240 or 208-volt circuits. G. Ground fault circuit interrupter(GFI) receptacles: Duplex, 20-ampere, and 125 volts, feed-through type. H. Isolated ground (IG) outlets: Duplex, 3-wire, with isolated grounding terminal, 20-ampere, and 125 volts. Outlets shall be orange in color, unless specified otherwise. 2.22 WELDING A. If special welding requirements are required for any piece of equipment during installation, requirements shall be stated on manufacturer's shop drawing of affected part. B. Furnish detailed welding requirements with equipment shipment. 2.23 WELDING RECEPTACLES A. Coordinate manufacturer and type with Owner's requirements. B. Provide in appropriate amperage as shown on Drawings; 600-volt, 3-phase with grounding conductors connected through fourth pole. C. Provide 1 matching plug with appropriate woven grip and plug cap for cable size. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL _ ms1222 SECTION 23 05 00-Page 15 D. Match receptacles to equipment. 2.24 PANELBOARDS A. Dead-front, circuit breaker type, rated for voltage, phase, with main lugs or main breaker as indicated on panel schedules. B. Enclosure shall be NEMA-rated for installation location and capable of flush or surface mounting. C. Enclosure cover and access door shall be hinged with breaker operating handles accessible through latchable and lockable door. D. Typed panel directory located inside door shall have panel and circuits function clearly identified. — Handwritten panel schedules not allowed. E. Provide main and neutral buses insulated from cabinet with separate ground bus. Bus material shall be copper. Ground bus shall be similar to neutral bus in size and number of conductor terminating positions. 1. Bond ground bus to panelboard enclosure by copper ground strap or copper conductor of appropriate size. Bond neutral bus to ground bus in accordance with requirements of NEC. 2. Grounding bus connection to enclosure by removable screws not allowed. 3. Bus shall be capable of terminating clamp type lugs for neutral cable in each supply conduit, and connections for neutral cable in each load circuit. 4. Neutral bus shall be fully rated, unless specified otherwise. 5. Isolated ground panelboards: As specified above, except isolated ground bus shall be bonded, by insulated ground conductor, back to source of separately derived system. Do not bond isolated ground bus to panelboard enclosure unless this is first point of grounding for separately derived system. 2.25 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded-case, thermal-magnetic, bolt-in, individually front replaceable, and shall vis bly indicate"On," "Off," and "Tripped"position. B. Branch circuit breakers used for lighting circuits shall be switch duty rated, "SWD." C. Breakers having multiple poles shall be manufactured as common trip type. D. Interrupting rating shall be not less than interrupting rating of panelboards, and not series rated to achieve required short circuit interrupting rating. E. Provide handle clips for 10%, or minimum of 2 whichever is greater,for breakers tc prevent casual operation. If no breakers are indicated for installation, then provide on breakers laLeled as spare. F. Breakers, and provisions for future breakers, shall be provided in quantities, poles, and ampere ratings shown on Drawings. G. Molded-case circuit breakers used in ac and do panelboards and ac load centers s,iall be bolt-on type, G-frame size. 2.26 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard coating systems shall be factory-applied. Coating systems shall provide resistance to corrosion caused by weather and industrial environments. 1. Surfaces inaccessible after factory or field assembly shall be protected for life of equipment. 2. Painted surfaces shall be filled to provide smooth, uniform base for painting. 3. Surfaces requiring field welds shall not be coated within 3" (75 mm) of field weld. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 16- SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 B. Coating material and application techniques shall conform to regulations of air quality management agency having jurisdiction. C. Exterior surfaces of control and electrical equipment, including panels, cabinets, switchgear, transformers, and motors shall be manufacturer's standard colors unless specified otherwise. D. Apply high-temperature coating systems to uninsulated equipment operating at temperatures at or above 200°F (93°C). 2.27 RUST-INHIBITOR COMPOUNDS A. Uncoated machined and ferrous surfaces subject to corrosion shall be protected with rust-inhibitor compounds. B. Rust-inhibitor compounds used to protect surfaces of equipment and piping exposed to feedwater or steam shall be completely water-soluble. C. Surfaces to be field welded shall be coated with consumable rust-inhibitor compounds that will not affect quality of weld. D. External gasket surfaces,flange faces, couplings, rotating equipment shafts and bearings shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with rust-inhibitor compounds. 2.28 GALVANIZING A. Galvanized structural steel members and steel assemblies shall be pickled after fabrication. Remove scale, rust, grease, and other impurities, then hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM. B. If galvanized member is to be bolted, structural bolts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM. 2.29 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Conduits inside manholes, hand holes, building entrance pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be provided with 19-gage (1 mm) stainless steel identification tags,with 1/2"(13 mm)stamped letters and numbers. 1. Attach conduit Identification tags with stainless steel banding. Tag position shall be readily visible for inspection. 2. Tags shall provide, as minimum: a. Circuit origination and destination. b. Voltage. c. Number of conductors in accordance with phase. d. Number of phase conductors. B. Cables passing through or terminating in manholes, hand holes, and pull boxes shall have 19-gage (1 mm)stainless steel identification tags with stamped lettering that provides circuit identification information. C. Provide power, control, and instrumentation cables with permanent type identification markers with typed cable numbers and from/to information at each point of termination. Cable numbers and from/to information will be provided for circuits not associated with low-voltage panelboards. 1. Position cable markers to be readily visible for inspection. 2. Cable numbers shall match those as shown on Drawings. 3. Provide wire tags at each termination point for each conductor. Tags shall be permanent, wrap around, heat-shrinkable type with typewritten information. D. Color-code power conductors with electrical tape or provide with colored jacket. 1. Source voltage of 120/240 volts: a. Phase A: Black. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS F.OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00- Page 17 b. Phase B: Red. c. Neutral: White. 2. Source voltage of 480Y/277 volts: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. 3. Source voltage of 240/120-volt delta: High-leg systems shall not be used withcut Engineer approval. _. 4. Service entrance and equipment ground conductors shall be bare copper or green insulated conductor. Equipment bonding conductors shall be bare copper. 5. Isolated ground conductors shall be insulated; green in color with integral yellow stripe. No substitutions. 2.30 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. Laminated white-over-black plastic such that face is white with black letters,with 1/8" (3 mm) _ engraved letters securely fastened with minimum of 2 self-tapping, stainless steel screws. B. Motor starters, either separately mounted or contained in motor control centers, shall have nameplates identifying related equipment. Where separate control and indicating lights are used, starters shall have engraved or etched legends ("start", "stop", etc.)as shown on Drawings. C. Provide control stations with nameplates identifying related equipment. Control and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends as shown on Drawings. D. Circuit breakers within main switchboards and distribution switchboards shall be provided with nameplates identifying related equipment being served. E. Fused and nonfused switches shall have 2 front cover-mounted nameplates. 1. Nameplate containing permanent record indicating switch type, manufacturer's name, catalog number, and appropriate rating for equipment served. 2. Provide additional nameplate to identify associated equipment. F. Panelboards shall have front cover-mounted nameplates identifying panelboard, matching information shown on Drawings and associated panel schedule. Nameplate shall have at least 4 lines of text consisting of: 1. Line 1: Panel equipment identification number. 2. Line 2: IEEE Voltage Designation. 3. Line 3: Appropriate description from which power is derived, (i.e. fed from HP1 through XFMR- LP1). 4. Line 4: Location of power source, (i.e. PP-1, NW wing). G. Lighting and auxiliary power transformers shall have front cover-mounted namepla`es identifying transformer, matching information shown on Drawings. Nameplate shall have at least 2 lines of text that consist of: - 1. Line 1: Transformer equipment identification number. 2. Line 2: Location of derived power source (i.e. fed from MDB, Elec Rm Basement). H. Nameplates shall meet requirements of NFPA 70E 2.31 HARDWARE A. Provide hardware including, but not limited to, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors, wire nuts needed for installation. B. Hardware smaller than 3/4" (19 mm)shall match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and electrical equipment. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209 03 00 Page 18-SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Contractor shall be responsible for familiarity with Project Site conditions. Equipment furnished and installed shall be capable of withstanding most severe conditions that will be encountered. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. B. Damage occurring to building or equipment during installation shall be repaired or replaced to conditions existing prior to damage at no additional cost or delay to project or Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Drawings. B. Details for equipment and systems installed in accordance with industry standard techniques will not be furnished. C. Installation details furnished on Drawings shall be followed unless found to be unsafe, inappropriate for equipment specified, or unachievable due to site conditions. D. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings, equipment shall be installed plumb, square, and level. E. Sheet metal junction boxes, equipment enclosures, sheet metal raceways, and similar items mounted on earth-bearing walls shall be separated from wall not less than 1/4"(6 mm) by corrosion-resistant spacers. F. Substations, switchgear, motor control centers, and similar equipment located outdoors shall be permanently sealed at base. Openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed as to prevent entrance of birds, rodents, and insects the size of wasps and mud daubers. 1. Sealing material at base shall be concrete grout. 2. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with silicone sealant. 3. Large openings shall use galvanized screen mesh. 3.04 TRIP SETTING COORDINATION A. Motor overload protection shall be selected and set by Contractor based on final motor nameplate information. Size motor circuit protectors to coordinate with motor starting characteristics and overload protection. Submit summary of settings to Owner, list: 1. Equipment project identification number. 2. Nameplate information. 3. Overload device trip range. 4. Overload device setting. 5. Trip device rating. 6. Trip device setting if different from rated value. B. Set trip devices and verify devices are operating within manufacturer's tolerances. Make changes to settings not complying with requirements furnished by Engineer. Device settings will be furnished for following equipment: 1. Medium-voltage system. 2. Low-voltage switchgear. 3. Secondary unit substations. 23209,03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS F;OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 26 05 00-Page 19 3.05 CABLE A. Prior to installation of each cable or cable group into assigned raceway, verify that raceway has been correctly sized. 1. Where raceway is not indicated in circuit schedule or on Drawings, size in accordance with requirements of NEC. 2. If raceway size indicated on Contract Documents is inadequate, notify Enginee'. B. Replace cables pulled into wrong raceway or cut too short to rack and train. C. Do not reinstall cables installed in wrong raceway and removed. Discard cables ur less inspected and accepted by Owner's Representative in writing. - D. Carefully lay or pull circuits in cable tray so neither cables nor tray is damaged. E. Protect cables from dirt,water, oil, damaging chemicals, and from physical injury prior to, and during installation. F. Cables shall be cut sufficiently long to conform to contour of trays,with particular attention paid to vertical inside bends. G. Remove excessive slack so cables lie parallel to sides of trays. H. Multiple single-conductor power cables No. 1/0 AWG (50 mm2)or larger installed in cable tray that constitute single power circuit shall be grouped together in tdplexed or quadriplexed arrangement. Maintain cable spacing to be 2.15 x O.D. of largest conductor in group or adjacent group. I. Multiconductor power cables No. 4/0 AWG (120 mm2) or larger installed in cable tray shall be installed in single layer with maintained spacing of not less than 1 cable diameter of largest cable. J. Fasten cables to cable tray with rated nylon ties to hold cables in place. K. Perform fishing and pulling with flexible round metal tape, CO2 propelled polyethylene cord, nylon rope, or manila rope. L. Cable damage caused by improper pulling tension and excessive sidewall pressures shall be considered for any cable pulls that require use of mechanized cable pulling machire,whether installed underground or overhead. _ 1. NEC requirements shall be used as guideline. Calculations shall be performed for duct bank runs over 300' (90 m), and for installations in conduit over 100' (30 m). 2. Monitor pulling tension during installation of cable. Tension shall not exceed maximum recommended by cable manufacturer. 3. To avoid damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends, pulling tension snall not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Pulling mechanisms, manual or power type, shall have rated capacity in tons legibly marked on mechanism. 5. During installation, observer shall constantly watch dynamometer and record maximum tension achieved during pull. a. If excessive strain develops, stop pulling operation at once. Determine difficulty and correct. _ b. Provide records of dynamometer readings to Engineer. c. Inform Owner prior to cable pulls. 6. Do not use woven wire cable grips. Use only pulling eyes for pulling cables. 7. As soon as cable is pulled into place, remove pulling eyes and reseal cable. M. Insert reliable nonfreezing type of swivel or swivel connection between pulling rope and eye to prevent twisting under strain. N. Only use lubricants as recommended by cable manufacturer. Water-based lubricants not allowed. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 20 -SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 O. Outside of each cable reel shall be carefully inspected. Remove protruding nails, fastenings, or other objects that might damage cable. 1. Perform visual inspection for flaws, breaks, or abrasions in cable sheath as cable leaves reel. Pulling speed shall be slow enough to permit inspection. 2. Damage to sheath or finish of cable shall be sufficient cause for rejecting cable. 3. Cable damaged during installation shall be replaced at no expense to Owner. P. Permanent radius of each bend after cable installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Q. Cable supports and securing devices shall have bearing surfaces located parallel to surfaces of cable sheath. Install to provide adequate support without deformation of cable jackets or insulation. R. Provide adequate cable end lengths. Properly install in junction boxes and manholes to avoid longitudinal strains and distorting pressures on cable at conduit bushings and duct end bells. S. Final inspection shall be made after cables are in place. Where supports, bushings, and end bells deform cable jacket, provide additional supports. T. Splices,joints, and connections shall be made only in accessible junction boxes in accordance with methods specified and instructions of cable manufacturer. Splices not allowed unless shown on Drawings. U. Rough-in wiring terminated in junction boxes shall have at least 8" (200 mm)of free conductor coiled in box for connection to equipment and receptacles. V. Circuit information for circuits originating from panelboards is indicated on panel schedules. Other circuits are identified on circuit schedule. 1. Do not combine receptacle loads with lighting loads. 2. Circuits fed from panelboards shall not be combined with circuits from circuit schedule. W. Panelboard circuits are indicated as individual runs. Circuits may be combined into common conduits in accordance with rules of NEC. Perform work associated with combining of circuits at no additional cost to Owner. 3.06 WIRING DEVICES, BOXES,AND FITTINGS A. Install galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings in: 1. Embedded in concrete walls, ceiling, and floors. 2. Outdoor exposed faces of masonry walls. 3. Locations where weatherproof cover is required by code or this specification. B. Install galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes in: 1. Indoor exposed faces of masonry walls. 2. Interior partition walls. 3. Joist supported ceilings. C. Rigid PVC device boxes shall be installed in exposed nonmetallic conduit systems. D. Telephone and communication conduit systems shall have separate junction boxes and pull fittings. E. Install fire system wiring in dedicated conduit system. F. Finish openings so standard sized cover plates can be used. Oversized plates not allowed. G. Mount wall switches T-6" (1050 mm) above finished floor or grade unless specified otherwise. After circuits are energized, test wall switches for proper operation. 23209.03.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS F_OR ELECTRICAL ms1222 SECTION 2 6 05 00-Page 21 H. Outlets: 1. Standard mounting height: 18" (450 mm)above finished floor, unless specified otherwise. 2. Outlets outdoors, garages, basements, shops, storerooms, and other rooms where equipment may be hosed down: 4'-0"(1200 mm) above finished floor or grade. 3. Surface-mount welding receptacles 4'-0" (1200 mm) above finished floor or grade. 4. After circuits are energized, test each receptacle for correct polarity. 5. Test GFCI receptacles for proper operation. 6. Mount wall thermostats 5'-6" (1650 mm) above finished floor unless noted otherwise. Thermostats mounted shall be suitably insulated from wall temperatures. I. Communication outlets: 1. 18" (450 mm)above finished floor unless required otherwise. 2. Outlets outdoors, garages, basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be hosed down: 4'-0" (1200 mm) above floor. J. Clock outlets: Locate T-0"(2.13 m) above finished floor or grade. 3.07 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Electrical system and equipment grounding shall be installed in accordance with NE C and shall conform to following, where applicable: 1. Ground conductors shall be bare or green-insulated in accordance with NEC. 2. Cable shall be soft-drawn copper or copper bar, sized in accordance with drawi-igs and NEC, but not smaller than No. 12 AWG. 3. Ground cable splices and joints inaccessible upon completion of construction shall meet requirements of IEEE 837 and shall be exothermic weld or compression system type. 4. Ground cable through exterior building walls not in conduit shall enter within 3' (1 m) below finished grade and shall be provided with water stop. Installation of water stop shall include filling space between strands with solder and soldering 12"(300 mm)copper disc over cable. 5. Ground cable near base of structure shall be in undisturbed earth and as far from structure as excavation permits, but not closer than 6"(150 mm). _ 6. Copper ground conductor in addition to conduit connection shall ground each piece of electrical equipment. 7. Copper or high-conductivity copper alloy ground lugs or clamps shall make ground connections to equipment and ground buses. Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be made by clamp-type lugs added under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and added through enclosures other than explosionproof, or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable access covers not permitted. 8. Bond grounding system to water piping by connection to first flange inside building from main that will form good ground connection. Make connection with copper bar or strap by drilling and tapping flange and providing bolted connection. 9. Ground conductors on equipment shall be formed to contour of equipment and firmly supported. 10. Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be minimum 5/8" (16 mm)diameter by 10' (3.0 m) long, with copper jacket bonded to steel core. 11. Make connections to ground grid where shown on Drawings. 12. Verify connections by performing continuity checks. 3.08 FIREPROOFING AND FIRE RATINGS A. Maintain fire-resistive integrity during construction. B. Penetrations through fire-resistive structures shall be sealed with fire-resistive material compatible with construction penetration. C. Where required by codes, local building officials, or fire marshal, furnish UL fire sealing systems and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 23209.03.00 Page 22 -SECTION 26 05 00 ms1222 3.09 STARTUP AND TESTING A. Clean equipment interiors and exteriors prior to start-up and testing. B. Unless specified otherwise, tests performed shall be standard tests listed by ANSI/IEEE for intended equipment. C. Equipment shall be checked and placed in service ready for operation. D. Circuits shall be electrically tested after installation. Test power and motor circuits prior to final connection to equipment. Splices shall be complete prior to testing. 1. Provide equipment and labor required for testing. 2. Circuit failing to test satisfactorily shall be replaced or repaired, and retested at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Check power and motor circuits, do power, and control circuits for: a. Correct terminations. b. Continuity. c. Unintentional shorts and grounds. 4. Check power conductors for correct phasing. 5. Motor circuits shall be checked for proper rotation and motors"bumped"to verify correct machine rotation. 6. Control, instrumentation, and thermocouple wire shall be checked for correct termination, continuity, freedom from shorts or grounds, and identification. 7. Current transformer wiring shall be loop checked by injecting current at one end of loop and checking with clip-on ammeter at each field termination point to assure continuity and phase identification. 8. Voltage transformer wiring shall be tested by applying voltage at one point and checking with voltmeter phase rotation meter and phase angle meter at each field termination point to assure continuity, identification and phase shift. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Final start-up and checkout shall be completed prior to Owner acceptance of project. B. Electrical installation shall be complete in every detail and capable of normal operation in presence of Owner or Owner's Representative to verify its readiness. END OF SECTION 1) M. J. Hill 2) L. E. Ingram 23209.03.00 ABOVE-GRADE RACEWAY ms1222 SECTION 26 05 33 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Above grade conduit, wireway, boxes, and associated accessories for support, securing, and protection of electrical wiring. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. List of proposed materials identifying manufacturer and type to be furnished. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, marked as necessary to indicate specific type, model or catalog number for equipment to be furnished for project. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Component and accessories data sheets. 2. Installation information. C. Such other similar information as Engineer may request. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall be manufacturer of major components within assembly and shall be ISO certified. 2. Manufacturer shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of 5 /ears. _ B. Regulatory requirements 1. Equipment shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable requirements of following: NFPA 70; ANSI C80.1, C80.3, C80.4, C80.5; UL 1, UL 6, UL 360, UL 651, UL 797, UL — 870, UL 1242; and NEMA TC2, TC3, TC6, TC9, and RN1. 2. Standards of foreign organizations shall not be used without written approval from Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Raceway systems and accessories shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Exposed and concealed conduit. 2. Elbows, fittings, and accessories. 3. Hardware for support, securing, and protection. 4. Wireways. 2.02 RIGID METAL CONDUIT, STEEL (RGS) A. Material: Mild steel tube with continuous welded seam in accordance with ANSI C80.1, and UL 6. B. Exterior and Interior protective coating: Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro- galvanizing. Apply final coat of transparent zinc chromate to exterior. Exterior and interior coatings applied to conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking. C. Thread pitch shall conform to ANSI/ASME 131.20.1. Taper shall be 3/4"/ft (62.5 mm/m). D. Each length of conduit shall have UL listing label. E. Couplings, unions, and fittings: Threaded-type, galvanized steel. ABOVE-GRADE RACEWAY 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 26 05 33 ms1222 F. Conduit bodies: Threaded or threadless type, cast metal or malleable iron type with zinc or cadmium coating. Covers shall have solid gaskets and captive screw fasteners. G. Running thread not acceptable. 2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized, high-grade steel with continuously welded seam. B. External protective coating: Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. Coating shall not flake or crack when conduit is bent. C. Internal coating: Baked enamel or similar compound resulting in smooth surface. D. Fittings: Rust-resistant steel compression type. Connectors shall have insulated insert in throat. Die- cast aluminum material, and indent or set screw type, are not acceptable. E. Conduit bodies: Malleable iron for use with compression type fittings. Set screw type not acceptable. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(FMC) A. Material: Galvanized mild steel. B. Construction: One continuous length of steel strip of uniform weight and thickness and shaped in interlocking convolutions; fabrication shall result in smooth interior and exterior surfaces, reduced or full wall. C. Fittings: Cadmium-plated steel, malleable iron, or zinc alloy. Screw in type, 1/2" (13 mm) and 3/4"(19 mm)shall have high-density polypropylene liners. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(LFMC) A. Material: Mild steel, galvanized. B. Construction: One continuous length steel strip of uniform weight and thickness and shaped in interlocking convolutions;fabrication shall result in smooth interior surface. C. External coating: Provide outer jacket of tough extruded polyvinyl. Jacket shall be positively locked to steel core and be sunlight resistant and listed as oil resistant. D. Continuous integral grounding strip: Required in sizes 1-1/4" (31 mm) and smaller. Ground wire shall be required for larger sizes. E. Fittings: Cadmium or zinc-plated steel or malleable iron. Compression type with tapered hub and synthetic rubber gasket and ground ferrule for making positive ground contact with steel core, designed to prevent outerjacket from pulling away from steel core. Connectors shall have insulated insert in throat. Suitable for grounding through 1-1/4" (31 mm)trade size, provide ground wire lug for sizes 1-1/2" (38 mm)and larger. 2.06 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, POLYVINLY CHLORIDE (PVC) A. Material: PVC Schedule 40, and Schedule 80. Schedule 40 shall be rated for above-grade installation. B. Fittings, elbows, and accessories: Connect to conduit by solvent-type cement process. Material shall be same as conduit. 23209.03.00 ABOVE-GRADE RACEWAY _ ms1222 SECTION 26 05 33 -Page 3 C. Transition for connection of plastic conduit to rigid metal conduit shall be threadless solvent-type cement connection to PVC, with threaded connection to rigid metal conduit. 2.07 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General use areas, protected or indoor: Galvanized sheet steel with a metal thickness meeting UL 50. Provide removable covers attached with round head silicon bronze machine screws B. Process or wet locations, indoor or outdoor: Galvanized steel or aluminum with gasketed covers _ attached with stainless steel hardware using raintight hubs. C. Hazardous areas: UL-approved for area classification. D. Where required for elbows, fittings, and accessories to be furnished by same manufacturer as conduit, boxes shall also be furnished by conduit manufacturer or by supplier approved by manufacturer. 2.08 WIREWAY A. Metal gage thickness shall conform to NEC. B. NEMA 1: Minimum 16-gage steel with baked enamel finish, hinged or removable cc vers with captive stainless steel screws. C. NEMA 3R: Minimum 16-gage galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, gasketed drip-shield cover, with stainless steel screws, weatherproof. D. NEMA 4X: Minimum 14-gage Type 304 stainless steel with neoprene gasket, hinge) cover, stainless steel external screw clamps, and external mounting tabs. E. NEMA 12: Minimum 16-gage steel with baked enamel finish with gasketed, hinged -;over with stainless steel screws, dust-tight. F. Screws shall be guarded to prevent damage to wire installation. G. Provide fittings, supports, end plates, and accessories as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Coordinate timing of installation and locations of raceway with other trades. Do not dock access or impede construction. B. Locations of above grade raceway indicated on Drawings are approximate. Coordir ate actual locations in field to avoid conflicts with other equipment. C. Areas designated for, but not limited to; access, maintenance, hatchway, tube removal, and expansion shall be kept clear of field-routed raceway. D. Exposed raceway runs shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to dominant surfaces with right- angle turns made with symmetrical bends or fittings. E. Install exposed raceway minimum of 6" (150 mm)from outside surface of insulation and lagging on hot water pipes, steam pipes, and other heat sources. Install minimum of 12" (300 mm)from uninsulated heat sources. Avoid long runs parallel to heat sources. F. Use expansion fittings where necessary. When expansion or deflection will be greaser than 6" (152 mm)or greater than fitting is designed to accommodate, provide junction boxes solidly mounted on ABOVE-GRADE RACEWAY 23209.03 00 Page 4-SECTION 26 05 33 ms1222 each side of expansion joint and connect with flexible, liquidtight conduit, or adjust conduit sections to limit expansion to less than 6" (152 mm). G. Support raceway independently from equipment, and temporary or movable structures. H. At minimum, identify raceways at both ends with raceway numbers provided by Engineer. Markers shall be adhesive, UV-resistance type with 1" (25 mm) high lettering. 3.02 USES AND LIMITATIONS A. Refer to NEC for guidelines regarding use, and limitation of each type of conduit. Follow NEC except as specified otherwise herein, or as shown on Drawings. B. PVC-RGS: Acceptable for corrosive areas. Install conduit system in accordance with manufacturer's installation manual. Installer shall be certified by manufacturer to install coated conduit. C. EMT: Use for concealed wiring in finished areas associated with lighting and small power circuits rated 600 volts or less. Do not use outdoors in concrete, or in damp or wet locations. Acceptable for use in nonhazardous, indoor, unfinished areas for lighting and communication, and specialty wiring. D. FMC: 1/2" (13 mm) minimum size. Use only in dry, interior, noncorrosive, and concealed locations. Maximum length shall be 3' (1 m)for general use, and up to 6' (1.6 m)to light fixtures in concealed locations. E. LFMC: 1/2" (13 mm) minimum size; 5' (1.5 m) maximum length. F. PVC: Do not use schedule 40 PVC for exposed runs. Schedule 80 PVC sunlight-resistant conduit may be used for exposed runs if approved by Engineer. 3.03 RIGID CONDUIT A. Conduits not shown on Drawings shall be sized in accordance with NEC. B. Conceal conduit in finished areas. C. Drainage: Avoid water pockets in conduit runs; provide suitable fittings at low spots in exposed conduit where pockets cannot be avoided. Weep holes not permitted in conduit. D. Conduit ends: 1. Cap spare conduits with fittings designed for intended use. 2. Conduit terminating in panels or enclosures where exposed to entrance of foreign material shall be plugged with commercial duct-sealing compound around conductors. 3. Cap conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of foreign material. E. Where practicable, provide 3" (75 mm)stubbed up conduit for conduit entering into bottom of freestanding equipment. Coordinate locations with equipment. Terminate with grounding bushings. F. Clean and swab inside of conduit by mechanical means to remove foreign materials and moisture before wires or cables are installed. Cleaning method shall not damage interior surface of conduit. G. Bushings: Provide at termination of conduit not terminated in hubs and couplings. Insulating bushings with 150"C rated insulating inserts in metal housings shall be provided on conduit 1-1/4" (31 mm) and larger. Insulating bushings shall be grounding type. Standard bushings shall be galvanized. H. Apply coat of zinc chromate to zinc-coated conduits where protective coating is damaged. 1. Couplings and unions: 23209 03.00 ABOVE-GRADE RACEWAY ms1222 SECTION 26 05 33-Page 5 1. Threaded conduit couplings shall join metal conduit with conduit ends butted. Where standard threaded couplings cannot physically be used,join metal conduit using conduit unions or split couplings. 2. Use ground-seat type,watertight unions where union may be submerged. 3. Install coupling nut in upper-most union to prevent entrance of water into union when used in vertical or inclined conduit runs. J. Bends: Run of conduit shall not contain more than equivalent of three 900 bends, including offsets at outlets or fittings. Use only manufacturer-approved conduit bending equipment. Do not use deformed or crushed conduits. K. Threads: Cut ends of conduit with saw; do not use wheel cutter. Conduit end shall have same number of threads as present from factory. Apply coat of zinc chromate to steel conduit threads and apply anti-seize compound containing powdered zinc or lubricating graphite to aluminum conduit threads. L. Use expansion joints as required such that no more than 6" (152 mm) allowance for expansion or contraction of conduit occurs. 3.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Connect equipment that moves due to vibration, normal operation of mechanism, o-thermal expansion, in relation to supported conduit using flexible conduit. Install junction boxes as required. Provide green ground wire. B. Flexible metal conduit 1-1/2" (38 mm)and larger shall be installed with external lugs and external grounding conductor. 3.05 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Hazardous areas: Rigid conduit shall be used in areas designated as Class 1 areas classified as hazardous locations in accordance with NEC. B. Fittings installed outdoors or in damp locations shall be weathertight. Outdoor fittin as shall be of heavy-duty construction. 3.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Supports of structural steel or manufactured framing members shall be fabricated from lightweight channel approved by manufacturer for intended use, provide required rods, anchor,, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims, bolts and accessories. — B. Clamps: Galvanized malleable iron 1-hole straps, beam clamps, or other device with necessary bolts and expansion shields. C. Adjustable hangers: Use to support horizontal runs only. Use trapeze-type supports for parallel runs of conduit. Install U-bolts at end of each run and at each elbow. Install conduit clamps every third intermediate hanger for each conduit. Hanger rods shall be 3/8" (10 mm)minimum diameter threaded galvanized steel rods. D. Conduits supports mounted on concrete surfaces: Fasten with self-drilling tubular expansion shell anchors with externally split expansion shells, single cone expanders, and annular creak-off grooved chucking cones. 3.07 PENETRATIONS A. Provide required penetrations in floors, walls, or roofs. Penetrations shall be kept to minimum, as small as possible, and installed in neat manner. Surrounding surfaces damaged during installation of penetrations shall be included as part of this work. ABOVE-GRADE RACEWAY 23209 03 00 Page 6-SECTION 26 05 33 ms1222 B. Seal penetrations in walls, floors, ceilings, and enclosures. Provide fire stops for electrical raceway penetrations. Maintain original fire rating that existed prior to commencement of work. Do not install fire seal for wire openings until interconnecting wiring of equipment is proven to operate properly. C. Sleeves: 1. Provide for passage of conduits through walls, floors, or partitions. Set sleeves in masonry during construction; set sleeves through concrete before placement begins. 2. Material: Rigid conduit or pipe securely fastened in position. 3. Cut sleeve flush with floor where conduit enters equipment enclosure otherwise extend sleeve 3" (75 mm)above floor. 4. Sleeves through exterior building walls: Install conduit in center of sleeve. Pack interior and exterior annular space around conduit with plastic backer rod sized to fit annular space in compression as recommended by backing manufacturer. Seal interior and exterior of joint with acrylic polymer sealant. 5. Sleeves through waterproof construction shall be flanged type. D. Penetrations required after walls, floors, or ceilings are constructed shall be provided and grouted or sealed. Openings shall be core-drilled, do not jackhammer. E. Patch and finish openings made in existing walls and floors to match original material in composition and appearance. F. Cut or punch penetrations in wall panels. External penetration shall be flashed and calked to provide weather tight seal. G. Limit penetrations in roofs to applications where required for connection to specific piece of equipment. When required, flash and apply seal material after installation of conduit to provide weathertight bond and seal. Materials shall be compatible with roofing system. 3.08 WIREWAY AND BOXES A. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Connections shall be made such that they maintain NEMA rating of enclosure and system. C. Locations and quantities shown on Drawings are approximate. Make adjustments as required to eliminate field interferences or to meet requirements of NEC. Provide Engineer with information regarding new locations. D. To access interior, locate to permit full removal of covers, or such that doors can be opened more than 1000. Mount at height as indicated, or as required by NEC,whichever is more restrictive. E. Support wireways and boxes independently of conduits by means of bolts, screws, rod hangers, and other suitable means. 3.09 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Space receptacles in multioutlet assemblies at 12"(300 mm)on center or as indicated otherwise. Adjacent receptacles shall be wired on different circuits. END OF SECTION 1) M. J. Hill 2) L. E. Ingram 23209.03.00 BELOW-GRADE RACEWAY ms1222 SECTION 26 05 43 -Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Below-grade conduit, boxes, and associated accessories for support, securing, and protection of electrical wiring. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. List of proposed materials identifying manufacturer and type to be furnished. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, marked as necessary to indicate specific type, model or catalog number for equipment to be furnished for project. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Component and accessories data sheets. 2. Installation information. C. Such other similar information as Engineer may request. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Manhole and hand hole dimensional layouts. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall be manufacturer of major components within assembly and shall be ISO certified. 2. Manufacturer shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of 5 years. B. Regulatory requirements 1. Equipment shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable requirements of following; NFPA 70;ANSI C80.1, C80.3, C80.4, C80.5; UL 1, UL 6, UL 360, Ul. 651, UL 797, UL 870, UL 1242; and NEMA TC2, TC3, TC6, TC9, and RN1. 2. Standards of foreign organizations shall not be used without written approval from Engineer. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Raceway systems and accessories include, but shall not be limited to: 1. Direct buried ducts. 2. Concrete encased ducts. 3. Cable trench. 4. Elbows, fittings, and accessories. 5. Hardware for support, securing, and protection. 6. Manholes and handholes. 7. Trenching and backfilling. 2.02 RIGID METAL CONDUIT, STEEL(RGS) A. Material: Mild steel tube with continuous welded seam in accordance with ANSI C80.1, and UL 6. B. Exterior and Interior protective coating: Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro- galvanizing. Apply final coat of transparent zinc chromate to exterior. Exterior and interior coatings applied to conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking. BELOW-GRADE RACEWAY 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 26 05 43 ms1222 C. Conduits shall be available in standard trade sizes, 3/4" (21 mm)minimum. D. Thread pitch shall conform to ANSI/ASME 131.20.1. Taper shall be 3/4"/ft(62.5 mm/m). E. Each length of conduit shall have UL listing label. F. In areas designated as corrosive, conduit shall meet NFPA 70. G. Couplings, unions, and fittings: Threaded-type, galvanized steel. H. Conduit bodies: Threaded-type, cast metal or malleable iron type with zinc or cadmium coating. Covers shall have solid gaskets and captive screw fasteners. I. Running thread not acceptable. 2.03 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) A. Material: PVC Schedule 40, and Schedule 80. Schedule 40 shall be rated for underground installation; underground shall be either direct buried or encased in concrete. When encased in concrete, underground conduits shall be rated for cables operating up to 900C installed within. B. Fittings, elbows, and accessories: Connect to conduit by solvent-type cement process. Material shall be same as conduit. Provide belled end fittings at each manhole and wall entrance. C. Transition for connection of plastic conduit to rigid metal conduit shall be threadless solvent-type cement connection to PVC,with threaded connection to rigid metal conduit. 2.04 RIGID NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND CONDUIT(EB) A. Material: PVC, designed for concrete encased applications. Comply with NEMA TC-6 and TC-8, and ASTM F512 for utility duct, and ETL-listed. B. No special cutting or tapering devices required. C. Joints shall be made with solvent-type cement. D. Provide duct end bells for termination into manholes. E. Fittings, elbows, and accessories, shall be manufactured by conduit manufacturer, and be of same material. 2.05 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Hazardous areas: UL-approved for area classification. B. Where required for elbows,fittings, and accessories to be furnished by same manufacturer as conduit, boxes shall also be furnished by conduit manufacturer or by supplier approved by manufacturer. 2.06 HANDHOLES A. Use: Airfield lighting circuits, unshielded medium-voltage circuits, and low-voltage power and communication circuits. Do not use for splicing multipair communication cables or shielded power cables. B. Size to accommodate splices and equipment contained within handhole. C. If acceptable to Engineer, open bottom handholes may be used. 23209.03.00 BELOW-c)RADE RACEWAY ms1222 SECTION 26 05 43-Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Coordinate timing of installation and locations of raceway with other trades. Do not block access or impede construction. B. Locations of raceway indicated on Drawings are approximate. Coordinate actual locations in field to avoid conflicts with other equipment. C. Areas designated for, but not limited to; access, maintenance, hatchway, equipment removal, and expansion shall be kept clear of field-routed raceway. D. Conduit embedded in concrete slabs: Minimum 1" (25 mm)from outer edge of corduit to bottom of slab. Conduit outside diameter shall be no more than 1/3 of slab thickness. Space conduits minimum of 6 conduit diameters apart. E. Use expansion fittings where necessary. When expansion or deflection will be greeter than 6" (152 mm) or greater than fitting is designed to accommodate, provide junction boxes so Idly mounted on each side of expansion joint and connect with flexible, liquidtight conduit, or adjust ,:;onduit sections to _ limit expansion to less than 6" (152 mm). F. Support raceway independently from equipment, and temporary or movable structUres. G. At minimum, identify raceways at both ends with raceway numbers provided by Engineer. Markers shall be adhesive, UV-resistance type with 1" (25 mm) high lettering. 3.02 USES AND LIMITATIONS A. Refer to NEC for guidelines regarding use, and limitation of each type of conduit. Follow NEC except as specified otherwise herein, or as shown on Drawings. B. RGS: Do not use underground except as stub-ups and apply corrosion protection. Do not mix aluminum fittings with steel conduit and vice versa. C. PVC-RGS: May be used for conduits installed underground, direct buried, or for slab-on-grade construction. Acceptable for corrosive areas. Install conduit system in accordance with manufacturer's installation manual. Installer shall be certified by manufacturer to install coated conduit. D. PVC and EB: Use Schedule 80 PVC conduit encased in concrete for installation under heavy traffic areas. 3.03 RIGID CONDUIT A. Conduits not shown on Drawings shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Minimum size: 3/4"(19 mm). B. Conceal conduit in finished areas. C. Drainage: Avoid water pockets in conduit runs; provide suitable fittings at low spots in exposed conduit where pockets cannot be avoided. Weep holes not permitted in conduit. D. Conduit ends: 1. Cap spare conduits with fittings designed for intended use. 2. Conduit terminating in panels or enclosures where exposed to entrance of foreign material shall _ be plugged with commercial duct-sealing compound around conductors. 3. Cap conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of foreign material. BELOW-GRADE RACEWAY 23209 03 00 Page 4-SECTION 26 05 43 ms1222 E. Where practicable, provide 3" (75 mm)stubbed up conduit for conduit entering into bottom of freestanding equipment. Coordinate locations with equipment. Terminate with grounding bushings. F. Clean and swab inside of conduit by mechanical means to remove foreign materials and moisture before wires or cables are installed. Cleaning method shall not damage interior surface of conduit. G. Bushings: Provide at termination of conduit not terminated in hubs and couplings. Insulating bushings with 150'C rated insulating inserts in metal housings shall be provided on conduit 1-1/4"(31 mm) and larger. Insulating bushings shall be grounding type. Standard bushings shall be galvanized. H. Apply coat of zinc chromate to zinc-coated conduits where protective coating is damaged. I. Couplings and unions: 1. Threaded conduit couplings shall join metal conduit with conduit ends butted. Where standard threaded couplings cannot physically be used,join metal conduit using conduit unions or split couplings. 2. Use ground-seat type,watertight unions where union may be submerged. J. Bends: Run of conduit shall not contain more than equivalent of three 90'bends, including offsets. Use only manufacturer-approved conduit bending equipment. Do not use deformed or crushed conduits. K. Threads: Cut ends of conduit with saw; do not use wheel cutter. Conduit end shall have same number of threads as present from factory. Apply coat of zinc chromate to steel conduit threads and apply anti-seize compound containing powdered zinc or lubricating graphite to aluminum conduit threads. L. Use expansion joints as required such that no more than 6" (152 mm)allowance for expansion or contraction of conduit occurs. 3.04 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Hazardous areas: Rigid conduit shall be used in areas designated as Class 1 areas classified as hazardous locations in accordance with NEC. 3.05 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Supports of structural steel or manufactured framing members shall be fabricated from lightweight channel approved by manufacturer for intended use, provide required rods, anchors, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims, bolts and accessories. B. Clamps: Galvanized malleable iron 1-hole straps, beam clamps, or other device with necessary bolts and expansion shields. C. Adjustable hangers: Use to support horizontal runs only. Use trapeze-type supports for parallel runs of conduit. Install U-bolts at end of each run and at each elbow. Install conduit clamps every third intermediate hanger for each conduit. Hanger rods shall be 3/8" (10 mm) minimum diameter threaded galvanized steel rods. D. Conduits supports mounted on concrete surfaces: Fasten with self-drilling tubular expansion shell anchors with externally split expansion shells, single cone expanders, and annular break-off grooved chucking cones. 3.06 PENETRATIONS A. Provide required penetrations in floors and walls. Penetrations shall be kept to minimum, as small as possible, and installed in neat manner. Surrounding surfaces damaged during installation of penetrations shall be included as part of this work. 23209.03.00 BELOW-GRADE RACEWAY ms1222 SECTION 26 05 43-Page 5 B. Seal penetrations in floors and enclosures. Provide fire stops for electrical raceway penetrations. Maintain original fire rating that existed prior to commencement of work. Do not install fire seal for _. wire openings until interconnecting wiring of equipment is proven to operate properly C. Sleeves: 1. Provide for passage of conduits through walls, floors, or partitions. Set sleeves n masonry during construction; set sleeves through concrete before placement begins. 2. Material: Rigid conduit or pipe securely fastened in position. 3. Cut sleeve flush with floor where conduit enters equipment enclosure otherwise extend sleeve 3" (75 mm)above floor. 4. Sleeves through exterior building walls: Install conduit in center of sleeve. Pa6: interior and exterior annular space around conduit with plastic backer rod sized to fit annular space in compression as recommended by backing manufacturer. Seal interior and exterior of joint with acrylic polymer sealant. 5. Sleeves through waterproof construction shall be flanged type. D. Penetrations required after footings, walls, or floors are constructed shall be provided and grouted or sealed. Openings shall be core-drilled, do not jackhammer. E. Patch and finish openings made in existing walls and floors to match original material in composition and appearance. 3.07 CONDUIT INSTALLED UNDERGROUND - A. Direct-buried conduit: 1. Direct-buried, underground or below slab conduit shall be RNMC unless indicated otherwise and installed to yield completely corrosion protected conduit system. 2. Slope conduits for drainage. 3. Depth: Minimum as required by NEC. B. Plastic-coated, rigid steel conduit: 1. Use procedures recommended by manufacturer to prevent damage to PVC coating. 2. Use strap wrenches for tightening threaded joints. 3. If protective coating is damaged, repair by application of patching compound as -ecommended by manufacturer. C. Concrete encased underground duct may be Type EB, unless noted otherwise. Verify by calculation that hydraulic force on bottom duct does not exceed theoretical collapse pressure of duct. Use thicker wall duct as required, unless a sequential pour technique is used. D. Elbow that stubs up at end of a conduit run shall be RGS conduit and shall be bonded to grounding system. Provide required fittings and accessories for connection of RGS conduit to nonmetallic conduit. E. Install duct runs and manholes at elevations consistent with project requirements. Top of duct banks shall be not less than 30" (750 mm) below finished grade elevation, unless indicated otherwise. Provide extension rings on manholes as required to bring opening flush with finished surface. F. Utilize duct spacers, both vertically and horizontally,to support runs of concrete encased ducts. Install duct spacers 8' (2.4 m)maximum on center, unless specified otherwise. Brace duct runs during concrete placement to prevent floating. Wood spacers or braces in concrete encasement are not acceptable, and iron ties or straps shall not be used around single ducts, but may be used around whole duct run. G. Crown duct runs between manholes at midpoint of run to allow drainage back into manholes. Slope shall be minimum of 1/32" per foot(0.8 mm per meter)of slope. Duct runs from stub-ups back to manholes shall maintain same slope. Provide end bell fittings at terminations of conduits into manholes. BELOW-GRADE RACEWAY 23209.03.00 Page 6 -SECTION 26 05 43 ms1222 H. Install ground cable and connect to ground system on both ends of duct bank. Place ground cable in concrete, and above direct buried conduits. I. Concrete work: 1. Duct bank concrete shall be poured without forming, provided trench walls do not cave;otherwise, use forms. Make trench no wider than necessary to provide nominal size concrete thickness. 2. Tie down conduits to prevent floating during concrete pouring. 3. Remove foreign substances from conduits before pouring concrete. 4. Use splashboard to divert flow of concrete away from trench sides, and avoid dislodging soil and stones. Prevent loose excavated material from falling into trench during concrete pouring. 5. Pour each section of duct bank complete in one operation; if this is not feasible, provide construction joint using rigid steel conduit 5' (1.5 m)on each side of joint. 6. Begin concrete pouring at 1 end of duct bank,working toward other end, to allow free end to move. Do not pour concrete from each end toward center. 7. Do not use mechanical vibrators. 8. Provide red coloring in concrete. J. Adjust duct footage at each tie-in to account for expansion and contraction due to variations in temperature anticipated during installation. Backfill terminated duct runs from tie-in point toward other end. If trench must be left open, do not terminate run. Consult with manufacturer for coefficient of thermal expansion properties. K. Use expansion joints as required such that no more than 6"(150 mm) allowance for expansion or contraction of conduit occurs. L. After construction of duct bank is complete, pull mandrel through each duct. Mandrel shall be 1/4" (6 mm)smaller in diameter than duct. If obstruction is encountered, or if there is evidence of water pocket, that section of duct bank shall be located, removed, and rebuilt with no schedule delay and additional cost to Owner. M. Underground utility marking tape for below grade raceway systems: 1. Provide solid aluminum foil core tapes for protection, location, and identification of underground utility installations. 2. Meet or exceed industry standards for APWA color code. 3. Resist degradation from acids and alkalis found in soil. 4. Contain environmentally safe lead-free pigments and organic lead-free ink identifying type of utility line it protects. 5. Provide width of tape appropriate for detection of conduit at required depth of installation. N. Support wireways and boxes independently of conduits by means of bolts, screws, rod hangers, and other suitable means. 3.08 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove material as required for proper alignment and elevation of work. Backfill and grade area to match final grade elevations. C. Provide extension rings as required to meet final finished elevations. END OF SECTION 1) M. J. Hill 2) L. E. Ingram 23209.03.00 LOW-VOLTAGE. SWITCHBOARDS ms1222 SECTION 26 24 13-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low-voltage, dead-front switchboards with molded-case circuit breakers. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS _ A. Product Data: 1. List of components by manufacturer, model number, and operating ranges. 2. Bill of Materials. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Complete and accurate Data Sheets. 2. Master shop drawing index. 3. Certified production test reports. 4. Test reports and documentation showing ratings and configurations on previous designs. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings.- 1. Certified switchboard outline drawings including front view, dimensions, elevation, anchor location, nameplate, enclosure construction, and conduit entrances. 2. Schematic and wiring diagrams and one line diagram. 3. Component ratings including short-circuit,voltage, continuous current, interrupting ratings, and cable termination sizes. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals. Provide at minimum: 1. General description and technical data, including actual weights and dimensions. 2. List components supplied. List manufacturer, model number, operating ranges, and equipment tag numbers. 3. Receiving, storage, installation, handling, and testing instructions. 4. Operating and maintenance procedures. 5. Complete set of reviewed drawings that require no further action. 6. Data Sheets modified to include field installation conditions. 7. Complete documentation of inspections and tests performed, including logs, curves, and certificates. Documentation shall note any replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing. 8. Recommended spare parts list. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide complete set of special tools as necessary for installation and maintenance for each piece of equipment supplied. Tools and intended use shall be identified in assembly instructions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Manufacturer of switchboard shall be same manufacturer of major components within assembly. 2. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall have produced similar equipment for minimum - of 5 years. 3. When requested by Engineer, provide acceptable list of similar equipment installations complying with requirements of this Section. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 26 24 13 ms1222 B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet applicable seismic requirements of BOCA National Building Code, paragraph 1612.6. This shall include both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified. Alternatively, manufacturer's certification may be based on detailed computer analysis of entire assembly structure and its components. Guidelines for installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. Manufacturer shall document requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of equipment. Test response spectra shall meet or exceed required response spectra peak acceleration of 1.6g's(3.2-11 Hz)and ZPA of 1.0g as specified in BOCA National Building Code, for equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. 2. Equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet applicable seismic requirements of Uniform Building Code(UBC). 3. Switchboard shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of NEMA PB-2 and UL 891. 4. Standards of foreign organizations shall not be used without written approval from Engineer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate transportation with requirements of pertinent authorities. B. Prepare detailed packing lists and shipping notification. C. Ship equipment to job site as completely assembled as practical. D. Equipment and accessories shall be covered and protected from damage during shipment. E. During delivery and storage, handle equipment carefully to prevent damage, denting, or scoring. F. Store equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard 1-year warranty commencing from date of final acceptance. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ABB. B. Cutler Hammer. C. General Electric. D. Square D. E. Or equal. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Switchboard shall satisfactorily accommodate incoming service or feeder conductors. B. Switchboard assembly shall consist of individual freestanding vertical sections bolted together to form rigid unit. Metal side sheets shall provide grounded steel barriers between adjacent sections. Individual compartments shall be isolated from main bus and design shall reduce fault propagation. 1. Front accessible units shall align at rear. 23209.03.00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS ms1222 SECTION 26 24 13-Page 3 2. Rear accessible units shall align in front and rear. C. Protective devices shall be compartmentalized with line and load bus connections. Distribution sections shall be sectionalized to provide front device section, intermediate bus section and feeder cable section. D. Provide glass polyester rear compartment vertical insulating barrier between cable compartment and main bus to protect against inadvertent contact with main or vertical bus bars. E. Equipment shall include required components, mounting hardware and supports. Future space shall include space for device, vertical bus, device connectors, and required mounting hardware. F. Components with similar frame size and ampere rating shall be interchangeable. G. Provide wire bend space allowance in compliance to latest version of NFPA 70. Enclosures shall be UL-listed. H. Wiring gutters shall be not less than 4" (100 mm) on sides. I. Provide interior door-mounted circuit schedule cardholder with clear plastic cover. J. Indoor enclosures shall be painted steel with flat roof NEMA 1 enclosures unless stated otherwise on Data Sheets. K. Outdoor enclosures shall be nonwalk-in, NEMA 3R, have roof sloping toward rear. 1. Outer sections shall be same widths as indoor structures, except each end of outdoor assembly shall have end trim. 2. Enclosure shall be provided with rear hinged doors for each section. 3. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking. 4. Ventilating openings shall be provided complete with replaceable fiber glass air filters. 5. Provide thermostatically controlled space heaters for each structure with adequate wattage to - prevent accumulation of moisture. 6. Power for space heaters, lights and receptacles shall be obtained from control power transformer within switchboard with 120-volt ac supply voltage. L. Assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. 2.03 BUS A. Provide silver-plated copper bus which extends entire length of switchboard and leaves end access for future switchboard growth. B. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with three phases arranged in same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 650C over 400C ambient outside enclosure, unless indicated otherwise. C. Provide full capacity neutral bus where neutral bus is indicated. D. Copper ground bus(minimum 114"x 2")(6 mm x 50 mm) shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend entire length of switchboard. E. Hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc-plated. F. Bus joints shall be provided with conical, spring-type washers. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 26 24 13 ms1222 2.04 UTILITY COMPARTMENT A. Where indicated, furnish separate utility metering compartment with barriers, complete with hinged sealable door. B. Bus work shall include provisions for mounting utility company current transformers and voltage transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. C. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features in accordance with NEC and local code requirements. D. Coordinate compartment to meet local utility requirements. 2.05 METERING A. Where indicated, provide separate customer metering compartment with front hinged door. B. Provide current transformers wired to shorting-type terminal blocks. C. Provide voltage transformers including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means, or fused potential taps as potential source, for metering. D. Metering shall be microprocessor based. 2.06 BREAKERS A. Provide bolted on, enclosed thermal-magnetic, protective, quick-make, quick-break,trip-free from handle, and trip indicating. B. Breaker status shall be clearly indicated. C. Provide switch quality breakers as required. 2.07 WIRING A. Provide small wiring, fuse blocks, and terminal blocks within switchboard as necessary. Control components mounted within assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, and switches shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on wiring diagrams. B. Control wire shall be Type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for control connections, except where saddle-type terminals provided are integral to device. C. Connect current transformer secondary leads to conveniently located and accessible short-circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. Each group of control wire leaving switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of control wiring. D. Lugs shall be provided in incoming line section for connection of main grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided. E. Mechanical terminals shall be provided for line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for at least 75°C. 23209.03.00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS ms1222 SECTION 26 24 13-Page 5 2.08 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Provide switchboard with stainless steel engraved nameplates attached with stainless steel screws or pins in locations clearly visible and readable without requiring unsafe condition. Adhesive nameplates are not acceptable. Characters shall be 3/16" (5 mm) high, minimum. B. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short-circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item number. C. Nameplate shall contain standard information in accordance with IEEE/ANSI C57.12.01 and serial number and year of manufacture. D. Tag equipment with item number as shown on Drawings. E. Terminal blocks shall be clearly identified for wiring. Each internal interconnecting wire shall be identified on both ends with sleeve type wire markers. F. Engraved nameplates, mounted on face of assembly, shall be furnished for main and feeder circuits — as indicated on Drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background. 2.09 FINISH A. Exterior and interior steel surfaces of switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with rust- inhibiting phosphatized coating. _ B. Color and finish: ANSI 61 light gray, unless indicated otherwise. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform routine factory tests in compliance with NEMA standards. B. Tests performed by manufacturer shall be manufacturer's standard. C. Completed unit assembly shall be energized and checked completely for operation before shipment. D. Prior to shipment, correct defects and defective equipment revealed or noted during testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. _ B. Provide assembly with adequate lifting means. Assembly shall be capable of being moved into installation position and bolted directly to floor without use of floor sills. Floor shall be level to 1/8"/3' (3 mm/1m) distance in any direction. C. Provide necessary hardware to secure assembly in place. D. Perform field adjustments of protective devices as required to place equipment in final operating condition. E. Perform field settings of devices and adjustments and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance to Engineer's short-circuit and protective device coordination study at no additional cost to Owner. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 26 24 13 ms1222 DATA SHEETS TAG No.:Westfield DB-1 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD DESCRIPTION UNITS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Switchboard Manufacturer: By Manufacturer Switchboard Catalog No.: By Manufacturer Site Conditions Installed Location Indoor Maximum Ambient Temperature °C 30 Minimum Ambient Temperature °C -10 Maximum Average 24-hour Ambient Temperature °C 40 Site Altitude Ft <3300 High-Humidity/Corrosive/Salt-Laden Y/N N Seismic Zone 0 Enclosure: Finish color ANSI 61 Gray NEMA Type 1/3R 1 Device/termination access location Front, rear Front Space Heaters Y/N N Operating Voltage V - Utility Compartment Y/N N Main Breaker Rating A - Metering Compartment Y/N N Current Transformers Oty - CT Ratio A/A - Voltage Transformers Oty - VT Ratio - Meter Type/Model Number - - Electrical Ratings: Rated Voltage V 480Y/277V Phase/Wires Phase/Wire 3ph,4W Main Bus Ampere Rating A 800 Neutral Bus Ampere Rating A 800 Fault Current Capability KA 65 Main Bus Material Cu/AI Cu Main Feeder: Entrance Location Top/Bottom Bottom Conductor Size AWG/KCMIL 500 KCMIL Conductors per Phase Oty 2 Ground Conductor Size AWG/KCMIL Breakers and Disconnects: See Drawings 23209.03.00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS _ ms1222 SECTION 26 24 13 -Page 7 DATA SHEETS LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD TAG No.: Vinton DB-1 DESCRIPTION UNITS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Switchboard Manufacturer: By Manufacturer Switchboard Catalog No.: By Manufacturer Site Conditions Installed Location Indoor Maximum Ambient Temperature °C 30 Minimum Ambient Temperature °C -10 Maximum Average 24-hour Ambient Temperature °C 40 - Site Altitude Ft <3300 High-Humidity/Corrosive/Salt-Laden Y/N N Seismic Zone 0 Enclosure: Finish color ANSI 61 Gray NEMA Type 1/3R 1 Device/termination access location Front, rear Front Space Heaters Y/N N Operating Voltage V _ _ Utility Compartment Y/N N Main Breaker Rating A _ Metering Compartment Y/N N Current Transformers Qty - CT Ratio A/A _ Voltage Transformers Qty _ VT Ratio Meter Type/Model Number Electrical Ratings: Rated Voltage V 480Y/277V Phase/Wires PhaseA/Vire 3ph, 4W Main Bus Ampere Rating A 225 Neutral Bus Ampere Rating A 225 Fault Current Capability KA 65 Main Bus Material Cu/AI Cu Main Feeder: Entrance Location Top/Bottom Bottom Conductor Size AWG/KCMIL 250 KCMIL Conductors per Phase Qty 1 Ground Conductor Size AWG/KCMIL Breakers and Disconnects: See Drawings LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS 23209.03.00 Page 8-SECTION 26 24 13 ms1222 DATA SHEETS TAG No.:Virden Creek DB-1 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD DESCRIPTION UNITS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Switchboard Manufacturer: By Manufacturer Switchboard Catalog No.: By Manufacturer Site Conditions Installed Location Indoor Maximum Ambient Temperature °C 30 Minimum Ambient Temperature °C -10 Maximum Average 24-hour Ambient Temperature °C 40 Site Altitude Ft <3300 High-Humidity/Corrosive/Salt-Laden Y/N Y Seismic Zone 0 Enclosure: Finish color ANSI 61 Gray NEMA Type 1/3R 1 Device/termination access location Front, rear Front Space Heaters Y/N Y Operating Voltage V 120 Utility Compartment Y/N N Main Breaker Rating A - Metering Compartment Y/N N Current Transformers Qty - CT Ratio A/A - Voltage Transformers Qty - VT Ratio Meter Type/Model Number - - Electrical Ratings: Rated Voltage V 480Y/277V Phase/Wires Phase/Wre 3ph,4W Main Bus Ampere Rating A 1200 Neutral Bus Ampere Rating A 1200 Fault Current Capability KA 65 Main Bus Material Cu/AI Cu Main Feeder: Entrance Location Top/Bottom Top Conductor Size AWG/KCMIL 600 KCMIL Conductors per Phase Qty 3 Ground Conductor Size AWG/KCMIL Breakers and Disconnects: See Drawings END OF SECTION 1) M. J. Hill 2) L. E. Ingram 23209.03.00 REDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTER ms1222 SECTION 26 29 13-19- Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low-voltage reduced-voltage solid-state(RVSS) motor starter designed for use on -phase squirrel cage induction motor. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data.- 1. Completed Data Sheets for each different starter provided. Identify any special accessories required to match with driven load. 2. Complete list an accompanying data for any special equipment required for operation and maintenance of RVSS. 3. Receiving, storage, installation, and testing instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Certified outline, general arrangement, assembly, and installation drawings, that includes front view, dimensions, and weight. 2. Elementary diagrams (3-line diagrams) and schematic control diagrams of complete RVSS system showing terminal block terminations, device terminal numbers and internal wiring diagrams. 3. Certified drawings of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for conduit entry/exit locations and indicating space available for cable terminations. 4. Nameplate drawing. C. Quality assurance data: 1. Submittal document index and submittal schedule. 2. Mean Time-to-Failure data. 3. Standard production testing procedures for starters, certified factory test data and results after _ completion of factory testing. D. Operation and maintenance manuals. Provide, at minimum.- 1. Final copies of documents listed above. 2. Operating and maintenance procedures. 3. Spare parts lists with pricing. 4. Installation field reports and Data Sheets updated to reflect field installation conditions 5. Copies of warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE — A. Design and manufacture according to latest editions of applicable NEMA, UL, NFPA, IEEE, and ANSI standards. B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9000 certified and shall have produced similar electrical equipment for - minimum period of 5 years. C. When requested by Engineer, provide acceptable list of similar equipment installations complying with requirements of this specification. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. During delivery and storage, handle equipment to prevent damage, denting, or scoring. B. Store equipment and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. REDUCED-VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTER 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 26 29 13-19 ms1222 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ABB. B. Allen Bradley. C. Benshaw. 2.02 CONTROL AND METERING A. Starter control and metering to include: 1. Digital microprocessor design with following functions: a. Starter protection. b. Starter diagnostics. c. System sequencing. 2. Starter control functions shall be stored on nonvolatile memory. B. Provide starter with local and remote controls: 1. Locate 2-position maintained switch on front of enclosure for selection of"Local' or"Remote" control. 2. Locate individual momentary buttons for local"Start," and "Stop" on front of enclosure. C. Operation: 1. Switch in "Local" position: Starter shall operate when local"Start"button is pushed. "Stop" button shall stop equipment without delay. 2. Switch in "Remote" position: Starter shall be remotely controlled from dry contact closure. "Stop" button shall stop the equipment without delay. "Start" button shall have no effect on operation. 3. Adjustable starting and deceleration functions. 4. Alarms and indication: a. Starter failure alarm. Dry contact to close in alarm state. b. Starter fault alarm. Dry contact to close in alarm state. 5. Starter in remote or local control indication. Dry contact to close in selected position. 6. Motor running indication. Dry contact to close at full speed output. D. Following shall be available locally either on control panel display or by use of readouts and LEDs, and available remotely through communication interface: 1. Starter ready. 2. Starter running. 3. Motor"Running"—LED on panel front. 4. Motor"Off: -LED on panel front. 5. Current, amperes. 6. Line-line voltage, volts. 7. Frequency, Hz: Digital readout. 8. Watts: Analog output. 9. Starter alarm conditions: a. Missing run or start permissive. b. Low control voltage. c. Microprocessor problem. d. Common trouble alarm. E. Starter fault conditions requiring immediate attention, and may indicate impending shutdown of starter. 1. Source undervoltage. 2. Source overvoltage. 3. Source loss of phase. 4. Source reverse phase sequence. 5. Load overcurrent. 6. Ground fault. 23209.03.00 REDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTER - ms1222 SECTION 26 29 13-19-Page 3 2.03 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS A. Starter protection functions to include: 1. Undervoltage. 2. Overvoltage. 3. Loss of phase. 4. Reverse phase sequence. 5. Overcurrent. 6. Ground fault. 2.04 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS A. Install in starter enclosure. B. Size in accordance with motor load. C. Provide control circuit to connect capacitors after end of starting mode. 2.05 DIAGNOSTICS A. Provide comprehensive diagnostics for maintenance and troubleshooting including: 1. Self-test of microprocessor Starter control system. 2. LED indicators for status indication on control boards. 3. Convenient maintenance test points. 2.06 COOLING A. Provide integral filtered ambient air cooling by natural convection or forced air cooling system as required to maintain Starter equipment at its full current rating. 2.07 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Securely attach nameplates with self-tapping stainless steel screws. Adhesive nameplates not acceptable. B. Lettering shall be black on white background. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean interior and exterior of equipment prior to placing into service. Debris shall be removed and appropriately discarded. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Perform manufacturer's recommended start-up and commissioning tests prior to placing into service. 1. Include 16 hours per RVSS for start-up and commissioning. 2. Include 8 hours total for operator training. C. Correct deficiencies with starter and other furnished equipment until system operates as required for installed equipment, at no cost to Owner. D. Refinish marred spots to match original finish. REDUCED-VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTER 23209.03.00 Page 4 -SECTION 26 29 13-19 ms1222 DATA SHEETS Equipment Name: Westfield Pumps Pump 1,Pum 2p ,and Pump 3 REDUCED VOLTAGE SOFT STARTER Tag No.: REV.# DESCRIPTION UNITS/OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA GENERAL Driven Equipment - Condenser Water Pump Nominal Operating Voltage V 480 System Operating Frequency Hz 60 Motor Nameplate Voltage V 460 Motor Nameplate Horsepower Hp 140 CABLE INFORMATION Power Cable Incoming Location Top/Bottom Top Power Cable Exit Location Top/Bottom Bottom SITE INFORMATION Maximum Ambient Temperature °F 104 Minimum Ambient Temperature OF 65 DESIGN Shorting Contactor Y/N Y Isolation Contactor Y/N Y ENCLOSURE NEMA Rating NEMA 1 Dimensions L x W x H By Manufacturer Weight Ibs By Manufacturer Cooling Method Air/Water Air CONTROLS Local/Remote Switch Y/N Y Start and Stop Push Buttons Y/N Y Programmable Setting Y/N Y Local LCD or LED Readout Panel Y/N Y Local and Remote Position Indication Y/N Y Monitoring of Fault Conditions Y/N Y Communication Interface - Motor running indicating light Y/N Y Motor off indicating light Y/N Y Special Accessories Required: 1A output, at full load, CT(Current Transformer)on 1A CT Y a single output phase 23209.03.00 REDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTER ms1222 SECTION 26 29 13-19 -Page 5 DATA SHEETS Equipment Name: Vinton Pumps REDUCED VOLTAGE SOFT STARTER Pump 1, Pum 2,and Pump 3Tag No.: REV.# DESCRIPTION UNITS/OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA GENERAL Driven Equipment - Condenser Water Pump Nominal Operating Voltage V 480 System Operating Frequency Hz 60 Motor Nameplate Voltage V 460 Motor Nameplate Horsepower Hp 20 CABLE INFORMATION Power Cable Incoming Location Top/Bottom Top Power Cable Exit Location TopJBottom Bottom SITE INFORMATION Maximum Ambient Temperature °F 104 Minimum Ambient Temperature °F 65 DESIGN Shorting Contactor Y/N Y Isolation Contactor Y/N Y ENCLOSURE NEMA Rating NEMA 1 Dimensions L x W x H By Manufacturer Weight Ibs By Manufacturer Cooling Method Air/Water Air CONTROLS Local/Remote Switch Y/N Y Start and Stop Push Buttons Y/N Y Programmable Setting Y/N Y Local LCD or LED Readout Panel Y/N Y Local and Remote Position Indication Y/N Y Monitoring of Fault Conditions Y/N Y Communication Interface Motor running indicating light Y/N Y Motor off indicating light Y/N Y - Special Accessories Required: 1A output, at full load, CT(Current Transformer)on 1A CT Y a single output phase REDUCED-VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTER 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 26 29 13-19 ms1222 DATA SHEETS Equipment Name: Virden Creek Pumps Pump 1, Pum 2,and Pump 3 REDUCED VOLTAGE SOFT STARTER Tag No.: REV.# DESCRIPTION UNITS/OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA GENERAL Driven Equipment - Condenser Water Pump Nominal Operating Voltage V 480 System Operating Frequency Hz 60 Motor Nameplate Voltage V 460 Motor Nameplate Horsepower Hp 335 CABLE INFORMATION Power Cable Incoming Location Top/Bottom Top Power Cable Exit Location Top/Bottom Top SITE INFORMATION Maximum Ambient Temperature OF 104 Minimum Ambient Temperature °F 65 DESIGN Shorting Contactor Y/N Y Isolation Contactor Y/N Y ENCLOSURE NEMA Rating NEMA 1 Dimensions L x W x H By Manufacturer Weight Ibs By Manufacturer Cooling Method Air/Water Air CONTROLS Local/Remote Switch Y/N Y Start and Stop Push Buttons Y/N Y Programmable Setting Y/N Y Local LCD or LED Readout Panel Y/N Y Local and Remote Position Indication Y/N Y Monitoring of Fault Conditions Y/N Y Communication Interface - - Motor running indicating light Y/N Y Motor off indicating light Y/N Y Special Accessories Required: 1A output, at full load, CT(Current Transformer)on 1A CT Y a single output phase END OF SECTION 1) M. J. Hill 2) L. E. Ingram 23209.03.00 LIGHTING ms1222 SECTION 26 50 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior lighting fixtures and accessories. B. Exterior lighting fixtures and accessories. _ C. Ballasts. D. Poles, E. Light control systems. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Lamp ANSI designation, initial and mean lumen output, average rated hours of lamp life and lamp mortality curve, and color temperature and color rendering index. - 2. Ballast ANSI designation; electrical characteristics, including volts, lamp, and line operating and starting amperes, watts and watt losses, percent of allowable line voltage variation range and lamp crest factor; total current harmonic distortion; minimum lamp starting temperature; and normal and maximum ballast operating temperature. 3. Poles and standards dimensions, details or hand holes and wire entries, mast or bracket arms and connection to poles, base plate and anchor bolt details, wind load and deflection, and finishes. 4. Lamps, poles: Include dimensions,wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS-3, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned and detailed drawings in booklet form with separate sheet or sheets for each fixture, assembled in luminaire"type"alphabetical order and showing: - 1. Materials of construction. 2. Arrangement of components and wiring. 3. Gasket sealed for weather tightness. 4. Means of mounting luminaire and adjusting aspect. 5. Finish; photometric data with lamp or lamps specified. 6. Electrical data including volts, amperes and watts; and for roadway type lighting fixtures. 7. Distribution data according to IES roadway classification type. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Manufacturer of major components within assembly. 2. ISO 9000 certified. 3. Manufacturer shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of 5 years. 4. When requested by Engineer, provide acceptable list of similar equipment installations complying with requirements of this specification. B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 1. ANSI C82.i -Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps. 2. ANSI C82.2 -Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts-Methods of Measurement. 3. ANSI C82A -Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps. 4. ANSI C2- National Electrical Safety Code. - 5. ANSI C78.1300-Specifications for High Pressure Sodium Lamps Series. 6. ANSI C82.4-Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps. 7. ANSI C136.20-Roadway Lighting, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Lighting Poles. 8. ANSI C81.10-76-Electric Lamp Bases and Holders-Screw-Shell Types (Revised and Consolidated into ANSI C81.61-90). 9. ANSI C82.1 -Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. LIGHTING 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 26 50 00 ms1222 10. ANSI H35.1-88-Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum. C. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15- Rules and Regulations: Radio Frequency Devices D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. 270-Procedure for Fluorescent Lamp/Ballast/Fixture Performance Comparison. 2. FA 1 -Outdoor Floodlighting Equipment. 3. OD 3-Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Photo Control Devices and Mating Receptacles. 4. SH 5-Tubular Steel,Aluminum, and Pre-stressed Concrete Poles. E. ASTM B429, "Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube." F. Military Standards(MIL-STD): 1. 461A-Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics Requirements for Equipment. 2. 462-Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics, Measurement. 3. 463-Definition and System of Units Electromagnetic Interference Technology. G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70-National Electrical Code(NEC) 2. 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 3. 101 -Code for Safety to life from fire in Buildings and Structures. H. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL 57 - Electric Fixture. 2. UL 496 -Edison-Base Lamp holders. 3. UL 676-Underwater Lighting Fixtures. 4. UL 542—Lamp holders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps. 5. UL 773 - Plug-in, Locking Type Photo controls, for Use with Area Lighting. 6. UL 773A—Non-industrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control. 7. UL 884-Lighting fixtures used in hazardous locations. 8. UL 935-Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 9. UL 1029-High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballast. 10. UL 1570-Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures. 11. UL 1571 -Incandescent Lighting Fixtures. 12. UL 1572-High-Intensity-Discharge(HID) lighting fixtures. I. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1. CFR 21 Part 1040-Performance Standards for Light-Emitting Products. 2. CFR 40 Part 761 -Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and Use Prohibitions. J. Federal Specifications (FS)W-F-412E- Fixtures, Lighting, Incandescent Lamp Industrial. K. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES), LHBK-Lighting Handbook, References and Application Volumes. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. During delivery and storage, handle equipment to prevent damage, denting, or scoring. B. Store equipment and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 23209.03.00 LIGHTING ms1222 SECTION 26 50 00 -Page 3 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pressure-treated wood poles shall comply with applicable AWPA treatment standards. 2.02 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Types: As designated in "Lighting Fixture Schedule"on Drawings. B. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished completely assembled with wiring and mounting devices, ready for installation in their intended location. C. Design fixtures with supports independent of ceiling supports. D. Equip with required lamps. E. Fixtures used as air handling registers shall meet requirements for intended use. - F. Fluorescent lamp sockets: 1. Lamp holder contacts: Biting-edge type of phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type. 2. Contacts for recessed, double-contact lamp holders and for slim line lamp holders: Silver-plated. 3. Lamp holders for bi-pin lamps, except for"U"type lamps: Telescoping-compression type, or single-slot entry type requiring 1/4 turn of lamp after insertion. _ G. Incandescent and HID shall have porcelain enclosures. H. Recessed fixtures mounted in insulated or fire rated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated or fire rated ceilings. I. Lenses, diffusers, covers, and globes: 100%virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High-resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens thickness: 0.125" (3 mm) minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated. 2.03 LAMPS A. Comply with standard of ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. Provide luminaires with indicated lamps of designated type, characteristics, and wattage. Where a lamp is not indicated for a luminaire, provide medium wattage lamp recommended by manufacturer for luminaire. B. Fluorescent color temperature and minimum color-rendering index: 3500 K and 85 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. C. Noncompact fluorescent lamp life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid-start circuits. D. Metal-halide color temperature and minimum color-rendering index: 3600 K and 70 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 LIGHTING BALLASTS A. Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be suitable for lamps as listed in "Lighting Fixture Schedule"and as follows: LIGHTING 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 26 50 00 ms1222 B. Fluorescent, solid-state, "Solid-State Ballast": 1. Type: Rapid start/instant start mode. 2. Thermal protection: UL Class P with internal automatic-resetting. 3. Conform to ETL-CBM label requirements. 4. Power factor: Not less than 90%. 5. Maintain constant light output of 4' rapid-start fluorescent lamps over operating ranges of 90 volts to 145 volts (120-volt ballasts) and 200 volts to 320 volts (277-volt ballasts). 6. Input current third harmonic content: Not to exceed 13%. 7. Total current THD: Less than 20%. 8. Provide sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites lamp. 9. Withstand line transients: As defined in IEEE Publication 587, Category A. 10. Frequency of operation: 20 kHz or greater, and operate without visible flicker. 11. Meet requirements of Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations, Part 18. 12. Parallel lamp circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 13. Ballast: a. Light regulation of t10 lumen output with t10% input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10%flicker(maximum) using any compatible lamp. b. UL-listed Class P with a sound rating of"A." c. Enclosure size shall conform to standards of electromagnetic ballasts. d. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on ballast packages. e. Ballast shall operate lamps in a parallel circuit configuration that permits operation of remaining lamps if one or more lamps fail or are removed. 14. T-8 lamp ballast: a. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 50OF (10°C)for F32T8 lamps, unless otherwise indicated. When indicated, ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0°F (-17°C)for F32T8 lamps. b. Total harmonic distortion (THD): 20% (maximum). Input wattage: 1) 32 watts(maximum)when operating one F32T8 lamp. 2) 62 watts(maximum)when operating two F32T8 lamps. 3) 92 watts(maximum)when operating three F32T8 lamps. 15. Manufacturer: Advance or as specified on Fixture Schedule on Drawings. C. Low-temperature fluorescent ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of-20°F for 800 and 1,500 mA lamps as indicated. D. Maximum sound ratings(equivalent to General Electric ratings): 1. Rapid-start: Sound Level A. 2. Instant-start(Slim line): Sound Level C. 3. High-output(800 mA): Sound Level C. 4. Super-high-output(1,500 mA): Sound Level D. E. Standards: ANSI C82.1 and UL 935. F. HID lamp ballasts: 1. Type: Constant-wattage, high-power-factor type or reactor high power factor type. Capacitors shall not contain polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)fluids or other fluids recognized as hazardous when discharged into environment. 2. Suitable for operation with type of lamp and supply voltage specified. 3. Mounting: Integral with luminaire or encased for mounting remote from luminaire as shown on Drawings. 4. Standard: UL 1029. 5. Minimum starting temperature: a. Indoor: 0°F. b. Outdoor: -20°F. 6. Size individual overcurrent protection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Provide integral thermal protection where fixture is recessed in interior ceiling. 8. Sound rating: Not less than B sound rating for interior fixtures. 23209,03.00 LIGHTING ms1222 SECTION 26 50 00 -Page 5 9. Fusing: Provide fuse for protection of each ballast, size as recommended by luminaire manufacturer. 10. Manufacturer: Valmont, Holophane,Advance, Magnetek. or specified on Light Fixture Schedule. G. Luminaire wiring: 1. Conductors: Stranded copper. 2. Insulation: 600-volt class, type in accordance with manufacturer's standards for ambient and environmental conditions. 3. Other requirements in accordance with NEC Article 410F. 2.05 RECESS-AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES A. Provide fixture type that can be re-lamped from bottom.Access to ballast shall be from bottom. B. Trim for exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated. 2.06 SUSPENDED FIXTURES A. Hangers: 1. Provide hangers capable of supporting twice combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers. 2. Type: Cadmium-plated steel with swivel-ball tapped for conduit size indicated. Shock-absorbing where indicated. 3. Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 0.79 rad 450. 4. Brace pendants 4' (12 m) or longer provided in shops or hangers to limit swinging. B. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. C. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. D. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18" (4.57 mm)diameter. 2.07 LIGHTING CONTROLS A. Type: Contactor, electrically-held, nonlatching. 1. Ratings: a. Continuous current: As shown on Drawings. b. Contacts: 277 volts. c. Coil: 120 volts. d. Frequency: 60 Hz. 2. Accessories: a. Control transformer rated 120 volts. b. "Hand-Off-Auto"selector switch on contactor cover. 3. Enclosures: NEMA 12. 4. Control: Photocell capable. 5. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500L, General Electric CR160L, Square G Class 8903, or equal. B. Time switch: 1. Astronomic, dial-type or electronic-type, arranged to turn "On" at sunset and turn"Off" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. 2. Provide switch rated 120 volts, having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. 3. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for time switch shall be surface- mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. 4. Manufacturer: As shown on Drawings, Intermatic"ET 8115C" Series, or equal. LIGHTING 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 26 50 00 ms1222 2.08 POLES A. Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 mph determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS-3 while supporting luminaires having effective projected areas indicated. B. Provide poles with oval-shaped hand hole having minimum clear opening of 2-1/2" x 5" (64 mm by 125 mm). C. Secure hand holes cover by stainless steel captive screws. D. Metal poles shall have internal grounding connection accessible from hand holes near bottom of each pole. E. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles not acceptable. F. Concrete: 1. ASTM C1089. Cross-sectional shape: Round. 2. Steel reinforcing: Prestressed shafts shall be reinforced with steel prestressing members. Design shall provide internal longitudinal loading by either pre-tensioning or post tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members. 3. Tensioned reinforcing primary reinforcement steel used for a pre-stressed concrete pole shaft shall be tensioned between 60%to 70%of its ultimate strength. Amount of reinforcement shall be such that when reinforcement is tensioned to 70% of its ultimate strength, total resultant tensile force does not exceed minimum section compressive strength of concrete. 4. Coating and sleeves for reinforcing members: Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to required core openings, such as hand hole and wiring inlet, protect reinforcing with vaporproof, noncorrosive sleeve over length without 1/2" (13 mm)concrete coverage. Each steel reinforcing member to be post-tensioned shall have nonmigrating slipper coating applied prior to addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout length of such member. 5. Strength requirement: As an exception to requirements of ASTM C1089, poles shall be naturally cured to achieve 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi(48.23 MPa). Poles shall not be subjected to severe temperature changes during curing period. 6. Shaft preparation: Completed prestressed concrete pole shaft shall have a hard, smooth, nonporous surface resistant to soil acids, road salts, and attacks of water and frost. Shaft shall be clean, smooth, and free of surface voids and internal honeycombing. Poles shall not be installed for at least 15 days after manufacture. G. Steel: 1. AASHTO LTS-3. Minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi(331 Mpa) and iron-oxide primed with dark bronze factory finish. 2. Provide pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. 3. Type: Anchor bolt-mounted. 4. Members: Tapered tubular; either round in cross section or polygonal. 5. Pole shafts: One piece. 6. Welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other means of fastening except as specifically approved. 7, Markings: Approximately 3'to 4' (900 mm to 1.2 m)above grade. Include manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, length, and loading tree. 2.09 POLE FOUNDATIONS A. Anchor bolts: Steel rod having minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344.5 mPa). Top 12" (300 mm) of rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A 153M. B. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00. 23209.03.00 LIGHTING ms1222 SECTION 26 50 00-Page 7 2.10 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS A. IEEE C136.3, IEEE C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. B. Pole brackets: Not less than 1-1/4" (32 mm)galvanized steel pipe or aluminum secured to pole. C. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. D. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. - E. Mount not less than 24' (7 m)above street. F. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head. PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine each piece of equipment to ensure there are no defects and that equipmert conforms to these specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Interior and exterior of equipment shall be cleaned prior to placing into service. Debris shall be removed an appropriately discarded. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Determine locations and arrangement of equipment from Drawings. Locations shown on Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Choose precise location to clear obstructions and to provide sufficient space for operation and maintenance. C. Coordinate timing of installation and location of equipment with other trades. D. Make permanent lighting system, or selected portions thereof, operable as soon as possible, E. Perform construction in accordance with NEC. F. Repair factory finishes where they become damaged during construction. G. Install equipment level and plumb. H. Coordinate with Division 1 for temporary lighting during construction. I. Grounding: 1. Ground noncurrent carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures. 2. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose. LIGHTING 23209.03.00 Page 8-SECTION 26 50 00 ms1222 J. Lighting fixtures: 1. Support lighting fixtures from building framing or floor slabs, independent of conduit system and suspended ceilings. 2. To minimize equipment breakage, delay installation of lighting fixtures in locations near heavy piping and equipment until such equipment is in place. 3. When permanent lighting system becomes operable, re-lamp lighting fixtures, as directed by Owner. 4. Replace defective or damaged lighting fixtures and lamps at conclusion of job. K. Wall-mounted equipment: 1. Concrete or masonry walls: Use expansion anchors and bolts; install collars around mounting bolts, or use other means to provide air space between wall and equipment enclosure. 2. Structural steel mounting: Bolt to steel or brackets attached to steel; provide air space between steel and equipment enclosure. L. Floor-mounted equipment: Secure to concrete floor or foundation with expansion anchors. M. Emergency lighting system: Install raceway and wiring for emergency lighting system in accordance with NEC Article 700. N. Lighting controls: 1. Mount photocells facing north or upward and adjust to render insensitive to artificial lighting units. 2. Install occupancy sensors and ambient light sensor in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures. Final adjustments of sensors shall be coordinated with Owner for proper settings. O. Outdoor lighting system: 1. Wiring: Install in underground conduits. 2. Provide excavation for and underground wiring. a. Excavate to depths indicated. b. Excavate by hand in areas near existing foundations and utilities. c. Backfill with materials from excavation, but exclude large stones, organic material, rubbish, and frozen material. d. Dispose of excess excavated material off Site. END OF SECTION 1) M. J. Hill 2) L. E. Ingram 23209.03.00 SITE CLEARING ms1222 SECTION 31 10 00-Pagel PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing and grubbing. B. Stripping. C. Disposal. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing: Remove and dispose of fences, trees, logs, brush, rubbish, and other objectionable material. B. Grubbing: remove and dispose of stumps and roots 3"(75 mm)and larger in diameter. C. Parking areas: Entirely remove trees, stumps, brush, roots, and other vegetation. D. Other areas: Remove trees, stumps, brush, roots, and other vegetation to a depth of not less than 18" (450 mm) below subgrade or existing ground line, whichever is lower. E. Backfill depressions caused by grubbing, and compact to conform to density of surrounding earth. 3.02 STRIPPING A. Strip areas to receive fill or to be occupied by new construction. B. Completely strip topsoil, rubbish, vegetation, and other foreign materials. C. Minimum depth: 8" (200 mm). D. Stockpile clean topsoil free from subsoil, stones, and other foreign materials, for future use. 3.03 DISPOSAL A. Dispose removed materials to locations off site. Off-site locations shall be arranged for by Contractor and at its expense. END OF SECTION 1) D. J. Bovee 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 GRADING ms1222 SECTION 31 22 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Embankments materials. B. Earth and borrow excavation. C. Embankment construction. D. Finish grading and protection. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EMBANKMENT MATERIAL A. Obtain embankment material from excavated areas or from an approved borrow area. B. Embankment materials shall be free from debris, roots, organic, or other unstable o-unsuitable materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTH EXCAVATION A. Grading shall consist of excavation, removal and satisfactory disposal of excess excavated materials taken from within Project area, construction of embankments, subgrades, ditches, and incidental work; and removal and satisfactory disposal of unstable and unsuitable materials and their replacement with satisfactory materials where needed. B. In cuts for parking areas proof-roll subgrade with fully loaded tandem-axle dump truck by making three passes with a heavy pneumatic-tired roller to detect localized zones of unstable material. Remove unstable material encountered and replace with suitable material. C. Dispose of unstable material off site at location selected by Contractor. 3.02 BORROW EXCAVATION A. Borrow excavation shall consist of excavating, transporting, and placing of earth materials obtained from locations furnished by Contractor necessary for construction of embankments, subgrades and other parts of Work. B. Contractor shall furnish and pay for borrow sites, or other sources of borrow, and obtain from property owners necessary agreements for removal of excavated material. Borrow material shall have a Standard Dry Density of not less than 95 lb/cu ft(1525 kg/m3)when tested in accordance with AASHTO T99 and shall not possess an organic content greater than 10%when tested in accordance with AASHTO T194. 3.03 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION A. Maintain embankments in satisfactory condition until final acceptance. B. Preparation of surfaces to receive fill: 1. After stripping of organic material or foreign matter, proof-roll areas to receive fill by making three passes with a roller. 2. If unsuitable or unstable material is encountered under embankment area, remove material and replace with suitable material prior to placing embankment material. GRADING 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 31 22 00 ms1222 C. Moisture control: 1. Moisture content of embankment materials prior to, and during compaction shall be uniform throughout each layer of material. 2. Place earth materials at or within 2% of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698; wet granular materials thoroughly during or immediately prior to compaction. 3. Add supplementary water to materials on embankment by sprinkling and mixing uniformly throughout layer as required. 4. Spread temporarily excavated materials too wet for placing until moisture content is acceptable. D. Placing: 1. Place embankment materials in manner permitting drainage, and in continuous, approximately horizontal layers, not exceeding 8" (200 mm) loose thickness. 2. Avoid abrupt changes in embankment levels. 3. If surface of previously placed materials is too dry or smooth to provide satisfactory bonding surface with new material, moisten and/or scarify in manner and to depths required to avoid shear plane. 4. If compacted surface of any layer of fill is too wet for proper compaction of next succeeding layer to be placed: a. Allow materials to dry or work with suitable equipment. b. Compact to provide satisfactory bonding surface for next succeeding layer of fill to be placed. 5. When each layer of material has been conditioned to moisture content specified, compact as follows: a. Compact embankments for parking areas to minimum of 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698: b. Compact other embankments to minimum of 90% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. E. Grade areas disturbed by construction operations to smooth, uniformly sloping surfaces. 3.04 FINISH GRADING A. Refer to Section 31 22 19. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Moisture-density laboratory tests: Minimum of one test on each type of soil to be used in embankment construction; conform to ASTM D698. Perform tests prior to placement of embankment materials. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Water shall be used as controlling agent to prevent operations from polluting air with dust. B. Regulations as set forth by OSHA and appropriate state agencies, shall govern. END OF SECTION 1) D. J. Bovee 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 FINISH GRADING ms1222 SECTION 31 22 19-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subgrade to receive topsoil. B. Placing topsoil. C. Finish grading. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil supply: 1. Use topsoil stockpiled on Site. Supply topsoil necessary in addition to that stockpiled. 2. Determine volume of topsoil necessary. B. Imported topsoil: Natural, friable loam typical of productive soils in locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, from well drained site free of flooding, not in frozen or muddy condition, not less than 2% organic matter, and pH value of 5.9 to 7.0. Free from subsoil, slag, clay, stones, lumps, live plants, roots, sticks, foreign matter and any material that may be harmful to plant growth. C. Existing topsoil: Natural, fertile soil capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, not in frozen or muddy condition. Free from subsoil, slag, clay, stones, lumps, live plants, foreign matter, and any material that may be harmful to plant growth. 2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Peat moss: Horticultural grade Class A decomposed plant material, elastic and homogeneous. Free of decomposed colloidal residue, wood, sulphur, and iron. pH value of 5.9 to 7.0, 60% organic matter by weight, moisture content not exceeding 15%and water absorption capacity of not less than 300% weight on oven dry basis. B. Sand: Hard, granular natural builders'sand, washed,free of impurities, chemicals, :salts, or organic matter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Preparation shall not start until outside construction Work has been completed. B. Protect existing underground improvements from damage. C. Scarify subgrade to a depth of at least 4" (100 mm) by disking, harrowing, or other method. Surface shall be left rough to provide a good bond with topsoil. D. Remove roots, clods, stones, and any other debris larger than 2"(50 mm) in any dimension from surface. 3.02 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Place topsoil on graded areas to be turfed, and as indicated on Drawings. B. Spread evenly, shape, and firm topsoil to a minimum depth of 6" (150 mm). Do not spread topsoil when topsoil or subgrade is frozen, or when excessively wet or dry. FINISH GRADING 23209.03.00 Page 2- SECTION 31 22 19 ms1222 C. Thoroughly till soil to a minimum depth of 4"(100 mm) by roto-tilling, disking, harrowing, or other method. Soil shall not be tilled when it is frozen, excessively wet or dry, or otherwise untillable. D. Remove from site, rocks, clods, roots, or other foreign materials larger than 1"(25 mm) in any dimension. 3.03 FINISH GRADING A. Grade to uniformly sloping surfaces and to elevations shown on Drawings. B. Slope finish grade to provide positive surface drainage away from buildings and other structures. C. Finish grade shall be free of all holes, rills, or gullies caused by erosion or construction operations. D. Finished ground level shall be firm to prevent sinkage pockets when watered. END OF SECTION 1) D. J. Bovee 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench excavation. B. Pipe bedding and backfill requirements. C. Backfill for manholes, appurtenances and structures. D. Construction along or across highways and railroads. E. Erosion control. F. Dewatering. G. Sheeting, shoring and bracing. H. Surface restoration and cleanup. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance data: Provide name, address, and telephone number of person who has access to equipment and is authorized to make emergency repairs to Contractor's Work, such as to correct trench cave-ins, moving excavated material, and correct other problems during weekends and off- work hours, so access can be maintained for fire-fighting equipment, and to maintain barricades for public safety. 1.03 SCHEDULING A. Schedule Work to keep streets, sidewalks, and utilities in usable condition; avoid property owner inconvenience insofar as practicable. B. Do not trespass on private property. Maintain construction operations on existing right-of-way or easements provided by Owner. C. Maintain suitable means of access for property owners abutting streets and highways involved in construction, except as specifically permitted otherwise by Owner. D. Suitable access shall mean a roadway of sufficient width, free from ruts, potholes, and mud holes, and capable of carrying a passenger car without damage to car. E. When access must be denied due to construction, provide suitable access within 24 hours after responsible construction is completed. F. Whenever construction is stopped due to inclement weather, weekends, holidays, or other reasons, suitable access shall be provided for property owners. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE ENVELOPE A. See Civil Details on Drawings for definition. B. Rigid sewer pipe(reinforced concrete pipe): 1. Class B Bedding: Well graded, clean gravel, or crushed stone meeting following gradation: ASTM C33, Table 2, Size 67. EXCAVATION AND FILL 23209.03.00 Page 2 -SECTION 31 23 00 ms1222 2. Initial backfill: Excavated or imported material, both conforming to one of following ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System) classifications: GW, GP, SW, or SP with 100% passing 3/4" sieve. Excavated material shall be free of debris, organic and frozen materials. 3. Remaining backfill: a. Applies to backfill above pipe envelope: See Civil Details on Drawings. b. Where pipe envelope is within limits of excavation for structures, remaining backfill shall be structure backfill as specified in Section 31 23 16-16. c. Job-excavated material: Free from debris, stones larger than 1-1/2" (38 mm), organic matter, and frozen material. C. Pressure pipe steel pipe and ductile iron pipe: 1. Type 1: a. Bedding: Excavated or imported material, both conforming to one of following ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System) classifications: GW or SW with 100% passing 3/4"sieve. Excavated material shall be free of debris, organic and frozen materials. b. Initial backfill: Excavated or imported material, both conforming to one of following ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System) classifications: GW, GP, SW, or SP with 100% passing 3/4" (19 mm) sieve. Excavated material shall be free of debris, organic and frozen materials. c. Remaining backfill.- 1) Applies to backfill above pipe envelope: See Civil Details on Drawings. 2) Where pipe envelope is within limits of excavation for structures, remaining backfill shall be structure backfill as specified in Section 31 23 16-16. 3) Job-excavated material: Free from debris, stones larger than 1-1/2"(38 mm), organic matter, and frozen material. 2. Type 2: a. Bedding: Impervious or semi-impervious excavated or imported material, conforming to ASTM D2487(Unified Soil Classification System)classifications: CL. Excavated material shall be free of debris, organic and frozen materials. b. Initial backfill: Impervious or semi-impervious excavated or imported material conforming to ASTM D2487(Unified Soil Classification System) classifications: CL. Excavated material shall be free of debris, organic and frozen materials. c. Remaining backfill.- 1) Applies to backfill above pipe envelope: See Civil Details on Drawings. 2) Impervious or semi-impervious excavated or imported material conforming to ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System)classifications: CL. Excavated material shall be free of debris, organic and frozen materials. 2.02 BACKFILL FOR MANHOLES AND APPURTENANCES A. Backfill material as required for adjacent trench. 2.03 HYDROSEEDING A. Use: Surface restoration. B. Fertilizer: 1. Apply fertilizer in combination with seeding by hydraulic seeder in approximately 400 gallons (4000 L)of water slurry per acre(hectare). 2. Apply a 13-13-13 commercial fertilizer or equivalent units of nitrogen, phosphate, and potash at rate of 450 lb/acre. 3. Apply mixture within 1 hour after fertilizer and seed are placed in hydraulic seeder. Continuous agitation will be required. Seed remaining in fertilizer solution for more than 1 hour will be unacceptable. Additional seed at specified rate will be required. C. Seed: 1. Use certified seed mixture of 70% Kentucky Bluegrass, 20% Creeping Red Fescue, and 10% Perennial Rye Grass (Fine leaf variety)for permanent seeding in urban areas. 2. Use application rate of 4 Ib/1,000 sq ft(2 kg/100 m2). 23209.03.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 00-Page 3 3. Sow seed only at times of year when temperature, moisture, and climatic conditions will promote germination and plant growth. Normal allowable seeding dates are between March 1 and May 31 and between August 10 and September 30. If an area is disturbed, but not seeded by September 30, scarify area to 3" (75 mm) depth and mulch. D. Mulch: 1. Type: Bonded fiber matrix(BFM) hydromulch. 2. Produced from long-strand wood fibers, held together by organic tackifiers and bonding agents that,when dry, become insoluble and nondispersible. 3. Upon curing 24 to 48 hours, form a continuous, 100% coverage, flexible, absorbent, erosion- resistant blanket that encourages seed germination. 4. Manufactured to be applied hydraulically. 5. Physical properties: a. Fibers: Virgin wood, greater than 88% of total volume. b. Organic material: Greater than 96%of total volume. c. Tackifier: 8-10%. d. pH: 4.8 minimum. e. Moisture content: 12% +/-3%. f. Water-holding capacity: 1.2 gal/lb. 6. Dyed green to facilitate visual metering. 2.04 PAVEMENT MATERIALS A. Sidewalks: 1. Material: Concrete. 2. Reinforcing: None. 3. Expansion joints: 1/2"(13 mm)preformed expansion joint material. B. Curb and gutter: 1. Material: Concrete. 2. Expansion joints: 1/2"(13 mm) preformed expansion joint material. C. Concrete streets and drives: 1. Base: Crushed rock; gradation as follows: Iowa DOT Detail Specification 4123.04 Class A crushed stone. Sieve Size Sieve Size metric Percent Passing by Weight 1-1/2" 38 mm 100 1" 25 mm 90-100 1/2" 13 mm 60-90 No.4 4.75 mm 35-55 No. 16 1.18 mm 10-40 No. 200 75 pm 5-15 2. Pavement: Concrete conforming to Iowa DOT M-3 mix. 3. Joint seal: Hot-applied bituminous material in accordance with AASHTO M173. 4. Expansion joints: 1/2" (13 mm) preformed expansion joint material. D. Asphalt streets and drives: 1. Subbase course: a. Streets with existing brick or concrete base: Crushed rock; gradation as specified for concrete pavement. b. Streets with existing gravel or crushed rock base: No subbase required. 2. Base course: a. Streets with existing brick or concrete base: Unreinforced concrete. b. Streets or drives with existing gravel or crushed rock base: Crushed rock; gradation as specified for concrete pavement. 3. Prime coat: Asphaltic primer MC-30. EXCAVATION AND FILL 23209 03 00 Page 4-SECTION 31 23 00 ms1222 4. Surface course: Hot-mix, equal in quality to existing pavement. E. Gravel streets or drives: 1. Material: Crushed rock. 2. Gradation: Iowa DOT Detail Specification 4120.04 Class A crushed stone. Sieve Size Sieve Size metric Percent Passing by Weight 1" 25 mm 100 1/2" 13 mm 65-95 No. 4 4.75 mm 40-60 No. 16 1.18 mm 15-45 No. 200 75 pm 5-13 3. Binder for seal coat streets and drives: Asphaltic binder MC-800. 4. Dust abatement for crushed rock base and seal coat streets, provide one of following: a. Emulsified asphalt, Type ASTM D977 RS-1 or RS-2. b. Calcium chloride. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Obtain from utility companies exact locations of buried utilities shown on Drawings. B. Make arrangements with utility companies to temporarily support, brace or remove utility poles either adjacent to or in trench excavation at no cost to Owner. C. Utility mains not shown on Drawings, in conflict with trench excavation or new facilities: Notify Engineer immediately. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION -GENERAL A. Classification: 1. Earth: Materials not classified as rock; includes clay, silt, sand and gravel, hardpan, disintegrated shale and rock, debris, and detached rock less than 1 cu yd in volume. 2. Rock: Materials that cannot be excavated without use of pneumatic tools, drilling and blasting, or line drilling and wedging, and detached pieces of such materials larger than 1 cu yd in volume. B. Rock excavation is not anticipated. C. Excavation shall be open cut unless otherwise specified or shown. D. Pile excavated material, suitable for backfill, in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edge of excavation to avoid slides or cave-ins; 2'-0" (600 mm)minimum clear distance. E. Excavate existing utilities sufficiently in advance of pipe laying to determine crossing arrangement. No payment will be allowed for down time due to utility relocation. F. Use caution when placing and compacting backfill to avoid placing construction loads on pipe which may damage or displace newly laid pipe. G. Limit amount of trench open at one time to minimum. 3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION-EARTH A. Strip and stockpile topsoil for use in surface restoration. 23209.03.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 00-Page 5 B. Keep trench width below top of pipe as narrow as practicable; provide adequate width for proper pipe jointing operations and for placing and compacting backfill. C. Slope walls of trench or provide trench shoring as required to comply with OSHA and safety requirements; maintain walls of excavation vertical below top of pipe. Use trench box or shield as required. D. Excavate to full depth by machine. Trench bottom shall be suitable for hand working of finely divided, loose, excavated material or for placement of pipe bedding material. E. If soft, spongy,or otherwise unstable material is encountered which may not provide:suitable foundation for pipe: 1. Notify Engineer immediately. — 2. Engineer will authorize remedial measures in writing as required. 3. Removal and replacement of questionable material will be authorized only if dewatering methods are unsuccessful in stabilizing trench bottom. 4. If removal of unsuitable material is authorized: a. Replace with crushed rock or clean gravel having same gradation as pipe bedding material. b. Compact replacement material with vibratory or pneumatic tampers. F. Excavate by hand: 1. Under tree roots 3"(75 mm) and larger. 2. Under and around structures and utilities. 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR APPURTENANCES A. Excavate as required for appurtenances. B. Carry excavation to firm, undisturbed soil. C. Unauthorized excavation carried below required depth: Backfill with concrete at no expense to Owner. 3.05 SHEETING, SHORING,AND BRACING A. Construct sheeting, shoring, and bracing where shown on Drawings and where required to hold walls of excavation to protect existing utilities, trees, structures, and other similar features and to provide protection of employees. B. Design of sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be responsibility of Contractor and shall comply with OSHA requirements. C. Sheeting which may be removed, in opinion of Engineer, without endangering utilities or structures shall be considered incidental and shall not be paid for. D. When movable trench shield is used below centerline of pipe, it shall be lifted prior to any forward - movement to avoid pipe displacement, unless moved by rearward thrusting jacks. 3.06 DEWATERING A. Execute Work in dry. B. Provide equipment for handling water encountered. C. Do not lay pipe or pour concrete on excessively wet soil. D. Prevent surface water from flowing into excavation; promptly remove any water accumulated. EXCAVATION AND FILL 23209 03 00 Page 6-SECTION 31 23 00 ms1222 E. Divert stream flow and/or sewage away from areas of construction. F. Do not discharge water pumped from excavations to existing sanitary sewers. G. Methods used shall not cause settlement or damage to adjacent property. 3.07 PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT A. Sidewalks: 1. Thickness: 5" (125 mm), except use 6"(150 mm) across driveways. 2. Width and finish to match existing sidewalks. 3. Expansion joints: Use joint material at intervals not exceeding 50' (15 m) and at junction with existing Work, and along adjacent curbs. 4. Finish: Provide edge and joint tooling and finish to match existing. B. Curb and gutter: 1. Cross section and finish to match existing Work. 2. Expansion joints: Use joint material at intervals not exceeding 50' (15 m) and at junction with existing Work. C. Concrete streets and drives: 1. Base: 6" (150 mm) crushed rock compacted to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557. 2. Pavement: Match thickness of existing pavement except use 8" (200 mm) minimum for streets and 7"(175 mm) minimum for drives. 3. Joint to match existing pavement. 4. Provide joint material for isolation joint around manholes and inlets. 5. Finish: Match existing pavement. 6. Pavement markings: Restore to match existing. D. Asphalt streets and drives: 1. Subbase course: a. Streets with existing brick or concrete base: 4" (100 mm)thick gravel or crushed rock. b. Streets with existing gravel or crushed rock base: Place base on trench backfill or existing subgrade. c. Compact to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. 2. Base course: a. Streets with existing brick or concrete base: Use 6" (150 mm) unreinforced concrete. b. Streets or drives with existing gravel or crushed rock base: Use 6"(150 mm)thick gravel or crushed rock. c. Compact to 95% maximum densit as determined by ASTM D1557. 3. Prime coat: 0.1 gallon/sq yd (0.45 I/m ) on concrete base or 0.4 gallon/sq yd (1.8 Um2)on gravel or crushed rock base.Air temperature 55°F (130C) minimum. 4. Surface course: Hot-mix, with total thickness of 4"(100 mm); place and compact in layers not more than 2"(50 mm)thick. 5. Machine place surface course on clean and primed base; match existing surface grade. 6. Repair scars in existing asphalt surface resulting from construction operations. 7. Pavement markings: Restore to match existing. E. Gravel streets, or drives: 1. Compacted 6" (150 mm)thickness of crushed rock. 2. Seal coat streets and drives: Grade portion of surface disturbed; apply one coat of asphaltic binder at rate of 0.3 to 0.5 gal/sq yd (1.4 to 2.3 1/m2); cover immediately with 3/8" (10 mm)gravel or crushed stone at rate of 25 Ib/sq yd (13.6 kg/m2). 3. Roll wearing course to finish grade. Time lapse between binder application and rolling should not exceed 30 minutes. 4. Dust abatement for crushed rock base and seal coat streets. a. Provide dust abatement measures during construction until resurfacing is completed. b. Provide one of following measures: 23209.03.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 00-Page 7 1) Apply emulsified asphalt at minimum rate of 0.25 gallon/sq yd (1.15 1/m). 2) Apply calcium chloride at rate of 1.35 lb (anhydrous weight)/sq yd (0.74 kg/m2). Follow calcium chloride with an application of water at rate of 0.12 gallon/sq yd (0.55 I/m2). c. Furnish labor, equipment, and material required to provide designated dust abatement measures. 3.08 PIPE BEDDING A. Trench bottoms excavated below required elevation: Backfill to proper elevation w th bedding material, at no additional expense to Owner. B. Bedding shall be placed with bucket or other similar means. Pushing material over edge of trench is prohibited. C. Level pipe bedding material to provide support for full length of pipe. D. Provide bell holes at each pipe joint; allow access completely around circumference of pipe for proper - jointing operations. E. Shape pipe bedding with template before placing pipe for 24" (600 mm) pipe size diameter. Minimum depth of shaping to be 10% of outside pipe diameter. F. Place in layers not to exceed 6" (150 mm)and hand work bedding with shovel to fill voids around underside of pipe. Compact by hand held tamping device to ensure material is compacted around entire pipe. 1. Compact to 85%for Class B and Type 1 pressure pipe bedding. 2. Compact to 95%for Type 2 pressure pipe bedding G. Backfill simultaneously on both sides of pipe to prevent displacement. 3.09 INITIAL BACKFILL A. Backfill trench immediately after locations of connections and appurtenances have been recorded. B. Backfill shall be placed with bucket or other similar means. Pushing material over edge of trench is prohibited. C. Backfill and compact simultaneously on both sides of pipe to prevent displacement Place in 6" (150 mm) maximum thick layers. D. Compaction: 1. Type 1 Pressure pipe initial backfill: 85% maximum density,ASTM D698. 2. Type 2 Pressure pipe initial backfill: 95% maximum density, ASTM D698. 3. Class B Rigid sewer pipe: 95%, ASTM D698. 3.10 REMAINING BACKFILL A. Pressure pipe Type 2 remaining backfill: Mechanically or hydraulically compact to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. Prepare upper portion of trench for surface restoration or pavement replacement. B. Trenches with center line beneath or closer than 10'(3 m)to seal coat or gravel surfaced streets, parking areas, and drives: Backfill in layers not to exceed 6"(150 mm); moisten if required; compact - to 90% maximum density as determined by ASTM D698; prepare upper portion of trench for surface restoration or pavement replacement. C. Rigid sewer pipe class B remaining backfill and pressure pipe Type 1 remaining backfill: Consolidate by mechanical compaction; fill upper portion of trench with topsoil and prepare for surface restoration; EXCAVATION AND FILL 23209 03 00 Page 8 -SECTION 31 23 00 ms1222 notify Engineer before mounding over trench or leveling off. Subsequent settlement: Refill, compact, and level. 3.11 BACKFILL FOR MANHOLES,APPURTENANCES, AND STRUCTURES A. Backfill and compact as required for adjacent trench. B. Backfill simultaneously on all sides; protect any waterproofing from damage. 3.12 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Repair, at no additional cost to Owner, existing fences, culverts, and drain tile disturbed by construction. B. Contractor fully responsible for liaison with utility companies and for repairing, at no expense to Owner, utilities damaged by Contractor. In event of break in existing water main, gas main, sewer, or electric or communication cable, immediately notify responsible official of organization operating utility affected. C. Restore obstructions removed to accommodate equipment or to facilitate excavation. D. Hydraulic seeding: 1. Order of operation: a. Seedbed preparation. b. Seed application, fertilizing, and mulching 2. Seedbed preparation, permanent: a. Limit preparation of seedbed to areas that will be seeded immediately upon completion. b. Work areas accessible to field equipment to a depth of no less than 3" (75 mm). Prepare by hand areas inaccessible to field machinery, to a depth of no less than 2" (50 mm). Where weed growth has developed extensively, they may be disked into ground. If weed growth develops sufficiently to interfere with proper seedbed preparation, mow weeds and remove them from project at no additional cost to Owner. c. Use crawler type or dual-wheeled tractors for seedbed preparation. Operate equipment in a manner to minimize displacement of soil and disturbance of design contours. Harrow ridging in excess of 4"(100 mm) due to operation of tillage equipment prior to rolling with cultipacker. Roll area with no less than one pass of cultipacker prior to permanent seeding. d. Shape and fine grade to remove rills or gullies, water pockets, undesirable vegetation, and irregularities to provide a smooth, firm, and even surface true to grade. Prepare to a fine texture and without soil lumps. Till parallel to contours. e, Smooth seedbed with a cultivator-type tillage tool having a rake bar or a rock rake. Pick up and remove all debris, such as rocks, stones, concrete larger than 2" (50 mm), or roots and other objectionable material that will interfere with seeding operation. Spring tooth cultivator may be used instead of rock picker. Remove rock by hand after each use of cultivator; repeat process until soil is relatively free of rock as determined by Engineer. f. Choose equipment to minimize soil compaction. Operate equipment in a manner to minimize displacement of soil and disturbance of design contours. Roll area with at least one pass of cultipacker. Remove ruts that develop during sequence of operations before subsequent operations are performed. Complete just prior to seeding. Notify Engineer before seeding application. 3. Seed application, fertilizing, and mulching: a. Place material, seed, fertilizer, mulch, and tackifier(if applicable) in hydraulic mulching equipment specifically manufactured for hydraulic seeding. b. Ensure hydraulic equipment, pump, and application process do not damage or crack seeds. c. Mix materials with fresh potable water using a combination of both recirculation through equipment pump, and mechanical agitation to form homogeneous slurry. d. Apply mixture within 1 hour after seed and fertilizer are placed in hydraulic seeder. e. If necessary, dampen dry, dusty soil, to prevent balling of material during application. f. Apply slurry evenly over specified areas at a minimum 3,600 lb/acre dry weight. 23209.03.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL _ ms1222 SECTION 31 23 00-Page 9 4. Watering: a. Provide water, equipment, transportation, water tanker, hoses, and sprinklers. b. Use enough water to keep soil and mulch moist to a depth of 1" (25 mm) and ensure growth of seed. For turfgrass seeding areas, sufficiently water to keep soil moist for a minimum of 21 days. If natural rainfall is adequate to keep soil and mulch moist, artificial watering may not be needed. E. Perform restoration work under favorable climatic conditions. 3.13 SOIL AND MATERIAL TESTING A. Moisture-density tests: ASTM D698; minimum of one determination of optimum mc�sture for each type of soil incorporated into Work. B. In-place density tests: ASTM D1556, D2167, or D2922. 1. Perform tests in areas of backfill and where compaction requirements are specified. 2. Provide equipment necessary and perform field density tests during course of Work. 3. Perform tests for fill or backfill at following interval: One test per 500 yd3(380 m3) at random depths. C. Sieve analysis: ASTM C136; minimum of one test on each source of each material of specified gradation unless otherwise specified or provide certified copy of test report from material supplier. D. If tests indicate inadequate placement or compaction, Contractor shall correct inadequacies and perform additional tests in same area at no additional cost to Owner. 3.14 CLEANUP A. Remove brush, rubbish, spoil, excess excavated material, and material not suitable for backfill to off- site location of Contractor's choice. B. Remove waste material promptly as it is generated by construction operations; do not permit to accumulate. Cleanup each portion of construction as it is completed. C. Cleanup operations in public right-of-way shall be kept within 400' (120 m)of constriction operations. D. Cleanup and remove rubbish, debris, and surplus material. E. Grade disposal areas periodically to reasonably neat surface to provide for drainage and access by others. F. Leave Site in neat condition. G. Reopen to traffic as soon as practicable. 3.15 EROSION CONTROL A. Take care to minimize soil erosion during and after construction. B. Cover existing storm water inlets adjacent to construction operations and take additional measures necessary to prevent sediment from entering storm sewers. C. Disturb only minimum area during construction. Pile excavated material in a manner as to prevent erosion of material. Restore surfaces to prevent erosion. D. Remove excess excavated material and debris and dispose of these materials in an acceptable manner to prevent erosion and sedimentation. EXCAVATION AND FILL 23209,03.00 Page 10-SECTION 31 23 00 ms1222 E. Employ erosion control measures and surface restoration procedures, as appropriate, in borrow and waste disposal areas. F. Take measures necessary, in addition to those specified herein, to prevent erosion, prevent sediment from entering surface drainage courses, and prevent sediment from being washed onto adjacent areas. G. Take positive steps for erosion control.Applicable steps will depend upon site characteristics (soil, _ slope, drainage, etc.), and construction techniques. Following are offered as possible steps which may be taken: 1. Relative to area drainage, excavated material shall be stored on upstream side of trenches. 2. Straw or hay bales, sandbags, or silt fences placed in drainage channels or at toe of excavation storage piles to serve as sediment dams. 3. Earthen dam with controlled discharge such as overflow pipe, used as a sedimentation pond. 4. Route runoff around excavated areas and excavated storage piles. 5. Mulching with straw and hay, and jute netting, or other matings, blankets, and netting. 6. Sod or riprap. 7. Temporary seeding. END OF SECTION 1) J. C. Whitney 2) M. D. Werner 23209.03.00 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ms1222 SECTION ?1 23 16-16 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Soil and material testing. B. Excavation, backfilling, and grading for structures. C. Dewatering system. D. Protective and support systems and associated work. - E. Importing backfill and fill materials. F. Disposal of excess or unsatisfactory materials. G. Underground obstructions. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Support system (per OSHA): Structure such as underpinning, bracing, or shoring, which provides support to adjacent structure, underground installation, or sides of an excavation. B. Protective system (per OSHA): Method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from materials that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include support systems, sloping and benching systems, and other systems that provide necessary protection. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - A. If quantities of excavation are changed from those required by Contract Documents, lump sum Contract Price will be adjusted on basis of unit adjustment prices set forth in Agreement. 1. Structural Earth Excavation, cubic yards, (CY): Unit adjustment price includes removal of material; obtaining, placing and compacting structural backfill as specified; dewatering; support systems and protective systems; disposal of excavated material as specified; grading; and all other incidental work. Cubic yards of structural earth excavation defined as volume of earth in its original space within neat lines of foundations and footing projections. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Fill and backfill materials to testing laboratory. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Test reports on samples of all backfill and fill materials. 2. Laboratory compaction test reports establishing moisture-density relationships and maximum densities for all backfill and fill materials. 3. Field in-situ compaction test reports including layouts identifying field test locations and elevations. 4. Test reports and records used to determine adequacy of soils at bottom of excavations including layouts identifying field test locations and elevations. 5. Recommendations for corrections where deviations from Specifications occur or where conditions are considered undesirable. C. Submit documents prepared by Contractor's professional engineer to engineer for review. 1. Scope of review shall be limited to evaluation of geotechnical aspects. Review of support systems is specifically excluded. 2. Submittal will not relieve Contractor from sole and complete responsibility for engineering, design, and installation of protective or support systems. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 31 23 16-16 ms1222 3. Such documents shall be signed and sealed by Contractor's professional engineer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineer will retain services of qualified professional soils consultant and testing laboratory. B. Responsibilities of soils consultant and testing laboratory shall include: 1. Sampling, testing, and approval of backfill and fill materials prior to and during placement. 2. Sampling and testing to determine moisture-density and maximum density characteristics of materials in accordance with ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698. 3. Observation of placement, selection of test locations, and testing of material during placement to determine that uniformity of compaction and specified compaction requirements are met. Determine in-place densities in accordance with ASTM D1556, D2167, or D2922, as applicable. Determine moisture contents in accordance with ASTM D2216 or D3017, as applicable. Conduct one test for every 1,000 sq ft(93 m2)of backfill material placed. 4. Inspection and approval of soil at bottom of excavations under foundations, considering settlement and load-bearing characteristics of soil and design bearing capacity. 5. Providing reports to Engineer giving information on materials and testing performed. 6. Making recommendations to Engineer where deviations from Specifications occur or conditions are considered undesirable. 7. Binding reports and recommendations in one report at end of Project and giving 2 copies to Engineer. C. Soils consultant shall provide evidence of professional registration in state where Work is performed and professional liability insurance covering its activities in the investigation, evaluation, and production of reports dealing with its work. D. Responsibilities of Contractor shall include: 1. Providing samples of backfill and fill materials to testing laboratory. 2. Notifying soil consultant and testing laboratory a minimum of 5 working days before commencing work that requires testing and minimum of 3 working days notice of any work requiring testing thereafter. 3. Providing access in field for compaction testing and inspection and testing of natural bearing soils. 4. Allowing inspection and approval of subgrades and fill layers by soil consultant before further Work in that area is performed. E. Contractor shall retain services of licensed professional engineer in the State of Iowa to design, inspect, and approve all protective systems, support systems, and dewatering. 1. Responsibilities of licensed professional engineer shall include: a. Designs and approvals where required by OSHA. b. Design Support and/or Protective System as required for construction. A Support System is recommended for construction at Vinton Lift Station. The contractor has the option to use a Support and/or Protective System at Westfield Avenue Pump Station. c. Design dewatering system capable of maintaining the phreatic level at least 3 foot below excavation surfaces. d. Design Support System(s)as required to protect structural stability of existing structures including but not limited to existing flood wall, levee, and railroad tracks. The current level of flood protection shall not be reduced or disturbed during construction. e. Supervision and inspection of work performed under design or approvals. 2. Contractor's professional engineer shall have a minimum of 5 years of relevant experience. 3. Contractor's professional engineer shall be licensed in the state of Iowa and provide evidence of professional liability insurance covering activities. 1.06 SCHEDULE A. Provide Owner minimum of 7 days notice of scheduled installation of components of support system that involve use of impact or vibratory hammers such as driven H-or sheet piling. 23209.03.00 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 16-16 Page 3 1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Known underground utilities, foundations, and other underground obstructions in v cinity of new construction are shown. Existing utilities are active and shall remain in service unless specifically identified on drawings as abandoned, to be removed or relocated. B. Protect underground facilities encountered during excavation. Provide support of facilities as required to facilitate excavation and project construction. Repair, without compensation, existing active facilities damaged during operations. C. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue Work in area until Engineer provides directive and notification to resume work. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL BACKFILL AND FILL A. Use material specified as backfill and fill material unless shown or specified otherwise. B. Exclude debris, large stones, rocks, roots, organic or frozen material, expansive material and other deleterious materials. C. Type: Excavated or imported material conforming to one of following ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System)classifications: GW, GP, SW, or SP. D. Use for all backfill and fill except where specified otherwise. 2.02 GRANULAR FILL A. Type: Clean, medium or coarse sand conforming to ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System) - classification SW. B. Material: Free of earth, clay or other foreign substances. C. Use: 1. Place 6" (150 mm) layer of granular fill under interior slabs-on-grade. 2. Fill all depressions, resulting from compaction proofrolling or excavation of unsuitable bearing _ material under interior slabs-on-grade. 3. Backfill behind walls of structure. 2.03 CRUSHED ROCK A. Clean crushed rock. B. Size and grading: 1" (25 mm) maximum, 10 to 35% passing No. 8 (2.38 mm)sieve, not over 15% passing No. 50 (0.30 mm)sieve, and not over 6% passing No. 200 (0.075 mm)sie\,e. C. Material: Free of earth, clay, or other foreign material. D. Use: As shown on Drawings. 2.04 DRAINAGE FILL A. Type: Clean, crushed rock or gravel. _ B. Size and grading: 100% passing 1-1/2"(38 mm) sieve and not over 2% passing No. 4(4.75 mm) sieve. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 31 23 16-16 ms1222 C. Material: Free of earth, clay, or other foreign substances. D. Use: As shown on Drawings. 2.05 FILTER MATERIAL A. Clean,well-graded gravel or crushed rock with maximum size of 3/8" (10 mm), not less than 95% passing No. 4(4.75 mm) sieve and not more than 5% passing No. 200 (0.075 mm)sieve. B. Use around perimeter drain and as shown. 2.06 COHESIVE BACKFILL AND FILL A. Type: Excavated or imported natural clay materials conforming to ASTM D2487(Unified Soil Classification System) Classification CL. B. Use: Surface water barrier as shown. 2.07 SUPPORT AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Provide support and protection systems where shown and where required to protect public,workers, and existing and new utilities, property and structures. B. Design of support and protection systems shall be responsibility of Contractor and shall conform to OSHA requirements. C. Design of system shall include: 1. Loading effects from: a. Soil. b. Ground water and surface water. c. Surcharge loading (construction and traffic on adjacent roadways and railroads). d. Existing structures dead load and live load. 2. Consideration of effects on existing structures including vibration and settlement. Installation and removal of support systems shall not cause damage to existing facilities. D. Determine existing foundation loads from existing structure drawings obtained from Owner. Where existing structure drawings do not define foundation loads, calculate foundation loads based upon structure details shown on Owner drawings and field inspection. Incorporate appropriate live loads on existing structures in load analysis. E. Certain Owner facilities are vibration sensitive. Incorporate techniques that minimize vibrations transmitted to existing facilities. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Prior to construction operations,verify governing dimensions and elevations. Take photographs to record any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and other facilities potentially affected by construction operations. Prepare list of such damages, verified by dated and signed photographs by Contractor and Engineer. These documents will be record of existing conditions prior to start of construction. B. Survey adjacent properties, structures, and facilities that may be influenced by excavation operations, establishing elevations at fixed points to act as bench marks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. Locate datum level used to establish benchmark elevations sufficiently distant so as not to be affected by movement resulting from construction activities. 23209.03.00 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 16-16 Page 5 C. During excavation, resurvey benchmarks weekly, or more often as may be necessary due to construction activities, employing a licensed land surveyor or registered professional engineer, licensed in the State of Iowa. Maintain accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident. Promptly perform whatever is necessary in order to stabilize existing elements. 3.02 EARTH EXCAVATION A. Excavate as shown and required for construction work. Extend excavation sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placement and removal of forms. B. Use special care when excavating under and around existing facilities. Support existing facilities and earth under facilities to prevent settlement resulting from construction operations. C. Excavation for soil supported foundations: 1. Excavate to elevations shown or specified. Soils consultant shall inspect and approve soil at foundation levels shown. 2. If soils consultant determines that bearing capacity of soil is unsuitable at foundation levels shown, notify Engineer of subsurface conditions and discontinue Work in area until Engineer provides directive and notification to resume Work. 3. Fill with crushed rock at no expense to Engineer, unauthorized excavations carried below bottoms of foundation levels shown. 4. Where concrete is placed directly on natural soil, trim excavations by hand to remove material disturbed by machine excavation; produce neat, plane surface at elevation of bottom of footing. D. Floor slab excavation: 1. Excavate soil under floor slabs for thickness of granular material shown. 2. If soils consultant determines that bearing capacity of any soil is unsuitable at elevation shown, notify Engineer of subsurface conditions and discontinue Work in area until Engineer provides directive and notification to resume Work. 3. Fill with crushed rock, at no expense to Engineer, unauthorized excavations for floor slabs carried below specified excavation elevation. 3.03 ROCK EXCAVATION - A. Rock is defined as boulders measuring over 1 cu yd (0.8 cu m)or natural occurring bedrock material that cannot be removed without special excavation techniques such as continuous loosening with pneumatic tools, rippers or drilling and blasting. B. Notify Engineer when rock is encountered. Do not perform rock excavation until notified by Engineer to do so. C. Use methods that produce solid, unshattered lines; roughen smooth, flat surfaces ar d cut steps in smooth sloping surfaces. D. When notified to excavate rock, over excavate to a depth of 1' (300 mm)below footing or foundation elevation and backfill as specified hereinafter. Provide at least 1' (300 mm)clear along sides of footings or foundation walls. E. Explosives: Blasting not permitted. 3.04 BACKFILL AND FILL - A. Backfilling around structures: 1. Backfill only after concrete has attained 85% of specified 28-day compressive strength. 2. Prevent displacement of construction during backfilling operations; backfill opposite sides of structures simultaneously. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 31 23 16-16 ms1222 B. Backfill and fill to elevations or grades as shown and required for drainage. Maintain surface and slopes for drainage during operations. C. Placement: 1. Maintain surfaces free of water, debris, and excessively wet, frozen, and other deleterious materials. 2. Place backfill and fill materials in successive horizontal layers not more than 8" (200 mm) in loose depth. 3. Place materials at proper moisture content for obtaining densities as specified. Generally maintain within -1%to+3% of optimum. 4. Material too dry or too wet to compact properly: Moisten or aerate to extent necessary to produce desired results. D. Compaction: 1. Compact backfill and fill within structure outlines, beneath and within 10' (3 m)of sidewalks, streets, drives, and parking areas to at least 95%of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. 2. Compact backfill and fill in other areas to at least 90%of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. 3. Perform sampling and testing in each layer of backfill and fill placed to confirm adequacy of compaction. Minimum of one sample and test for each 1,000 sq ft(93 m2)of each layer. 4. Do not use pneumatic tired rollers, sheeps-foot type heavy mechanical tamping rollers or heavy vibratory compactors within 6'(1.8 m)of structure,walls, pipes, or other construction which might be damaged by compaction equipment. 5. If tests indicate inadequate compaction, remove, replace and recompact material until compliance with these specifications is achieved. 3.05 DEWATERING A. Furnish, install, and remove dewatering equipment necessary to drain and keep maintaining the phreatic level at least 3 foot below excavation surfaces during construction. B. Prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and into existing or new structures; promptly remove any water accumulated. C. Maintain dewatering operations until Work area is accepted as complete. 3.06 SUPPORT AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Where existing utilities are in vicinity of support and protection systems that has components to be drilled or driven into soil, expose existing utilities to verify location prior to start of installation of support and protection systems components to avoid damage to existing utilities. B. Remove support and protection system in manner to avoid damage or disturbance to Work. Leave support system in place, where removal will endanger Work, public,workers, adjacent utilities, property or structures or where it has been used as permanent formwork for concrete construction. 3.07 SITE GRADING A. Grade areas disturbed by construction operations. B. Finish grade to smooth, uniformly sloping surfaces to elevations shown and required for drainage. - C. Fill depressions and provide for positive drainage away from buildings and structures. D. Finish with 4"(100 mm) layer of topsoil in area to be seeded; refer to Section 31 22 00. 23209.03.00 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ms1222 SECTION 31 23 16-16 Page 7 3.08 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. Dispose of excess and unsuitable excavated material off site in Owner-approved rubble site. B. Dispose of debris, large stones, rocks, roots, and organic materials off site in Owner-approved rubble site. C. Contractor shall pay disposal fees. END OF SECTION 1) L. H. Badtram 2) C. S. Phillips 23209.03.00 AGGREGATE SURFACING ms1222 SECTION 32 15 00- Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate surfacing including subgrade preparation, hauling, spreading, compacting, and material tests. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide testing of materials and field compaction. B. Refer to Section 01 40 00. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregate shall be salvaged HMA(RAP) meeting the requirements of Iowa Department of Transportation Materials Instructional Memorandum (I.M.) 210. B. Process RAP to pass 1-1/2" (38 mm) sieve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Prior to placing aggregate, prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 22 00. B. Deposit aggregate in its final position with spreader. Compact surface of aggregate with a pneumatic- tired roller. Surface shall be rolled at least four times and compacted to minimum of 95%of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. If moisture content of aggregate is insufficient to permit specified compaction during rolling operations, add sufficient water to obtain specified compaction. C. Provide laboratory test results indicating conformance to article 2.01. D. Provide moisture density laboratory test conforming to ASTM D698. END OF SECTION 1) D. J. Bovee 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ms1222 SECTION 32 31 13-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fencing. B. Grounding. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 00 10-Concrete Work. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on dimensions, materials, and finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fencing shall meet or exceed minimum standards established by Chain Link Fence Manufacturers - Institute Product Manual for materials,finishes, and installation. B. Perform installation with experienced fence erectors. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Allied Tube&Conduit. B. Wheatland Tube Co. C. American Fence Co. D. Master Halco, Inc. E. Merchants Metal. F. Steven Pipe&Steel. 2.02 FENCE MATERIALS A. Fence height: 6' (1.8 m)to top of mesh and framing. Barbed wire shall be in addition to this height. B. Fabric: 1. Zinc coated fabric meeting the requirements of ASTM A392, Class 2 coating. 2. 2" (50 mm)diamond mesh, 9-gage(4 mm). 3. Tensile strength: 80,000 psi(550,000 kPa) minimum. 4. Top selvage: Twisted and barbed. 5. Bottom selvage: Knuckled. C. Barbed wire: 1. Use barbed wire meeting the requirements of ASTM A 121 for 950 pounds(423 kN)force minimum strand breaking strength. 2. Composed of 3 lengths of barbed wire attached to 45' extension arms. 3. Each wire shall consist of 2 strands of 12-1/2 gage (2 mm), zinc-coated wire with 14-gage (1.6 mm)wire barbs in 4-point pattern on 5"(125 mm)centers. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 32 31 13 ms1222 4. Extend vertical members of gate frame 12" (359 mm). Barbed wire attached to frame using fabric tension bands to hold barbed wire from moving out of position on the gate. D. Framework: ASTM F1043, Group 1A steel pipe; orASTM F1043, Group 1C high-strength steel pipe. Pipe shall conform to following sizes and weights: Sizes and Description Outside Diameter, Weight, Group 1A Weight, Group 1C in (mm) Ib/ft(kg/m) Ib/ft(kg/m) Top rail 1.660(42) 2.27 (3.38) 1.40(2.10) Line post 2.375 (60) 3.65 (5.44) 3.12(4.65) End, corner, and pull post 2.875 (73) 5.79(8.63) 4.64 (6.91) Brace rail 1.660 (42) 2.27(3.38) 1.40(2.08) Gate post: Up to 6' (1.8 m)wide 2.875(73) 5.79 (8.63) 4.64(6.91) T to 12' (2.1 m to 3.6 m)wide 4.000(100) 9.11 (13.57) 6.56 (9. E. Post tops: Post tops shall be so designed as to exclude moisture from post. F. Tension wire: 6-or 7-gage, zinc-coated wire. G. Truss rods: 3/8" (10 mm) diameter, zinc-coated steel rod, adjustable. H. Gate frame: Pipe,joined at corners by welding or fittings. Provide fabric and any necessary bracing and adjustable truss rods. 1. Gates: ASTM F900 swing type, complete with necessary latches, stops, keepers, hinges, and provision for padlocking. J. Latch: Fulcrum-type with provision for padlocking. K. Fittings: Galvanized press steel, malleable, or ASTM F626 cast steel. L. Finishes: 1. Chain link fabric: Steel galvanized after weaving by hot-dip process to give a minimum of 1.2 oz of zinc/sq ft(450 mg/m2)of wire surface distributed over entire fabric, including cut ends, in accordance with ASTM A392 Class 1. 2. Framework: a. External coating: 1) Steel pipe,ASTM F1043, Group 1A: Zinc-coated in accordance with paragraph 7.1.1. 2) Steel pipe, ASTM F1043, Group 1C: Zinc with organic overcoat in accordance with paragraph 7.1.2. b. Internal coating: 1) Steel pipe,ASTM F1043, Group 1A: Zinc-coated in accordance with paragraph 7.2.1. 2) Steel pipe,ASTM F1043, Group 1 C: Zinc-coated in accordance with paragraph 7.2.2. 2.03 GROUNDING MATERIALS A. Ground rods: 5/8" (16 mm) diameter x 10'-0"(3 m)copper-clad steel, sectional. B. Cable from fence connection to ground rod: Minimum No. 6 AWG (16 mm2)solid copper. C. Gate to gate post connection: Flexible tinned copper braid. D. Clamp connectors: High conductivity copper alloy, nonferrous, noncorrosive; suitable for fence member and conductor. Burndy, or equal. 23209.03.00 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES _ ms1222 SECTION 32 31 13-Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FENCE INSTALLATION A. Spacing of posts: 1. Space posts evenly for distance required unless specific spacing is shown. 2. Maximum spacing: 10' (3 m)c to c. B. Set each post in concrete as follows: _ 1. Diameter: 10" (250 mm)for line posts, 12"(300 mm)for corner posts, 18" (450 mm)for gate posts; crown concrete tops to shed water. 2. Depth: Extend gate posts 5-0" (1,500 mm) into 5'-6" (1,650 mm)foundation; other posts 3'-0" (900 mm) into 3'-6" (1,050 mm)foundation. 3. Concrete: Class C, as specified in Section 03 00 10. 4. Form top 6" (150 mm)with"Sonotube,"or equal. C. Where fence turns corner or bends in excess of 300 horizontally or vertically, provide corner post complete with bracing. D. Connect fabric securely to line posts and top rails using tie wires every 12" (300 mm on posts and 24" - (600 mm) on rails. E. Provide necessary tie wires, clips, angles, and fastening devices to erect fence and gates to structural supporting elements. F. Gates shall swing freely to open 1200 upon completion of installation. G. Install one extension arm facing outward with barbed wire on top of fence. H. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. 3.02 GROUNDING INSTALLATION A. Drive tops of ground rods to depth of 2'-0"(610 mm) below grade. B. Install clamp connectors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install ground rods as follows: 1. Crossing of primary electrical transmission line: 1 at crossing location and 1 at a distance 50' (15 m)each side of crossing. 2. Adjacent to and within 50' (15 m)of a primary electrical transmission line: At least 1 in each uninterrupted run and not more than 500'(150 m)intervals. D. Install ground rods at locations shown on Drawings. E. Ground gates using flexible, tinned copper braid. END OF SECTION 1) D. J. Bovee 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 TRASH RACKS ms1222 SECTION 3�20 13-26 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install trash system including trash rack and related appurtenances for cleaning vegetation and other debris from a storm sewer upstream of pump station intake. B. Pumped fluid consists of turbid stormwater that may contain sand, silt, vegetative matter and debris. C. Collection system shall include one trash rack for each lift station. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Catalog data and illustrations showing principal parts and material. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Installation and erection manual. 4. Protective coating systems. B. Quality assurance data: Manufacturer's qualifications and certification of compliance with Specifications. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Detailed layout dimensions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment and materials shall be by a single manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in design and manufacture of equipment. Manufacturer shall demonstrate to satisfaction of Engineer that quality is equal to equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. Manufacturer of trash rakes shall have been in manufacture of similar equipment for at least 5 years. B. Equipment furnished shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with approved drawings, specifications, engineering data, and recommendations furnished by equipment manufacturer. C. Regulatory requirements: The edition of publications of organizations listed below in effect at time of advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to extent referenced. See various paragraphs for specified standard. In case of a conflict between requirements of this section and those of listed document, requirements of this section shall prevail. 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4. American Welding Society (AWS). 5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Duperon Corporation, or equal. 2.02 MECHANICAL DESIGN A. Bar racks shall be inclined from vertical plane as shown on Drawings. TRASH RACKS 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 35 20 13-26 ms1222 B. Parts of mechanism shall be amply proportioned for all stresses that may occur during erection, fabrication, and intermittent or continuous operation. C. Flat bars: 1. Type 304 stainless steel, welded to stainless steel cross bars. 2. Bar clear spacing: 1-1/2" (38 mm). 3. Each bar rack may have a square edge. D. Bar screen anchors and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. E. Service life: Minimum of 25 years under service conditions specified. F. Removal and reinstallation: 1. Rack shall be capable of being removed for access to pump. 2. Anchorage of rack shall be as indicated on Drawings. 3. Design for 2 lift points. 4. Rack anchorage shall be readily accessible with adequate tolerance to facilitate easy reinstallation. 5. Equip fasteners with locking device such as a lock nut and a lock washer. 2.03 STRUCTURAL DESIGN A. In accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction. B. Design loads: 1. Design shall address all live and dead loads. 2. Design for maximum loading corresponding to 5' (1.5. m)differential of head above elevation of pump low water shut off for full width of rack. 3. Design lifting lugs to withstand a load of no less than 3 times weight of rack. C. Maximum allowable rack deflection: L/360. D. Intermediate support: 1. Maximum of 1 intermediate support shall be provided if required. 2. Materials of support shall be stainless steel conforming to requirements specified. 3. Support member, if not an integral part of rack, shall be easily removed and re-installed for pump maintenance. E. Minimum bar and component size: Structural members shall have a minimum thickness of 3/8" (10 mm). Vertical collection bars shall have a minimum depth of 2-1/2" (64 mm). F. Allowable stress for rack structural elements shall not exceed those stated in AISC Manual of Steel Construction and shall not be higher than following percentages of minimum yield strength of materials used: 1. Tension (on net section at holes): 40%. 2. Bending (tension and compression on extreme fibers of members): 55%. 3. Shear(on gross section of member): 35%. 4. Bearing on contact area of machine surfaces: 70%. 5. Stress concentration factors shall be used where applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. System shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturer's installation instructions, as submitted with Shop Drawings, or any pre-installation checklists. B. Installation shall use standard torque values and be installed secure in position and neat in appearance. 23209.03.00 TRASH RACKS ms1222 SECTION 35 20 13-26-Page 3 C. Installation shall include site preparation tasks; pre-installation tasks as determined by manufacturer; such as unloading, touch-up painting, etc. and any other installation tasks and materials as determined by Engineer or specified by manufacturer. D. Manufacturer's field representative shall meet with Contractor to provide guidelines for installation of equipment. END OF SECTION 1) J. C. Whitney 2) B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 SLUICE GATES ms1222 SECTION 35 20 16-26 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sluice gates. B. Operators. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer and manufacturer's type designation. 2. Manufacturer's catalog data. B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions and section views of equipment. C. Quality assurance data: 1. Plan indicating location and extent of proposed field welding, and showing what provisions have been made for type of base metal, present stress conditions, and preheating requirements. 2. Certificates for each welder, showing proof of qualifications as outlined in code, prior to any field welding, either temporary or permanent. 3. Report of factory test data. 4. Product information, charts, or graphs to verify product provided meets requirements set forth in this specification. 5. Affidavit of compliance in accordance with AVMA C560. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, store, and protect equipment as recommended by manufacturer. B. Receive and unload shipments to plant site from suppliers of equipment under this Contract. Unload equipment as soon as possible after arrival. C. Pay freight car and truck demurrage, detention, and any other costs which may be bided to Owner due to failure to unload cars or trucks within time required by freight companies. D. Provide physical protection for equipment placed in storage. 1. Store and maintain materials and equipment after receipt until completed installation is accepted by Owner. Such storage and maintenance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Specifications. Provide materials, equipment, and labor required for such storage and maintenance. Contractor shall be accountable for any deterioration of materials or equipment occasioned by improper storage or maintenance, and shall recondition, repair, or replace any such materials or equipment without addition cost to Owner. 2. Stored equipment shall be supported above ground and shall be covered with canvas or other heavy-duty sheeting. Cover shall be securely fastened and shall be replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during storage period. 3. Motors shall be stored in dry, warm place and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Motors over 20 hp shall have shaft rotated 900 each month. Provide Engineer with evidence that this requirement is met. 4. Desiccant shall be maintained between cover and motor frames on motors. Provide desiccant of type permitting visual determination of condition of desiccant. Replace desiccant when it becomes ineffective. SLUICE GATES 23209.03.00 Page 2- SECTION 35 20 16-26 ms1222 5. Following items shall be stored in weatherproof building complete with bins for storage of small pieces of equipment. Heat to a minimum of 50OF (100C). Storage inside of existing treatment plant not available. a. Electronic instruments and cabinets. b. Electrical equipment with general-purpose enclosures. c. Insulation materials. d. Rotating equipment. e. Miscellaneous electronic equipment, gaskets, and small, machined parts. f. Instruments and controls. E. Inspect stored equipment weekly. Renew protective coatings as necessary to preserve fitness of equipment. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Equipment will be located outdoors. Gates will be submerged in water and may be exposed to outside air. B. Outside air characteristics: 1. Temperature: -20OF to 100°F(-29°C to 380C). 2. Relative humidity: 30%to 100%. C. Water characteristics: 1. Storm water with grit, gravel, oils, and dissolved organic material. 2. Temperature: 320F to 75OF (0°C to 240C). 3. pH: 6.O to 8.5. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plasti-Fab. B. Rodney Hunt. C. Waterman Industries, Inc. D. Hydro Gate Corporation. E. Or equal mm 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Type: 1. New: a. Location: New lift stations. b. Construction: Either cast iron or fabricated fiberglass-reinforced polyester(FRP). c. New sluice gates: Product of same manufacturer. 2. Refurbish: a. Location: Existing lift station and gatewells. b. Replace threaded stem, pedestal, gate actuator, and stem cover. c. Manufacturer shall either submit calculations showing that existing solid gate stem and stem guide spacing are acceptable for use with electric gate actuators or replace solid gate stem and stem guides with an acceptable design. 3. Gate actuators: Product of same manufacturer. -- 23209.03.00 SLUICE GATES ms1222 SECTION 3E 20 16-26-Page 3 B. Performance and design requirements: 1. Design and select gate components for continuous submerged operation and in accordance with Section 4, AWWA C560 for cast iron gates or AWWA C563 for FRP gates. 2. Operating forces: Base on Appendix A to AWWA C560. 3. Gate components: a. Yokes, frames, discs, stems, disc nut pockets, wedges, and other load-bearing members. b. Strength based on maximum operating force applied by operator and on design head. c. Maximum leakage shall not exceed amount stated in AWWA C560, Section 5.6. 4. Operator components: a. Gears, shafts, housings, bearings, stands, pedestals, and cranks or handwheels. b. Strength based on supplying maximum operating force. c. Select operator to provide maximum opening or closing operating force with maximum of 100 ft-lb (13.8 kg-m) and normal operating force of not more than 50 ft-lb (6 9 kg-m). d. Provide method of mounting limit switches. C. Operating requirements: See article"Sluice Gate Schedule." 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Provide dowel pins and shims necessary for leveling and doweling equipment to baseplates. Shims shall be stainless steel. B. Provide expansion anchors where required, subject to review by Engineer. C. Provide welding rod for field erection of equipment installed under this Contract. D. Westfield: Provide galvanized steel slot covers and expanded metal covers over exposed gate frame for safety. 2.04 CAST IRON SLUICE GATES A. Meet requirements of AWWA C560 specifications for cast iron gates, except as otherwise specified. B. Medium-duty type sluice gates. C. Flange or flat back frames. D. Provide cast iron wall thimbles with sluice gates. E. Show location of vertical centerline with permanent marks at top and bottom of machined face; include word "top" marked near top center of thimble opening. F. Provide stems and stem guides in accordance with AWWA C560, Section 4.4. 1. Single rising stem, unless otherwise specified. 2. 290 threads, acme. 3. Stem diameter capable of withstanding twice maximum operating force; turned straight and true and honed to smooth 63 micro inch or better finish. 4. Support stem at spacings such that I/r ratio for unsupported stem length is 200 or less. 5. Provide split, bronze bushed, adjustable type stem guides. G. Materials: 1. Gate, guide, and frame: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B. 2. Seating faces: Bronze,ASTM B98 or B139. 3. Wall thimbles: Cast iron,ASTM A126, Class B. 4. Stem, stem couplings: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304. 5. Wedges, thrust nut: Bronze,ASTM B584, CA873. 6. Fasteners and adjusting hardware: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304. 7. Yoke: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B. SLUICE GATES 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 35 20 16-26 ms1222 8. Bottom seal: Neoprene. 9. Flush bottom retainer bar: Stainless steel,ASTM A276, Type 304. 10. Pedestal, Operator housing: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B. 2.05 STRUCTURALLY REINFORCED FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC A. Quality: Composition of gate laminate shall be in accordance with recommendations shown in the Quality Assurance Report for Reinforced Thermostat Plastic(RTP) Corrosion Resistant Equipment prepared under the sponsorship the Society of the Plastics, Industry, INC. (SPI)and the Material Technology Institute of the Chemical Process Industries, Inc., (MTI)for"Hand Lay-up Laminates"; and shall meet specifications for Type 1, Grade 10 laminates shown in Appendix M-1 of said report. B. Materials: 1. Gate: Structurally reinforced fiberglass-reinforced plastic. 2. Frame, stem mounting bracket, stem, stem guides, stem couplings: Stainless steel,ASTM A276, Type 304. 3. Fasteners, wedges, wear strips and adjusting hardware: Stainless steel,ASTM A276, Type 304. 4. Lift nut, thrust nut: Bronze,ASTM B584, CA873. 5. Wedge adjustment bolts: Naval bronze. 6. Seals: Elastomeric J-seals made of molded or extruded neoprene having a hardness range of 55 to 65 shore A durometer and conforming to ASTM D2000 having a maximum compression set of 25%, and low temperature brittleness to meet suffix F-17 (-40 F). 7. Pedestal, operator housing: Stainless steel,ASTM A276, Type 304. C. Gates: 1. Molded individually to exact dimensions specified. Sluice gates shall be manufactured of reinforced thermo-set plastic containing ultraviolet absorbers. 2. Surface: a. Resin rich to a depth of.010"to .020" and reinforced with C-glass or polymeric fiber surfacing material. b. Free of exposed reinforcing fibers. c. Composition of layers: Approximately 95% (by weight) resin. d. Remaining laminate: Copolymer composite and reinforcing fibers in a form, orientation, and position to meet mechanical requirements. 3. Utilize structural reinforcing to attain necessary stiffness to meet deflection requirements.and well encapsulate with a laminate not less than 1/4"thick on each side to ensure against any permeation by water to core areas. 4. Fasten stem mounting bracket to gate with through-bolts. Through-holes shall not pass through or be in contact with internal steel reinforcing. 5. Core material: 100% resistant to decay and attack by fungus and bacteria. D. Frames and guides: 1. Guides: a. Provide a slot suitable for mating with gate cover. b. Equip guides to be bolted to wall with heavy-duty mounting angle for ease of mounting to - channel wall by means of anchor bolts. c. Where guides are extended above operating floor, level to form bench stand upon which lift mechanism is fastened, guides shall be suitably strong and rigid without use of additional stiffening members. 2. Self-contained guide frames: a. Affix head rail to allow gate to be removed from guide without disassembly. b. Head rail maximum deflection: 1/4"when subjected to a horizontal force of 4 times 40 lb. maximum hand wheel pull. E. Seals: 1. Equip gate with elastomeric seals to reduce leakage. 2. At maximum operating head, leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gpm/foot of wetted perimeter. 3. Mount seals, including bottom seals, on gate covers with cap screws and clamping bars providing means of repair and replacement without dewatering. 23209.03.00 SLUICE GATES ms1222 SECTION 1 20 16-26-Page 5 4. Fasten 1/4"thick UHMW wearstrip to opposite side of gate from J-seals along Loth sides. Wearstrip shall have a coefficient of friction less than 0.15. 2.06 OPERATORS A. Select operator to provide necessary opening and closing forces with a maximum operating force of 40 lb pull after slide is unseated. B. Enclose gears, operating nuts, shafts, and bearings in weatherproof housing. C. Provide pressure type fittings for grease lubrication of bearings, gears, operating nits, and shafts. D. Provide mechanical seals around operating nut to prevent loss of lubricant and entrance of water, dust, and contaminants. E. Provide operating nut with internal 29'acme threads; machined to accurately mate with stem threads; turned straight and true; honed to smooth 63 microinch (1.6 micrometer) or better finish. F. Mount operating nut on 2 tapered roller bearings. 1. Located above and below nut flanges. 2. Sized to transmit gate-operating forces from stem and operating nut into housing; radial and axial. G. Design to be self-locking at any position of stem travel. H. The operating speed shall provide gate closing and opening at approximately 6 inches per minute. I. Provide galvanized steel stem cover with "Open"and"Closed" position indicator. J. Manual, geared, crank type operator: 1. Design for specified mountings: a. Standard pedestal. b. Offset pedestal. c. Yoke. 2. Mount pinion shaft on tapered roller bearings to resist axial and radial thrusts. 3. Provide mechanical seals around pinion shaft to prevent loss of lubricant and entrance of water, dust, and contaminants. 4. If needed to meet operating requirements, provide reduction gear case with precision-machined gears mounted on tapered roller bearings. Provide seals at shafts. 5. Provide maximum 15" (375 mm) handwheel; fit to square input shaft with square hole. 6. Locate handwheel between 32"and 36"(800 mm and 900 mm)above floor. 7. For self-contained (yoke type)frames where input shaft is located greater than 36"(900 mm) above operating floor, mount crank on side of frame at 36"(900 mm) above operating floor, and connect to geared operator through a combination of drive shaft, sprockets, chain, and/or gears. K. Electric motor actuator: 1. AWWA C540. 2. Actuator: a. Capable of producing not less than 1-1/2 times required operator torque. Motor shall be 460/230-volt ac, 3-phase, 60 Hz , totally enclosed construction. Class F insulation for 400C ambient temperature, reversible squirrel cage induction type, suitable for across-the-line starting. Motors shall have 2 thermal overload relays including space heaters. b. Full open-close travel speed of gate: 10"to 14"/min (250 mm to 350 mm/min). c. Provide integral full-voltage reversing motor starter with motor circuit protector disconnect and pushbutton station in NEMA 4 enclosure. d. Provide torque switches to prevent damage due to obstructions or binding. Torque switches shall deenergize motor on high torque. e. Provide position switches to stop gate at end of travel. Auxiliary switches for gate position shall be provided for external indication of gate full open and full close positions. Switches shall be rated for 120 volts ac applications. SLUICE GATES 23209.03.00 Page 6 - SECTION 35 20 16-26 ms1222 f. Provide integral control station with following features: 1) Local/Stop/Remote control modes. Dry contact shall be provided to monitor actuator in remote mode. Contact shall close in remote mode. 2) Open/Close local control 3) LCD local indication of position and alarms for intelligent operators. g. Control circuits: 1) Motor-operated gates shall operate in fully open/fully closed mode. 2) Gate controls shall be capable of being remotely controlled in future through normally open "Open" and"Close" dry contacts. 3. Accessories: Hand operator for manual opening or closing. Provide means of manual mechanical override.When manual operation is selected, motor shall be interlocked so it cannot run. Handwheel shall instantly be disconnected from gear train upon resumption of motor operation. 4. Mount motor operator to gate with adaptor coordinated by gate manufacturer. 5. Manufacturer: Auma Limitorque, Rotork, or equal. 2.07 SHOP FINISH A. Prepare ungalvanized ferrous surfaces and shop prime before shipment. B. Use primer compatible with field finish specified in Section 09 90 00. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Each gate and operator shall be inspected at factory before shipment. B. Perform seat clearance and operating tests in manufacturer's shop as specified in Section 5.2 of AWWA C560. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install where shown on Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer. B. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide access space around equipment for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 FLOOR SHORING A. Shore parts of structure for which design loading would be exceeded during construction or installation of equipment.B. Protect flooring and other finished surfaces by means of heavy planking. C. Remove shoring and repair any damage to floors or other parts of structures after equipment has been installed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide inspection and testing by service representative as specified in Section 01 40 00. 1. Describe installation to Contractor. 2. Inspect and accept installation for compliance with warranty requirements. 3. Direct and witness equipment testing prior to start-up. B. Perform field operating and leakage tests as specified in Section 5.2,AWWA C560. 23209.03.00 SLUICE GATES ms1222 SECTION 3'_) 20 16-26- Page 7 3.04 SLUICE GATE SCHEDULE Site Qty Type Size, Opening Bottom Side Frame Design head,feet OF erator Operator Max. Inches Direction Seating Mounting Type =) ype Mounting Travel, W (e) (0 (d) �n Inches 9) Seating Unseating Westfield 1 New 98 x U S Wall SC 8 10 Electric Y 98 98 Actuator Westfield 1 Refurbish U - - Electric - Actuator (h) Vinton 3 New 40 x U FB Channel NSC 10 15 Electric SP 60 60 Actuator Virden 6 Refurbish U - - Electric - Actuator o)0) Notes: (a) Dimensions for gates are shown as clear opening width x height. Widths listed do not include sluice gate seating area. Gate sizes are approximate; Contractor shall verify dimensions prior to fabrication. (b) U= upward opening; D =downward opening (c) S =standard; FB =flush bottom (d) SC= self-contained (yoke type); NSC = non self-contained (e) Calculated as difference between maximum water level and gate centerline(elevation. (f) SP = standard pedestal mount;Y=yoke mount; OP =offset pedestal mount (g) Maximum disc travel from closed to full open. (h) Replace existing manual operator with electric operator. (i) Replace existing electric operator with new electric operator. (j) Shop Drawings for Virden sluice gates are available from Engineer upon req_lest. END OF SECTION 1) J. C. Whitney 2) M. D. Werner, B. W. Roeth 23209.03.00 PROCESS WATER PIPING ms1222 SECTION 40 23 00 -Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories for process piping systems. B. Equipment vents and drains. C. Connections to metering instruments and regulating devices. D. Cleaning, testing, and disinfection of piping systems. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers' catalog data, marked to indicate materials being furnished, on standard equipment, piping, valves, specialties, and accessories. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Outline and installation drawings for equipment furnished. 2. Shop-fabricated piping systems. 3. Drawings showing arrangement of piping, controls, and accessory equipment furnished, B. Quality assurance data: 1. Equipment performance data and operating characteristics. 2. List of field welders names with corresponding identifying symbols. 3. Certification by nationally recognized, independent organization that components, materials, and treatment chemicals in contact with potable water conform to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 or 61, as applicable. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide special tools required for repacking and disassembling valves provided. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insofar as practicable, use valves of only one manufacturer for each type of valve. B. Welding materials and procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable State Labor Regulations. C. Employ certified welders in accordance with ASME Code Section IX ANSI/AWS D1 1 . 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Arrange delivery of products in accordance with construction schedules and to allow inspection prior to installation. 2. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with conditions at Site. 3. Deliver products in undamaged condition in original containers or packaging, wah identifying labels intact and legible. 4. Clearly mark identity of partial deliveries of component parts to facilitate assembly. B. Storage: 1. Store products immediately on delivery and protect until installed. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. PROCESS WATER PIPING 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 40 23 00 ms1222 2. Provide platforms, blocking or skids, or coverings required to protect products from deterioration or damage. 3. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection. 4. Maintain storage conditions to prevent deterioration or damage. 5. Protect products after installation to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove when no longer needed. C. Handling: 1. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. 2. Handle products by methods to prevent bending or overstressing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Valves shall be type shown on Drawings and as specified herein. B. Pressure class, body material, bonnet-type, and trim material:As shown in standards and as specified. Unless specified elsewhere,valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psig (1.03 mPa). C. Laying dimensions of flanged valves: In accordance with ANSI B16.10. D. Valves shall open by turning operator in a counterclockwise direction. E. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. 2.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. AWWA C151;with 60-42-10 ductile iron. B. Minimum thickness, buried: 1. 4"thru 12"(100 mm thru 300 mm): Pressure Class 350. 2. 24"thru 64" (600 mm thru 1600 mm): Pressure Class 200. C. Exposed (flanged): AWWA C115 Class 53. D. Fittings: 1. Buried piping: Mechanical restrained joints; 3"thru 24" (75 mm thru 600 mm)and 54"thru 64" (1400 mm thru 1600 mm): AWWA C153. 2. Exposed piping: Flanged; 3"thru 48" (75 mm thru 1200 mm): AWWA C110; rated working pressure; 150 psi (1030 kPa) E. Joints: 1. Buried piping: Push-on or Mechanical restrained joints;AWWA C111. 2. Exposed piping: Flanged;AWWA C111. 3. Gasket: Styrene-butadiene rubber. 4. Fitting joints: Type similar to that used for piping;AWWA C110, C111, C115, or C153. 5. Restrained joints: Use manufacturer's standard restrained joints or restraining gaskets rated at specified test pressure for buried piping. F. Include gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts required for complete installation. G. Mark each length of pipe with manufacturer's name and thickness class. H. Coating and lining: 1. Bituminous coating: AWWA C151. 23209.03.00 PROCESS WATER PIPING ms1222 SECTION 40 23 00-Page 3 2. Cement lining: AWWA C104; standard thickness with bituminous seal coat. I. Polyethylene encasement: Polyethylene film, AWWA C105 for buried pipe. 2.03 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP) A. ASTM C76; Class III minimum B. Cement: ASTM C150 Type 11. C. Rubber gaskets: ASTM C443, Section 5. D. Connections: Bell-and-spigot gasketed joint conforming to ASTM C443. E. Both bell and spigot areas shall be reinforced. _ F. Manholes: 1. Construct concentric top shallow manholes of RCP. 2. Precast concrete manholes: a. Reinforced concrete pipe;ASTM C76 Class 11, Wall B, or ASTM C478. b. Joints: Rubber ring gasket in conformance to ASTM C443. c. Pipe blockouts at base: Factory fabricated. d. Separate floor slab or integral floor and wall riser section may be used. e. Shop-or field-apply asphalt waterproofing: "Hydrocide 700 or 70013" as ma-lufactured by Sonneborn Building Products, Inc., or equal. 2.04 MANHOLE ACCESSORIES A. Manhole steps: 1. Polypropylene encapsulating 1/2" (13 mm) steel rod. 2. Minimum dimensions: Conform to requirements of ASTM C478. 3. Steps shall be free of sharp edges, have nonslip surface and have end lugs to irevent feet from slipping off step. B. Manhole frame and lid: 1. Gray cast iron or ductile iron; minimum clear opening: 24" (600 mm). 2. Model: "Neenah" R-1642, East Jordan Iron Works No. 1040, or equal except use"Neenah" R- 6060, or equal, for shallow manhole slab construction. 3. Lid: "Neenah"self-sealing with continuous gasket and concealed pickhole. 2.05 STEEL PIPE A. Material: ASTM A53 A or B. B. Wall thickness, minimum: 1. 8"—12" (200 mm—300 mm): Schedule 40. 2. 14"—24" (350 mm—600 mm): Schedule 40. C. Joints 2-1/2" (63 mm)and larger: Butt weld. D. Fittings, butt welded: ASTM A234 Grade WPA or WPB. Minimum wall thickness same as pipe. 2.06 VALVES A. Valve connections: 1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves. 2. Flanged for exposed ductile iron pipe sizes 2-1/2"(64 mm) and larger. PROCESS WATER PIPING 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 40 23 00 ms1222 3. Butt welded for exposed and buried steel pipe sizes 2-1/2"and larger. 4. Mechanical joint for buried ductile iron pipe 3" (75 mm) and larger. B. Gate valves: 1. AWWA C500. 2. Type permitting repacking under pressure when wide open. 3. Packing: Stuffing box with nonasbestos packing or double O-ring. 4. Stem arrangement, exposed cast iron valves: Rising stem with handwheel. 5. Disc: Solid-wedge type, except double disc may be used for buried valves. 6. Trim: Brass or bronze. 7. Bonnet: Bolted. 8. Provide handwheel operator on exposed valves; provide valve box for buried valves. Valves positioned 7'-0" (2.1 m) or more above floor level shall be equipped with chainwheel with chain extending to 3'-0"(900 mm)above floor. C. Combination sewage air release and air/vacuum valves: 1. Application: Vent large quantities of air when filling line and allow air to re-enter line when it is being drained; allow entrained air to be released while under pressure. 2. Type: Vertical, float-operated, automatic, nonclogging, designed for use with raw sewage. 3. Pressure rating: 150 psi (1030 kPa). 4. Accessories: Inlet gate shut-off valve; manual blow-off valve; back flushing hose and shut-off valve with quick disconnect fittings. 5. Connections: Butt welded; 10" (250 mm) inlet; 10"(250 mm)outlet on air/vacuum valve; minimum 5/16" (8 mm) outlet orifice on air release valve. 6. Manufacturer: APCO Model 400/402, or equal. 2.07 TRANSITION/REDUCING COUPLINGS A. Use for connection between ductile iron pipe and steel pipe. B. Middle ring: Steel,ASTM A36. C. Followers: Steel, ASTM A36. D. Gaskets: 1. Nitrile butadiene rubber(NBR, Buna-N), ASTM D2000; molded virgin rubber. 2. Gasket temperature range: -40°F to 212°F(-40°C- 100°C) 3. Recommended for water, salt solutions, mild acids, bases, sewage and natural gas. E. Bolts and nuts: 1. Nominal sizes 2" (50 mm) and larger: Minimum 5/8"(16 mm) bolts ASTM A242/ANSI 21.11/AWWA C111 corrosion-resistant, high-strength low-alloy; heavy hex nuts A563 in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C219. 2. Epoxy-coated, Powercron 590-534; stainless steel 18-8. F. Finish: Heavy coat of corrosion-resistant shop coat primer. Optional fusion-applied epoxy, ANSI/AWWA C-213. G. Working pressure: Rated for 250 psi working pressure when installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.08 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports as necessary to support piping properly. B. Unless detailed on Drawings, hanger and support types shall comply with MSS 58 and MSS 69. 23209,03.00 PROCE')S WATER PIPING ms1222 SECTIOt1 40 23 00-Page 5 2.09 PIPES THROUGH WALLS AND SLABS A. Wall sleeves: 1. Use where shown for pipes passing through floors,walls, or roof slabs. 2. Materials: Cast iron or polyethylene with intermediate flange on piping 3" (75 r im)and larger; 3. Sleeve length: Extend 2" (50 mm) above floors, flush with other surfaces. 4. Clearance: As recommended by seal manufacturer. 5. Seal: Mechanical, link-type, modular, field assembled, insulating, positive-sealing; Thunderline/Leak Seal"Link-Seal,"Advance Product&Systems, Inc., "Innerlynx,"or equal. 2.10 THRUST PLATE - A. Install steel thrust plate to attached discharge piping to gatewell structures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verification of measurements: 1. Before fabrication, verify measurements at Site, including actual location of existing piping and equipment connections and verification of flange facings and drillings to which piping connects. 2. Make field measurements necessary to accurately determine piping make-up lengths or closures and to permit working piping into place without forcing or springing. B. Adequately protect surrounding work so as to prevent damage during installation. 3.02 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION A. Prepare trench in accordance with Section 31 23 00. B. Minimum earth cover: 3.5' (1 m), unless shown otherwise. C. Clean pipe interior of foreign material before lowering into trench; keep clean at all 'imes by securely closing open ends of pipe and fittings. D. Lay pipe in the dry. E. Handle pipe and accessories in manner to ensure delivery to trench in sound, undamaged condition; take particular care not to injure pipe coating or cement lining. F. Cut pipe using tools and methods which do not damage pipe ends. G. Carefully protect joint material from injury while handling and storing pipe; keep weight off joint material on spigot; use no pipe with joints deformed, gouged, or otherwise impaire,�. H. Pipe damaged or unsound will be rejected. I. Use suitable fittings where grade or alignment requires offsets greater than manufacturer's recommended joint deflections. J. Plug or cap and block pipe ends or fittings left for future connections. —' K. Uncover existing pipe,to which connections are to be made, sufficiently ahead of pipe laying operations to determine fittings required. L. Make connections between existing and new pipe with specials and fittings to suit actual conditions. PROCESS WATER PIPING 23209 03 00 Page 6-SECTION 40 23 00 ms1222 M. Follow recommendations of pipe manufacturer. N. Where pipe connects to structures, provide joints with short sections of pipe as shown on Drawings. 3.03 THRUST RESTRAINTS A. Provide thrust restraints by restrained joints where buried pressure piping changes direction, changes size, at pipe joints and at deadends. B. Installation methods shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR EXPOSED PIPE A. Piping not detailed on Drawings: 1. Install essentially as indicated and required; modify as required to clear building structure and openings, lights, ducts, and other services. 2. Route parallel to building lines and other piping. 3. Provide sufficient unions and flanged connections to permit dismantling and removing equipment. 4. Spacing: Adequate to permit servicing valves and specialties, and replacing sections of pipe. 5. Grade: Slope to permit complete draining. 6. Flexibility: Prevent excessive forces or moments on equipment. 3.05 PIPE JOINTS AND METHODS A. Welding: 1. Metallic arc process, in accordance with ASME B31.1. 2. Shielded arc or coated electrodes specifically designed for pipe material. 3. Use only 1 welding operator on each joint. 4. Thoroughly grind or wire brush each weld pass and remove welding slag and defective material before next pass is applied. 5. Welds shall be neat; remove excessive spatter by chipping or grinding. 6. Welding operator shall stamp pipe adjacent to weld with its identifying symbol; submit list of symbols used on Project with corresponding operator names. B. Flanged joints: 1. Makeup flanges prior to completing last weld in connecting piping; alignment of piping shall be correct without forcing or drifting. 2. Coat bolt threads with suitable lubricant and anti-seize thread compound. 3.06 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal. B. Where not otherwise detailed, locate valves for convenient operation from floors. C. Install as recommended by manufacturer to prevent distortion of body. D. Remove bonnets from solder end valves during installation. E. Tighten valve glands as work is erected, and again as required after placing in service. F. Replace any gland packing which is deteriorated or in unsatisfactory condition. G. Install air/vacuum valves at high points as shown on Drawings. 3.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Drawings for pipe support spacing. 23209.03.00 PROCE >S WATER PIPING ms1222 SECTIOrJ 40 23 00 -Page 7 B. Arrange hangers for adjustment of load and pipe elevation after installation. C. Furnish and install auxiliary structural steel members required for support of piping 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove foreign material from pipe before erection. B. Close ends of partially erected systems. C. Remove temporary preservative coatings from valves and accessories. D. Flush or otherwise clean systems after erection, but before connecting to existing :system. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Provide adequate protection for completed Work prior to acceptance. END OF SECTION 1) J. C. Whitney 2) M. D. Werner 23209.03.00 PRIMARY PROCESS MEASURING DEVICES _ ms1222 SECTION 40 91 00-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Instruments and control equipment: B. Installation of instrumentation and control equipment including field transmitters, seising elements, and miscellaneous devices. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 40 91 00-19—Sample Calibration Report. 1.03 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Indoor applications at Westfield Avenue and Vinton Street: 1. Temperature: 50 to 110°F. 2. Humidity: 10 to 90%. B. Indoor applications at Virden Creek: 1. Temperature: -5 to 110°F. 2. Humidity: 10 to 90%. C. Outdoor applications: 1. Temperature: -20 to 120°F. 2. Humidity: 10 to 100%. D. Electrical power source: 120-volts ac, 60 Hz. E. Analog signals: 1. Voltage: 24-volt dc. 2. Range: 4 to 20 mA. 3. Load impedance: 0-750 ohms, minimum. F. Discrete signals: 1. Voltage: 120-volt ac. 2. Contact type: Form C(1 NO, 1 NC), minimum. 3. Rating: 5 amperes at 120-volts ac. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS — A. Submitted information relating to instrumentation and control devices shall be referenced by instrument tag number listed below. _ B. Submittals provided without following information will be marked "returned without review"as defined in submittal section. Submittals shall clearly identify: 1. Each item by instrument tag number. 2. Complete part or catalog number including material selections, design parameters, equipment — catalog designations, calibration range, device options and accessories to be provided. C. Product Data: Spare parts lists including maintenance, special tools, test equipment, and name with address of manufacturer's local supplier for spare parts. PRIMARY PROCESS MEASURING DEVICES 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 40 91 00 ms1222 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data or specification sheets for instrumentation and control devices showing design parameters, equipment catalog designations, calibration range, and clearly identifying options provided. 2. Instrument listing: Listing shall be oriented by instrument tag number and include manufacturer, model number, calibrated range, and setpoint values. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Certified outline drawings. 2. Installation drawings including mounting and grounding requirements. 3. Wiring interconnection drawings for equipment and accessories provided. Wiring interconnection drawings shall define terminal numbers and functions for interface with other instruments and equipment. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Complete instruction manuals and parts lists covering installation, operation, wiring interconnections, and maintenance of equipment. 2. Schematic drawings for motor or relay-based control logic. Show color of wire, all termination points, terminal numbers, cable and wire numbers. Assign cable and wire numbers for external panel wiring. Cable and wire numbers shall be tag number oriented. B. Record Documents: 1. "As-built"control loop diagrams and schematic drawings as defined above. 2. Instrumentation calibration reports as defined in Section 40 91 00-13. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 1-year supply of spare parts as recommended by equipment manufacturer as part of initial installation. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide instruments from same manufacturer and of same model series when multiple units of same item are required. B. Instruments, control devices, and accessories shall be free of mercury and asbestos. C. Furnish new and unused instruments and control devices. D. Provide linkages, mounting accessories, etc. necessary to place device into service. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 2.02 INSTRUMENT WIRING A. Provide No. 16 AWG single twisted shielded pair cable for 24-volt do analog signals in accordance with Section 26 05 00. B. Provide No, 16 AWG, 600-volt wire for 120-volt ac signals in accordance with Section 26 05 00. C. Provide No. 12 AWG, 600-volt wire for 120-volt ac power circuits in accordance with Section 26 05 00. 23209.03.00 PRIMARY PROCESS MEASURING DEVICES ms1222 SECTION 40 91 00-Page 3 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE TAGS A. Type: Embossed, heat-shrink tubing. B. Color: White. 2.04 INSTRUMENTS A. Level Controller: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue wet well: LE/LIT-100. b. Vinton Street wet well: LE/LIT-200. c. Virden Creek wet well: LE/LIT-300. 2. Level Transducer: a. Measurement range: 1 to 26 feet. b. Output Frequency: 43 KHz. c. Beam angle: 10°. d. Deadband: 12". e. Temperature compensation: Intemal temperature sensor. f. Ambient temperature limits: -4 to 149 'F. _ g. Material of construction: PVDF body and CSM face. h. Mounting connection: 1"NPT. i. Housing classification: IP68. j. Cable material: 20 AWG twisted shield cable with PVC sheath. k. Cable length required: Contractor to determine; maximum length 1200 feet. I. Approvals: Non hazardous area. m. Model: XRS-5 3. Level Controller: a. Accuracy: 0.25% of range or 0.24", whichever is greater. b. Resolution: 0.1% of measuring range or 0.08",whichever is greater. c. Ambient temperature limits: -4 to 122 'F. d. Power requirements: 115-volt ac, 60 Hz. e. Mounting: Wall mounted. f. Calibration: 1) LIT-100: 0—12.0 feet. — 2) LIT-200: 0—12.59 feet. 3) LIT-300: 0— 12.0 feet. g. Analog output signal: 4-20 mA into 750 ohm load, maximum. h. Relay outputs: 4 SPDT Form A/2 SPDT Form C, rated 5A and 250-volt ac. i. Display: 1.5 x 4" backlit LCD. j. Programming: Provide handheld programmed, Order No. 7ML1830-2A K. k. Memory: 512KB flash EPROM, no battery backup required. I. Model : HydroRanger 200 m. Order No.: 7ML5034-1AA01. 4. Manufacturer: Siemens/Milltronics. B. Float level switch: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue high-high level, LSHH-100. b. Westfield Avenue low-low level, LSLL-100. c. Vinton Street high-high level, LSHH-200. d. Vinton Street low-low level, LSLL-200. e. Virden Creek high-high level, LSHH-300. _ f. Virden Creek low-low level, LSLL-300. 2. Type: Self weighted, freely suspended float. 3. Material of construction: Polypropylene with sheathed PVC cable. 4. Cable length: CONTRACTOR to determine for specific application. 5. Switch configuration: 3-wire, SPDT, rated 5 ampere at 30-volt dc. 6. Manufacturer: Flygt ENM-10, or equal. PRIMARY PROCESS MEASURING DEVICES 23209 03 00 Page 4-SECTION 40 91 00 ms1222 C. Non-classified area filed mounted emergency pushbutton: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue pump#1: HBE-110. b. Westfield Avenue pump#2: HBE-120. c. Westfield Avenue pump#3: HBE-130. d. Vinton Street pump#1: HBE-210. e. Vinton Street pump#2: HBE-220. f. Vinton Street pump#3: HBE-230. g. Virden Creek pump#1: HBE-310. h. Virden Creek pump#2: HBE-320. i. Virden Creek pump#3: HBE-330. 2. Type: Nonilluminated. 3. Area classification: Nonclassified. 4. Rating: NEMA 4/4X/13. 5. Size: 30.5mm. 6. Configuration: N.O. -N.C.L.B. 7. Contact rating: 10 amperes at 120-volts ac, 60 Hz. 8. Head type: Jumbo mushroom. 9. Cap color: Red. 10. Operator function: 2-position, push-pull, maintained. 11. Mounting: NEMA 4X control station. 12. Legend plates: Emergency Stop. 13. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 800H-FRXJT6A1, or equal. D. Alarm horn: 1. Application and tag number: Virden Creek pump pre-start alert, QA-300. 2. Construction: Die-cast aluminum with gray enamel finish. 3. Classification rating: NEMA 4X. 4. Operating voltage: 120-volt ac. 5. Audible level: 100 dBA at 10 feet. 6. Mounting: Surface mounted. Provide with necessary accessories as required. 7. Manufacturer: Federal Signal, 350WB-120 or equal. 2.05 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Each instrument and control device shall have a tag permanently attached to case with following applicable information: 1. Tag number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Model number. 4. Serial number. 5. Operating range. 6. Calibration setting/range. 7. Power rating. B. Each control valve and actuator shall have stainless steel nameplate, permanently fastened to valve body or actuator with following as applicable: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Valve action on air failure. 3. Operating range and bench setting. 4. Body and trim size. 5. Body and trim materials. 6. Body and flange rating. 7. Type of packing and lubricant. 8. Flow arrow indicating direction of flow. 9. Tag number. 23209.03.00 PRIMARY PROCESS MEA. URING DEVICES ms1222 SECTION 40 91 00-Page 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install instrument and control devices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and/or where approved by Owner's Representative. B. Locate instruments and control devices where shown on Drawings and/or designatEd by Owner's Representative. C. Mount instruments so they are rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in such a manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from heat, shock and vibration; and `reedom from interference with other equipment, piping, and electrical work. D. Do not install instruments until heavy construction work adjacent to instruments has been completed to extent that damage will be unlikely to installation by such construction work. E. Manufacturer's recommendations referred to herein shall be as stated in manufacturer's installation manual and/or by manufacturer's service representative. Final interpretation of"installation requirements"will be by Owner's Representative. 3.02 INSTRUMENT EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. Mount instrumentation equipment to building steel, concrete floors, or walls using pipe mounting stands or field-fabricated mounting brackets. 1. Secure instrumentation equipment mounting bracket to building steel by welding or bolting, and to _ concrete or masonry building structure by expansion-type anchors. Do not mount instrumentation equipment to exterior removable panels. 2. Grout mounting brackets on concrete floors with nonmetallic, chloride-free gypsum material, ASTM C1107, Grade A; formulation suitable for application. 3. If vibration-free location is not available for instrument mounting, appropriate vibration shock mounting shall be provided by use of rubber grommets or other vibration dampeners designed for vibration absorption subject to Owner's review.Instrument accessibility: Following general rules shall be adhered to, unless limited by other requirements in design of system. 1, Locate instrument process connections for maximum convenience in operation and servicing of instrument. Orient connections so instruments or piping will not obstruct aisles, platforms, or ladders. _ 2. Install field-mounted instruments so they are accessible from grade, platform, or permanent ladder. Instruments requiring adjustment or inspection shall be accessible for servicing from grade, walkway, platform, or permanent ladder. 3. Locate remote instruments and control devices (devices not located in or on process lines)at - nominal height of 4-1/2' (1.35 m) above finished floor, grade, or platform. Provide instrument racks for location in which 3 or more instruments or control devices are located within close proximity of each other. 4. Control valves shall be accessible from grade or platforms. Use manufacturer's recommended clearance distances. 5. Mount local indicators, recorders, and controllers so they are readable, controllEole, and serviceable from grade or platforms. 3.03 CLEANING A. Before assembly or erection, thoroughly clean instruments of temporary protective coatings and foreign materials. B. After erection of equipment, clean external surfaces of oil, grease, dirt, or other foreign material. PRIMARY PROCESS MEASURING DEVICES 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 40 91 00 ms1222 3.04 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Maintain minimum of 1'(300 mm) separation between signals operating at voltages greater than 120- volts ac and instrumentation or communications signals. Group and route wire/cables as follows: 1. Low-voltage/low current do instrumentation signals(30-volts/50 mA or lower). 2. High-voltage do alarm signals (48-volts or greater). 3. Low-voltage ac control signals (120-volts or lower). 4. High-voltage ac power signals (greater than 120-volts). B. Install continuous wire from terminal-to-terminal. Splices not acceptable. C. Shielded signal cable: 1. Connect shields to common ground at source of loop power. 2. Shields of multiple cable runs shall be connected on separate terminal blocks, but not grounded. 3. Cut and tape shield at destination end. D. Identify both ends of wires and/or cables with permanent wire marker. END OF SECTION 1) S. A. Tripmacker 2) T. J. Mergen 23209.03.00 SAMPLE CALIB=_ATION REPORT ms1222 SECTION 40 ,91 00-19-Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 40 91 00—Primary Process Measurement Devices. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SAMPLE CALIBRATION REPORT A. Refer to attached sample calibration report. END OF SECTION 1) S.A. Tripmacker 2) T. J. Mergen Transmitter Calibration Transmitter Tag No.: Service: Information Mfr-. Plant: Model No.: Building: Serial#: Area: Reference Dwg.-. Nameplate Data: Calibration Data Input% Value Desired As Found As Left 0% Incr. 25% Incr. 50% Incr. 75% Incr. 100% Incr. 75% Decr. 50% Decr. 25% Decr. 0% Decr. Remarks: Calibrated by: Date: Sheet of Contact Closure/Switch Device Tag No.: Service: Information Mfg: Plant: Model No.: Building: Serial#: Area: Reference Dwg.: Nameplate Data: Contact Logic: #1 #2 #3 #4 Calibration Data Function Desired As Found As Left Set#1 Reset#1 Set#2 Reset#2 Set#3 Reset#3 Set#4 Reset#4 CR=Closes Rising CF=Closes Falling OR= Opens Rising OF= Opens Falling Remarks: Calibrated by: Date: Sheet of General Analog Device - Type: Device Tag No.: Service: Information Mfg: Plant: Model No.: Building: Serial#: Area: Reference Dwg.: Nameplate Data: Calibration Data Parameter Measured Input Output Adjusted Y/N (0% Incr.) (25% Incr.) (50% Incr.) (75% Incr.) As Found (100% Incr.) (75% Decr.) (50% Decr.) (25% Decr.) (0% Decr.) (0% Incr.) (25% Incr.) (50% Incr.) (75% Incr.) As Left (100% Incr.) (75% Decr.) (50% Decr.) (25% Decr.) (0% Decr.) Remarks: Calibrated by: Date: Sheet_of 23209,03.00 PROCESS CONTROL PANEL;, AND HARDWARE ms1222 SECTIOI�d 40 95 13-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Control panels and enclosures completely assembled with instruments and electrical controls mounted and wired pump control panels and telemetry panels. B. Provide, mount and wire instruments as applicable for each panel and enclosure and as specified herein. C. Performance tests. 1.02 SITE CONDITIONS A. Indoor applications at Westfield Avenue and Vinton Street.- 1. Temperature: 50 to 1101F. 2. Humidity: 10 to 90%. B. Indoor applications at Virden Creek: 1. Temperature: -5 to 110°F. 2. Humidity: 10 to 90%. C. Outdoor applications: 1. Temperature: -20 to 120°F. 2. Humidity: 10 to 100%. D. Electrical power source: 120-volts ac, 60 Hz. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Information relating to instrumentation and control devices referencing instrument tag number listed on submittal documents. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Control panel and enclosures: a. Panel exterior general arrangement drawings showing location of surface and flushed mounted equipment. b. Panel interior arrangement drawings including: 1) Locations and identification of terminal blocks. 2) Locations and identification of racks/chassis and equipment mounted within. 3) Arrangement of other equipment mounted inside panel identified by instrument tag number. c. Exterior panel wiring interface termination diagrams. d. List of nameplate legends and sizes for panel-mounted equipment. 2. Panel-mounted instruments: Manufacturer's data and/or specification sheets for control and instrument items, showing design parameters, equipment catalog designations, calibration range, -- features and options provided. Sheets shall be identified with corresponding instrument tag numbers. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Control panel and enclosures: Schematics and wiring diagrams identifying terminals, circuits, color of wire, and cable/wire numbers. Cable, wire, and terminal numbers for panels shall be assigned by panel provider. Cable,wire, and terminal numbers shall be instrument tag number oriented. Coordinate with electrical contractor to avoid duplication of wire and terminal numbers. 2. Panel-mounted instruments: Tabulation of equipment including accessories listed separately where not assembled with equipment item. Tabulation shall include item number, service PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 40 95 13 ms1222 equipment description, or identification, part or catalog number and other information helpful to installation of equipment and coordination of Project. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manual. 1. Complete instruction manuals and parts lists covering installation, operation, and maintenance of panel-mounted devices. Manuals shall include interface drawings defining terminal numbers and functions for interface with other instruments and equipment. 2. Schematic and wiring diagrams for each panel/enclosure. Show color of wire,termination points, terminal numbers, cable and wire numbers. B. Record Documents: "As-built'schematics and wiring diagrams defining terminals, cables, and wire numbers as specified above. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish separately packaged spare parts of following items: 1. Fuses: 100% of each rating furnished with control equipment and used internally within panel/enclosure for circuit protection including, but not limited to, miscellaneous fuses on controllers, recorders, and indicators. Minimum of one standard package. 2. Indicating lamps: 10% of each type furnished with control equipment. Minimum of one standard package. 3. Relays: 10% of each type furnished with panel/enclosure. Minimum of one of each model used. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship control panels as recommended by control panel/enclosure manufacturer. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Panels shall satisfy UL-508 requirements. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Size: Sufficient to house terminal blocks,wireways, power supplies, and instruments required for each application. Nominal size as defined in Panel Schedule below. B. Oil-resistant gasket attached with oil-resistant adhesive. C. Provide each panel/enclosure with industrial corrosion inhibitor emitters of sufficient size and quantity to protect contents of enclosure size selected. Emitters shall contain additional red metal inhibitors to protect brass and copper material in addition to ferrous metals. D. Provide 200 watt electric heater and thermostat for telemetry panel located in Virden Creek lift station. E. Provide"data pockets"for Drawing storage on inside face of panel. F. Subpanels: Provide for full surface mounting of terminal blocks,wireways, power supplies, and instruments. G. Wall-mounted panels: 1. Provide with seam-sealed construction with no holes or knockouts and with stainless steel collar studs for mounting subpanels. 2. Provide full size subpanel. 3. Color: RAL 7035 textured light-gray polyester powder paint inside and out. 23209.03.00 PROCESS CONTROL PANEL:..AND HARDWARE ms1222 SECTION 40 95 13-Page 3 H. Special features as specified in Panel Schedule: 1. Panel nameplate. - 2. Size. 3. Type. 4. Style. 5. Cable entry location. I. Style and manufacturer: Concept, Hoffman Engineering Company, or equal. _ 2.03 PANEL-MOUNTED INSTRUMENTATION A. As specified on panel layout drawing drawings and as defined below. B. Control relays: 1. Function: General logic hardware interlocks. a. Type: Plug-in. b. Construction: Continuous duty. c. Coil voltage: 120-volt ac, 60 Hz. d. Switch configuration: 2, 3, or 4-SPDT as shown on Drawings. e. Indication: Mechanical or LED to indicate energized relay. f. Switch rating: 10 amperes at coil voltage. g. Mounting: Socket for DIN-rail mounting. h. Manufacturer: Allen Bradley, Type 700-HF, or equal. C. Selector switches: 1. Type: Nonilluminated. 2. Configuration: Number of poles as required for application and as shown on Drawings. 3. Contact rating: 10 amperes at 120-volts ac, 60 Hz. 4. Operator function: Maintained. 5. Legend plates: As required for application subject to Engineer's review and as shown on panel layout drawings. - 6. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, Series 800T, or equal. D. Pilot lights: 1. Type: Standard. 2. Input: Full voltage, 120-volt ac, 60 Hz. 3. Lamp type: LED. 4. Lens color: a. Red: Off or closed. b. Amber: Shutdown, caution, pre-alarm, or abnormal. c. Green: Run or open. d. White: Power available, ready. e. Blue: Status. f. As shown on panel layout drawings. 5. Legend plates: As required for application subject to Engineer's review and as:shown on panel layout drawings. 6. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, Series 800T or equal. E. Pushbuttons: 1. Type: Nonilluminated. 2. Configuration: Single-operator, number of poles as required for application as required for application and as shown on Drawings. 3. Contact rating: 10 amperes at 120-volts ac, 60 Hz. 4. Operator: a. Flush head: Open, close, and reset applications. b. Extended head: None required. c. Mushroom head: None required on control panel. 5. Button color: a. Red: Close. PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 4-SECTION 40 95 13 ms1222 b. Green: Open. c. Black: Reset. d. As shown on panel layout drawings. 6. Legend plates: As required for application subject to Engineer's review and as shown on panel layout drawings. 7. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, Series 800T or equal. F. Digital display: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue wet well level, LI-100. b. Vinton Street wet well level, LI-200. c. Virden Creek wet well level, LI-300. 2. Display: 4 digit(-1999 to 9999) red LED, 1.2" high. 3. Decimal point: Up to 3 decimal places. 4. Update rate: 3.7 to 5 times per second. 5. Input signal: 4-20mA, externally powered. 6. Calibration range: a. Westfield Avenue wet well level, 1.00-13.00(feet). b. Vinton Street wet well level, 2.41 -15.00 (feet). c. Virden Creek wet well level, 6.00-18.00(feet). 7. Output signal: Not required. 8. Relay outputs: None required. 9. Enclosure: 1/8 DIN, high impact plastic. 10. Electrical classification: NEMA 4X, IP65 front. 11. Supply voltage: 120-volt ac. 12. Electrical connection: Screw terminal blocks. 13. Mounting: Pump control panel. 14. Manufacturer: Precision Digital, PD765-6X0-00, or equal. G. Time delay relay: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue Pump Station low-low level reset delay, KY-100. b. Westfield Avenue Pump#1 failure, KY-1 10. c. Westfield Avenue Pump#1 backup timer, KY-1 10. d. Westfield Avenue Pump#2 failure, KY-120. e. Westfield Avenue Pump#2 backup timer, KY-121. f. Westfield Avenue Pump#3 failure, KY-130. g. Westfield Avenue Pump#3 backup timer, KY-131. h. Vinton Street Pump Station low-low level reset delay, KY-200. i. Vinton Street Pump#1 failure, KY-210. j. Vinton Street Pump#1 backup timer, KY-211. k. Vinton Street Pump#2 failure, KY-220. I. Vinton Street Pump#2 backup timer, KY-221. m. Vinton Street Pump#3 failure, KY-230. n. Vinton Street Pump#3 backup timer, KY-231. o. Virden Creek Pump Station low-low level reset delay, KY-300. p. Virden Creek Pump#1 failure, KY-310. q. Virden Creek Pump#1 backup timer, KY-311. r. Virden Creek Pump#2 failure, KY-320. s. Virden Creek Pump#2 backup timer, KY-321. t. Virden Creek Pump#3 failure, KY-330. u. Virden Creek Pump#3 backup timer, KY-331. v. Virden Creek Pump#1 start delay, KY-311. w. Virden Creek Pump#2 start delay, KY-321. x. Virden Creek Pump#3 start delay, KY-331. 2. Type: On-delay. 3. Coil voltage: 120-volt ac, 60 Hz. 4. Switch configuration: SPDT. 5. Timing range: 0.05 seconds to 10 hours in 6 settings. 23209.03.00 PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE ms1222 SECTION 40 95 13 -Page 5 6. Switch rating: 5 amperes at 250 volts ac. 7. Mounting: Din rail mounted. 8. Manufacturer and model: Allen Bradley 700-FEA3TU23, or equal. H. Elapsed time meter: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue Pump#1 run time, KQI-110. b. Westfield Avenue Pump#2 run time, KQI-120. c. Westfield Avenue Pump#3 run time, KQI-130. d. Vinton Street Pump#1 run time, KQI-210. e. Vinton Street Pump#2 run time, KQI-220. f. Vinton Street Pump#3 run time, KQI-230. g. Virden Creek Pump#1 run time, KQI-310. - h. Virden Creek Pump#2 run time, KQI-320. i. Virden Creek Pump#3 run time, KQI-330. 2. Type: Nonresettable 6-digit electromechanical. 3. Input power: 120-volt ac. 4. Mounting: Flush on pump control panel. 5. Electrical connection: Lead wires, nominally 20"long.. 6. Case: Rectangular. 7. Manufacturer: Kessler-Ellis Products, HB2600-110VAC 60Hz, or equal. 1. Multi-stage alternator: 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue pump alternator, LC-100. b. Vinton Street pump alternator, LC-200. c. Virden Creek pump alternator, LC-300. 2. Provide alternating relay to control sequence operation of pumping system. 3. Capacity: a. Inputs: Up to four contact type. Powered from alternator at 12-volt dc. b. Outputs: Up to four SPST contact outputs, rated 5 amp at 240 vac, configured from dip switch on unit. 4. Power required: 120-volt ac. 5. Temperature rating: -20 to 140F 6. Mounting: Internal to pump control panel. 7. Manufacturer and model: Time Mark Corporation, 441-120, no substitutions. J. Uninterruptible power supply(UPS): 1. Application and tag number: a. Westfield Avenue Telemetry Panel, JE-190A. b. Vinton Street Telemetry Panel, JE-290A. c. Virden Creek Telemetry Panel, JE-390A. 2. Provide one UPS within each Telemetry Panel. 3. Type: True on-line. 4. Capacity: 1500 VA, minimum. 5. Manufacturer and model: Minuteman PRO 1500LCD, APC Back-UPS Pro, or eq,.Jal. 2.04 TELEMETRY PANEL A. Telemetry panel shall be provided as a complete package from a single supplier. City of Waterloo has incorporated a network of Trunk Radio telemetry system. Telemetry panels provided in this Contract shall interface with existing telemetry system. B. Current Trunk Radio provider: Radio Communication Systems, 1657 Falls Avenue, Waterloo, Iowa 50701. Contact: Felix Schaumberg, phone 319-234-3511. C. Components: 1. Control panel: Full windowed 36 x 36 x 12 enclosure as defined above. PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 40 95 13 ms1222 2. Security system: a. Application and tag number: 1) Westfield Avenue, JE-190B, UI/UC/KY-191. 2) Vinton Street, JE-2906, UI/UC/KY-291. 3) Virden Creek, JE-390B, UI/UC/KY-391. b. Security system shall comprise 1/0 circuit board to accept alarming inputs as shown on drawings and output common alarm to RTU unit. c. Power supply as necessary to provide any required do power. d. Time delay relay for power final input. Elk, model ELK-906. e. Model 6160 alpha keypad. f. Manufacturer: Ademco, no substitutions. 3. RTU: a. Application and tag number: 1) Westfield Avenue, UC-192. 2) Vinton Street, UC-292. 3) Virden Creek, UC-392. b. RTU system shall comprise of RTU enclosure and 1/0 module. c. 1/0 module shall support 16 discrete inputs, 16 open collector outputs, 4 analog inputs, and 4 analog outputs. d. Manufacturer and model: Zetron, Model 18+ (901-9287), no substitutions. 4. Radio: a. Application and tag number: 1) Westfield Avenue, UT/UE-193. - 2) Vinton Street, UT/UE-293. 3) Virden Creek, UT/UE-393. b. Telemetry system interfaces with existing 800 MHz Trunk Radio network providing communication between selected lift stations and Wastewater Treatment Facility. Three new lift stations shall be added to existing network. c. Kenwood mobile 800 MHz Trunking Control Station, model TK980K, no substitutions. d. Cabinet for radio and power supply. BaseKen5, no substitutions. e. No ground plan 800 MHZ antenna. f. Manufacturer: Kenwood, no substitutions. 2.05 FACTORY WIRING A. Provide complete factory wiring of control cabinet and equipment mounted thereon. B. Provide separate circuits from power distribution panel for: 1. Individual panel incoming power. 2. Individual pump control logic circuitry with each pump control panel. C. Install continuous wire from terminal to terminal. Splices not acceptable. D. Wire and cable: 1. Analog signal cable: a. Configuration: Twisted pair, shielded, and jacketed. b. Insulation: 300-volt, 60°C, PVC, color-coded to permit identification of each conductor. c. Conductors: Stranded copper, 18 AWG. d. Shield: Metallized foil or tinned copper braid providing 100%coverage against noise together with 20 AWG stranded tinned drain wire. 2. Power wire: a. Rating: 600-volt, 90°C, PVC insulation/jacket, Type MTW. b. Conductors: Stranded copper, 12 AWG. 3. Discrete signal wire: a. Rating: 600-volt, 90°C, PVC insulationfjacket, Type MTW. b. Conductors: Stranded copper, 18 AWG. 4. Power and discrete signal wire insulation color: a. BLK: Line voltage. b. BRN: Line voltage/fused. 23209.03.00 PROCESS CONTROL PANELS,-%ND HARDWARE ms1222 SECTION 40 95 13-Page 7 c. RED: 120-volt control ac. d. ORG: 24-volt control ac. e. YEL: Caution/may be live from remote power source. f. GRN: Ground. g. BLU: Dc negative. h. VIO: Dc positive. i. WHT: Neutral at GND potential. E. Group and route wire and cables from terminal blocks to panel-mounted instruments in separate wireways as follows: 1. Low-voltage/low current do analog signals(30-volts/50 mA or lower). 2. High-voltage do alarm signals (48-volts or greater). 3. Low-voltage ac control signals(120-volts or lower). - 4. High-voltage ac power signals (greater than 120-volts). F. Wring interfaces: 1. External connections: a. Install dedicated terminal strips for analog, discrete, and power signals. b. Provide manufacturer's standard connectors for communications, digital data, and multiplexed signals. c. Provide surge suppressor terminal blocks for analog and discrete signals that leave building structure: 1) Analog signal blocks: Voltage rating 24-volt ac/dc; Phoenix Contact TT-SLKK5-S-24DC, or equal. 2) Discrete signal blocks: Voltage rating 120-volt ac/dc; Phoenix Contact TT-SLKK5/110AC, or equal. 2. Provide separate terminal strips and wireways for 120-volt ac and 24-volt do circuits. 3. Terminal block requirements: a. Type: High-density. b. Voltage: 600-volt. c. Wire range: 30 AWG to 12 AWG. d. Termination: Screw clamp compression with pressure plate. e. Mounting: Rail-mounted with end anchors and barriers. f. Spare: Provide greater amount of 20%or 6 terminals per terminal strip g. Manufacturer: Allen Bradley 1492-1-11, or equal. - 4. Terminate maximum of 2 wires on single connect point. 5. Install power distribution blocks to parallel feed to power control devices. ParallE!l wiring from instrument to instrument not acceptable. 6. Provide plug-in strip for ac supply power to devices requiring ac power via power cord. 7. Circuit protection: a. Provide plug-in module type 120-volt ac utility supply surge arrestors with base. Phoenix Contact Mains PlugTrab, PT-2 PE/S-120AC/FM, or equal. b. Install individual circuit breakers for protection of control panel power supply circuits as identified above. Allen Bradley 1489-A1C Series, or equal. c. Group circuit breakers on separate terminal strip away from low-voltage instrumentation circuitry. d. Provide fuses or circuit breakers for protection of individual instrumentation circuits. Instrumentation circuits for field-mounted instruments may be combined in logical groupings of no more than 10 devices/signals. 1) Fuses: Allen Bradley 1492-H6 Series, or equal. 2) Circuit breakers: Allen Bradley 1492-GH Series, or equal. 8. Provide 8 AWG internal copper grounding bus for ground connections. G. Wire tags: 1. Type: Embossed, heat-shrink tubing. Fiber tape tagging not acceptable. 2. Color: White. 3. Identify both ends of wires and/or cables with permanent wire marker. PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 8 -SECTION 40 95 13 ms1222 H. Service equipment: Duplex, 120-volt ac, 3-wire grounded type convenience outlets. Provide 1 duplex receptacle per 12 sq ft of subpanel area. 2.06 NAMEPLATES A. Provide permanent nameplates for devices mounted on or within panels. Provide separate nameplates. Standard nameplates included with instruments not acceptable. Plastic tape labeling not acceptable. B. Type: Instrument nameplates shall be fabricated of laminated plastic, not less than 1/16" (2 mm)thick white Bakelite engraving stock with black core. C. Nameplate size, engraving, and letter height: As indicated on Control Panel Layout drawing. D. Instrument nameplates shall be fabricated of laminated plastic, not less than 1/16" (2 mm)thick of white Bakelite engraving stock with black core. E. Attach nameplates with heat-resistive,waterproof adhesive. 2.07 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Surfaces shall be commercial blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP6. B. After preparation of surfaces, pits or indentations shall be filled with a 100% solid catalyzed epoxy putty compound. C. After hardening of putty filler, filled areas shall be sanded smooth. Entire exterior surface shall be smooth and uniform to receive paint. D. Manufacturer's standard interior and exterior paint shall be acceptable as primer coat. E. Prepare interior and exterior surfaces for finish coat of paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Color: RAL 7035 textured light-gray polyester powder paint inside and out. G. Spray-apply paints to produce smooth, uniform coat, free of defects. SSPC PA-1 shall apply. H. Each coat shall be properly cured according to manufacturer's instructions before application of succeeding coats. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall be responsible for hardware provided and shall notify Engineer, in writing, when panel and enclosure control systems are considered complete, in good operating condition, and ready for performance testing. B. Factory performance tests: 1. Contractor shall perform testing and inspection prior to shipment of control equipment at Contractor's manufacturing facility. 2. Contractor testing in preparation for inspection shall include, but not be limited to following: a. Confirm point-to-point wiring by continuity tests with written checklist indicating satisfactory results after final assembly and wiring. b. Energize control circuits. c. Verify hand switches, pushbuttons, and pilot light operations. d. Check control circuits for proper sequence of operation and interlocking functions. 23209.03.00 PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE ms1222 SECTION 40 95 13 -Page 9 e. Test instruments over full operational range. Prove instruments to be within published specifications and accuracy. Instruments shall be tested individually and where applicable, as a system. Testing shall be by simulated field signals. 3. If equipment or system fails to perform properly, Contractor shall make necessary corrections, including replacement, at no cost to Owner as follows: a. Correct wiring changes including changing terminal block and/or wire tags. - b. Document all changes on Project Report Documents. c. Retest equipment verifying deficiencies are corrected. 4. At completion of testing, Contractor shall notify Engineer of completion of testing and readiness for inspection. C. Inspection: 1. Notify Engineer, in writing, 10 days prior to completion of control panels and enclosures final testing. At their option, Owner and Engineer may witness final factory inspection 2. Coordinate between all concerned parties and establish schedule for inspection. Give minimum 10-day notice to all parties. 3. Written test procedures shall be submitted prior to witness testing. Procedures shall be used for final testing. 4. Upon satisfactory completion of testing, final inspection will be made by Engineer. 5. If system fails to perform properly, Contractor shall make necessary changes and adjustments to equipment at no cost to Owner as specified above, and notify Engineer when ready for reinspection. 6. Reinspection schedule shall be same as initial inspection procedures. 7. If inspection is substantially correct but with minor defects, Contractor shall verify deficiencies are - corrected in writing to Engineer without need for additional witness testing. D. Testing costs: 1. Costs of conducting tests, except for following, shall be borne by Contractor. a. Owner and Engineer's costs associated with factory performance test, not exceeding 1 round trip to Contractor's manufacturing facility and 1-day per person for total of 3 persons. b. Owner and Engineer's costs associated with field performance tests not exceeding 60-day field performance period. 2. Owner and Engineer will each render bill to be paid by Contractor covering costs incurred by retesting or supplemental testing exceeding limits noted herein. 3. Billings to Contractor for Owner and Engineer's cost for retesting and supplemental testing exceeding limits specified shall be paid directly to Owner or Engineer, as appropriate, within 30 calendar days from receipt by Contractor. Contractor's failure to pay such billings shall be cause for withholding final payment in amount equal to such costs. 4. Engineer's costs, when applicable, will be determined at Engineer's current per d+em rates, plus direct expenses. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount controls panels as shown on Drawings and/or where approved by Owner's rep,esentative. B. Mount rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in such manner as to provide accessibi ity; protection from damage; isolation from heat, shock, and vibration; and freedom from interferences with other equipment, piping, and electrical work. C. Do not install equipment until adjacent heavy construction work has been completed to extent that damage will be unlikely to installation by such construction work. D. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Coordinate between concerned parties and establish schedule for testing and inspection. PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 23209.03.00 Page 10 -SECTION 40 95 13 ms1222 B. Notify Engineer and Owner, in writing, 10 days prior to start of field testing. C. Due to type of lift station associated with Project, conditions may not exist to provide a normal 24 hour per day, 30-day test. If conditions exist, 30-day test or a reduced period depending on weather will be required as defined below under field performance tests. Otherwise, an on-site inspection shall be required to prove pump and level control operation. D. Field performance tests: 1. Conduct"On-Line,"24-hour per day, reliability test for 30 consecutive days of all hardware. Field instruments and interlocks shall be fully operational. 2. Excessive downtime, as specified below,will result in 30-day guarantee period starting anew upon return to uptime. 3. Downtime not fault of process control equipment hardware will not cause guarantee period to start anew. Upon return to uptime, count of consecutive days will continue less days, or parts of days, of such downtime. 4. Equipment reliability: a. First occurrence of any hardware component failure that is successfully repaired by Owner's personnel within 2 hours from start of occurrence shall not be included in determination of reliability performance. b. Subsequent similar failures or failures not meeting preceding criteria will be included in determination of reliability performance. c. Third similar occurrence of any hardware component failure meeting preceding criteria will result in guarantee period starting anew. d. Reliability will be computed by dividing uptime by sum of uptime and downtime. Owner and Engineer will maintain appropriate daily records of operation during field performance test period to compute reliability. Uptime and downtime will be measured in hours and whole minutes. e. Hardware shall meet reliability test requirements within 60 days after initial date when reliability tests are started. E. Submit certification that control panels passed testing and inspection and will satisfy requirements specified. w �- _ Q a� � o c� p a 2 ch p cn N Ln LO LO Zrn 0 0 0 Qo 0 Q o N Q o r) Q No z N No z ch No Z w 00 p` N Cl) Z F- QU aw J � O a) a) a) LD Z C C C U) C cn to O w .O O - T O T E O E E O O O :a00 O E O O E O O E O O O m O w C) m 0 m 0 0 U m m m O a 3 3 � 3 3 - � m75 ` � ac ` ca) o o O :5 c coE o a o o o o o 3o _0O O _0a o -a -a O _0 O -a c a� E rn mo rn rnO rn 5o _c _c _c c c c U) � E � iT) ECO i�5 E Z a? aoi a�oi a�oi aa) (D 0 (n 7�5 (;5 U Q N N N N N N w U) 2 2i 2 2 2 2 a w w w w w w O z z z z Z z p z w N N N N N N N >X X X X X X X M M M M M M a) x X X X X X X (n IT cY) V M ct cY) a) C a> a) C a) C N t0 C E cu c co Y C n a� a a� 0 a 0 a a� a a) a� Q o �' o m a a m a m -0 c J z m 0 a U o 0 (D o a) m p N n a a) c c N V a E W ca E Q > E > au > E > m L 7 F- 3 F- a)c) a a a E a) w Q m o z -C aD 0 Q O N a Q 6 N E (n F- ON = Cl) a) Z N Cl) c}• In (O to O N E M ^ � N 23209.03.00 SUBM =RSIBLE PUMPS _ ms1222 SECTION 43 21 39-Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submersible centrifugal pump and motor units with necessary lifting accessories. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications, engineering data, fabrication, assembly, installation and wiring diagrams. 2. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Shop Drawings: Show arrangement, dimensions, and materials. C. Test and evaluation reports: 1. Characteristic performance curves for pumps, showing total dynamic head, efficiency, and brake horsepower plotted against capacity in gpm (Ipm)for conditions of head and capacity with required impeller. 2. Motor test data and shop test results. 3. Certified shop test curves. D. Submit copy of this Section with addenda and referenced sections with addenda,with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations and clarifications from specified requirements. 1. If deviations and clarifications from Specifications are indicated and requested by Contractor, provide detailed written justification for each deviation and clarification. 2. Failure to include copy of marked-up specification sections and or detailed justifications for requested deviation or clarification will result in rejection of submittal with no further review and consideration. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Operation manuals: a. Detail step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. b. Include manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of equipment and basic operating features. 2. Maintenance manuals: a. List routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. b. Include piping and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of system as installed. 3. Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Pumps shall be product of single manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer shall have 5 years'experience producing substantially similar equipment and evidence of at least 5 installations in satisfactory operation for at least 5 years. B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of HI, NFPA 70 including City of Waterloo amendments, IEEE, ANSI, NEMA except as otherwise shown or specified. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 23209.03.00 Page 2-SECTION 43 21 39 ms1222 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Spare parts: 1. Each pump shall be furnished with a manufacturers repair kit that shall include, as a minimum: a. One set of mechanical seals for each pump. b. Pack spare parts in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings. 2. Store in a dry, warm location until transferred to Owner at conclusion of Project. 3. Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flygt Corporation. B. KSB. C. No substitutions. 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Pumping units shall consist of submersible pumps and motors, lifting chains anchor bolts, access frame and cover, electric cables, controls, and accessories for a complete, operable system. B. Pumps shall be suitable for pumping stormwater and shall be capable of passing 3" (75 mm)spheres without clogging. C. Pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation at flow conditions stated herein without excessive noise, vibration, heating, cavitation, or damage to pump. D. Head characteristics for pumps: Continuously rising as flow is decreased. Shutoff head shall be minimum of 1.2 times rated head. E. Fit each pump with centered lifting loop and Type 316 stainless steel lifting chain of adequate strength to raise and lower pumping unit. Chain shall be of length required for installation depth shown on Drawings. F. Discharge connections for submersible impeller pumps shall be permanently installed in wet well with discharge G. Attach sliding guide bracket to pump units which will slide between a minimum of 2 guide rails to properly position pump discharge on discharge connection elbow. H. Pump, appurtenances, and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater to depth of 25'without loss of watertight integrity. I. Design pump motors to operate continuously at design conditions with 50%of motor unsubmerged without overheating. 2.03 PUMP DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION M A. Type: 1. Vinton Lift Station: Submersible centrifugal flow impeller pump, nonclog, bottom suction, integral discharge mating with discharge connection elbow, rail guided. 2. Westfield and Virden Creek Lift Stations: Submersible axial flow propeller pump and motor unit(s). Pump and motor unit(s) shall be close coupled to form one integrated direct drive unit. Pump and 23209.03.00 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS _ ms1222 SECTION 43 21 39 - Page 3 motor unit shall be designed for installation into a discharge column onto a seat at bottom of column. Pump and motor unit shall be held in place by its own weight and pumping head. B. Quantity: See Pump Schedule. C. Operating conditions: See Pump Schedule. D. Materials: 1. Casing: Cast iron,ASTM A48. 2. Impeller: Cast iron,ASTM A48. 3. Propeller: ASTM B 148(aluminum bronze), ASTM A743 CFBM austenitic stainless steel, or ASTM 890 CD4 MCu duplex stainless steel. 4. Shaft: Heat-treated alloy steel or A276 Type 420 stainless steel. 5. Exposed nuts and bolts: Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Wear ring contact surface: Stainless steel. 7. Anchor bolts: Type 316 stainless steel. 8. Pump discharge column: Fabricated steel. 9. Formed Suction Intake(FSI): Stainless steel or A36 structural steel. E. Casing: 1. Volute: Single-piece design with smooth fluid passages. 2. Pump casing shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand minimum hydrostatic test pressure of 150 psig (1,030 kPa). 3. Provide with replaceable wearing ring. 4. Mating surfaces requiring watertight sealing shall be machined and fitted with Vitun nitrile rubber O-rings. Sealing shall be accomplished by metal-to-metal contact and controlled :ompression of O-ring without specific torque requirement. 5. Cable entry design: a. Ensure watertight and submersible seal without specific torque requirement. b. Provide close tolerance fit against cable outside diameter and cable entry inside diameter and shall produce compression seal when installed. c. Entry body shall provide strain relief separate from sealing function to prevent strain in cable from damaging seal and allowing entry of water. d. Cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by stator lead sealing gland or terminal board which shall prevent foreign material from coming in contact with motor interior. e. Junction chamber, containing terminal board with permanently affixed connectors between cable conductors and stator leads, shall provide completely leakproof seal from motor. Alternately, cable gland shall be sealed internally with epoxy to prevent wicking. F. Impeller: 1. One-piece, enclosed, nonclog-type capable of handling solids normally present it storm water. 2. Manufactured from gray cast iron, Class 35B. 3. Capable of passing minimum of 3" (75 mm) solid. 4. Statically and dynamically balanced, securely positioned and locked to shaft using key and cap screw. Provide means for impeller clearance adjustment. 5. Impellers shall have smooth contours. G. Propeller: 1. Single piece cast material as specified with smooth surfaces. 2. Four-blade, fixed pitch design 3. The blades shall be noticeably backward curved so that any clogging tendency is minimized H. Shaft: 1. Machine and polish over entire length. 2. Dynamically balanced with impeller at all operating speeds. 3. Shaft shall provide rigid support of impeller and prevent critical vibration at all operating speeds. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 23209.03.00 Page 4 -SECTION 43 21 39 ms1222 I. Bearings: 1. Anti-friction ball and/or roller bearings, ABMA L,o life rating of 40,000 hours, designed to carry thrust and radial loads. 2. Lubrication: Permanently lubricated with grease or oil specifically suited for high temperature applications. J. Thermal protection: 1. Vinton Street small horsepower motors: Provide motor embedded thermal switches to wire in series with leakage detection sensors defined below to interface with supervisory relay for motor control and alarming. 2. Westfield and Virden Creek large horsepower motors: a. Provide motor winding thermal switches in each motor phase winding, connected in series to monitor over temperature operation. b. Provide 1 temperature probe to monitor motor winding temperature to provide direct stator temperature readout. c. Provide 1 temperature probe to monitor lower thrust bearing temperature to provide direct bearing temperature readout. K. Moisture protection: 1. Vinton Street small horsepower motors: Provide 1 float-actuated reed switch or moisture sensor in motor housing to detect liquid leakage into stator area. 2. Westfield and Virden Creek large horsepower motors: a. Provide 1 float-actuated reed switch or moisture sensor in motor housing to detect liquid leakage into stator area. b. Provide 1 float-actuated reed switch or moisture sensor in motor housing to detect liquid leakage into power cable junction chamber. L. Seals: 1. Provide pump with shaft sealing system utilizing oil chamber. a. Oil chamber shall provide means to compensate for changes in oil pressure. b. Provide oil chamber with easily accessible drain and inspection plug equipped with positive, antileak seal.Access to plug shall not require any disassembly of pump. 2. Dual independent mechanical rotating shaft seal system running in oil reservoir. a. Lower seal unit, between pump and oil chamber: 1 stationary and 1 positively driven rotating silicon or tungsten carbide or carbon ceramic ring. Impeller pump-out vane shall be used in conjunction with carbon ceramic. b. Upper seal unit, between oil chamber and motor housing: 1 stationary silicon or tungsten carbide or carbon ceramic ring and 1 positively driven rotating silicon carbide or carbon ring. c. Seal faces: Hold in contact by integral springs and hydrodynamically lubricate at constant rate. 3. Seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be easily inspected and replaceable. 2.04 DISCHARGE COLUMN FOR SUBMERSIBLE AXIAL FLOW PROPELLER PUMPS A. Permanently install discharge column in wet well. B. Design so pump unit(s)will be automatically and firmly connected to discharge tube when lowered into place. C. Locking device located on external surface of pump housing or other device shall prohibit rotational movement of pump and motor unit(s)within tube(s). D. Pump(s) shall be easily removable for inspection or service with no need for personnel to enter wet well. E. Pump(s) shall not require bolts, nuts or fasteners for connection to discharge column. 23209.03.00 SUBMI__RSIBLE PUMPS ms1222 SECTION 43 21 39 - Page 5 F. Provide stiffening and guiding webs at pump support seat to ensure concentric positioning of pump within discharge column. G. Provide O-ring on bottom of inlet(suction) bell mouth so weight of pump unit, when acting on O-ring, will provide effective seal between pump and discharge column. H. Provide sill plate for opening dimensions on drawings. I. FSI: 1. Provide for Virden Creek pumps. 2. Connection between pump discharge column and FSI shall not include external Dolting or fastening due to close proximity of concrete walls on 3 sides. 3. Conform to a shape hydraulically tested and proven in other installations. Manufacturer shall review intake hydraulics of existing pump station and confirm acceptability or rec ommend remedial measures. 4. Coordinate design with installation contractor's means and methods. FSI shall Le installed in existing wet well with concrete baffle that may require FSI to be installed in 2 or -pore pieces. In such case, FSI shall be delivered to project site assembled. 5. Load-bearing to directly support weight of pump and discharge column. 6. Anchor to lift station floor with concrete encasement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.05 ACCESS FRAME AND COVER A. Vinton pump station only. B. Access frame and cover shall be sized and completely coordinated with pumps and shall be furnished by pump manufacturer. C. Material: 1. Frame: 1/4"x 3"x 3"(6 mm x 75 mm x 75 mm) steel angle. 2. Cover: 1/4"(6 mm)aluminum diamond plate, rated support strength 300 Ib/sq ft. D. Construction: 1. Double leaf covers: Equip hinges with torsion bars. Provide with safety chains which position automatically on open sides of opening when covers are raised. 2. Single leaf covers: Equip with cover lifting mechanisms to aid in opening/closing covers. 3. Provide automatic hold-open and cover release arms. 4. Cover: Equip with underside-mounted slam lock with attached handle and flush removable plug and key wrench handle for topside use. 5. Top surface of doors shall be skidproof. 6. Equip frame with rails or O-ring device for attaching lifting chain and other accessories. 2.06 GUIDE RAILS AND BRACKETS FOR SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL FLOW IMPELLER PUMPS A. Guide rails: Minimum Schedule 40, Type 316 stainless steel pipe of sufficient size to remain rigid and unbending under intended loading conditions. B. Guide bars shall not support any portion of weight of pump. C. Secure lower end of guide bars to discharge connection. Secure upper ends to frarre of access cover. D. Provide intermediate guide bar spacer supports when clear span distances between supports will exceed 12' (3.6 m). E. Sliding guide brackets: Cast iron or fabricated steel, galvanized after fabrication. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 23209.03.00 Page 6-SECTION 43 21 39 ms1222 2.07 MOTORS A. Standards: Applicable parts of NEMA MG1. B. Type: Squirrel cage induction, shell-type design, housed in air-filled,watertight chamber. Oil-filled ball bearing motor acceptable alternate. C. Enclosure: Completely submersible,watertight. D. Ratings: Continuous duty 460-volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz, 1.15 service factor; capable of sustaining minimum of 10 evenly spaced starts per hour for axial flow pumps and 20 evenly starts per hour for centrifugal flow pumps. E. Insulation and temperature rating: Class F insulation rated at 155°C (40°C ambient plus 115°C rise). F. Starting: Reduced-voltage solid-state, for constant-speed pumps. No starters shall be required from Submersible Pump manufacturer. G. Nameplate horsepower shall be not less than maximum required pump input for all conditions of head and capacity for full range of impeller furnished. H. Equip air-filled type motors with water jacket cooling system encircling stator housing designed to circulate pumped liquid and sized to be nonclogging. I. Monitor stator temperature for pumps using thermal sensors embedded in each stator winding. Sensors shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection. J. Motors shall be furnished with preassembled power and control cables. 2.08 CARRIER CABLE A. Provide cable protection and suspension system on installations with in-tube cable runs. B. Provide stainless steel carrier cable system with each pump to restrain power and control cables securely during pumping operations. C. Carrier cable system: 1. Stainless steel shackles on each end. 2. Stainless steel cable. 3. Stainless steel carrier lifting eyes at minimum every 4'. D. Provide EPDM (ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer)spacer between power, control, and carrier cable for protection against binding and abrasion. Secure spacer to power/control/carrier cable bundle with protective hose and clamp above and below each shackle and lifting eye. 2.09 CONTROLS A. Pump motors shall start and stop based on relay logic by others within Contract. No controls or control enclosures shall be required from Submersible Pump manufacturer. B. Temperature and moisture monitoring equipment shall be provided for mounting in control panel by others within Contract. 23209.03.00 SUBW:RSIBLE PUMPS ms1222 SECTION 43 21 39-Page 7 2.10 SHOP FINISHING A. Protect metal surfaces coming into contact with pumped media, other than stainless steel, by factory- applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate or other anti-corrosion rea tion primer with polyester or epoxy resin paint finish on pump exterior. 2.11 IDENTIFICATION A. Permanently attach stainless steel nameplate to pump. Nameplate shall contain following information: 1. Equipment number(see Drawings). 2. Serial number of pump. 3. Capacity in gpm. 4. Pumping head in feet. 5. Speed, rpm. 6. Manufacturer's name. 7. Size and type of pump. 8. Motor horsepower 9. Design pressure and temperature. B. Each pump shall be provided with a cast-in or permanently attached direction-of-rotation arrow. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydraulic performance shop test: 1. Submersible pumps shall be factory-tested at pump manufacturer's plant.Tests shall be in accordance with Test Code of Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2. Test curves shall cover full range of operation from shutoff to maximum capacity and have capacity plotted as abscissas, and operating head, brake horsepower, net positive suction head required (NPSHrq) and efficiency plotted as ordinates. Each test shall be witnessed by a registered professional engineer, who may be an employee of manufacturer. Registered engineer will sign and seal all copies of pump curves and shall certify that hydrostatic tests were performed. 3. Test points: a. Shut off. b. Maximum run out. c. Design operating condition. d. Two additional points, 1 on each side of design operating condition. 4. Test tolerances: a. Pumps shall be within 1 or other of following tolerance: 1) At rated head: +10% of rated capacity. 2) At rated capacity: +5% of rated head. b. No minus tolerance or margin shall be allowed with respect to capacity or total head at rated or specified condition. c. Pump manufacturer shall provide shop space, tools, equipment, instruments personnel, and all else required for satisfactory completion of tests. Payment for tests shall be included in Contract amount. d. Certified test curves shall be submitted and reviewed prior to pumps being released for shipment. B. Pump tests: 1. Pump manufacturer shall perform following inspections and tests on pumps prior to shipment. a. Inspect for conformance to Contract Documents with respect to correct model number, motor rating, and electrical connections. b. Test motor and seal housing chambers for moisture content or insulation defects. c. Prior to submergence, allow pump to run dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. d. Discharge piping attached to pump shall operate submerged under a minimum of 6'(1.8 m) of water for a minimum of 30 minutes. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 23209.03.00 Page 8-SECTION 43 21 39 ms1222 e. After operational test, motor and cable shall be tested again for moisture content or insulation - defects. 2. Pumps failing inspection or tests shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Comply with requirements of Section 01 73 19. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide qualified service representative to perform functions described in Section 01 40 00. 3.03 PUMP SCHEDULE Rated Operating Condition Full Load Minimum Hydraulic Ca acity TDH Synchronous Efficiency at No (gpm) Design Range Motor Speed Maximum Pump Service Type Re 'd feet feet Maximum Speed Westfield Axial Flow 3 12,000 25.5 25-29 1185 rpm 75% Vinton Centrifu al Flow 3 1,333 27.9 27-30 1750 rpm 60% Virden Creek Axial Flow 3 45,000 18 18-22 590 rpm 80% END OF SECTION 1) J. C. Whitney 2) B. W. Roeth